Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
NWA-041693-001
ISSUE 12.0
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
NEC Corporation reserves the right to change the specifications,
functions, or features, at any time, without notice.
NEC Corporation has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The information contained herein is the property
of NEC Corporation, and shall not be reproduced without prior written
approval from NEC Corporation.
All brand names and product names on this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Copyright 2008 - 2013
NEC Corporation
PRODUCT LIABILITY
PRODUCT LIABILITY
1. USING THE EQUIPMENT SAFELY
The following safety information describes how to avoid injuries while working with the equipment and how to
prevent damage to the equipment. Learn the meaning of the following symbols and then read this section
carefully before using the equipment.
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
DANGER
Incorrect use of the equipment may cause personal injury or death.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the equipment may cause personal injury or a serious
system fault.
ATTENTION
Incorrect use of the equipment may limit the system performance or
cause the system to fail.
PL-1
PRODUCT LIABILITY
2. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
The following describes the safety considerations that must be observed before using the system, the powerrelated equipment and the peripheral equipment, such as consoles, the Main Distribution Frame (MDF),
telephones, PCs, printers, etc.
DANGER
If the system emits smoke or a burning, acrid odor, immediately turn off the system power.
Operating the system in this state might cause a fire, an electrical shock, or a system failure. After
turning off the power and confirming that the smoke has disappeared, contact the dealer.
If any equipment, such as the system, the main power source, a cabinet or peripheral equipment tips
over, turn off the power and contact the dealer.
If liquid reaches the inside of the system or the main power source, turn off the power. Operating
the system in this state might cause a fire, an electrical shock, or a system failure.
PW
Do not touch the internal parts of the main power source to disassemble or configure it. This action
may cause a fire, an electrical shock or a system failure.
NEC Corporation does not take any responsibility for disassembled or reconfigured equipment.
Do not put any container objects (such as a vase or a cup) on the main power source or any
peripheral equipment. It might cause a fire, an electrical shock or a system failure.
Be sure to use cables designated by NEC or cables attached to the equipment. If cables are not
designated particularly, choose cables with considering safety and transmission performance
carefully. Ask the dealer or your local agency if needed.
Do not tamper with, modify, forcefully bend, forcefully remove or twist an electrical cord or any
wiring to or from the system, the main power source or any peripheral equipment. It might cause a
fire, an electrical shock, or a system failure. If the wiring is damaged, contact the dealer.
dust
Correctly insert all of the electrical plugs into the electrical outlets. Before inserting a plug into an
electrical outlet, ensure that there is no dust on the plugs blades. If there is dust on a blade, it might
cause a fire.
PL-2
PRODUCT LIABILITY
PWR
DANGER
Do not use power other than the power that was designated for the system when it was installed.
PWR
Do not attempt to repair or move the main power source without assistance from the dealer.
Do not put any metal or combustible objects into a vent of the system, the main power source, or
any peripheral equipment. Operating the system in this state might cause a fire, an electrical shock,
or a system failure. If this occurs, turn off the power and contact the dealer.
Be careful when using any peripheral equipments Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). If the liquid
leaks, it can be harmful to the user and to the system.
Before connecting any non-NEC, customer-provided equipment, check with the supplier to ensure
that the equipment is compatible. If the supplier cannot confirm the compatibility, do not connect
the equipment. Connecting incompatible equipment might cause a fire or an electrical shock.
PL-3
PRODUCT LIABILITY
WARNING
Do not place any object on the system or the main power source. If the object falls, it might cause
personal injury or damage to the equipment.
When removing a plug from an outlet, be sure to grip the plug, not the cord. Gripping the cord to
remove the plug could cause a fire or an electrical shock to occur.
Provide the appropriate temperature, humidity, and ventilation on an around-the-clock basis. For
example, at a height that is one meter (3.28 feet) above the floor, the temperature should be between
20 C and 25 C (68 F to 77 F) and the humidity should be approximately 50%.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
Take appropriate anti-static measures so that the other end of the anti-static kit can be connected to
the metal part of the frame.
PL-4
PRODUCT LIABILITY
WARNING
PL-5
PRODUCT LIABILITY
ATTENTION
Thinner
Do not use benzine, thinner or alcohol for cleaning. When removing dust and dirt, put diluted, mild
detergent on a cloth and then wring out the cloth. Remove the dust and dirt with the cloth and then
wipe the cleaned area with a dry cloth.
Do not place any equipment in the following environments:
Locations that are exposed to direct sunlight
Locations where the moisture level exceeds the allowed level
Locations where the equipment might be exposed to water, oil, or chemicals
Locations with very low temperatures, such as in a walk-in cooler or freezer
Locations that are exposed to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from devices such as
television sets and two-way radios
Locations that receive illegal electric waves
The life expectancies of the system and the main power source will be shortened if placed in a
location that is affected by hydrogen sulfide or salt, such as a seaside area.
PL-6
Before connecting this telephone system to the telephone network, the following information must be provided
to the telephone company:
REGULATORY
R-1
1.2
INCIDENCE OF HARM
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint
with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain interrupted service.
1.3
If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
If equipment malfunctions, all repairs must be performed by an authorized agent of NEC Corporation of America, Inc. or by NEC Corporation of America, Inc. The user requiring service is responsible for reporting the
need for service to an NEC Corporation of America, Inc. authorized agent or to NEC Corporation of America,
Inc.
1.4
For Private (Leased) Line (Analog Data Format) equipment, type JM8 jack is required. Refer to ATIS Technical Report No. 5 for details on this connector.
The Facility Interface Code (FIC) associated with each private line application represents the type of service
that will be provided by the telephone company. The user instructions must contain a detailed list of private
line ports and the associated FICs for which the equipment has been approved. In addition, the Service Order
Code (SOC) must also be included for analog systems. The SOC indicates the degree of network protection
provided by the equipment,.
For Private (Leased) Line (Digital Format) equipment, in addition to the general requirements for all equipment, certain digital connections require that an encoded analog content and billing protection affidavit be provided the telephone company. Customer instructions must contain information on the preparation and
submission of the affidavit.
To comply with state tariffs, the telephone company must be given notification prior to connection. In some
states, the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission must give prior approval of connection.
1.5
The consumer/purchaser/supplier instructions accompanying this equipment and/or software features must
contain the following notice:
The software contained in the UNIVERGE SV8500 to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to
recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.
REGULATORY
R-2
Failure to upgrade the premises systems or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customers employees from gaining access to the network and these
codes.
1.6
Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE)
user.
This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). Permissible exceptions are:
A call is unanswered.
1.7
When using voice announcement or monitoring over DID Lines, observe the following.
CAUTION
Using the Voice Announcement feature to eavesdrop or record sound activities at the other end of the telephone line may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws. Consult a legal advisor before implementing any practice to monitor or record a telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws require
a party monitoring or recording a telephone to use a beep-tone(s), notify all parties to the telephone conversation and/or obtain consent of all parties to the telephone conversation. In monitoring or recording
sound activities at the other end of the telephone line using the Voice Announcement feature, the sound of
the alert tone at the beginning of the Voice Announcement may or may not be considered sufficient under
applicable laws. Some of the applicable laws provide for strict penalties for illegal monitoring or recording of telephone conversations.
REGULATORY
R-3
1.8
If equipment such as Private Branch Exchanges (PBX), key systems or customer-owned coin/credit card telephones is sold to a call aggregator, it must be capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of access codes. Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block
access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990.
1.9
Parties responsible for equipment requiring AC power should consider including an advisory notice in their
customer information suggesting the customer use a surge arrestor. Telephone companies report that electrical
surges, typically lightening transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC
power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem.
1.10 HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY
NEC Multiline Terminals and NEC Single Line Telephones that are provided for this system are hearing aid
compatible. The manufacturer of other Single Line Telephones for use with the system must provide notice of
hearing aid compatibility to comply with FCC rules that now prohibit the use of non-hearing aid compatible
telephones.
1.11 MUSIC ON HOLD
Note: "In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of Com-
posers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music On Hold feature of this telecommunication system. NEC Corporation of
America, Inc., hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license."
2. RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE
In compliance with FCC Part 15 rules, the following statement is provided:
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pur-
suant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of
this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will
be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Note: Modifying this equipment without an approval from NEC Corporation of America, Inc. may void your
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 0-M General Requirements Canadian Electrical Code, Part II
REGULATORY
R-4
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Part l: General Requirements
UL 60950-1-SAFETY, 1st Edition Safety of Information Technology Equipment Part I: General Requirements
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the applicable electrical inspection authority or electrician.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be
connected to the telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of RENs of all the devices does not exceed five/Lindice dequivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaus qui peuvent etre
raccordes a une interface telephonique. La terminaison dune interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme dindices dequivalence de la sonnerie
de tous les dispositifs nexcede pas 5.
This equipment has been certified by the Canadian Standards Association and found to comply with all
applicable requirements of the standard for telephone equipment C 22.2 No. 225.
REGULATORY
R-5
This equipment meets IC requirements CS03, PART II, PART III, PART VI.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus
as set out in the radio interference regulations of Industry Canada/Le present appareil numerique nemet
pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de Classe A
prescrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par Industrie Canada.
5. BATTERY DISPOSAL
The UNIVERGE SV8500 system includes the batteries listed below. When disposing of these batteries, Chassis, and/or Blades, you must comply with applicable federal and state regulations regarding proper disposal
procedures.
Battery Types and Quantities for Chassis and Blades
Unit Name
Type of Battery
Quantity
MH250 (WLPS3(E)-A)
Lithium-ion
PSIII (PS3D)
Lithium-ion
Nickel Metal-Hydride
DTH-4R-2
Nickel Metal-Hydride
DTL-8R-1
Nickel Metal-Hydride
Lithium
DTR-1R-2
Nickel-Cadmium
DTR-4R-2 TEL
Nickel-Cadmium
DTU-4R-1 TEL
Lead Acid
Nickel Metal-Hydride
Lithium-ion
DTR-1HM-1 TEL
Headset Cordless II
Bluetooth Cordless Handset
DO NOT PLACE USED BATTERIES IN YOUR REGULAR TRASH! THE PRODUCT YOU PURCHASED CONTAINS LITHIUM, NICKEL-CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD BATTERIES. LITHIUM,
NICKEL-CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD BATTERIES MUST BE COLLECTED, RECYCLED, OR DISPOSED OF IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY SOUND MANNER.
The incineration, landfilling or mixing of nickel-cadmium or sealed lead batteries with the municipal solid waste stream is PROHIBITED BY LAW in most areas. Contact your local solid waste management officials for other information regarding the environmentally sound collection, recycling, and disposal of
the battery.
REGULATORY
R-6
Nickel-Cadmium (or sealed lead) batteries must be returned to a federal or state approved nickel-cadmium (or sealed lead) battery recycler. This may be where the batteries were originally sold or a local seller
of automotive batteries. Contact your local waste management officials for other information regarding
the environmentally sound collection, recycling and disposal of the battery contained in this product. For
Ni-Cd batteries, you can also call 1-800-8-BATTERYSM when further information is required.
The packaging for the UNIVERGE SV8500 system contains the following labels regarding proper disposal.
PRODUCT PACKAGE LABELING
REGULATORY
R-7
The equipment described in this manual is intended to be connected to local area networks (LAN) and supports
a wide range of peripheral equipment. Additional interfaces are available for connection to public analogue
and digital telecommunication networks which comply with:
To take advantage of all features of this system and the connected equipment, the country specific or network
specific features should match the supported features of the system. For an overview of the supported features,
refer to the detailed documentation that comes with this system, contact your local NEC representative or the
support desk of NEC Unified Solutions B.V.
Hereby, NEC Unified Solutions B.V., declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
REGULATORY
R-8
1.2
Electromagnetic compatibility
For some of the SV8500 communication platform components the following warning is applicable:
WARNING:
Notice that this warning is only applicable to components of the SV8500 communication platform of which
the product type plate indicates Complies with EN55022 Class A.
2. PRODUCT DISPOSAL INFORMATION
2.1
Electrical and electronic products including the cables, plugs and accessories should be disposed of separately
in order to allow proper treatment, recovery and recycling. These products should be taken to a designated facility where the best available treatment, recovery and recycling techniques are available. Separate disposal
has significant advantages: valuable materials can be re-used and it prevents the dispersion of unwanted substances into the municipal waste stream. This contributes to the protection of human health and the environment.
Please be informed that a fine may be imposed for illegal disposal of electrical and electronic products via the
general municipal waste stream.
To facilitate separate disposal and environmentally sound recycling arrangements have been made for local
collection and recycling. If you need to dispose of your electrical and electronic products, please refer to your
supplier or the contractual agreements that your company made when these products were acquired.
At www.nec-unified.com/weee you can find information about separate disposal and environmentally sound
recycling.
2.2
Disposal of electrical and electronic products in countries outside the European Union should be done in line
with the local regulations. If no arrangement has been made with your supplier, please contact the local authorities for further information.
3. Declaration of Conformity
esky
NEC Corporation tmto prohlauje, e tento SV8500 je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi
pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
REGULATORY
R-9
Dansk
Undertegnede NEC Corporation erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr SV8500 overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Deutsch
Hiermit erklrt NEC Corporation, dass sich das Gert SV8500 in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Eesti
Kesolevaga kinnitab NEC Corporation seadme SV8500 vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E
phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
English
Hereby, NEC Corporation, declares that this SV8500 is in compliance with the essential requirements
and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Espaol
Por medio de la presente NEC Corporation declara que el SV8500 cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Franais
Par la prsente NEC Corporation dclare que l'appareil SV8500 est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
slenska
Hr me lsir NEC Corporation yfir v a SV8500 er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og arar krfur,
sem gerar eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
REGULATORY
R-10
Italiano
Con la presente NEC Corporation dichiara che questo SV8500 conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed
alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Latviski
Ar o NEC Corporation deklar, ka SV8500 atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un
citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Lietuvi
iuo NEC Corporation deklaruoja, kad is SV8500 atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB
Direktyvos nuostatas.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Malti
Hawnhekk, NEC Corporation, jiddikjara li dan SV8500 jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma
provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Magyar
Alulrott, NEC Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a SV8500 megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Nederlands
Hierbij verklaart NEC Corporation dat het toestel SV8500 in overeenstemming is met de essentile
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Norsk
NEC Corporation erklrer herved at utstyret SV8500 er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Polski
Niniejszym, "NEC Corporation" deklaruje, ze SV8500 jest zgodny z wymaganiami i innymi warunkami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Portugus
REGULATORY
R-11
NEC Corporation declara que este SV8500 est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Slovensko
NEC Corporation izjavlja, da je ta SV8500 v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi
doloili direktive 1999/5/ES.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Slovensky
NEC Corporation tmto vyhlasuje, e SV8500 spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Suomi
NEC Corporation vakuuttaa tten ett SV8500 tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten
vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
Svenska
Hrmed intygar NEC Corporation att denna SV8500 str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga
egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
http://www.nec-unified.com/doc
REGULATORY
R-12
SYSTEM NAMES
UNIVERGE SV8500
NEAX2400 IMX
NEAX7400 IMX
NEAX7400 ICS (IMX)
NEAX2000 IVS2
NEAX2000 INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER
NEAX7400 ICS M100MX
Note 1: UNIVERGE SV7000 Remote Node over IP is also included in the SV7000 series, which is migrated from
the existing IPX system. It is mentioned as Remote Node over IP or the system in this manual.
Note 2: In regard to China market, NEAX2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange has not been released but
NEAX2400 is released.
Note 3: In regard to China market, NEAX2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER has not been released but
NEAX2000 is released.
TERMS-1
Terminal Name
In this manual, the following terminals are mentioned as each common term unless these types need to be identified.
TERMINAL NAMES
Dterm
Digital terminal
DT300 Series
IP Enabled
Dterm
IP terminal
IP
Station
DtermSP20
DtermSP30
DtermIP
(Proprietary Protocol)
DtermSP30
(Proprietary Protocol)
DtermSP30 (SIP)
DtermIP (SIP)
DT710
SIP
terminal
DT730
DT700 Series
DT730G
DT750
DT770G
MH250
PS
PCS
Note 4: This terminal provides users with all features currently available on DtermIP (Proprietary Protocol).
TERMS-2
terminals which are controlled by SP in FP85-109 S6 or earlier. Standard SIP terminals require connection
tests of NEC. When service conditions of Standard SIP terminals vary depending on controlling device,
Standard SIP terminals are mentioned as shown below.
GENERIC TERMS USED
IN THIS MANUAL
TERMINAL NAMES
CONTROLLING DEVICE
SP
SP Controlled SIP
terminal
TERMS-3
Media Gateway (MG), Media Converter (MC), and Voice Conference Server (VS) Names
In this manual, the following are mentioned as each common term unless these types need to be identified.
GENERIC TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL
EQUIPMENT NAMES
MG-T1(SIP)
MG(BRI)
MG(SIP)
MC&MG-COT Note 9
MG-COT Note 10
Analog MC Note 11
TERMS-4
EQUIPMENT NAMES
VS-32
VS32
IPG Digital
IPG Analog
UG50 Note 6
General Terms
PIR on this manual is a term equivalent to GC (Gateway Chassis) in the North America.
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) on this manual is a term equivalent to Calling Line Identification
(CLI) in Australia.
Note 6: The conditions vary according to the mode of the UG50. See the table below.
Operation
Mode
Device Type
Protocol Type
UG50 (DLC)
Proprietary Protocol
CD-8DLCA
PZ-8DLCB
CD-16DLCA
Proprietary Protocol/SIP
CD-4LCA
CD-8LCA
PZ-4LCA
PZ-8LCE
Proprietary Protocol/SIP
CD-PRTA
Multi-slot mode
UG50 (PRT 1.5M) [Proprietary Protocol/SIP]
Note 7
UG50 (COT-TYPE1) Note 9
Proprietary Protocol
Proprietary Protocol/SIP
CD-4COTA/B/C
PZ-4COTE/F/G
UG50-IPG(Digital)
Proprietary Protocol
CD-16DLCA
UG50-IPG(Analog)
Proprietary Protocol
CD-8LCA
PZ-8LCE
UG50-8LC Note 11
SIP
CD-8LCA
UG50-2MC Note 11
Proprietary Protocol
CD-4LCA
CD-8LCA
Proprietary Protocol/SIP
CD-PRTA
UG50-4LC2COTA Note 9
Proprietary Protocol
CD-4LCA
CD-8LCA
CD-4COTA
Proprietary Protocol/SIP
CD-4COTA/B/C
PZ-4COTE/F/G
Note 7 Note 10
IPG mode
Mounting Card
Retrofit mode
TERMS-5
TERMS-6
NWA-041693-001
ISSUE 12.0
JULY, 2013
UNIVERGE SV8500
Operations and Maintenance Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. ABOUT THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. SYSTEM ACCOMMODATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 SV8500 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 PIR and TSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. HOW TO READ PRECAUTIONS, DIAGNOSTIC, AND FAULT REPAIR INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
4.1 Precaution about Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 How to Follow Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. REPORTING FAULT TO NEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Fault Reporting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Forwarding Faulty Circuit Card Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. BASIC KNOWLEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Line Equipment Numbers (LENS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 Module Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3 Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.4 Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Local Partition (LP) Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Fault Detecting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Range of Faults Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
1
3
4
7
7
11
15
15
17
18
19
20
24
24
24
26
27
28
29
33
41
42
42
42
43
44
44
44
45
46
47
47
48
50
51
52
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
ii
53
53
54
54
56
56
58
60
60
60
62
62
63
69
70
70
74
78
79
86
87
88
94
97
104
104
106
107
107
107
110
114
117
118
125
129
129
129
129
129
130
130
130
153
154
164
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
iii
164
168
168
169
171
171
172
173
173
174
174
183
183
183
183
184
185
187
188
204
207
207
207
208
208
208
208
210
210
210
210
210
211
211
212
214
216
216
216
216
218
220
220
220
220
221
222
222
223
224
225
225
225
226
226
226
227
227
229
229
230
230
230
230
230
231
231
232
235
236
237
237
238
238
240
240
243
250
253
254
256
258
259
260
261
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
iv
PLO Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Group Down Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSW ACT Change Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock-Up Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock-Up Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-48V Over Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Line Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Line Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Line Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Fault Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both TSW Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSW Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLKC Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both MUX Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCI Card Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCI Card Failure Recovered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSW Ready Failure Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMA/EXB/IOC Communication Failure Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Failure (For Telephony Server and Two-Unit SR-MGC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Failure (for SR-MGC(E)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Failure (for SR-MGC(S)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RGU & Howler Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Load Control Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Load Control Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bad Call Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STA-Test Connection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Control Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Control Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abnormal Call Duration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Initialize With Data Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU MBR Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU MBR Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSW MBR Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSW MBR Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSW PLO Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSW PLO Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PM MB Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
271
273
274
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
300
301
303
304
306
308
310
311
312
313
318
322
323
324
325
328
332
334
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
vi
344
345
346
347
359
398
399
400
401
402
404
406
408
409
410
421
424
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
436
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
451
452
453
456
462
463
464
465
466
467
vii
468
471
472
473
474
475
477
478
479
480
481
483
485
486
487
488
492
500
503
504
506
509
510
511
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
542
544
546
547
548
549
554
558
561
568
574
576
579
581
582
584
585
587
588
596
597
600
603
604
605
606
606
607
608
613
614
616
618
618
618
619
623
626
627
627
628
629
630
630
631
632
634
634
636
638
639
639
641
641
641
642
644
647
649
651
viii
ix
652
653
657
662
663
665
666
671
673
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
680
683
684
685
688
688
688
690
692
693
695
697
699
702
703
704
707
711
713
716
716
719
721
723
724
724
727
727
728
729
729
730
730
730
733
733
733
734
734
736
736
736
737
737
738
739
740
742
742
746
747
747
748
748
749
750
750
751
752
754
755
755
755
756
756
757
757
757
758
758
759
xi
774
777
778
780
781
783
784
785
802
804
806
809
810
813
814
815
822
823
825
827
829
830
831
832
834
848
851
852
854
857
860
865
867
868
870
873
877
878
880
882
883
885
886
894
895
896
xii
898
900
903
904
906
909
917
922
923
924
927
928
929
930
931
934
935
936
937
939
941
943
945
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
984
985
986
1003
1016
1017
1018
1019
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1034
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1046
1048
1049
1050
1058
1059
1064
1065
1066
1069
xiii
xiv
1072
1072
1075
1076
1078
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1
General
General
America market.
2. SYSTEM ACCOMMODATION
SV8500 consists of the following components:
SV8500 Server
PIR
TSWR
FANU
The following shows a fully expanded system (DC-powered Model, 4-IMG) as an example.
FANU
TSWR
SV8500 Server
PIR 3
PIR 7
PIR 11
PIR 15
PIR 2
PIR 6
PIR 10
PIR 14
PIR 1
PIR 5
PIR 9
PIR 13
FANU
FANU
FANU
PIR 0
PIR 4
PIR 8
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
FRONT
CPU Card
EMA Card
IOC Card (option)
EMA SUB-A (option: required for PIR)
EMA SUB-B (option: required for TSWR)
EXB (option: required for PIR/TSWR)
Power Module
System Cooling FAN Module
FANU
PIR 12
BASEU
CHAPTER 1
General
EMA
CPU Card #1
IOC (Option)
CPU Card #0
EMA SUB-A
Front View
Power Module
Note 1
EMA SUB-B
EXB #1
EXB #0
Rear View
Power Module
CHAPTER 1
General
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Slot number
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
TSW / MUX #1
TSW / MUX #0
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Number of ports
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32
Unieversal Slots
for Line/Trunk cards
Unieversal Slots
for Line/Trunk cards
TSW #13
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
PLO #1
TSW #12
06
PLO #0
TSW #11
TSW #10
05
TSW #03
04
TSW #02
03
TSW #01
02
TSW #00
GT #01
01
GT #00
01
DLKC #01
00
DLKC #00
Slot number
14
15
CHAPTER 1
3. GLOSSARY
The following is a list of typical technical terms that are used in this document.
Ready Error
Parity Error
Phase 1 Restart
MEM (Memory)
General
CHAPTER 1
General
Ready Error
For acknowledging the connection between the CPU and a circuit card, an interface signal called Ready
Signal is used. When the CPU has accessed a specific circuit card and the normality of the connection
is acknowledged, the Ready Signal is returned to the CPU within a certain time period. If the Ready
Signal is not returned to the CPU within the above time period after access, the situation is referred to
as Ready Error.
Parity Error
For confirming the normality of data transfer between the CPU and the circuit card under the control
of the CPU, a parity check is made. When an error is detected in a parity check, it is referred to as Parity
Error. Parity check means to confirm the normality of data by adding an error detecting parity bit to a
set of data to transfer.
When a set of data is transferred, a parity bit is added to the data so that the data has an even-number
of 1 bits (referred to as Even Parity). When there is an odd-number of 1 bits in the received one set
of data, it is detected as an error.
Phase 1 Restart
The system is initialized. All connections except for basic two-way connections (STN-STN, STNTRK, TRK-TRK) that have already been established are forcibly released.
CHAPTER 1
General
In this processing, the faulty PM (Line/Trunk Card) is isolated from the system and, at the same time,
the calls associated with that faulty PM (Line/Trunk Card) are released. No calls related to the faulty
PM (Line/Trunk Card) are processed and the system normally runs without the faulty PM (Line/Trunk
Card).
MEM (Memory)
A memory module that is mounted on the CPU Card.
CHAPTER 1
General
)
U
P
U
P
Backboard
contact portion
wrist strap
U
P
U
P
wrist strap
PWR ACT ALM
EMA
APEX
LOAD
LAN1 LAN2
TxRx
LOAD
LAN1 LAN2
TxRx
LINK TxRx
SV7000 TP/S
LINK
SV7000 SP/S
LINK
SP-234
SN1234
conductive sheet
Note 1: A ground wire should be connected to the frame which is not coated by an insulating material.
CHAPTER 1
General
When holding a circuit card with bare hands, do not touch the component mounted side of the card or
the connector portion.
Note
Connector
(Contact)
Portion
Set MB switch
to UP.
ComponentMounted Side
432-P
S
4 3 2 1N
S
SP-234
SN1234
Card Puller
Tab
wrist strap
PW
R
LOA
D
ON
LIN
E
CO
NS
OLE
CF
LINE
SPE
1
2
ON
LINE
SPE
ED
2
US
B
PW
R
3
SPE
ED
SYS
LINE
EXPR
CO
NS
OLE
SYS
ALM
SYS
LINE
D
ON
LIN
E
wrist strap
ED
1
3
MO
DE
PW
R
LOA
LIN
1
OP
E
ED
MB
(SU
B)
GEA
1
3
PFT
PF
SYS
LOC SYS
K
SEL
SE
2
SWO
0
SWO
1
LINE
1
2
ON
ALM
SPE
ESS
CF
SPE
ED
INIT
PBI
No.
LINE
SPE
ED
MO
DE
2
US
B
EM
AM
AIN
LINE
SPE
ED
LINE
EXPR
SPE
ED
ESS
GEA
CF card
Connect ground wire to
the frame.
Note 1
Note 1: A ground wire should be connected to the frame which is not coated by an insulating material.
CHAPTER 1
General
(4) When a circuit card appears faulty, check the following items before replacing it with a spare:
(a) Poor connector contact at the circuit card may be responsible for the fault. Repeat insertion and extraction of the circuit card a few times. Clean the connector portion, and recheck for proper operation.
(b) Check the lead wires of vertically-mounted parts (resistors, capacitors, etc.) to ensure they have not
shorted each other or broken.
(c) Check the back side of the circuit card to see if there is any short-circuited soldered portion, or modified cross connection wires erroneously left unconnected.
(d) Check the ROMs to ensure proper seating in the IC socket. Figure 1-6 shows a leg that is bent and not
set in the socket.
Figure 1-6 How to Set the ROM in IC Socket
SOCKET
Cleaning
Circuit
Container
Note 1: Some of the parts are subject to damage if they come in contact with the cleansing liquid. Be careful to
allow only the connector portion (gold-plated terminal) to contact the cleaning liquid.
Note 2: Be sure to use fresh cleaning fluid (FREON or isopropyl alcohol).
CHAPTER 1
General
(b) Using a soft cotton cloth, wipe both sides of the connector portion (gold-plated terminal) clean (only
PA-XX type circuit card), as shown in Figure 1-8.
Figure 1-8 How to Clean Gold-Plated Terminal
gauze
Gold-plated terminal
Note 1: Use cloth (gauze, etc.) to clean.
Note 2: After wiping, be careful not to leave lint on the surface of the circuit card.
(6) When a check on the flat cable or LT cable is directed in the tree, check the following items:
(a) Make a visual check to see if the connector is properly connected.
(b) Poor connector contact may be responsible for the fault. Repeat connection and disconnection a few
times, and check again to see if the connector is properly connected.
(c) Perform continuity test on the flat cable.
(7) When replacing the circuit card is directed in the tree, replace the circuit card with a spare as per Chapter 5.
(8) When multiple circuit cards appear faulty, before replacing them with spares, remount them (one at a time)
into their slots, to determine which cards should be replaced.
10
CHAPTER 1
General
The following is an example where the fault was recovered after the replacement of circuit cards:
START
Set the first circuit card back into its mounting slot
If the fault recurs: Replace the circuit card.
Set the second circuit card back into its mounting slot
If the fault recurs: Replace the circuit card.
Set the third circuit card back into its mounting slot
If the fault recurs: Replace the circuit card.
END
If a circuit card is found faulty, send the faulty circuit card for repair.
(9) When a fault recovery is completed, use the RALM command to clear all the alarm indications and registered system messages. If required, restore temporary cross connections and transient data for testing to the
original ones.
4.2 How to Follow Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure
(a) Diagnostic Work
A fault diagnostic procedure by system message is explained in the TREE format on an individual system message basis.
Proceed with judgment as to whether the fault status coincides with the indicated status, following
the sequence beginning from START.
STEP 1
Determine whether the fault coincides with the fault status (1) in Figure 1-9.
11
CHAPTER 1
General
STEP 2
If the fault status does coincide, the fault is indicated by (2). Repair the fault by referring to the
relevant section in Chapter 4. Otherwise, proceed to (3).
STEP 3
Perform the work indicated by (3). The result of the work (3) is broken down as indicated by (4).
STEP 4
Determine whether the result of work (3) coincides with the status indicated by (5). If so, the
fault(s) is/are indicated either by (6) or by (7). If not, proceed to the next Step.
STEP 5
Perform the work indicated by (8), and if the result of the work is the same as the status indicated, the fault is indicated by (9). If the fault repair work indicated by (9) affects another normal
line, recheck the work as indicated by (10).
Begin from START and proceed with the necessary repair work following the sequence.
When a faulty circuit card (or circuit cards) is suspected, replace the faulty circuit card with a spare
in accordance with the work procedure pertaining to that specific circuit card.
STEP 6
Replace the circuit card indicated by (A) with a spare and check it. Perform the detailed work
as per (B). If the fault status is beyond repair, proceed to the next step.
STEP 7
If the range of the fault or the system configuration is as indicated by (C), perform a check as
indicated by (D). If the fault status is beyond repair, proceed to the next step.
STEP 8
Replace the circuit card indicated by (E) with a spare and check it. The detailed procedure indicated by (G) varies with the system configuration indicated by (F).
12
CHAPTER 1
General
START
(2)
(1)
FAULT
When
: It is the fault of
Section No.
(3)
(11)
(5)
Perform
FAULT SUPERVISION
When
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
FAULT
When
: It is the fault of
Section No.
(Chapter 5)
(11)
(8)
When
(Chapter 5)
(9)
with
FAULT
performed
:
CHECK OF WORK
Section No.
END
(10)
(Chapter 5)
(11)
Note: (1):
(2),(6),(7),(9):
(11):
(3):
(4):
(5):
(8):
13
CHAPTER 1
Figure 1-10 Recovery Procedure Example
START
(A)
(B)
Check
(C)
(D)
When
Check
(E)
Check
(F)
(G)
When
(F)
When
END
14
(G)
General
CHAPTER 1
General
Faulty phenomena
On lifting the handset, dial tone is not heard but side tone is heard, etc.
History of fault
When did the fault occur? What kind of repair procedure has been executed? Does the fault still exist
or not exist? etc.
Range of fault
Range of fault should be reported: Single line?, Specific trunk?, Specific circuit card?, Specific PIR?,
Whole system?, etc.
15
CHAPTER 1
General
(2) Circuit Card Version Number, Program Name, and Program Package Version Number of the circuit card.
See Figure 1-11.
Figure 1-11 Circuit Card Version Number, Program Name, and Program Package Version Number
16LC
Program Name
9A 91-03
SP 785
TR 5448
SPA16LCBE
A 6A
Program Package
Version Number
Front
16
CHAPTER 1
General
17
CHAPTER 1
General
Administrative
Management Procedures
Administrative Procedures
Office Data Management and Office
Data Protection
See Chapter 2
See Chapter 2
Traffic Management
Actions on Claims from
Station Users and/or Operators
(A)
Management Procedures
Station Message Detail
Recording System (SMDR)
See Chapter 2
See Chapter 2
Routine Diagnosis
See Chapter 7
See Chapter 2
(B)
Line fault
Alarm Indications
Fault Analysis/
Test Operation/
Changeover/
Make-Busy/Circuit
Card Change/
Initialization
(A)
18
See Chapter 6
Refer to
Chapter 2,
Chapter 6
CHAPTER 1
General
7. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
This section identifies the information necessary for the system operations and maintenance procedures.
System Configuration
19
CHAPTER 1
General
Figure 1-1 shows the system configuration of the fully expanded 1-IMG and 4-IMG type. For details on
each module accommodation, see Figure 1-2 through Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-1 System Configuration
DC Powered Model:
1-IMG
4-IMG
4-PIR (maximum)
IMG 0
IMG 1
IMG 2
IMG 3
PIR 3
PIR 7
PIR 11
PIR 15
PIR 2
PIR 6
PIR 10
PIR 14
PIR 1
PIR 5
PIR 9
PIR 13
FANU
FANU
FANU
FANU
PIR 0
PIR 4
PIR 8
PIR 12
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
PIR 3
PIR 2
PIR 1
FANU
FANU
PIR 0
TSWR
SV8500
server
SV8500
server
BASEU
BASEU
FANU
PIR 2
AC-DC
FANU
PIR 1
AC-DC
FANU
PIR 0
FANU
AC-DC
PIR 3
SV8500
server
AC-DC
PIR:
Port Interface Rack
FANU: FAN unit
BASEU: Base unit
20
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
MUX #1
MUX #0
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR)
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
TSW #1
TSW #0
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR)
DC-DC PWR #0 (PWR)
PIR 0
PIR 3
FANU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
CPU Card #1
EMA Card
SV8500 Server
CPU Card #0
BASEU
21
General
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1
Figure 1-3 Face Layout of 4-IMG System (SV8500 Server and TSWR)
FANU
TSW #12
TSW #13
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
PLO #1
TSW #11
06
PLO #0
TSW #10
05
TSW #03
04
TSW #02
03
TSW #01
02
TSW #00
GT #01
01
GT #00
01
DLKC #01
00
DLKC #00
TSWR
14
15
EMA Card
CPU Card #1
IOC Card (Option)
SV8500 Server
CPU Card #0
BASEU
22
General
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
MUX #1
MUX #0
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR)
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
MUX #1
MUX #0
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR)
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
MUX #1
MUX #0
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR)
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
MUX #1
MUX #0
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
PIR 0
PIR 1
PIR 2
PIR 3
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
FANU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
BASEU
23
General
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1
General
The Line Equipment Numbers (LENS) are used to specify the location of a circuit (trunk/port) in any of
the PIR universal slots. Refer to the figures in this section, and confirm the LENS format used in the system.
As shown in Figure 1-5, the LENs consists of six digits: two digits for Module Group (MG), one digit for
Unit (U), two digits for Group (G), and one digit for Level (LV).
Figure 1-5 LENS Format
LENS = XX X XX X
Level (LV) : 0 - 7
Group (G) : 00 - 23 Note
Unit (U)
:0-3
7.2.1
If an FCH (PA-FCHA) card is used, Line Groups 24-31 can be used as the extended group numbers.
Module Group
Figure 1-6 explains the Module Group (MG). In a fully expanded system, the MG number ranges from
00 to 07.
Figure 1-6 Module Group Allocations
IMG0
IMG1
IMG2
IMG3
MG01
MG03
MG05
MG07
MG00
MG02
MG04
MG06
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
FRONT VIEW
7.2.2
Unit
Figure 1-7, that represents a fully expanded system, explains the Unit (U) numbers. The numbers range
from 0 to 3, and each unit represents the PIR Universal Slot 04-12 (U 0/2) or 15-23 (U 1/3).
24
CHAPTER 1
Figure 1-7 Unit Number Allocations
On each Module Group (MG: 00 - 07), a total of four Units (U0 - U3) can be assigned.
4-IMG
IMG0
PIR3
U2
IMG1
U3
U2
MG01
PIR2
U0
PIR1
U2
U1
U0
U3
U2
U2
U1
U0
U3
U2
U2
U3
MG07
U1
U0
U3
U2
U1
U3
MG06
U1
U0
U1
U0
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
U3
MG04
U1
U0
IMG3
MG05
MG02
U1
U0
U3
MG03
MG00
PIR0
IMG2
BASEU
FRONT VIEW
02
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
(16)
MUX (PH-PC36) 1
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32
MUX (PH-PC36) 0
192 TS
PWR
PWR
Number
of
Time Slots
00
192 TS
PIR
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32
(32)
(16)
16
16
16
16
16
16
1-IMG
IMG0
TOPU
PIR3
U2
Control
U3
MG01
PIR2
U0
PIR1
U2
U1
U3
MG00
PIR0
U1
U0
BASEU
25
Control
TS : Time Slot
General
CHAPTER 1
7.2.3
General
Group
The Group (G) numbers are allocated as shown in Figure 1-8. A total of two Groups are assigned on
each universal slot within the PIR. Slots 10, 11, 12, 21, 22, 23 can contain a total of four Groups as an
exception.
Figure 1-8 Group Number Allocations
A total of two or four Groups (G) can be assigned on each PIR universal slot.
Slot 10
4-IMG
IMG0
U2
PIR3
IMG1
U3
U2
IMG2
U3
MG01
U2
MG03
IMG3
U3
U2
MG05
U3
MG07
PIR2
U0
U1
U0
U1
U0
U1
U0
U1
PIR1
U2
U3
U2
U3
U2
U3
U2
U3
PIR0
U0
U1
U0
U1
U0
U1
U0
MG00
MG02
BASEU
MG04
MG06
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
G = 03
32 ports total
16 ports total
PWR
MUX (PH-PC36) 1
PWR
G = 14
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
MUX (PH-PC36) 0
02
Slot 05
U1
PIR
00
G = 15
G = 02
FRONT VIEW
G = 13
1-IMG
PIR3
U2
U3
MG01
PIR2
U0
PIR1
U2
U1
U3
G = 12
MG00
PIR0
U1
U0
BASEU
01 03 05 07 09 11
Group No.
(24)
(25)
Extended
Group No.
Note
Slot No.
00
02
00 02 04 06 08 10
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
27
29
31
27
29
31
26
28
30
26
28
30
15 19
23
14 18
22
13 17
21
12 16
20
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
U=0/2
U=1/3
Note: In addition to Group 00 - 19, the system can use 20 - 31 as theoretically valid numbers.
26
PIR
CHAPTER 1
7.2.4
General
Level
Figure 1-9 explains the Level (LV) numbers. There are a total of eight Levels (LV 0 - LV 7) on every
Group number, that ranges from 00 to 31.
Figure 1-9 Level Number Allocations
A total of eight Levels (LV 0 - LV 7) can be assigned on each Group.
4-IMG
1-IMG
IMG0
PIR3
U2
IMG1
U3
U2
MG01
PIR2
U0
PIR1
U2
U1
U0
U3
U2
U1
U0
U3
U2
BASEU
U2
U1
U0
U3
U2
U3
U1
U0
BASEU
BASEU
U1
MG06
U1
U0
U3
MG07
MG04
U1
U0
IMG3
U3
MG05
MG02
U1
U0
U2
MG03
MG00
PIR0
IMG2
U3
U2
U3
MG01
U1
U0
U2
U3
MG00
U1
U0
BASEU
BASEU
FRONT VIEW
U=0/2
00
02
01 03 05 07 09 11
Group No.
(24) (25)
U=1/3
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
00 02 04 06 08 10
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
27
29
31
27
29
31
26
28
30
26
28
30
Level (LV)
Group
(G = Odd No., < 11)
32-port Slot
16-port Slot
Group
(G = Even No., < 10)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
27
22
Level (LV)
15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21
12 16 20
PIR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Group
(G = 15/19/23)
Group
(G = 14/18/22)
Group
(G = 13/17/21)
Group
(G = 12/16/20)
CHAPTER 1
General
The Local Partition (LP) number refers to a logical local processor number, theoretically assigned for each
IMG that consists of four (or less) Port Interface Racks (PIR). Though the local processor does not actually
exist in any of the IMGs, the system can apply the two-digit LP number to each IMG (see Figure 1-10) on
its data memory program. The LP numbers are used primarily in the following cases:
The Local Partition number (two digits, even number) is assigned as follows.
1-IMG
PIR3
PIR2
PIR1
FANU
PIR0
BASEU
LP = 00
FRONT VIEW
4-IMG
IMG0
IMG1
IMG2
IMG3
PIR3
PIR7
PIR11
PIR15
PIR2
PIR6
PIR10
PIR14
PIR1
PIR5
PIR9
PIR13
FANU
FANU
FANU
FANU
PIR0
PIR4
PIR8
PIR12
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
BASEU
LP = 00
LP = 02
LP = 04
FRONT VIEW
28
LP = 06
CHAPTER 1
General
The system finds a fault by its fault detecting circuit and the fault detecting program. Once a fault occurs,
the system initiates a remedial action such as system changeover, make-busy setting, or restart processing
by the automatic diagnosis function. This action reduces the influence of the fault so that system servicing
may be minimized. The result of the process taken and the fault situation are indicated for equipment
concerned.
Among the faults, those related to speech path (noise, one-way speech, speech inability, etc.) are not
detectable. Since these fault reports are obtained from a station or operator, periodic trunk tests must be
performed without failure to detect faults related to speech path.
Figure 1-11 shows an outline of fault detection. Figure 1-12 and Figure 1-13 show a block diagram of fault
detection.
Figure 1-11 Fault Detection General Diagram
Indication of
Fault Occurrence
Information
Collection and Diagnosis
Example of Faults
System Messages
PCPro
printer, etc.
CPU
card
Indication of
Alarm Lamp
on EMA card
ALM
EMA
card
29
Abnormal temperature,
power supply failure,
fuse blowing, etc., within
the equipment frame
CHAPTER 1
General
Firmware
faults
PCPro
MUX
Ready
Clock
EXB
CPU
Software abnormal
behavior monitor
Howler,
Ringer fault
PWR
Ready
Clock
Howler,
Ringer fault
Fault
Information
Power off,
blown fuse
(Note)
PWR
TSW
(IOC)
Printer, etc.
LC/TRK
EMA
SYMBOL
MEANING
SYMBOL
CPU
EXB
GT card
EMA
PWR
Power Supply
IOC
I/O Controller
TSW
LC/TRK
Line/Trunk
MUX
Multiplexer
30
MEANING
CHAPTER 1
General
MUX
LC/TRK
PWR
- Symbols : Circuit Card in PIR/TSWR
: Card in SV8500 Server
: Faults to be detected
: Speech Path
: Fault Information flow
TSWR
PWR
TSW
Ready
Clock
PCPro
GT
EXB
CPU
PLO
Ready
Clock
(IOC)
printer, etc.
Software abnormal
behavior monitor
Power off,
blown fuse
(Note)
SYMBOL
Ready
Clock
Fault
Information
EMA
MEANING
SYMBOL
MEANING
CPU
PWR
Power Supply
EMA
DLKC
IOC
I/O Controller
TSW
LC/TRK
Line/Trunk
MUX
Multiplexer
GT/EXB
Gate card
TSWM
31
CHAPTER 1
General
The CPU transfers line/trunk card control information to the associated peripheral circuits via IO
Bus. When a party error is detected in the transfer data or when the required information cannot be
transferred from a circuit card, the CPU identifies the cause of the fault, changes over the CPU so
that system operation is not affected, and executes restart processing.
Others
The alarm detecting circuit on the EMA card continuously monitors the occurrence of faults in the
PWR supply cards, such as abnormal status within the equipment frame, and lights the alarm lamp
on the front when a fault is detected.
32
CHAPTER 1
General
(1) Upon receiving a fault report from a station user or an operator, the technician can assume a faulty card
exists if the range affected by the fault can be determined. For the detailed procedure, refer to Chapter 6.
Use the following actions to check the MDF:
(a) Check the LENS of the reporter (Station or ATTCON/DESKCON).
(b) Check other circuits of the circuit card in which the reporter (station line or ATTCON/DESKCON) is
located.
(c) Check the other groups (other circuit cards mounted in the same module) in the module in which the
reporter is located.
(d) Check lines in each of the other modules on the basis of multiple lines.
(2) If the fault cannot be detected by the system (a fault related to the speech path such as noise during speech,
one-way speech, speech inability), the range of (a) through (d) (itemized above) should be limited.
(3) When a major fault is detected in the dual systems, the CPU or TSW system automatically changes over if
the fault range is (c) and (d). In this case, the whole module involved is placed into make-busy status even
if the fault is partial, and the station lines currently operating normally become faulty status. Diagnose the
fault from the content of the system message displayed and repair the fault as required.
(4) To narrow down the range of faults, consider the system circuitry that consists of the control (see Figures
1-17 and Figure 1-18, where CPU 0 is active) and speech path systems (see Figure 1-14 and Figure 1-19).
(5) As seen from the block diagrams in Figure 1-14 through Figure 1-19, if a fault that affects the common
portions occurs, all other associated portions will be affected by this fault. When CPU and TSW are provided in dual configuration, they will be automatically changed over as far as the fault is detectable by the
system.
33
CHAPTER 1
Figure 1-14 General System Block Diagram (1-IMG)
PM Bus
MUX
MUX
LC/TRK
PIR3
LC/TRK
PM Bus
MUX
MUX
LC/TRK
PIR2
LC/TRK
PM Bus
MUX
MUX
LC/TRK
PIR1
LC/TRK
PM Bus
TSW
MUX
MUX INT
EXB INT
LC/TRK
TSW
MUX
MUX INT
EXB INT
LC/TRK
BUS0
BUS1
PIR0
SV8500 Server
EXB0
EXB1
CPU0
CPU1
EMA
IOC
(option)
PCI-Ex bus
(PCI Express)
IOC
(option)
: Circuit Card
: CPU Control Routes
34
PCI-Ex bus
(PCI Express)
: Signal
: Cable
General
CHAPTER 1
Figure 1-15 Speech Path Block Diagram (1-IMG)
PIR 3
MUX
MUX
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
PIR 2
MUX
MUX
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
PIR 1
MUX
MUX
PIR 0
MUX
MUX
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
TSW
TSW
TSW
TSW
[Symbols]
: Speech Path
: Cable
MUX : PH-PC36
35
General
CHAPTER 1
Figure 1-16 Range of Speech Path Fault (1-IMG)
Faults within this range affects
these two slots.
LC/TRK
PIR 3
32ch
LC/TRK
MUX
512ch
PIR 2
32ch
LC/TRK
MUX
512ch
PIR 1
32ch
LC/TRK
MUX
512ch
Fault within this range
affects this circuit card.
Faults within this range affects
these two slots.
LC/TRK
PIR 0
LC/TRK
MUX/INT
32ch
TSW
[Symbols]
: Circuit Card
36
: Speech Path
General
CHAPTER 1
Figure 1-17 CPU Controlling Block Diagram (4-IMG)
IMG0
PIR 3
IMG1
PIR 3
PM BUS
MUX
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX
PM BUS
PIR 2
LC/TRK
PIR 2
PIR 1
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX
LC/TRK
PIR 1
PIR 0
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX
LC/TRK
PIR 0
MUX
PM BUS
MUX
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX
PM BUS
LC/TRK
PM BUS
PM BUS
MUX
MUX
PM BUS
MUX
PM BUS
LC/TRK
PM BUS
PM BUS
MUX
MUX
PM BUS
MUX
PM BUS
LC/TRK
PM BUS
PM BUS
MUX
PM BUS
MUX
LC/TRK
MUX
PM BUS
To IMG 2 To IMG 3
TSWR
PCI-Ex bus
(PCI Express)
M M M M
U U U U
X X X X
MUX/INT
MUX/INT
TSW 00
MUX
/INT
MUX
/INT
TSW
02
TSW
03
M M M M
U U U U
X X X X
M M M M
U U U U
X X X X
MUX/INT
MUX/INT
TSW 01
TSW 10
DLKC BUS
EXB0
DLKC 1
EMA
IOC
(option)
DLKC BUS
DLKC BUS
Local I/O BUS
PLO 0
PLO 1
GT 1
CPU Board 1
PCI-Ex bus
(PCI Express)
EXB1
(Note 3)
MUX
/INT
TSW
12
TSW 11
DLKC 0
GT 0
MUX
/INT
DLKC BUS
IOC
(option)
SV8500 Server
CPU Board 0
M M M M
U U U U
X X X X
To IMG 2 To IMG 3
GT :PH-GT09
TSW :PH-SW12
DLKC:PH-PC20/PH-PC20-B
PLO :PH-CK16-D
MUX :PH-PC36
[Symbols]
: CPU Controlling Routes
: Circuit Card (ACT)
: External Cable
: Signal
: Cable
: Circuit Card (STBY)
: Clock Oscillator
37
TSW
13
General
CHAPTER 1
Figure 1-18 Speech Path Block Diagram (4-IMG) (1 of 2)
IMG0
IMG1
PIR3
PIR 3
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PIR 2
PIR 2
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PIR 1
PIR 1
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PIR 0
PIR 0
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
TSWR
TSW 00
MUX 003
MUX 002
MUX 001
MUX 000
MUX/INT
TSW 10
MUX 100
MUX 101
MUX 102
MUX 103
MUX/INT
TSW 01
MUX 013
MUX 012
MUX 011
MUX 010
MUX/INT
TSW 11
MUX 110
MUX 111
MUX 112
MUX 113
MUX/INT
[Symbols]
: Speech Path
: Circuit Card (ACT)
: External Cable
: Circuit Card (STBY)
TSW: PH-SW12
MUX: PH-PC36
38
MUX/
INT
TSW
02
MUX/
INT
TSW
12
MUX/
INT
TSW
03
MUX/
INT
TSW
13
General
CHAPTER 1
Figure 1-18 Speech Path Block Diagram (4-IMG) (2 of 2)
IMG2
IMG3
PIR 3
PIR 3
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PIR 2
PIR2
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PIR 1
PIR1
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PIR 0
PIR 0
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
TSWR
TSW 03
MUX 033
MUX 032
MUX 031
MUX 030
MUX/INT
TSW 02
MUX 023
MUX 022
MUX 021
MUX 020
MUX/INT
TSW 12
MUX 120
MUX 121
MUX 122
MUX 123
MUX/INT
TSW 13
MUX 130
MUX 131
MUX 132
MUX 133
MUX/INT
[Symbols]
: Speech Path
: Circuit Card (ACT)
: External Cable
: Circuit Card (STBY)
39
TSW: PH-SW12
MUX: PH-PC36
MUX/
INT
TSW
00
MUX/
INT
TSW
10
MUX/
INT
TSW
01
MUX/
INT
TSW
11
General
CHAPTER 1
Figure 1-19 Range of Speech Path Fault (4-IMG)
Faults within this range affects
these two slots.
LC/TRK
PIR 3
LC/TRK
32ch
MUX
512ch
PIR 2
LC/TRK
32ch
MUX
512ch
PIR 1
LC/TRK
32ch
MUX
512ch
LC/TRK
PIR 0
LC/TRK
32ch
MUX
512ch
TSW
MUX/INT
[Symbols]
: Circuit Card
40
: Speech Path
General
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2
41
CHAPTER 2
General
System clock can be manually or automatically adjusted as shown below. For automatic adjustment, an SNTP
server is required.
NO.
SNTP SERVER
COMMAND
not used
ATIM/ATIMN
used
ANTPL
EXPLANATION
By pressing the Set button on this command, the specified date and
time are applied to the system.
By specifying an SNTP server with start time to obtain time information
from the server, time adjustment will be automatically performed on a daily
basis.
ATIM/ATIMN
manual adjustment
automatic adjustment
ANTPL
SNTP server
SV8500 server
time-synchronization
PCPro
1.2
ATIM/ATIMN
Date, Time, and Day Light Savings (Start/End) can be specified on this command. By pressing the Set
button on the command, the specified Date and Time will be applied to the system that is in operation.
(2) When Using SNTP Server
STEP 1
ATIM
When using Day Light Savings, set the data by using ATIM command.
STEP 2
By this command, set time for time-synchronization (SNTP) service as well as an SNTP server by using the domain name or IP address. Time adjustment will be automatically performed on a daily basis.
IP Address of the DNS Server must be set using the ADTM command when SNTP server is specified
the domain name.
42
CHAPTER 2
Note: For the details, refer to UNIVERGE SV8500 Data Programming Manual - Business.
Note: Activation of time-synchronization (SNTP) service is limited to once a day. Thus, if ANTPL command is
used to change the start time for SNTP service after SNTP service is already active for that day, the
change takes effect from the following day. Activate the SNTP service manually by pressing the Execute
button when immediate time adjustment is needed.
Example:
1) Existing start time for SNTP service is 01:00.
2) At 03:00, ANTPL command is used to change the start time from 01:00 to 05:00.
3) The next start time for SNTP service is 05:00 on the next day.
1.3
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 2
Click on Execute button to synchronize the date and time of the specified SNTP server.
43
CHAPTER 2
2. ALARM INDICATIONS
If trouble occurs in the system, the system activates an appropriate remedial action such as system changeover,
make-busy of the circuit card, restart processing by executing the automatic diagnostic function. Results of the
action taken and the faulty situation are displayed by the alarm indication and system message (s). This section
describes the alarm indication. For the system messages, refer to Chapter 3.
2.1
Front panel
Each circuit card
Each peripheral equipment Note 1
Note 1: When major alarms or minor alarms are generated in the system, alarm lamp on Attendant Console
rights red. This lamp is enabled by setting the basic data for Attendant Console. For the basic data
setting, see 4. Attendant Console (ATTCON) Data of Chapter 2 in Data Programming Manual - Business.
(b) System Messages
2.2
Execute DFTD command from PCPro to collect the recorded system messages.
STEP 2
Note: When RALM is executed, all system messages will be cleared. Be sure to collect the system messages
44
CHAPTER 2
2.3
Alarm Indications
The system has alarm lamps on EMA card as shown below. The table below lists the meaning of each lamp.
Alarm Indications on EMA card
SYS ALM lamp
EMA Card
LINK ACT
SYS
PWR ALM SYS 1
MB
(SUB) PFT
ALM
SYS SYS
LOCK SEL
ON
SYS 0
SW00
PBI No.
INIT
1
0
SW01
PWR
SYS
ALM
LINK
OPE
ALM
MB
(SUB) PFT
SYS 0
LINE
SPEED LINE
SPEED
LINE
SPEED LINE
SPEED
LINE
SPEED LINE
SPEED
PBI No.
INIT
SWO0
SYS SYS
LOCK SEL
SYS 1
1
SWO1
PWR
LOAD
ON
LINE
PWR
LOAD
4
ON
LINE
LINE
NAME
2
SPEED LINE
COLOR
SYS0
Red
OFF
ALM lamp
SYS1
DESCRIPTION
Flashes in 1-second cycle.
Lights.
Red
OFF
Red
OFF
SPEED
No failure is detected.
Lights when failure occurs on software operation in CPU #0
(software operation failure during the system is operating).
Flashes when failure occurs on software operation in CPU #0
(software operation failure on starting up the system).
No failure is detected.
Lights when failure occurs on software operation in CPU #1
(software operation failure during the system is operating).
Flashes when failure occurs on software operation in CPU #1
(software operation failure on starting up the system).
No alarm is detected.
45
REMARKS
CHAPTER 2
2.4
ALMG
ASYD
Assign the following data for modifying the default alarm grade.
START
ALMG : Assign output grade and alarm lamp grade on a system message basis.
FK: Fault Message Kind (0-7, 10-17, 20-27, 30-37)
FI: Fault Message Index (A-Z)
LMP: Alarm Lamp Grade (0-3)
GRD: Output Grade (0-3)
SYSM GRD: System Alarm Lamp Output Grade (0-3) Note
Note: Indicates the setting status of output grade for System Alarm Lamp and System Message,
which can be assigned by ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 91, b2 and b3.
ASYD : Assign the output grade of System Alarm Lamp and System Message on a node basis.
SYS1, INDEX 91, b2 and b3
b3 b2
0 0 = Output all fault
0 1 = Output the fault higher than Grade 1 (SUP/MN/MJ)
1 0 = Output the fault higher than Grade 2 (MN/MJ)
1 1 = Output the fault higher than Grade 3 (MJ)
END
46
CHAPTER 2
General
This section explains how to initialize the system. The following can be used:
PCPro (SINZ)
Telephony Server Maintenance Menu (For FP85-109 S6 or later)
PCPro Tools (System Control - System Reboot) (For FP85-108 S5 or earlier)
By INIT key Operation on EMA card
By Turning OFF/ON the System
Note: Use PCPro Tools for FP85-108 S5 or earlier and Telephony Server Maintenance Menu for FP85-109
Load Initial
MEM
CF Card
Initialization
- Office Data
- Program
47
load
- Office Data
- Program
Initialization
CHAPTER 2
PCPro
(SINZ)
Load Initial
Telephony
PCPro
Server
Tools
Maintenance
(Note 1)
Menu (Note 1)
INIT key
Operation
(EMA card)
Tuning Off/On
Note 1: Use PCPro Tools for FP85-108 S5 or earlier and Telephony Server Maintenance Menu for FP85-109
CF Card
Program
(Main Memory)
Office Data
- Basic Software
- Service Software
- IMAT Software
- TCP/IP Software
- Data Memory
- Call Forwarding Data
- Speed Calling Data
- Name Display Data
etc.
Program Loading
MEM
- Program
- Office Data
3.2
48
CHAPTER 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
Initialization starts.
PCPro is automatically placed in logout state.
Note: For the detail, refer to SINZ on page 1050 in this manual.
STEP 3
Make sure that the SYS ALM lamp (red) lights on the EMA card.
STEP 4
STEP 5
Set the current date and time from the PCPro. (Refer to How to Adjust Date and Time.)
STEP 6
49
CHAPTER 2
3.3
Note: The procedure explained here (Initialization by Telephony Server Maintenance Menu) is available since
FP85-109 S6.
The following initialization type is available.
Restart (Program & Office Data Load & System Initial (OS Restart))
STEP 1
STEP 2
Note: "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" represents the LAN 1 IP address of the destination Telephony Server.
Note: The default for both user name and password is admin. You are recommended to change user name
Click the Reboot button in the SYSTEM CONTROL area (in the upper right-hand part of the
screen).
STEP 4
The Reboot dialog box appears. Click the Reboot button in the dialog Box.
STEP 5
STEP 6
Confirm that the PWR, Link, and ACT lamps on the EMA card are lit green.
* When the initialization process is complete, the ACT lamp lights up green.
STEP 7
Set the current date and time from the PCPro. (Refer to How to Adjust Date and Time.)
50
CHAPTER 2
3.4
Note: The procedure explained here is available for FP85-108 S5 or earlier. Do not use PCPro Tools for FP85-
109 S6 or later.
The following initialization type is available.
Restart (Program & Office Data Load & System Initial (OS Restart))
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Select 1.System Reboot from the list box, and then click the Execute button.
Initialization starts.
PCPro is automatically placed in logout state.
STEP 4
Confirm that the PWR, Link, and ACT lamps on the EMA card are lit green.
* When the initialization process is complete, the ACT lamp lights up green.
STEP 5
STEP 6
Set the current date and time from the PCPro. (Refer to How to Adjust Date and Time.)
STEP 7
51
CHAPTER 2
3.5
All on-going calls will be disconnected. The system will be rebooted by using program and office data that
are in the MEM.
[MEM]
- Program
Initialization
- Office Data
STEP 1
Identify which system of CPU is in operation. The following shows an example when the system
is operating by CPU #0.
SYS
PWR ALM
LINK
SYS 1
ACT
ALM
MB
SYS SYS
(SUB) PFT LOCK SEL
ON
SYS 0
SW00
STEP 2
SYS
PWR ALM
INIT
1
2
Lamp (Color)
PBI No.
SW01
Status
PWR (Green)
On
Off
LINK (Green)
On
ACT (Green)
On
ALM (Red)
Off
Press INIT key on the EMA card to start Non Load Initial.
LINK
SYS 1
SYS 0
ACT
ALM
MB
SYS SYS
(SUB) PFT LOCK SEL
ON
1
SW00
INIT
1
2
PBI No.
SW01
INIT key
STEP 3
Status
PWR (Green)
On
LINK (Green)
On
ACT (Green)
On
On
STEP 4
Set the current date and time from the PCPro. (Refer to How to Adjust Date and Time.)
STEP 5
52
CHAPTER 2
3.6
Restart (Program & Office Data Load & System Initial (OS Restart))
Note 1: PCPro Tools is available only for FP85-108 S5 or earlier. Since FP85-109 S6, Telephony Server Main-
tenance Menu is used in place of PCPro Tools.Do not use PCPro Tools for FP85-109 S6 or later.
3.6.1
This procedure assumes that the system has been shut down for some reason.
STEP 1
Turn off the power of the system referring to Chapter 5 How to Turn ON/OFF Whole System.
STEP 2
Turn on the power again referring to Chapter 5 How to Turn ON/OFF Whole System.
STEP 3
Status
PWR (Green)
On
LINK (Green)
On
ACT (Green)
On
ALM (Red)
On
STEP 4
Set the current date and time from the PCPro. (Refer to How to Adjust Date and Time.)
STEP 5
53
CHAPTER 2
4. ROUTINE DIAGNOSIS
For confirming its own servicing status, the system automatically executes self diagnosis every day, and
displays the result of the diagnosis as a system message. By this function, possible causes for trouble can be
discovered in an early stage and possible trouble can be prevented from remaining undetected.
4.1
When routine diagnosis starts, and the result of the routine diagnosis is normal, the result
displays as System Message [7-O].
0/1: Not displayed/Displayed
b1
When the result of the routine diagnosis is abnormal, it displays as System Message [7-P].
0/1: Not displayed/Displayed
b3, b2 Processing at the time when Trunk Ineffective Hold is detected. Note 1
BIT
b3
b2
Note 1: Trunk Ineffective Hold is a continuous state other than idle state within a predetermined duration while
routine diagnosis is in progress. Whether it is detected/not detected, it is assigned by ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 89.
Note 2: When Trunk Ineffective Hold on the FCCS Network is detected, setting of ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 86,
b2b3 and SYS1, INDEX 89, b4b5 must be the same at all nodes on the network.
(Hour)
INDEX 88 0
(Minute)
54
CHAPTER 2
SYS1, INDEX 89, 90 Routine Diagnosis Items: The item corresponding to each bit is to execute
once a day.
INDEX90
INDEX90
Note 1: When Trunk Ineffective Hold Check or Trunk Ineffective Hold Detection is executed while the bit 0 of
ASYDL SYS1 INDEX1034 is set to 1, Virtual Register Ineffective Check is also enabled.
Note 2: There is a limit on the number of CCIS/QSIG trunks per LP to perform the diagnostic task; the maxi-
55
CHAPTER 2
For an LP where CCIS/QSIG trunks exceeding the above limits are registered, System Message [7-P]
([52H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Impossible) is provided, and the diagnostic task is not executed (For other LPs where no such error is detected, the task is conducted as scheduled).
Note 3: CCIS Control System Interoffice Audit Test 0/1= Required/Not Required.
This system data becomes valid only when activating TRK Ineffective Hold Check function of the periodic test, and releases the Ineffective Hold Trunk of self/destination node.
If there is peer to peer byCCIS over IP with PHC service in self office, assign this system data to
1= Not required, only Ineffective Hold Trunk is released (Regarding opposite trunk, depending on
whether Ineffective Hold Check is checked or not in the opposite node).
Note 4: It is enabled when ASYD SYS1 INDEX89 b6=1 (Routine Diagnosis Call Forwarding Memory Clear is
executed) is assigned.
4.2
[7-O]
Abnormality detected
[7-P]
Routine Backup
By assigning ASYD SYS1 INDEX90 Bit1=1(executing Routine Backup), Office Data backup can be
executed during Routine Diagnosis.
<How to Backup>
Assign ASYD SYS1 INDEX90 Bit1=1 (executing Routine Backup) in advance, assign the office data from
the following system data to be backed up.
56
CHAPTER 2
INDEX306
57
CHAPTER 2
INDEX306
4.4
(1) Conditions when Routine Backup conflicts with Office Data backup by MEM_HDD or MEM_HDD_N
command
(2) Conditions when Routine Backup conflicts with a switchover of system mode for a dual configuration system
58
CHAPTER 2
(3) For a dual configuration in a FCCS Network, when a command which reads out a data is executed toward
a node under a Routine Backup process from another node, a transmission error between nodes may occur
according to the execution timing.
(4) In the Single System Configuration, the result of a periodic backup of the STBY side is always shown as
Normal End in System Messages 7-O and 7-P.
59
CHAPTER 2
(1) Office data that is stored in memory during the operation can be backed up to the CF card
mounted on the SV8500 server. Also, office data stored in the CF card can be copied and
stored in other storage devices such as hard disk by using Telephony Server Maintenance
Menu/PCPro Tools.
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
Figure 2-3 Telephony Server Maintenance Menu/PCPro Tools and PCPro Coverage
UNIVERGE SV8500 Server
Office Data, etc.
CF card
other storage
devices....
upload/download
up
loa
o
d/d
wn
Load
MEM_HDD
MEM
(Memory)
Save
loa
PCPro
Note: PCPro Tools is available only for FP85-108 S5 or earlier. Since FP85-109 S6, Telephony Server Main-
tenance Menu is used in place of PCPro Tools.Do not use PCPro Tools for FP85-109 S6 or later.
(2) Saving the office data
The system operates according to the office data, so make sure to save the latest office data to the CF card.
Otherwise, re-assignment of whole office data will be necessary if memory is corrupted for some reason.
In this case, all services will be stopped during the data assignment.
Viewing and confirming office data by the routine diagnosis is the best way to reduce possible system failures. Always keep the following at an easily accessible place.
(a) Configuration Sheets
Use a pencil to record the latest data in the configuration sheets.
(b) CF card for backup data
Prepare another CF card to store the office data as an backup data.
5.2
Make a plan for data modification - Write into the configuration sheets
STEP 2
STEP 3
60
CHAPTER 2
STEP 4
STEP 5
61
CHAPTER 2
5.3
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
5.3.1
MEM (memory)
SV8500 Server
PCPro
CF card
Data Memory
Name Display
Wireless Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Speed Calling
User Assign Key
Number Sharing
ACD Data Memory
Call Block
ICB and DR
Expanded Speed Calling
Call Forwarding-Logout
One-Touch Speed Calling for DtermIP
62
CHAPTER 2
5.3.2
MEM (memory)
SV8500 Server
other storage
devices....
download
CF card
The following data can be saved to other storage devices from the CF card.
Data Memory
Name Display
Wireless Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Speed Calling
User Assign Key
Number Sharing
ACD Data Memory
Call Block
ICB and DR
Expanded Speed Calling
Call Forwarding-Logout
63
CHAPTER 2
STEP 2
Type "http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:9801/" into the address bar to access Telephony Server Maintenance Menu. Telephony Server Maintenance Menu Login screen appears. After the login,
Telephony Server Maintenance Menu screen appears.
Note: "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" represents the LAN1 IP address of the destination Telephony Server.
Note: The default for both user name and password is admin. You are recommended to change user name
Click the Download button for Office Data on Telephony Server Maintenance Menu screen.
The Office Data Download dialog box appears in the lower right portion of the screen.
STEP 4
STEP 5
Click the Download button on the Office Data Download dialog box.
STEP 6
STEP 2
Type "http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:9801/" into the address bar to access Telephony Server Maintenance Menu. Telephony Server Maintenance Menu Login screen appears. After the login,
Telephony Server Maintenance Menu screen appears.
Note: "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" represents the LAN1 IP address of the destination Telephony Server.
Note: The default for both user name and password is admin. You are recommended to change user name
Click the Upload button for Office Data on Telephony Server Maintenance Menu screen.
The Office Data Upload dialog box appears in the lower right portion of the screen.
STEP 4
64
CHAPTER 2
STEP 5
Click the Browse button on the dialog box and specify the Office Data file to be uploaded.
STEP 6
Click the Upload button on the Office Data Upload dialog box to upload the specified data.
STEP 7
Execute Office Data Load & System Initialize with the SINZ command.
65
CHAPTER 2
2) PCPro Tools
The office data stored in the CF card of SV8500 can be saved (downloaded) in other storage device by
using PCPro Tools. Also, office data stored in other storage device can be loaded (uploaded) by using
this tool.
Note: Do not use PCPro Tools for FP85-109 S6 or later.
Note: When operating the Telephony Server with PCPro Tools, the same install CD used to install into the Te-
lephony Server must be imported to the maintenance PC in advance. Select Tool - Import Install
CD from the main menu of PCPro Tools to import the CD.
Note: When an install CD which is different from the one used to install into the Telephony Server is imported
to the maintenance PC, data control between PCPro Tools and the Telephony Server (CF card) cannot
be executed properly.
Figure 2-6 How to Save the Office Data using PCPro Tools
upload
MEM (memory)
SV8500 Server
other storage
devices....
download
CF card
PCPro Tools
The following data can be saved to other storage devices from the CF card.
Data Memory
Name Display
Wireless Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Speed Calling
User Assign Key
Number Sharing
ACD Data Memory
Call Block
ICB and DR
Expanded Speed Calling
Call Forwarding-Logout
One-Touch Speed Calling for DtermIP
SPD Name Data
Message Area ID Data
SIP Terminal Call Transfer
66
CHAPTER 2
STEP 2
Select an appropriate connection account from Connect Account Name list box.
STEP 3
Specify appropriate CF card drive name using System Side radio buttons.
STEP 4
Click Individual File Operation from Menu and select Office Data.
STEP 5
STEP 6
Select Download (PC <-- Telephony Server) from Operation list box.
STEP 7
STEP 8
Select an appropriate item from Install Data Registration Name list box.
STEP 9
Select an appropriate item from Office Data combo box, where you can type arbitrary name
as required.
STEP 10 Click on Execute button. By doing this, the office data will be added to the specified data.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Select an appropriate Install Data from Install Data List and then click on Detail button.
STEP 4
Select Office Data from Data Kind list box, and then click on Import button.
STEP 5
Click on Browse button to select Import Data, and then click on OK.
STEP 6
STEP 7
Click on Execute button. The specified data will be added to the data.
67
CHAPTER 2
STEP 8
STEP 1
Select an appropriate connection account from Connect Account Name list box.
STEP 2
Specify appropriate CF card drive name using System Side radio buttons.
STEP 3
Click Individual File Operation from Menu and select Office Data.
STEP 4
STEP 5
Select Upload (PC --> Telephony Server) from Operation list box.
STEP 6
STEP 7
Select an appropriate item from Install Data Registration Name list box.
STEP 8
STEP 9
Click on Execute button. Uploading will start toward the specified CF card drive.
68
CHAPTER 2
5.3.3
Note: There is no compatibility between Speed Calling data between Dterm and DtermIP.
Note: The setting/deleting of the ACD data can be changed (written into the system memory) by using a MIS
or an external application. Therefore, if it is changed after taking the backup, Verify HDD against
MEM of MEM_HDD will end in an error.
69
CHAPTER 2
5.4
Note: The procedures explained in this section are available for FP85-108 S5 or earlier. Since FP85-109 S6,
the Telephony Server Maintenance Menu is used to initialize the CF card. Refer to Installation Manual CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM STARTUPInitial Startup (for FP85-109 S6 or later)CF Card
Initialization for the CF card initialization by Telephony Server Maintenance Menu.
5.4.1
This section explains how to initialize CF card. Performing this procedure, all the contents on the card will
be initialized, leaving BASE System (OS) only installed. Any programs of the system, SVI files, or office
data settings are not to be installed on the card. To install these data to CF card, perform the initial installation by using PCPro Tools after this initialization procedure.
Note: Refer to Installation ManualCHAPTER 5 SYSTEM STARTUPProgram Install to CF Card
WARNING
Initialization procedure deletes all the programs, SVI files, and office data settings from the CF
card. Be sure to make backups of these data before performing the following steps.
Note 1: Keyboard can be selected whether Japanese keyboard layout or English keyboard layout.
Note 2: Initialization procedures delete all the programs, SVI files, and office data settings from the CF card.
Be sure to make backups of these data before performing the following steps.
Note 3: Performing the initial installation procedures and executing reboot, LAN1 becomes invalid. Set LAN1
the settings on your PC. After the initial installation process, the default IP address for LAN2 of
SV8500 becomes 172.16.253.0/16. Check the settings on your PC.
Note 5: Use DISS command to check the issue information of BASE System (OS). You can see the issue infor-
mation of the installer CD-ROM printed on the label as BASE_SYS:xx.xx. When you obtain the latest
installer CD-ROM, compare the version information and decide whether to update the OS or not.
Note 6: You do not have to specify a correct device of boot prompt in normal.
Note 7: You do not have to do mounting CD/DVD drive operation.
70
CHAPTER 2
[Start]
STEP 1
STEP 2
Insert the installer CD-ROM (printed BASIC SOFTWARE on the label) to the CD/DVD drive
of the PC.
STEP 3
Set the PC to reboot from the CD-ROM; give the top priority to the CD/DVD drive.
Note: Refer to the PCs manual for the BIOS setting information.
STEP 4
Options are:
usb
ide
scd0
scd1
scd4
scd5
hda
hdb
hde
hdf
auto
none (test only)
scd2
scd6
hdc
hdg
scde3
scde7
hdd
hdh
boot:
STEP 5
Boot prompt is displayed, and then press ENTER in order to detect the device name automatically (command is not required).
71
CHAPTER 2
STEP 6
STEP 7
Login as root.
root@(none):~#
STEP 8
Insert the CF card to be initialized to the PCMCIA card slot of the PC.
STEP 9
root@(none):~#
root@(none):~# INSTALLCF
......
......
......
Note: When you try to remove the CF card, a message may appear on the display. This message is harmless
72
CHAPTER 2
Installation is finished.
root@(none):~#
root@(none):~# halt
......
Note: When halt command is executed, turning off the power of PC and ejecting CD-ROM from PC can be
performed automatically. Turning off the power of PC begins approximately 30 seconds later when halt
command is executed.
STEP 12 If you modified the BIOS setting (booting drive priority) at STEP 3, restore to the previous setting as needed.
[End]
CF card initialization is now finished. Go on to the initial installation procedures. Refer to the Installation
Manual CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM STARTUP 1.2 Program Install to CF Card for the initial installation procedures.
Note: If you use a PC whose writing speed to CF card is slow, an error may occur.
If the process ends up showing error, the CD-ROM will not be ejected automatically; remove manually.
If CF is NOT found... is displayed, the PC is failed to recognize the card. Try this on other PC.
73
CHAPTER 2
5.4.2
This section explains how to initialize CF card. Performing this procedure, all the contents on the card will
be initialized, leaving BASE System (OS) only installed. Any programs of the system, SVI files, or office
data settings are not to be installed on the card. To install these data to CF card, perform the initial installation by using PCPro Tools after this initialization procedure.
Note: Refer to the Installation ManualCHAPTER 5 SYSTEM STARTUP1.2 Program Install to CF
WARNING
Initialization procedure deletes all the programs, SVI files, and office data settings from the CF
card. Be sure to make backups of these data before performing the following steps.
Be sure to make backups of these data before performing the following steps.
Note 3: Performing the initial installation procedures and executing reboot, LAN1 becomes invalid. Set LAN1
the settings on your PC. After the initial installation process, the default IP address for LAN2 of
SV8500 becomes 172.16.253.0/16. Check the settings on your PC.
Note 5: Use DISS command to check the issue information of BASE System (OS). You can see the issue infor-
mation of the installer CD-ROM printed on the label as BASE_SYS:xx.xx. When you obtain the latest
installer CD-ROM, compare the version information and decide whether to update the OS or not.
Note 6: Do not specify an incorrect device. Doing so will cause a kernel panic. If this occurs, reboot the PC by
power switch.
74
CHAPTER 2
[Start]
STEP 1
STEP 2
Insert the installer CD-ROM (printed BASIC SOFTWARE on the label) to the CD/DVD drive
of the PC.
STEP 3
Set the PC to reboot from the CD-ROM; give the top priority to the CD/DVD drive.
Note: Refer to the PCs manual for the BIOS setting information.
STEP 4
Options are:
usb
ide
scd0
scd1
scd4
scd5
hda
hdb
hde
hdf
auto
none (test only)
scd2
scd6
hdc
hdg
scde3
scde7
hdd
hdh
boot:
STEP 5
Assign the device from boot prompt. (The sample screen below is for IDE connection.)
Note: When multiple CD/DVD drives are connected, the display may vary depending on the environment.
Note: Do not specify an incorrect device. Doing so will cause a kernel panic. If this occurs, reboot the PC by
power switch.
Enter usb when CD/DVD drive is
connected with USB.
boot:ide
STEP 6
75
CHAPTER 2
Login as root.
root@(none):~#
STEP 7
Note: When the system is FP85-104 S1 Issue 5, this command entry is not required.
(root@(none):~#
(root@(none):~# mount /dev/cdroms/cdrom0 /cdrom
STEP 8
STEP 9
Insert the CF card to be initialized to the PCMCIA card slot of the PC.
root@(none):~#
root@(none):~# INSTALLCF
......
......
......
Note: When the system is FP85-104 S1 Issue 4 or earlier, enter the command as below.
root@(none):~#
root@(none):~# /cdrom/INSTALLCF
......
......
......
76
CHAPTER 2
installation finish!
Installation is finished.
root@(none):~#
root@(none):~# halt
......
Note: When the system is FP85 104 S1 Issue 3 or earlier, execute reboot command instead of halt command.
installation finish!
Installation is finished.
root@(none):~#
root@(none):~# reboot
......
Execute Reboot.
can be performed automatically. Turning off the power of PC begins approximately 30 seconds later
when halt command is executed.
Note: If the reboot command is executed in Step 12. When boot prompt appears, remove the installer CD-ROM
boot:
STEP 14 If the reboot command is executed in Step 12, turn OFF the PC.
STEP 15 If you modified the BIOS setting (booting drive priority) at STEP 3, restore to the previous setting as needed.
[End]
CF card initialization is now finished. Go on to the initial installation procedures with PCPro Tools. Refer
to the Installation Manual CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM STARTUP 1.2 Program Install to CF Card
for the initial installation procedures.
Note: If you use a PC whose writing speed to CF card is slow, an error may occur.
If the process ends up showing error, the CD-ROM will not be ejected automatically; remove manually.
If CF is NOT found... is displayed, the PC is failed to recognize the card. Try this on other PC.
77
CHAPTER 2
Power module #1
FAN REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE (Section 7)
Power module #0
78
CHAPTER 2
6.1
This section explains how to replace the CPU card. This card controls the call process for the
system.
Be careful to handle the key operation. The mishandling may cause a critical influence to the
system.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
If a system has the dual CPU configuration, you can replace the CPU card while the system is in
operation.
There are two types of CPU cards, CF-CP00 and CF-CP02, and you cannot use them together in
the same system. Check the product name of CPU cards carefully when you replace them.
EMA card
IOC card (Option)
PWR switch
Note
PWR switch
Note
CPU card #0
Power module #1
Power module #0
Note: Since FP85-108 S5, when Telephony Server Maintenance Menu - Shutdown button/PCPro Tools - Sys-
tem Shutdown command is not available or does not work, press PWR switch to use auto-shutdown
of the CPU card. If auto-shutdown does not work, press PWR switch for four seconds to shut down
the CPU card.
Earlier than FP85-108 S5, when PCPro Tools - System Shutdown is not available or does not work, press
PWR switch for four seconds to shut down the CPU card.
79
CHAPTER 2
WARNING When the system is CPU single configuration, the whole system must be shut down.
[Start]
STEP 1
module.
<By PCPro Tools (For FP85-108 S5 or earlier)>
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
On the initial screen, select System Control and click Execute button.
Select System Shutdown in Select Processing list box.
Click Execute button to shut down the system.
Make sure that PWR lamp is off on the CPU card.Note
Turn off Power switch (press the right side of the switch) on the Power module.
Note: Be sure to confirm PWR lamp is off on the CPU card before turning off Power switch on the Power
module.
<By switch operation>
When Telephony Server Maintenance Menu - Shutdown button/PCPro Tools - System Shutdown is not
available or does not work, follow these procedures to shut down the CPU card.
Since FP85-108 S5:
1) Press PWR switch on the CPU card to execute auto-shutdown.Note 1
2) Make sure that PWR lamp is off on the CPU card.Note 2
3) Turn off Power switch (press the right side of the switch) on the Power module.
Earlier than FP85-108 S5:
1) Press PWR switch for four seconds on the CPU card.
2) Make sure that PWR lamp is off on the CPU card.Note 2
3) Turn off Power switch (press the right side of the switch) on the Power module.
80
CHAPTER 2
Note 1: For normal operation, use auto-shutdown to turn off the power. Only when the auto-shutdown does not
work, press and hold PWR switch for four seconds to turn off the power forcibly.
Note 2: Be sure to confirm PWR lamp is off on the CPU card before turning off Power switch on the Pow-
er module.
STEP 2
Turn off the PIR (s) and TSWR when they are accommodated. If not skip this step.
<For 1-IMG>
Turn off the power (PWR/DPWR cards) in the following order.
<For 4-IMG>
Turn off the power (PWR/DPWR cards) in the following order.
TSWR
PIR0PIR1PIR2....PIR15 (smaller number PIR first)
STEP 3
Note: It is recommended to put a mark on the cable not to reconnect a wrong cable.
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
Pull the CPU card slowly toward you to remove from the system.
STEP 8
On the new CPU card, set the switches exactly same as those of the old CPU card.
STEP 9
81
CHAPTER 2
<For 1-IMG>
Turn on the power (PWR/DPWR cards) in the following order.
<For 4-IMG>
Turn on the power (PWR/DPWR cards) in the following order.
TSWR
PIR0PIR1PIR2....PIR15 (smaller number PIR first)
Turn on Power switch (press the right side of the switch) on the Power module.
STEP 16 Make sure that the system is placed in normal operation by checking the following lamps.
STEP 17 Set the clock information referring to How to Adjust Date and Time.
[End]
82
CHAPTER 2
Therefore, in the following explanation, replace #1 with #0 as needed when performing this procedure on the
actual system.
Note: When the system is CPU-dual configuration, system shutdown is not necessary for CPU replacement.
[Start]
STEP 1
ACT lamp of SYS0 side lights green: CPU card #0 is in ACT mode.
ACT lamp of SYS1 side lights green: CPU card #1 is in ACT mode.
STEP 2
If the CPU to be replaced is in ACT mode, place it in STBY mode. Otherwise, start from STEP
5.
Note: MODE switch - 4 is Make Busy Request (MBR) key. CPU ACT/STBY can be switched by this switch. See
How to Change over CPU Card - CPU Changeover by Key Operation for more details.
STEP 3
With CTSP command, move terminals registered to the CPU to be replaced to the other CPU.
may cause some of the terminals to re-register to SP-PHD. Be sure to click Stop button after confirming
that the connection switchover is complete.
STEP 4
ACT lamp on the EMA card is changed? (In this example, SYS0: ACT lamp lights green.)
Note: No operation is needed using SW01 switch (SYS LOCK/SYS SEL) on the front side of EMA card. Ensure
83
CHAPTER 2
STEP 5
Note: Be sure to confirm PWR lamp is off on the CPU card before proceeding to the next step.
work, press and hold PWR switch for four seconds to turn off the power forcibly.
Note 2: Be sure to confirm PWR lamp goes off on the CPU card before proceeding to the next step.
STEP 6
Disconnect the LAN cables from the CPU card that is shut down.
Note: It is recommended to put a mark on the cable not to reconnect a wrong cable.
STEP 7
84
CHAPTER 2
STEP 8
STEP 9
STEP 10 Pull the CPU card slowly toward you to remove from the system.
STEP 11 On the new CPU card, set the switches exactly same as those of the old CPU card.
STEP 12 Insert the removed CF card to the CF slot on the new CPU card.
STEP 13 Insert the new CPU card to the CPU slot.
Note: Being inserted into the connector, the CPU card is automatically powered on.
STEP 17 Switch over the CPU ACT/STBY to test the newly replaced CPU card.
STEP 18 Make test calls to see that newly replaced CPU card is operating normally.
STEP 19 Attach the front cover again.
[End]
85
CHAPTER 2
6.2
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
There are two types of EMA MAIN card, SCG-PC00-B and SCG-PC00-A.
Note: SCG-PC00-B works with both CF-CP00 and CF-CP02. However, CF-CP02 only works with SCG-
PC00-B. Check the product name label on the EMA MAIN card and make sure to use SCG-PC00-B with
CF-CP02. SCG-PC00-A does not work with CF-CP02.
SV8500 Server (front)
EMA card
CPU card #1
CPU card #0
Note: Functions provided by EMA card are not available during the replacement process, when Power Failure
by EMA SUB cards can also not be used during EMA card replacement. See EMA SUB Card Replacement Procedure.
[Start]
STEP 1
STEP 2
Pull the EMA card toward you slowly to remove from the system.
Note: PFT function will start operating if NCU circuit card is provided.
STEP 3
On the new EMA card, set the switches exactly same as those of the old EMA card.
STEP 4
Insert the new EMA card to the system. (Insert the connector to the system firmly.)
PWR lamp lights green on the front panel of the EMA card.
STEP 5
STEP 6
Set the clock information referring to How to Adjust Date and Time.
[End]
86
CHAPTER 2
6.3
EMA SUB-A
Note 1
EMA SUB-B
(for 4-IMG only)
Note: Functions provided by EMA SUB cards are not available during the replacement process.
Note 1: EMA SUB-A (CG-M00) does not have DSP connector.
[Start]
STEP 1
Set SW00-1 [MB (SUB)] on the front panel of EMA card to ON (Upward).
STEP 2
Disconnect the cables from the connector of the EMA SUB card.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
Set SW00-1 [MB (SUB)] on the front panel of EMA card to OFF (Downward).
[End]
87
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
CHAPTER 2
6.4
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
Line/Trunk
PIR/TSWR
EXB1
CPU1
CPU0
EMA
SV8500 Server
WARNING When the system is CPU single configuration, the whole system must be shut down for EXB
card replacement.
EXB (#1)
EXB (#0)
88
CHAPTER 2
On the initial screen, select System Control and click Execute button.
Select System Shutdown in Select Processing list box.
Click Execute button to shut down the system.
Make sure that PWR lamp is off on the CPU card.Note
Turn off Power switch (press the right side of the switch) on the Power module.
Note: Be sure to confirm PWR lamp is off on the CPU card before turning off Power switch on the Power
module.
<By switch operation>
When Telephony Server Maintenance Menu - Shutdown button/PCPro Tools - System Shutdown is not
available or does not work, follow these procedures to shut down the CPU card.
FP85-108 S5 or later:
1) Press PWR switch on the CPU card to execute auto-shutdown.Note 1
2) Make sure that PWR lamp is off on the CPU card.Note 2
3) Turn off Power switch (press the right side of the switch) on the Power module.
Earlier than FP85-108 S5:
1) Press PWR switch for four seconds on the CPU card.
2) Make sure that PWR lamp is off on the CPU card.Note 2
3) Turn off Power switch (press the right side of the switch) on the Power module.
Note 1: For normal operation, use auto-shutdown to turn off the power. Only when the auto-shutdown does not
work, press and hold Power switch for four seconds to turn off the power forcibly.
89
CHAPTER 2
Note 2: Be sure to confirm PWR lamp is off on the CPU card before turning off Power switch on the Pow-
er module.
STEP 2
Turn off the PIR (s) and TSWR when they are accommodated. If not skip this step.
<For 1-IMG>
Turn off the power (PWR/DPWR cards) in the following order.
<For 4-IMG>
Turn off the power (PWR/DPWR cards) in the following order.
TSWR
PIR0PIR1PIR2....PIR15 (smaller number PIR first)
STEP 3
EXB card
screw
PWR
ACT
screw
Cable support
bracket
D37 SC50 CA-A / D37 SC50 CA-B
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
Insert the new EXB card by placing it on the slots of the server, and then securely insert into the
connector provided on the server.
STEP 8
Place the both ends of the cable support bracket on the screws.
STEP 9
Fasten the cable support bracket on the EXB card by tightening the screws.
90
CHAPTER 2
<For 1-IMG>
Turn on the power (PWR/DPWR cards) in the following order.
<For 4-IMG>
Turn on the power (PWR/DPWR cards) in the following order.
TSWR
PIR0PIR1PIR2....PIR15 (smaller number PIR first)
Turn on Power switch (press the right side of the switch) on the Power module.
STEP 14 Make sure that the newly replaced EXB card is operating normally in the system.
Note: If the lamp does not light green, make sure that the EXB card is securely inserted into the main unit.
STEP 15 Make test calls to see that newly replaced EXB card is operating normally.
1) Place test calls using stations / trunks accommodated in PIR.
2) Confirm whether any system messages related fault are output or not. Use DFTD from PCPro.
Note: If any fault is found, check the following:
91
CHAPTER 2
Therefore, in the following explanation, replace #1 with #0 as needed when performing this procedure on the
actual system.
Note: When this system is CPU-dual configuration, system shutdown is not necessary for EXB replacement.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Make sure the EXB card to be replaced is placed in STBY mode. ACT/STBY can be identified
by ACT lamp on the EXB card.
If the EXB to be replaced is in ACT mode, switch over CPU ACT/STBY. Note
Note: When CPU is provided in dual configuration, ACT/STBY of EXB card and CPU always switches over in
combination.
Note: MODE switch - 4 is Make Busy Request (MBR) key.
STEP 3
Disconnect the bus cable from the EXB card that is placed in STBY mode.
EXB card
screw
PWR
ACT
screw
Cable support
bracket
D37 SC50 CA-A / D37 SC50 CA-B
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
92
CHAPTER 2
STEP 7
Insert the new EXB card by placing it on the slots of the server, and then securely insert into the
connector provided on the server.
STEP 8
Place the both ends of the cable support bracket on the screws.
STEP 9
Fasten the EXB card by tightening the two screws onto the server.
Note: If the lamp does not light green, make sure that the EXB card is securely inserted into the main unit.
STEP 12 Switch over the CPU ACT/STBY to test the newly replaced EXB card.
1) Use CMOD command from PCPro.
2) Place test calls using stations / trunks accommodated in PIR.
3) Confirm whether any system messages related fault are output or not. Use DFTD from PCPro.
Note: If any fault is found, check the following:
93
CHAPTER 2
6.5
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
WARNING During IOC card replacement, all pieces of equipment that are connected to the IOC card
cannot be used.
SV8500 Server (front)
EMA card
CPU card #1
IOC card
IOC card
CPU card #0
to PIR/TSWR
EXB0
EXB1
CPU1
CPU0
EMA
IOC
IOC
#0
#1
#2
94
#3
IOC cards
(option)
CHAPTER 2
[Start]
STEP 1
Turn on MBR key (left side of SW00) on the IOC card to be replaced.
Port0
MBR AUX
IOC card
OPE
1
0
ALM
SD
RD
DR
ER
RS
CD
Port1
Port2
Port3
CONN
SW00
Note: During IOC card replacement, the system does not send the text data (i.e. SMDR data) to the connected
equipment. The text data is temporarily stored in the buffer memory of the system, and it is automatically
sent to the equipment when the replaced IOC card is placed in operation.
STEP 2
Disconnect the IOC cable (SV 4PORT CA-A) from the front connector.
Port0
IOC card
MBR AUX
OPE
1
0
ALM
SD
RD
DR
ER
RS
CD
Port1
Port2
Port3
CONN
SW00
IOC cable
(SV 4PORT CA-A)
STEP 3
Loose the right side screw and then remove the cable support bracket.
To remove the bracket, slide it to the left and pull it toward you.
Port0
MBR AUX
OPE
IOC card
SD
1
0
ALM
Port1
Port2
Port3
RD
DR
ER
RS
CD
SW00
95
CONN
CHAPTER 2
STEP 4
STEP 5
Pull the IOC card slowly toward you to remove from the system.
STEP 6
On the new IOC card, set the switches exactly same as those of the old IOC card.
STEP 7
Turn on MBR key (left side of SW00) on the new IOC card.
STEP 8
Insert the new IOC card by placing it on the slots of the server, and then securely insert into the
connector provided on the server.
STEP 9
Note: If OPE lamp does not start flashing, check the following.
96
CHAPTER 2
6.6
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
WARNING
Power module of
SV8500 Server #1
PACT
CAUTION
Power module of
SV8500 Server #0
WARNING
PACT
PWR lamp
Power switch
AC power inlet
[Start]
Note: In this subsection, we explain how to replace the power module #0 as an example. When the power mod-
ule is operating in dual configuration, and if you need to replace the power module #1 as well, complete
the replacement of the module #0 first, and continue with that of #1 in the same procedure.
97
CHAPTER 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
98
CHAPTER 2
STEP 3
Counterclockwise
Phillips screwdriver
STEP 4
Grab the loosened screws and pull the power module slowly toward you to remove from the system.
STEP 5
STEP 6
WARNING Be sure to fasten the screws that is located at both sides of the power module, as they serve
as grounding to the whole system. If they are loose, static electricity may cause a system
failure.
STEP 7
STEP 8
STEP 9
Make sure that the PWR lamp lights and the FAN operates normally.
[End]
99
CHAPTER 2
WARNING
Power module of
SV8500 Server #1
MP -48V -48VR
ALM
IN
(COMMON)
PACT
CAUTION
WARNING
Power module of
SV8500 Server #0
MP -48V -48VR
ALM
IN
(COMMON)
PACT
PWR lamp
Power switch
[Start]
Note: In this subsection, we explain how to replace the power module #0 as an example. When the power mod-
ule is operating in dual configuration, and if you need to replace the power module #1 as well, complete
the replacement of the module #0 first, and continue with that of #1 in the same procedure.
STEP 1
MP
ALM
-48V
IN
-48V
(CO
MM
ON)
MP
ALM
-48V
IN
-48V
(CO
MM
100
ON)
CHAPTER 2
STEP 2
Disconnect the -48V power cable (blue) and the -48VR power cable (red) on the BASE unit
from the power receiving terminals. Do not disconnect FE cable (green).
WARNING Be sure to disconnect the power cable on the BASE unit first to prevent short circuit. Then
disconnect the power cables on the power module.
REAR
-48VR
-48V
+80V
SV8500 server
Yellow
Blue Red
Green
DC terminals
BASEU
See the following figure, and disconnect the power installation cables (AWG 12 or AWG 14).
Note: Be careful not to touch the electric potential with the metallic part of the driver when connecting the pow-
er cable.
3.0 mm
0.4 mm
Cable hole
101
CHAPTER 2
STEP 3
Check that the cables on BASE unit have been disconnected, and then disconnect all cables on
the power module.
-48VR
(COMMON)
!
WARNING
MP -48V -48VR
ALM
IN
MP -48V
ALM IN
(COMMON)
PACT
CAUTION
WARNING
MP -48V -48VR
ALM
IN
(COMMON)
PACT
STEP 4
Counterclockwise
MP
ALM
-48V
IN
-48V
(CO
MM
ON)
MP
ALM
-48V
IN
-48V
(CO
MM
ON)
STEP 5
Grab the loosened screws and pull the power module slowly toward you to remove from the system.
STEP 6
102
CHAPTER 2
STEP 7
WARNING Be sure to fasten the screws that is located at both sides of the power module, as they serve
as grounding to the whole system. If they are loose, static electricity may cause a system
failure.
STEP 8
STEP 9
Connect the power cables on the BASE unit; first -48VR (red), and then -48V (blue).
103
CHAPTER 2
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
WARNING
MP -48V -48VR
ALM
IN
(COMMON)
PACT
WARNING
MP -48V -48VR
ALM
IN
(COMMON)
PACT
Note: If cooling FAN is faulty, temperature in the system may rise, which might cause some serious damage
to system operations. For this reason, we recommend you to replace FAN at least every five years,
whether any failure is found or not.
7.1
Replacement Procedure
STEP 1
If a FAN is faulty, identify the FAN by using PCPro. When this is periodical FAN replacement,
this identification is not necessary.
STEP 2
Loosen the left side screw on the FAN module by using a Phillips screw driver.
MP
ALM
-48V
IN
-48V
(CO
MM
ON)
MP
ALM
-48V
IN
-48V
(CO
MM
104
ON)
CHAPTER 2
STEP 3
PWR cable
MP
ALM
-48V
IN
-48V
(CO
MM
ON)
MP
ALM
FAN cover
-48V
IN
-48V
(CO
MM
ON)
STEP 4
Disconnect the PWR cable of the FAN to be replaced from the connector. When the FAN is operating, this will stop the FAN.
STEP 5
105
CHAPTER 2
MP
ALM
-48V
IN
-48V
(CO
MM
ON)
MP
ALM
-48V
IN
-48V
(CO
MM
ON)
FAN to be replaced
STEP 6
STEP 7
Connect the PWR cables to the connector. This will starts the FAN.
STEP 8
Repeat the steps explained above again for the remaining FANs as needed.
Note: When replacing two or three FANs while the system is in operation, if you attempt to replace multiple
FANs at a time, the chassis might be heated up. For this reason, when replacing multiple FANs, be sure
to replace them one by one.
7.2
STEP 2
If any FAN is not operating, check the PWR cable of the FAN.
STEP 3
106
CHAPTER 2
8.1
8.1.1
Changeover of CPU/TSW/PLO
General
This section explains the system operations that are necessary for changeover of CPU/TSW/PLO.
Before performing these operations, see Figure 2-7 through Figure 2-10 to obtain general understanding
on the system configuration.
107
CHAPTER 2
<1-IMG>
CPU Card Changeover:
Speech Path Changeover: The ACT/STBY of speech path system (TSW) can be changed over by the
CMOD command or operating the TSW MBR key on the active TSW circuit card. When the TSW is changed over, all MUX cards in the system are
also changed over.
PLO Changeover:
IMG 0
Line/Trunk PM
TSW 0
(PLO 0)
MUX
Note 2:
TSW 1 Note 3:
(PLO 1)
TSW: PH-SW10-A
[SV8500 Server]
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
MUX
MUX: PH-PC36
EXB0
EXB1
Note 1:
CPU1
CPU0
Note 4:
EMA
Note 1: When CPU changes over, EXB will also change over.
Note 2: When TSW changes over, all the speech path including MUX cards also change over.
Note 3: TSW has a MBR key (Make Busy Request). System changeover is available also by this key.
Note 4: System changeover is available by the MBR key on the front of the CPU card in ACT state.
108
CHAPTER 2
<4-IMG>
CPU Card Changeover:
Speech Path Changeover: The ACT/STBY of speech path system (TSW) can be changed over by the
CMOD command or operating the MBR key on the active GT circuit card.
When the speech path is changed over, all TSW, DLKC, MUX cards are
also changed over.
PLO Changeover:
IMG 1
Line/Trunk PM
IMG 0
Line/Trunk PM
MUX
TSW 13
TSW 03
PLO 1
PLO 0
GT 1
GT 0
[TSWR]
[SV8500 Server]
EXB0
Note 2:
Note 1:
EXB1
CPU1
CPU0
EMA
Note 3:
Note 1: When CPU changes over, EXB will also change over.
109
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
TSW 02
PM BUS
TSW 01
PCM HW
MUX
TSW 12
TSW 11
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
IMG 3
Line/Trunk PM
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
MUX
PM BUS
TSW 00
PCM HW
TSW 10
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
MUX
IMG 2
Line/Trunk PM
DLKC 1
CHAPTER 2
Note 2: When GT changes over, all the speech path including DLKC/TSW/MUX cards will change over.
Note 3: The system changeover is available by the MBR key on the front of the CPU card in ACT state.
8.1.2
To determine whether the system is in normal operation or not, maintenance personnel can check LED
lamps. The following shows a sample of LED indications when the system is in normal operation. Note
that the sample assumes that the system is operating by CPU #0, TSW #0, and PLO #0.
<1-IMG>.
How To Judge ACT/STBY of Each Block (1-IMG)
Block
Card
CPU
EMA Card
ACT (Green)
Speech
Path
PLO
State
Description
ON
ACT
OFF
STBY
ON
ACT
OFF
STBY
ON
ACT
OFF
STBY
ON
ACT
OFF
STBY
Remarks
ACT (SYS0) is ON: CPU 0 is ACT Note
ACT (SYS1) is ON: CPU 1 is ACT
ACT/STBY of TSW and MUX cards always switch
over in combination when speech path is provided in
dual configuration.
Note: If both ACT lamps (SYS0 and SYS1) light green because of reasons such as ACT-CPU failure, the system
110
CHAPTER 2
MUX ACT
PIR3
MUX ACT
PIR2
MUX ACT
PIR1
TSW ACT
TSW ACT
PIR0
MUX ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
PLO ACT
MUX ACT
MUX1
MUX0
MUX ACT
MUX1
MUX0
MUX ACT
MUX1
MUX0
Speech Path
FANU
PLO
TSW1
TSW0
[CPU Card 1]
LINK
SYS
ALM SYS1
PWR
LOAD
CPU
ON LINE
ACT
ALM
SYS0
PWR
[CPU Card 0]
PWR
Lamp Status
LOAD
ON LINE
BASEU
: ON
: Flash
: OFF
Note: LED indications shown above are an example, where system 0 is in ACT system.
111
CHAPTER 2
To perform the ACT/STBY system changeover, check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 2-10, and
then operate the related key.
Note: LED indications cited in Figure 2-10 are only an example. The indicating pattern (ON/Flash/OFF) can
Accommodati
on
Card (Slot
Number)
LED Name
(Color)
CPU
SV8500 Server
EMA Card
ACT lamp
(Green)
GT
(04/05)
OPE/MB
(Green)
TSW
(06-13)
TSW ACT
(Green)
DLKC
(02/03)
OPE/MB
(Green)
PIR
MUX
(13/14)
MUX ACT
(Green)
TSWR
PLO
(14/15)
ACT
(Green)
Speech
Path
PLO
TSWR
State
Descri
ption
ON
ACT
OFF
STBY
ON
ACT
OFF
STBY
ON
ACT
OFF
STBY
ON
ACT
OFF
STBY
ON
ACT
OFF
STBY
ON
ACT
OFF
STBY
Remark
ACT (SYS0) is ON: CPU 0 is ACT Note
ACT (SYS1) is ON: CPU 1 is ACT
Note: If both ACT lamps (SYS0 and SYS1) light green because of reasons such as ACT-CPU failure, the system
PLO1
PLO0
TSW13
TSW12
TSW11
TSW10
TSW03
TSW02
TSW01
TSW00
GT1
GT0
DLKC1
DLKC0
00 01
02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
112
CHAPTER 2
Figure 2-10 How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (4-IMG: IMG2/3)
PIR3
MUX ACT
PLO
MUX ACT
MUX1
LINK
SYS
ALM SYS1
PWR
LOAD
ON LINE
MUX ACT
MUX0
[CPU Card 1]
PLO1
TSW1
PLO0
TSW1
TSW1
TSW1
TSW1
TSW0
TSW0
TSW0
TSW0
GT1
GT0
DLKC1
DLKC0
TSW0
PIR1
ACT
TSWR
Speech Path
MUX ACT
MUX1
TSW ACT
MUX ACT
MUX0
OPE/MB
PIR2
MUX1
MUX0
Speech Path
LED Name
MUX ACT
PWR
ACT
ALM
CPU
SYS0
FANU
PIR0
MUX ACT
PWR
MUX1
[CPU Card 0]
MUX ACT
MUX0
[EMA Card]
LOAD
ON LINE
BASEU
Lamp Status
: ON
BASEU
: Flash
: OFF
113
CHAPTER 2
8.1.3
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
.
TYPE
OPERATIONS
(a)
Changeover by CMOD
(b)
REMARKS
Note 1: While the changeover of the CPU card is in progress, any call attempt is rejected. Already established
Therefore, in the following explanation, replace #1 with #0 as needed when performing this procedure on
the actual system.
114
CHAPTER 2
STEP 1
Make sure which CPU card is placed in ACT mode by checking lamp ACT lamp on the EMA
card. When CPU card #0 is active, SYS0 - ACT lights green on the EMA card.
Figure 2-11 CPU in ACT/STBY Mode (when #0 is ACT)
ACT lamp (SYS1: CPU#1)
SYS
PWR ALM
LINK
SYS 1
ACT
ALM
MB
SYS SYS
(SUB) PFT LOCK SEL
SYS 0
SWO0
PBI No.
1
ON
2
INIT
SWO1
STEP 2
Check the mate CPU card (#1 in this example) is operating normally.
LINE
SPEED LINE
CF
PWR
1 2 3 4
ON
LOAD
ON
LINE
SPEED
CONSOLE
MODE
USB
LINE
SPEED LINE
SPEED
LINE
SPEED LINE
SPEED
ON LINE lamp
ACT:
3
1 2 3 4
ON
LOAD
ON
LINE
CF
PWR
CONSOLE
MODE
USB
LINE
SPEED LINE
SPEED
WARNING The system changeover of CPU can be performed only when the mate CPU is available.
STEP 3
Set the MBR key to ON (downward) on the active CPU card. A few seconds later, return the
MBR key to OFF (upward). System changeover starts automatically. The ACT lamp will change
as follows on the CPU card.
115
CHAPTER 2
LINE
PWR
SPEED LINE
SPEED
STBY:
LOAD
ON
LINE
[1] ON (downward)
SPEED LINE
SPEED
LINE
SPEED LINE
SPEED
changeover
ACT:
MODE switch
-4
CF
PWR
1 2 3 4
ON
LOAD
ON
LINE
LINE
CONSOLE
LINE
USB
MODE
SPEED LINE
SPEED
1 2 3 4
ON
MODE
ON
1 2 3
ON
MODE
Note: If the MBR (MODE switch - 4) key remains in the DOWN position, the CPU card stays in make-busy
state. Be sure to return the key to the UP position, except in special circumstances.Leaving CPU mode
switch 4 in the DOWN position will prevent CPU changeover.
STEP 4
Another ACT lamp should light green (SYS1 ACT lamp in this example)
Figure 2-13 ACT Lamp Indication on CPU card
ACT lamp (SYS1: CPU#1)
SYS
PWR ALM
LINK
SYS 1
SYS 0
ACT
ALM
MB
SYS SYS
(SUB) PFT LOCK SEL
1
SWO0
PBI No.
1
ON
1
INIT
SWO1
STEP 5
116
CHAPTER 2
8.1.4
This section explains how to control switching block, which consists of the following cards:
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
Perform the required system changeover by using the CMOD command or by operating the related key on
the GT/PLO card. Refer to the tables below.
Changeover of Switching Block (1-IMG)
TYPE
CMOD
(recommended)
Key Operation
OPERATIONS
REMARKS
- Set TSW MBR key upward on the TSW that is placed in ACT.
- Return TSW MBR key downward on the TSW.
WARNING Be sure to use TSW MBR key on the TSW-ACT TSW card. If TSW MB key is operated
before operating TSW MBR key on the TSW-ACT TSW card, the card will be reset. During
this initialization, all channels on the card will be placed in MB status, disconnecting all active
Changeover of Switching Block (4-IMG)
TYPE
CMOD
(recommended)
Key Operations
OPERATIONS
REMARKS
- TSW ACT lamp goes off on the TSW card that was originally placed
in ACT mode. OPE lamp also goes off on DLKC card that was originally placed in ACT mode.
- TSW ACT lamp lights green on the TSW card that was originally
placed in STBY mode. OPE lamp also lights green on DLKC card that
was originally placed in STBY mode.
- TSW ACT lamp goes off on the TSW card that was originally placed
in ACT mode. OPE lamp also goes off on DLKC card that was originally placed in ACT mode.
- TSW ACT lamp lights green on the TSW card that was originally
placed in STBY mode. OPE lamp also lights green on DLKC card that
was originally placed in STBY mode.
WARNING Be sure to use MBR key on the ACT GT card. If MB key is operated before operating
MBR key on the ACT GT card, the card will be reset. During this initialization, all channels
that are related to this card will be placed in MB status, disconnecting all active calls.
117
CHAPTER 2
8.1.5
1-IMG
WARNING Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the related keys, applying
extreme care.
MODULE
SLOT
NUMBER
CIRCUIT CARD
13
TSW
(PH-SW10-A, etc.)
FANU
13 14
TSW1
TSW0
PIR0
14
PIR0
TSW
(PH-SW10-A, etc)
SV8500 Server
118
CHAPTER 2
STEP 1
TSW:ACT
slot13
TSW ACT
TSW ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
MB
MB
TSW MBR
TSW MBR
PLO MBR
PLO MBR
TSW:STBY
Meaning
slot14
ON
OFF
WARNING The changeover of TSW can be performed only when the mate TSW is in STBY mode. Do
not attempt the changeover, if the mate TSW is closed.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Make sure that the TSW ACT lamp starts to light green on the mate TSW card. A few seconds
will be required before this happens.
119
CHAPTER 2
STEP 4
ACT
Return TSW MBR key downward on the TSW that was placed in ACT.
STBY
STBY
ACT
TSW ACT
TSW ACT
TSW ACT
TSW ACT
TSW ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
TSW MBR
TSW MBR
TSW MBR
TSW MBR
TSW MBR
TSW MBR
PLO MBR
PLO MBR
PLO MBR
PLO MBR
PLO MBR
PLO MBR
slot14
slot13
slot14
slot13
slot14
Note: If the MBR key remains in the UP position, the TSW card stays in make-busy state. Be sure to return the
PLO.
Be sure to use TSW MBR key on the TSW-ACT TSW card. If TSW MB key is operated
before operating TSW MBR key on the TSW-ACT TSW card, the card will be reset. During
this initialization, all channels on the card will be placed in MB status, disconnecting all active
WARNING
STEP 5
Make test calls to see that the TSW card is operating normally.
STEP 6
When TSW ACT/STBY is changed, system Messages 7-E, 7-F, and 1-T will be issued.
120
CHAPTER 2
[4-IMG]
To changeover the ACT/STBY of Speech Path System, the CMOD command is normally used.
However, if the command cannot be used, use the key operations listed below.
ACT/STBY of the Speech Path System can be changed over via the MBR key on the GT (PH-GT09)
card. Because each GT (GT 0 and GT 1) can control both the Speech Path System 0 and 1, perform the
key operation on the active GT card, not on the card in STBY mode.
By changing over the ACT/STBY of Speech Path System, all the related systems, such as TDSW,
DLKC, and MUX, are totally switched over.
Figure 2-15 System Block Diagram (Switching Network for Speech Path System)
IMG 0
IMG 1
IMG 2
IMG 3
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
[PIR]
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
TSW 02
PCM HW
MUX
MUX
TSW 13
TSW 12
TSW 11
TSW 01
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
MUX
PM BUS
PCM HW
TSW 10
TSW 00
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
MUX
TSW 03
PLO 1
DLKC 1
PLO 0
Note 1
[TSWR]
[SV8500 Server]
GT 1
GT 0
EXB0
Note 1
EXB1
CPU1
CPU0
EMA
Note 1: When turning on and off the MBR key on the GT PKG, all the speech path (TSW/INT, DLKC, MUX)
121
CHAPTER 2
MODULE
CIRCUIT CARD
FANU
04 05
GT1
GT0
TSWR
TSWR
04/05
GT (PH-GT09)
SV8500 Server
STEP 1
Make sure which speech path system is currently placed in ACT mode.
The following shows lamp indications on DLKC/TSW/MUX cards that are placed in ACT mode.
Figure 2-16 Lamp Indication of TSW/DLKC/MUX that are in ACT Mode
DLKC
(PH-PC20/PH-PC20-B)
OPE/MB
MB
TSW (PH-SW12)
MUX (PH-PC36)
Meaning
ON
OFF
MUX ACT
TSW ACT
MB
MB
TSW MBR
DLKC:ACT
TSW:ACT
MUX:ACT
Note: Check all cards that are related to speech path system such as TSW cards and MUX cards.
WARNING The ACT/STBY of Speech Path System can be changed over only when the mate system is
in STBY mode. Do not attempt the changeover if the mate Speech Path System is closed.
122
CHAPTER 2
The following shows lamp indications on DLKC/TSW/MUX cards that are placed in STBY mode.
Figure 2-17 Lamp Indication of TSW/DLKC/MUX that are in STBY Mode
DLKC
(PH-PC20/PH-PC20-B)
TSW (PH-SW12)
MUX (PH-PC36)
OPE/MB
TSW ACT
MUX ACT
MB
MB
MB
Meaning
ON
OFF
TSW MBR
DLKC:STBY
TSW:STBY
MUX:STBY
Note: Check all cards that are related to speech path system such as TSW cards and MUX cards.
WARNING Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the related keys with extreme
care.
STEP 2
Flip the MBR key on the active GT card. Refer to Figure 2-18.
Figure 2-18 Speech Path System Changeover via Active GT MBR Key
GT (PH-GT09)
OPE/MB
OPE/MB
OPE/MB
MB
MB
MB
MBR
MBR
(1) Upward
MBR
(2) Downward
123
CHAPTER 2
Note: If the MBR or MB key is set to upward, the GT card is placed in make-busy status. Return the key to the
Before
After
DLKC
TSW
OPE/MB
TSW ACT
MB
MB
MUX
DLKC
MUX ACT
OPE/MB
MB
MB
TSW MBR
TSW
TSW ACT
MB
MUX
MUX ACT
MB
TSW MBR
STEP 4
Make test calls to see that the TSW card is operating normally.
STEP 5
ON
When TSW ACT/STBY is changed, system Messages 7-E, 7-F, and 1-T will be issued.
124
OFF
CHAPTER 2
8.1.6
OPERATIONS
REMARKS
- PLO ACT lamp goes off when PLO MBR key is set upward on the TSW whose PLO is placed in ACT.
- PLO ACT lamp lights green on the mate PLO-STBYTSW card.
WARNING Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the related keys with extreme
care.
WARNING Voice calls are not be affected by PLO changeover. However, bit errors may occur on data
lines.
SLOT
NUMBER
CIRCUIT CARD
13
TSW
(PH-SW10-A, etc.)
FANU
13 14
TSW1
TSW0
PIR0
14
PIR0
TSW
(PH-SW10-A, etc)
SV8500 Server
STEP 1
125
CHAPTER 2
STEP 2
STEP 3
Make sure that PLO ACT lamp lights green on the mate TSW.
STEP 4
ACT
Return the PLO MBR key downward on the key-operated TSW card.
ST-BY
ST-BY
ACT
TSW ACT
TSW ACT
TSW ACT
TSW ACT
TSW ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
MUX ACT
PLO ACT
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
TSW MBR
TSW MBR
TSW MBR
TSW MBR
TSW MBR
TSW MBR
PLO MBR
PLO MBR
PLO MBR
PLO MBR
PLO MBR
PLO MBR
slot13
slot14
slot13
slot14
slot13
slot14
Note: Be sure to return the PLO MBR key to down position, except in special circumstances.
Note: PLO changeover does not affect the ACT/STBY of TSW.
STEP 5
When PLO ACT/STBY is changed, system Messages 7-U, 7-V will be issued.
126
CHAPTER 2
OPERATIONS
REMARKS
Note: When operating MB key, ten seconds interval is required between MB key ON and OFF.
WARNING Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the related keys with extreme
care.
WARNING Voice calls are not be affected by PLO changeover. However, bit errors may occur on data
lines.
Target Cards for Manual System Changeover of PLO (4-IMG)
MODULE
SLOT
NUMBER
CIRCUIT CARD
FANU
14 15
14/15
PLO1
PLO0
TSWR
PLO
(PH-CK16-D, etc)
TSWR
SV8500 Server
127
CHAPTER 2
STEP 1
Make sure which PLO is currently placed in ACT mode by checking OPE lamp.
ON
Meaning
PLO
OPE
MB
OFF
OPE
MB
PLO ACT
PLO STBY
slot14
STEP 2
STEP 3
slot15
STEP 4
Note: When operating MB key, ten seconds interval is required between MB key ON and OFF.
WARNING The changeover of PLO system can be done only when the mate PLO is in STBY mode. Do
not attempt the changeover if the mate PLO is closed.
ACT
ST-BY
slot14
STEP 5
ST-BY
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
slot15
slot14
slot15
slot14
When PLO ACT/STBY is changed, system Messages 7-U, 7-V will be issued.
128
slot15
CHAPTER 2
Overview
This section explains how to display the mounting status of IMGs and unit information. This feature helps
maintenance personnel to install/maintain the system and improves system maintainability. You can confirm the
following information:
Maximum of MG numbers
IMG1
IMG2
U=2
U=3
PIR7
PIR11
MG1
MG3
MG5
MG7
PIR10
PIR14
PIR9
PIR13
MG4
MG6
PIR8
PIR12
U=2
U=3
PIR1
MG0
U=0
PIR6
PIR5
MG2
PIR4
PIR0
BASEU
PIR15
PIR3
PIR2
U=0
U=1
PIR0
TSWR
IMG3
U=1
BASEU
BASEU
Virtual PIR
Physical PIR
UUNIT
PCPro
9.2
Operating Procedure
This procedure can be done with the DSOS command. For more information on this command, refer to the
DSOS in Chapter 7 Maintenance Commands.
9.3
Service Conditions
Data Assignment
None
129
CHAPTER 2
KIND OF
MEASUREMENT
Terminal Traffic
Measurement Note 2
Route Traffic
Measurement
Station Peg Count
TYPE
1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 5
Note 1
Note 5
Note 6
Note 1
Note 5
10
15
Note 3
Note 6
18
Note 7
19
Note 7
20
21
DESCRIPTION
130
CHAPTER 2
TYPE
22
KIND OF
MEASUREMENT
SIP Service Peg Count
DESCRIPTION
Measurement of the number of call originations, completed call originations, call terminations, answered calls, unanswered calls, handover
attempt, completed handover, registration request, succeeded Digest
Authentication, failed Digest Authentication, all speech channels in busy
state, and failed Keep Alive connection for SP Controlled SIP terminals in
entire system and per SIP Server ID.
Note 1: These kinds of traffic measurement can be saved on the HD of the PCPro.
Note 2: Terminal traffic measurement is not available for LENS of IP terminal and virtual LENS of PS/WLAN
Handset.
Note 3: ATT Answer Peg Count is available for the following Attendant Incoming Calls. Note that the Route
Class Data (CDN 6: TCL) of the Incoming Route must be 1 (=DDD Line)/2 (=FX Line).
Ringdown
Note 4: The word Node here refers to (1) self-SV8500 and (2) distant SV8500 on the other connected side.
When FCCS Networking via IP/CCIS Networking via IP is used, Node stands for the self-SV8500 and
distant SV8500.
Note 5: Assign the largest value of Number of Tenants (ASYDN, SYS1, INDEX 8) in all nodes to activate the
activate the traffic measurement order by ATRFN command. Assign FF Hex for MDATA.
Note 7: This traffic measurement is also available for connections via IPPAD; however, incoming and outgoing
131
CHAPTER 2
Page (Down)
[LOCALHOST::DTFA]
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
13
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
9 CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
Level 0
Level 1
09179.718
09252.000 09215.859
09179.718
09252.000 09215.859
09179.718
09252.000 09215.859
09179.718
09252.000 09215.859
09179.718
09252.000 09215.859
09179.718
09252.000 09215.859
1 09252.000 3 09215.859 6 09179.718 0
09179.718
09252.000 09215.859
09179.718
09252.000 09215.859
09179.718
09252.000 09215.859
0.9143.576
0.9143.576
0.9143.576
0.9143.576
0.9143.576
0.9143.576
0.9143.5766
0.9143.576
0.9143.576
0.9143.576
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
0
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
Level 5
Level 6
Level 7
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
1
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
5
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
0
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
Module Group
Unit
Group
Level 0 - Level 7
Type
132
CHAPTER 2
Page (Down)
[LOCALHOST::DTFA]
Route
13
4
5
6
7
8
9
Number of Trunks
3
1
1
20
1
6
1
Type
Erlang
Erlang
Erlang
Erlang
Erlang
Erlang
Traffic Data
2.976
0.127
0.987
14.59
12.344
50.322
Route
: Route Number
Number of Trunks
: Number of Trunks
Type
Traffic Data
133
CHAPTER 2
Page (UP)
Page (Down)
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
[LOCALHOST::DTFA]
Tenant
Originator
Sta to Sta
Outgoing
13
13
Outgoing
1
Other
Outgoing
Sta to Sta
Incoming
Incoming
Ringing
No Answer
30 Seconds
Answer
No Answer
Other
Incoming
Outgoing
Other Outgoing
Originator
: The number of times a station went off-hook and dialed a station number, a dead number or an attendant number.
Call originations are counted even if they encounter line busy. Also
counted when a station placing a call on hold dials a station number,
dead number or an attendant number.
Transferred call to another station when the station is engaged in a call,
calling another station via Attendant, call origination by Step Call are
not counted here.
134
CHAPTER 2
Outgoing
Other Outgoing
: The number obtained by subtracting the number of Sta to Sta Outgoing and the number of Outgoing from Originator.
Examples counted as Other Outgoing calls are:
-When a call originator lifted the handset but did not dial any digits.
-When a call originator started dialing but replaced the handset before
dialing was completed.
Other Incoming
No Answer 30 Seconds
Answer
*Number of answer in 30 seconds
No Answer
Incoming
: The number of station calls attempted by direct dialing (not via Attendant) from C.O. lines or tie lines.
Ringing
No Answer 30 Seconds
Answer
No Answer
: The number of calls that are not answered in the Ringing. (The number obtained by subtracting Answer from Ringing.)
The number of calls that are not answered within 30 seconds in the
Ringing. (Calls answered after 30 seconds have past are not counted
here.)
135
CHAPTER 2
Other Incoming
Page (UP)
Page (Down)
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
[LOCALHOST::DTFA]
Tenant
* INCOMING *
LDN
13 23
ATNDor
ADM
9 13
RCL
FX
WATS
CCSA
0 0
TIE
BUSY
NANS
ICPT
613
00
TF
DND
GST
HWC
LT
Total
50
SCBorHP
5 0
Tenant
Tenant No.
: Tenant Number
ATN
ATTCON No.
LDN
ATND
Attendant
ADM
Administration Station
: The number of call terminations from Administration Station to Attendant in the hotel system.
RCL
Recall
136
CHAPTER 2
FX
Foreign Exchange
WATS
CCSA
TIE
Tie Line
BUSY
NANS
ICPT
SCB
: Not used.
HP
TF
Inter-Position Transfer
DND
Do Not Disturb
GST
Guest Station
HWC
Howler Call
LT
137
CHAPTER 2
Page (Down)
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
[LOCALHOST::DTFA]
Report Type
Incoming/Outgoing Trunks
Attempts
Block
23
13
Established
Route 1
Outgoing
26
19
Station
Tandem
Others
Incoming
6
VT(E-CCIS)
Establishment
[OUT]
0
Register Access
0
6
VT(E-CCIS)
Establishment
[IN]
Attendant
19
Report Type
(Route Peg Count Type)
Attempts
Block
: The number of times that trunk busy was encountered when accessing a
trunk.
Established
Outgoing
: The number of times trunks were accessed. The number does not always
coincide with the number obtained by subtracting Block from Attempts.
Incoming
Register Access
Attendant
138
CHAPTER 2
Station
: The number of incoming station to station calls (not via the Attendant
Console). Note 1
Tandem
Others
The number obtained by subtracting Attendant, Station and Tandem from Incoming. These calls include the following scenarios:
-Incoming calls terminated but released before the line is connected.
-Calls to unused numbers or busy lines, etc.
Page (UP)
Page (Down)
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
[LOCALHOST::DTFA]
Tenant 1
Call Hold
Call Back
Call Back
Cancel
Erow
12
15
CFA Cancel
CFB Entry
1
CFB Cancel
3
CFDA Entry
6
CFDA
Cancel0
System
Speed
6 Call
Access
Individual
Speed Call
0
Access
1
13
Call Waiting
Originate
Call Waiting
Terminate
12
Off Hook
OG Queuing
On Hook
Queuing
Entry
Consult Hold
Call Transfer
Add On
Conference
On Hook
Queuing
Cancel
0
Call Pick Up
Direct Call
Pick Up
CFA Entry
Individual
1Speed Call
Entry
0
TAS Answer
0
0
Call Hold
: The number of times that the line is on hold with dialing access code
for CALL HOLD [C-6].
139
CHAPTER 2
Call Back
: The number of times that CALL BACK [C-1] is set to the station with
dialing the access code for CALL BACK.
: The number of times that CALL BACK [C-1] is canceled with dialing
the cancellation access code CALL BACK.
Erow
Call Pick Up
: The number of times that another station in a group for CALL PICKUP-GROUP [C-7] answers the call with dialing access code when the
terminated station in the group does not answer the call.
: The number of times that another station answers the call with dialing
access code for CALL PICK UP [C-30] + actually call terminated station number when the terminated station does not answer the call.
CFA Entry
The number of times that CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS [C5] is set to the station with dialing the entry access code + target station number.
CFA Cancel
The number of times that CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS [C5] is canceled with dialing the cancellation access code.
CFB Entry
CFB Cancel
CFDA Entry
CFDA Cancel
The number of times that the station performs SPEED CALL ACCESS-SYSTEM [S-3] with dialing the access code + Abbreviated
Call Code.
The number of times that the station performs SPEED CALL ACCESS-STATION [S-21] with dialing the access code + Abbreviated
Call Code.
The number of times that a station bridges into the busy connection
with dialing access code for EXECUTIVE RIGHT-OF-WAY [E-1].
140
CHAPTER 2
TAS Answer
: The number of times that the station answers incoming external calls
with dialing TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION (TAS) [T-8]
access code (or with pressing Function Key/Answer Key).
Consult Hold
Call Transfer
Add On Conference
This count service is set when calls from stations providing OFFHOOK QUEUING [O-7] encounter all outgoing trunks are busy.
Count begins with the first call origination since trunks become idle.
The number of times that another party is added to an existing connection (without Attendant assistance) and THREE-PARTY CALLING [T-2] is established.
141
CHAPTER 2
Page (UP)
Page (Down)
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
[LOCALHOST::DTFA]
Route
Incoming Calls
Answered Calls
Abandoned Calls
1
1
5
1
2
1
134
256
45
114
231
42
20
25
3
13
Route
Incoming Calls
Answered Calls
Abandoned Calls
142
CHAPTER 2
Page (UP)
Page (Down)
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
[LOCALHOST::DTFA]
13
UCD Group
Incoming Calls
Answered Calls
1
2
3
4
5
96
7
124
221
453
67
13
544
65
120
221
453
62
13
544
64
Abandoned Calls
4
0
0
5
0
60
1
UCD Group
Incoming Calls
Answered Calls
Abandoned Calls
143
CHAPTER 2
Page (Down)
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
[LOCALHOST::DTFA]
13
UCD Group
Tenant
Station
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
1
1
1
1
1
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
Incoming Calls
2
1
3
4
2
3 0
3
11
43
19
33
Answered Calls
Abandoned Calls
2
1
3
4
2
3 0
3
11
43
19
33
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
UCD Group
Tenant
: Tenant Number
Station
: Station Number
Incoming Calls
Answered Calls
Abandoned Calls
144
CHAPTER 2
Page (UP)
Page (Down)
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
[LOCALHOST::DTFA]
Attendant Number
1
2
3
4
5
13
Answered within
0 to 10 seconds
Answered within 10
to 30 seconds
0
2
0
1
1
1
0
2
3
3
6
Answered within
30 to 60 seconds
0
0
1
0
1
6
Answered calls
exceeding 60 seconds
0
0
0
0
0
Attendant Number
: ATTOCON number
: The number of times that Attendant answers a C.O. incoming call within a period of time (0-10 seconds)
: The number of times that Attendant answers a C.O. incoming call within a period of time (10-30 seconds)
: The number of times that Attendant answers a C.O. incoming call within a period of time (30-60 seconds)
: The number of times that Attendant answers a C.O. incoming call after more than 60 seconds have past
145
CHAPTER 2
Page (Down)
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
[LOCALHOST::DTFA]
C_RT
Attempts
Block
Outgoing
Incoming
4
9
346
167
23
11
187
78
156
64
13
Terminate
134
69
Tandem
Others
16
8
C_RT
: Connection Route
Attempts
Block
: The number of times that trunk busy was encountered when accessing
a trunk.
Outgoing
Incoming
Terminate
Tandem
Others
The number of times trunks were accessed. The number does not always coincide with the number obtained by subtracting Block from
Attempts.
146
CHAPTER 2
Page (Down)
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
[LOCALHOST::DTFA]
13
C_RT
Number of Trunks
Type
Traffic Data
9
12
24
45
Erlang
Erlang
98.123
19.236
C_RT
: Connection Route
Number of Trunks
: Number of Trunks
Type
Traffic Data
147
CHAPTER 2
Page (Down)
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
[LOCALHOST::DTFA]
NODE 1
FPC 1
PC -
Attempts
Block
Outgoing
Outgoing-Incomplete
1
255
65535
9
287454020
1
287454020
3
Incoming
Incoming-Incomplete
1
Incoming-Incomplete
2
Incoming-Incomplete
3
Incoming-Incomplete
Other
287454021
287454021
287454022
287454023
287454024
13
NUMBER 100000000000000000000000
Outgoing-Incomplete
2
287454019
0
Outgoing-Incomplete
Other
Outgoing-Incomplete
3
287454018
0
287454017
5
Attempts
Block
Outgoing
Outgoing-Incomplete 1
Outgoing-Incomplete 2
: The number of placed call incompletion (connected party is busy, or incoming trunk selection NG) Note 2
Outgoing-Incomplete 3
: The number of placed call incompletion (No answer from called party)
Outgoing-Incomplete
Other
Incoming
148
CHAPTER 2
Incoming-Incomplete 1
Incoming-Incomplete 2
: The number of incoming call incompletion (called party is busy, or incoming trunk selection NG) Note 2
Incoming-Incomplete 3
Incoming-Incomplete
Other
Note 1: Dead number means lack of dialed number, non-existent station number.
Note 2: Incoming trunk selection NG indicates that incoming trunks are all busy or cannot be used for some
reason.
Note 3: The restriction by office data includes incoming call restriction at terminal side and restriction of in-
Page (Down)
[LOCALHOST::DTFA]
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
NODE
FPC
PC
NUMBER
1
100
2
3
253
3
-
100
100
18383
100000000000000000000000
555555555555555555555555
999999999999999999999999
13
Traffic Data
301999997.930
03220.900
150994943.985
1549741.982
NODE
149
CHAPTER 2
FPC
PC
NUMBER
Traffic Data
150
CHAPTER 2
Page (Down)
Page (UP)
[LOCALHOST::DTFA]
Sending frequency
: Number of times the call originated from the SP Controlled SIP terminal is answered by the destination. Also it includes the number of
times the call is connected to Announcement Trunk.
Arrival frequency
: Number of times the call is terminated to the SP Controlled SIP terminal (ringer is heard).
Number of times the terminating call is answered by the SP Controlled SIP terminal.
151
CHAPTER 2
: Number of times Digest Attestation by the SP Controlled SIP terminal is succeeded and accepted.
: Number of times Digest Attestation by the SP Controlled SIP terminal is failed and rejected. Note 4
: Number of times sending and receiving the Keep Alive messages are
failed between the SP Controlled SIP terminal and the SP
Number of times WLAN Handset (MH Series) completes the handover. Note 2
Note 1: Number of unanswered calls also includes the number of all speech channels in busy state.
Note 2: Handover mentioned here is layer 3 level handover that requires changing IP address.
When the handover is layer 2 level handover, the traffic data is not counted as Handover demand frequency and Handover completion call frequency.
Note 3: In the following cases, the number is not counted as this frequency:
When domain assigned to the SP Controlled SIP terminal is different from the domain in the SP domain list
Note 4: When this count is large in number, wrong password may be assigned to either the Telephony Server
side or the SP Controlled SIP terminal side. When the Telephony Server side or the SP Controlled SIP
terminal side of password is corrected, this situation does not occur. For more information of Telephony Server side password, refer to SP CONTROLLED SIP TERMINAL [S-168] in Data Programming
Manual - Business. For the SIP terminal side, refer to the operation manual for each terminal.
Note 5: This is the number of situations recognized as no vacancies in bandwidth at SP. When this count is large
in number, additional vacant speech channels are needed. The speech channels are added by ASSDN/
ASSDL command. Up to 1200 speech channels are provided.
152
CHAPTER 2
(1) If other application has been installed, delete the other application and residence application.
(2) If you started up or used the other command when traffic collection was in operation,
be sure not to start up or use the other command during the automatic traffic collection.
if automatic traffic collection is executed for a prolonged time, install dedicated PC for automatic traffic
collection aside from the PCPro for the normal maintenance use.
(3) If automatic traffic collection has been ran for more than one month, restart a PC once a month.
In case you cannot fix these problems despite the above operations, it is recommended to upgrade the PC
model.
153
CHAPTER 2
surement is performed.
STEP 2
By using the ATRF/ATRFN command, assign the traffic measurement programs as follows:
When performing traffic measurement on a node basis:
- ATRF Note 4
Assign traffic measurement TYPE Note 3, PORT number used, and the output INTERVAL and
Time (HOUR/MINUTE), etc. For more information, see the ATRF command.
When performing traffic measurement on a network basis (via TCP/IP):
- ATRFN Note 4
Assign traffic measurement TYPE Note 3, PORT number used, and the output INTERVAL and
Time (HOUR/MINUTE), etc. For more information, see the ATRFN command.
Note 3: Select one measurement TYPE at a time. If two or more measurement TYPEs are needed, repeat the
STEP 4
An image of a PCPro Menu is shown in Figure 2-20. Terminate all PCPro commands, and
make sure no command is currently running via the Processes button.
Set the programmed Traffic Measurement in routine operation.
Click the Scan New Alarms/Traffic and Collect New Alarms buttons on the PCPro Menu
(confirm the clicked buttons remain in the pressed state). Then, the Traffic Measurement is
154
CHAPTER 2
activated as programmed.
END
(2) Procedure for Set-up and Start (IP Service Traffic Measurement)
The procedure to set up and start the traffic measurement (related to IP Services) is as follows:
STEP 1
By using the ASYD command, assign the necessary system data as follows:
- ASYD
SYS1, INDEX 8 (Number of Tenants)
SYS1, INDEX 47, b0 (Unit of Traffic Measurement): 0/1 = CCS/Erlang
SYS1, INDEX 47, b7 (Traffic Measurement Service): 0/1 = Out/In Service
STEP 2
Assign 1.
By using the ANTI command, assign the Node number at each connected side:
- ANTI
Assign Node numbers for self-SV8500 and each connected SV8500.
STEP 3
By using the ATRF command, assign the traffic measurement programs as follows:
- ATRF Note 2
Assign traffic measurement TYPE Note 1, PORT number used, and the output INTERVAL and
Time (HOUR/MINUTE), etc. Also, be sure to assign START NODE and END NODE.
Note 1: Select one measurement TYPE at a time. If two or more measurement TYPEs are needed, repeat the
STEP 5
155
CHAPTER 2
This Figure shows an example of PCPro menu, which should look similar to the following:
Scan New Alarms/Traffic
Collect New Alarms
Command Entry Field
156
CHAPTER 2
(3)
COMMAND
NAME
Terminal Traffic
DTF101
Route Traffic
DTF102
DTF103
DTF104
DTF105
DTF201
DTF301
DTF302
DTF303
DTF501
DTF601
DTF602
DTF701
21 IP Service Traffic
DTF702
DTF801
COMMAND
NAME
Terminal Traffic
DTF101N
Route Traffic
DTF102N
DTF103N
DTF104N
DTF105N
DTF201N
DTF301N
DTF302N
DTF303N
157
CHAPTER 2
COMMAND
NAME
DTF501N
DTF601N
DTF602N
MEASUREMENT TYPE
(BY ATRFN COMMAND)
Note: For information on the command display images, see Figure 2-21, Figure 2-22, and Figure 2-23.
158
CHAPTER 2
This Figure shows the DTFD command display image (example). The DTFD/DTFDN command should look
similar to this.
Data collecting Log
Traffic Data
Tool Buttons
Collect Data
Used to collect the Traffic report with regard to the selected Traffic Data TYPE. The result test is shown in
the Data Collection Log display area.
Stop
Used to quit the currently performed Traffic Data collection.
Print Log
Used to print out the text data now displayed in the Data Collection Log area
View Database
Used to view the whole data (based on the selected Traffic Data TYPE), so far stored in the database. More
details are shown in Figure 2-22.
Clear Database
Used to delete (clear) the whole data (based on the selected Traffic Data TYPE), so far stored in the database.
Log Colors
Used to designate/change the text font color of the Data Collection Log display area.
Exit
Used exit this command. (Note that the database contents are not cleared by pressing this button.)
159
CHAPTER 2
Figure 2-22 Listup Report Window when View Database is Selected (Example)
This Figure shows a sample image of the Listup Report window for the DTFD/DTFDN command. This window appears by taking
the following operations, and is used to obtain a sequence of Traffic data, so far collected and stored in the database. The window is
also used to save the Traffic data text (now displayed in the window) onto the desired PC directory.
- To activate this window:
1. Designate a specific Traffic Data TYPE out of the DTFD/DTFDN command check boxes. (see Figure 2-21).
2. Press the View Database button on the left-bottom part of the DTFD/DTFDN command (see Figure 2-21).
Display Area
This area displays the details
on the Traffic report, specified
by the Page (UP)/Page
(DOWN) buttons.
Shown here is an example of a
certain first page of Terminal
Traffic Data (DTF101).
Page (UP)
Page (DOWN)
Any Traffic data, now in the database, can easily be found via these buttons. Select UP
or DOWN, according to the text display pattern: the newest the first, the oldest the last.
Note
Note: When this window displays, the first text to appear is the newest file data. This data is derived from a sequence of Traffic
reports. The newest text (in the database) appears on the first page, and the most current previous version on the next
page.
160
CHAPTER 2
Figure 2-23 Export Dialog for Traffic Report Text File Saving
If the Save Text File button is selected on the Listup Report window, the dialog box shown below, displays.
(see Figure 2-22 above). If saving the file:
1. Select Character-separated values on the Format
list box.
2. Select Disk file on the Destination list box.
3. Click OK.
After these steps, a new dialog box displays. Enter the saved file name and directory. Complete the data saving by filling
out these necessary items.
161
CHAPTER 2
(4)
(5)
When the Traffic Measurement target node is in the FCCS network, follow the programming
procedure on a network basis.
It is because programming Traffic Measurement order on a node basis is not available by the ATRF
command. ATRFN command needs to be used instead of the ATRF command.
Each time the system is initialized or data change is requested from the ATRFN command, the
Network-level Data (NDM) for the traffic measurement order is replaced/updated.
b.
When the network-level data is once assigned via the ATRFN command, the node-level data for ATRF
command cannot be changed or modified.
c.
When the network-level data is once assigned via the ATRFN command, the already assigned data by
the ATRF command is not cleared, but becomes ineffective.
d.
When a data transfer error occurs, the following are performed in order:
Traffic measurement is suspended momentarily and system message is displayed (notification of
fault)
Traffic measurement concerning all the remaining data, except for the fault-involved one, is
resumed.
Retry is made repeatedly for the transfer of fault-involved data, until the fault has been eradicated
If the fault has not eradicated by the time of next measurement routine, the data is finally
discarded and the next traffic measurement routine starts
e.
(6)
When the same individual ATT numbers exist on the network, the traffic measurement concerning the
ATTCON/DESKCON cannot be performed correctly.
The measurement of Traffic TYPE 20 [IP Service Peg Count] and 21 [IP Service Traffic] can be
performed only on a Node-to-Node basis, without consideration of other mediating interface(s).
Node refers to:
- self-SV8500 and distant SV8500 (when FCCS Networking via IP/CCIS Networking via IP is used)
b.
By designating Traffic TYPE 20 [IP Service Peg Count] in the ATRF command, the following
information can be obtained:
<Origination>
- The number of call attempts
- The number of calls whose origination was blocked
- The number of call origination
- The number of placed call incompletion (due to the dialing of dead number or invalid number) Note
1
- The number of placed call incompletion (connected party is busy, or incoming trunk selection NG)
Note 2
- The number of placed call incompletion (No answer from called party)
- The number of placed call incompletion (due to other reason)
<Termination>
- The number of call termination
162
CHAPTER 2
- The number of incoming call incompletion (due to the dialing of dead number or invalid number)
Note 1
- The number of incoming call incompletion (called party is busy, or incoming trunk selection NG)
Note 2
- The number of incoming call incompletion (incoming call is restricted by office data) Note 3
- The number of incoming call incompletion (due to other reason)
Note 1: Dead number means lack of dialed number, non-existent station number.
Note 2: Incoming trunk selection NG indicates that incoming trunks are all busy or cannot be used for some reason.
Note 3: The restriction by office data includes incoming call restriction at terminal side and restriction of
Either of CCS or Erlang can be selected for Traffic TYPE 21 [IP Service Traffic].
d.
For both Traffic TYPE 20 [IP Service Peg Count] and 21 [IP Service Traffic], free output interval can
be set in the sphere between 30 and 120 (minutes) by 10 minute increments.
e.
For both Traffic TYPE 20 [IP Service Peg Count] and 21 [IP Service Traffic], it is only available via
FCCS/CCIS using the IPTRK circuit card. It is not available with the Peer-to-Peer FCCS and Peer-toPeer CCIS network.
163
CHAPTER 2
The System provides the SMDR equipment with the following information:
Call Data
Upon receiving the above information from the System, the SMDR equipment performs editing and management of the information and outputs the resulting information. This section explains the information provided
to the SMDR equipment and also explains the method of controlling the interface port between the SMDR
equipment and the Telephony Server.
11.1 Transmission Data to SMDR Equipment
(1) Transmission Format
As seen in the figure below, the basic information to be transmitted (Transmission Message) is a block
which begins with Start of Text (STX) and ends with End of Text (ETX). When the call ends, the whole
contents of this information is transmitted to the SMDR equipment.
S
T
X
S
A
U
A
TRANSMISSION MESSAGE
STX:
ETX:
SA:
UA:
START OF TEXT
END OF TEST
SYSTEM ADDRESS
UNIT ADDRESS
164
E
T
X
CHAPTER 2
BINARY DIGIT
REMARKS
HEX.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SPACE
STX
ETX
SA
UA
*
#
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
20
02
03
30
21
2A
23
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
165
CHAPTER 2
BYTE DATA
28
BYTE DATA
60
MONTH
A
3
9
10
12
18
20
22
24
26
30
ROUTE
NUMBER
TRUNK
NUMBER
ORIGINATING
TRUNK
INFORMATION
34
36
ORIG
TENANT
STATION
OR
ATTENDANT
OR
ROUTE
TRUNK
NUMBER
32
CALLING
PARTY
INFORMATION
(SEE
PARAGRAPH
7.2.1)
HOUR
MINUTE
SECOND
104
CALLED
NUMBER
AUTHORIZATION
CODE
DAY
HOUR
MINUTE
CALL END
TIME
(SEE
PARAGRAPH
7.2.2)
(SEE
PARAGRAPH
7.2.3)
SECOND
38 ACCOUNT
CODE
114
(SEE
PARAGRAPH
7.2.4)
116
YEAR
YEAR
118
MONTH
DAY
BYTE DATA
92
CALL START
TIME
(SEE
PARAGRAPH
7.2.2)
48
SPACE
(20 Hex.)
(SEE
PARAGRAPH
7.2.7)
CALLING
PARTY
TENANT
96
51
CALL
METERING
CONDITION
B
54
100
ROUTE
NUMBER
1
57
ROUTE
NUMBER
2
ROUTE
ADVANCE
INFORMATION
(SEE
PARAGRAPH
7.2.5)
166
OFFICE
CODE
OF
CALLING
PARTY
OFFICE
CODE OF
BILLING
PROCESS
OFFICE
128
ONLY FOR
NO. 7 CCIS
(SEE
PARAGRAPH
7.2.8)
(SEE
PARAGRAPH
7.2.4)
CHAPTER 2
BYTE DATA
28
EI-K
BYTE DATA
60
MONTH
E
3
9
10
12
18
20
22
24
26
ROUTE
NUMBER
30
TERMINATING
TRUNK
INFORMATION
32
TRUNK
NUMBER
34
ORIG
36
TENANT
STATION
OR
ATTENDANT
OR
ROUTE
TRUNK
NUMBER
CALLED
PARTY
INFORMATION
(SEE
SECTION
7.2.1)
HOUR
MINUTE
SECOND
104
CALLED
NUMBER
AUTHORIZATION
CODE
DAY
HOUR
MINUTE
CALL END
TIME
(SEE
SECTION
7.2.2)
(SEE
SECTION
7.2.3)
SECOND
38 ACCOUNT
CODE
114
(SEE
SECTION
7.2.4)
116
YEAR
YEAR
118
MONTH
DAY
BYTE DATA
92
CALL START
TIME
(SEE
SECTION
7.2.2)
48
CONDITION
B
54
100
ROUTE
NUMBER
57
SPACE
(20 Hex.)
(SEE
SECTION
7.2.7)
CALLED
PARTY
TENANT
96
51
CALL
METERING
00
00
ROUTE
ADVANCE
INFORMATION
(SEE
SECTION
7.2.5)
00
167
OFFICE
CODE
OF
CALLED
PARTY
OFFICE
CODE OF
BILLING
PROCESS
OFFICE
128
ONLY FOR
NO. 7 CCIS
(SEE
SECTION
7.2.8)
(SEE
SECTION
7.2.4)
CHAPTER 2
BYTE DATA
28
MONTH
BYTE DATA
60
B
3
30
SPACE
(20 Hex.)
32
34
9
10
ORIG
TENANT
12
36
DAY
HOUR
62
CALL END
TIME (SEE
SECTION 7.2.2)
20
CALLING
38 ACCOUNT
PARTY
CODE
INFORMATION
(SEE SECTION
7.2.1)
22
HOUR
(SEE
SECTION
7.2.4)
CALLED
PARTY
INFORMATION
(SEE SECTION
7.2.1)
TENANT
(SEE SECTION
7.2.4)
71
114
SPACE
(20 Hex.)
116
YEAR
YEAR
118
MONTH
DAY
STATION
OR
ATTENDANT
AUTHORIZATION
CODE
68
STATION
OR
ATTENDANT
18
104
TENANT
MINUTE
SECOND
BYTE DATA
SPACE
(20 Hex.)
92
CALL START
48
TIME (SEE
SECTION 7.2.2)
SPACE
(20 Hex.)
CALLING
PARTY
TENANT
96
24
26
MINUTE
SECOND
51
CONDITION
B
(SEE SECTION
7.2.6)
SPACE
(20 Hex.)
128
54
SPACE
(20 Hex.)
The 9th byte indicates the type of the calling (or called) party. The 10th through 17th bytes are data
pertaining to this calling (or called) party.
168
CHAPTER 2
The contents of 12th through 17th bytes vary with the type of the calling (or called) party.
EXAMPLE
12
1st DIGIT
13
2nd DIGIT
14
3rd DIGIT
15
4th DIGIT
16
5th DIGIT
SPACE
17
6th DIGIT
SPACE
BYTE
EXAMPLE
12
1st DIGIT
13
2nd DIGIT
14
3rd DIGIT
SPACE
15
4th DIGIT
SPACE
16
5th DIGIT
SPACE
17
6th DIGIT
SPACE
BYTE
(3) For a trunk (ORIG = 2): Data showing Route Number and Trunk Number
Byte
12
Example
Data
1st DIGIT
13
2nd DIGIT
14
3rd DIGIT
15
1st DIGIT
16
2nd DIGIT
17
3rd DIGIT
0
Route
Number
RT No. = 1
1
0
Trunk
Number
5
0
169
TR No. = 50
CHAPTER 2
BYTE
DATA
EXAMPLE
18
MONTH
19
(01-12)
20
DAY
21
(01-31)
22
HOUR
23
(00-23)
24
MINUTE
25
(00-59)
26
SECOND
27
(00-59)
114
YEAR
115
(00-99)
DATA
EXAMPLE
28
MONTH
29
(01-12)
30
DAY
31
(01-31)
32
HOUR
33
(00-23)
34
MINUTE
35
(00-59)
36
SECOND
37
(00-59)
116
YEAR
117
(00-99)
170
CHAPTER 2
DATA
EXAMPLE
60
1st DIGIT
61
2nd DIGIT
62
3rd DIGIT
63
4th DIGIT
64
5th DIGIT
65
66
67
68
69
70
SPACE
71
12th DIGIT
SPACE
90
30th DIGIT
SPACE
91
32nd DIGIT
SPACE
9: OG ACCESS CODE
171
CHAPTER 2
DATA
EXAMPLE
38
1st DIGIT
39
2nd DIGIT
40
3rd DIGIT
41
4th DIGIT
42
5th DIGIT
SPACE
46
9th DIGIT
SPACE
47
10th DIGIT
SPACE
BYTE
Note: An Account Code is a numerical code dialed (up to ten digits) by a station user with the capability
EXAMPLE
104
1st DIGIT
105
2nd DIGIT
106
3rd DIGIT
107
4th DIGIT
108
5th DIGIT
SPACE
112
9th DIGIT
SPACE
113
10th DIGIT
SPACE
BYTE
Note: An Authorization Code is a numerical code dialed (up to ten digits) by station users that will
override the stations class (RSC or SFC) for facilities access restriction.
11.2.5 Route Advance Information
When a call has been originated by route advancing, the following data is transmitted.
172
CHAPTER 2
DATA
BYTE
EXAMPLE
1st DIGIT
54
0
ROUTE
NUMBER 1
55
2nd DIGIT
56
3rd DIGIT
57
1st DIGIT
58
2nd DIGIT
59
3rd DIGIT
ROUTE
NUMBER 2
3
0
DATA
OUTPUT NUMBER
51
C2
0, 1 or SPACE
52
C1
03 or SPACE
53
C0
05 or SPACE
C2:
C1:
0 = Normal Call
1 = Call originated by OG trunk queuing
2 = Call originated by dialing with Account Code
3 = Call originated by OG trunk queuing and dialing with Account Code
C0:
173
CHAPTER 2
BYTE
DATA
EXAMPLE
92
1000
93
100
94
10
95
11.2.8 Office Code of Calling (Called) Party and Billing Process Office
The 96th byte through 99th byte indicates the Office Code of Calling (Called) Party terminated via
CCIS line.
The 100th byte through 103rd byte indicates the Office Code of the office processing centralized billing
for CCIS network.
Note: Office Code includes the CCIS line access code.
BYTE
DATA
EXAMPLE
96
1st DIGIT
97
2nd DIGIT
98
3rd DIGIT
99
4th DIGIT
100
1st DIGIT
101
2nd DIGIT
102
3rd DIGIT
103
4th DIGIT
OFFICE CODE OF
CALLING (CALLED)
PARTY
2
SPACE
8
OFFICE CODE OF
BILLING PROCESS
OFFICE
3
SPACE
S
T
X
K
Kind
/
of
K L Data Data
Length
/
Note
M
Transmission Data
174
Kind
Data
of
Data Length
Transmission Data
E
T
X
CHAPTER 2
CONTENTS
KK
(OUTGOING)
KL
(INCOMING)
KM
(STATION)
00
Not Used
01
Provided
Provided
02
Provided
Provided
03
Conditionally
Provided
Conditionally
Provided
04
Provided
Provided
05
Conditionally
Provided
Conditionally
Provided
06
Provided
Provided
Provided
07
Account Code
Conditionally
Provided
Conditionally
Provided
Conditionally
Provided
08
Condition B Information
Provided
Provided
Provided
09
Provided
Provided
10
Dial Code
Provided
Conditionally
Provided
11
Conditionally
Provided
Conditionally
Provided
12
Authorization Code
Conditionally
Provided
Conditionally
Provided
13
Provided
Conditionally
Provided
175
CHAPTER 2
CONTENTS
KK
(OUTGOING)
KL
(INCOMING)
KM
(STATION)
14
Conditionally
Provided
15
Department Code
Conditionally
Provided
16
Conditionally
Provided
Conditionally
Provided
17
Converted Number
Conditionally
Provided
18
MA-ID
Conditionally
Provided
Conditionally
Provided
Conditionally
Provided
19
Conditionally
Provided
Not Used
20-99
176
CHAPTER 2
For more
information on
the data to
which the
Note marks
are attached,
see
Reference.
STX
0
!
K
K
0
75
Byte Data
Byte Data
Minute
1
0
Byte Data
220
0 ~ 3
Second
150
225
Billing
Information
/Call
1
0, 0
80
10
85
Month
Day
Trunk
Call
End
160
90
Logical
235
Dial Code
(Max. 32
digits)
Hour
15
D
230 Bill Notification
155
Year
Outgoing
Trunk
Physical
Minute
20
95
25
Tenant
240
STN No.
ATT CON
No.
30
RT/TK
35
110
Accoun
t Code
User
Group
45
115
190
0
8
0
Telephone
Number
(Max. 16
digits)
C2
C1
C0
0
Condition B
Information
Note
Office
Code of
Billing
Automatic
Number
260 Indication
(Max. 32
Office Code
Information
265
1
195
270
0 ~ 1
Logical
Physical
0
60
135
Authorization Code
200
FPC1
130
Alternate
Routing
Information
Authorization
205
Code
(Max 16
digits.)
Year
Logical
Month
70
140 Physical
Logical
Day
Hour
ETX
1
215
3
0, 0, 0
C
145
177
1
7
0 ~ 0
1
6
Converted
Number
(Max. 6
285
digits)
FPC2
Call
Start
Time
275
280
210
65
Automatic
Number
Indication
Note
125
/
55
255
1
1
0
Office
Code of
Calling
120
50
180
185
Calling
Party
Information
(Telephone
250
Account
Code
(Max. 16
FPC
40
1
6
0 ~ 1
105
0 ~ 2
245
175
Department Code
0 ~ 3
Milli-Sec0
100
Condition
D Informa-
Depart-
165
170
Calling
Party
Information
(Station No.)
1
5
0
Dial Code
Second
ORIG
Condition
C Informa-
Milli-Sec-
1
FPC
Byte Data
290
1
8
1
0
Converted
Number
MA-ID
Calling
Party
MA-ID
MA-ID
(Max. 5
295 digits)
Outgoing
Route
MA-ID
300 (Max. 5 digits)
EXT
CHAPTER 2
STX
0
!
K
L
0
1
1
FPC
(3 digits)
10
Month
70
Incoming
Trunk
Information
75
Second
145
Milli-Second
Month
Call End
Time
Day
0
4
1
Called
Party
Information
(Station
STN No.
ATT CON
No.
30
RT/TK No.
50
55
110
240
245
Automatic
Number
Indication
Note
0
8
0
120
0
6
3
250
1
1
115
Logical
Route No.
Year
ETX
170
175
C2
C1
C0
0
9
1
FPC1
Physical
RT No. 1
185
0
Office
Code of
Calling
Party
Condition B
Information
Note
190
Incoming
Route
Number
Note
Office
Code of
Billing Process Office
1
195
2
0 ~ 1
200
ETX
255
Office Code
Information
260
265
1
8
1
0
Called
Party
MA-ID
(Max. 5
digits)
For more information on the data to which the Note marks are attached, see Reference.
178
Second
Milli-Second
235
Automatic
Number
Indication
(Max. 32
digits)
Day
Minute
0 ~ 3
MA-ID
MA-ID
Year
Hour
290
1
6
230
Dial Code
285
Call
Metering
165
Account
Code
(Max. 16
digits)
130
65
Condition
C Information
*
Dial Code
(Max. 32
digits)
Incoming
Route
MA-ID
(Max. 5
digits)
1
9
1
7
Month
180
125
60
220
105
Called
Party
Information
(Telephone
1
3
0
C
160
Account
Code
FPC
(3 digits)
Telephone
Number
(Max. 16
digits)
215
225
05
45
280
0 ~ 1
0 ~ 2
User
Group
Number
210
Logical
RT No. 2
Minute
0
7
100
40
275
Physical
RT No. 2
150
95 Milli-Second
270
(Max. 16
155
Second
Authorization
Code
205
Hour
90
35
Authorization
Code
0 ~ 3
Year
85
Byte Data
Logical
RT No. 1
1
0
80
Logical
Route
Tenant
(3 digits)
140
Minute
Trunk No.
25
135
FPC2
Hour
Physical
Route
ORIG
Call
Start
Time
Day
15
20
Byte Data
Byte Data
Trunk
Arrival
Time
CHAPTER 2
Byte Data
10
15
STX
0
!
K
M
0
2
1
0
ORIG (Note)
Tenant
(3 digits)
135
Calling
Party
Information
(Station No.)
FPC
(3 digits)
25
75
140
Telephone
Number
(Max. 16
digits)
0
8
145
80
STN No.
ATT CON
No.
(6 digits)
0
2
~
7
2
Called
Party
Information
(Telephone No.)
70
150
0
6
85
0
3
20
Byte Data
Calling
Party
Information
(Telephone No.)
3
4
Year
Call
Start
Time
155
90
160
Month
User Group
Number
(3 digits)
Day
95
0
3
C2
C1
C0
1
8
1
0
Calling
Party
MA-ID
(Max. 5
digits)
Condition B
Information
Note
MA-ID
Called
Party
MA-ID
(Max. 5
digits)
ETX
Hour
Minute
30
100
35
Telephone
Number
(Max. 16
digits)
Milli-Second
105
40
110
55
Tenant
(3 digits)
STN No.
ATT CON
No.
(6 digits)
Call End
Time
Day
Hour
1
0
ORIG (Note)
50
Year
Month
0
4
45
Second
115
Called
Party
Information
(Station No.)
Minute
Second
Milli-Second
120
0
7
0
1
~
1
6
125
05
60
0
2
~
3
2
FPC
(3 digits)
65
User Group
Number
130
Account
Code
(Max. 16
digits)
Account
Code
For more information on the data to which the Note marks are attached, see Reference.
179
CHAPTER 2
Reference
Data = 02: Calling Party Information (Station Number)
02
10
O
R
I
G
Station No.
ATTCON No.
RT / TK No.
(6 digits)
Tenant
(3 digits)
ORIG:
08
03
C
2
C
1
C
0
C0 =
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
Call
Call
Call
Call
Call
Call
Call
Call
C1 =
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Call
Call
Call
Call
Call
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
C2 =
Origination
Origination
Origination
Origination
Origination
Origination
Origination
Origination
Direct
via ATTCON
Direct (Alternate Routing)
via ATTCON (Alternate Routing)
Direct (LCR Routing)
via ATTCON (LCR Routing)
Direct (Called No. - first six digits of change code)
via ATTCON (Called No. - first six digits of change code)
Origination
Origination
Origination
Origination
by
by
by
by
OG Queuing
dialing with accounted code
OG Queuing & dialing with accounted code
Call Forwarding Outside
180
CHAPTER 2
Data = 09: Alternate Routing Information (KK) / Incoming Route Number (KL)
09
18
FPC1
(3 digits)
Physical
RT 1
Logical
RT 1
FPC2
(3 digits)
FPC1:
Physical Route 1:
Logical Route 1:
FPC2:
Physical Route 2:
Logical Route 2:
Physical
RT 2
Logical
RT 2
13
01
05
07
Billing Info
/
Call Metering
Charge
Charge
Charge
Charge
Charge
Charge
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
F:
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
(Basic
(Basic
(Basic
(Basic
(Basic
(Basic
Charge
Charge
Charge
Charge
Charge
Charge
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
x 100)
x 101)
x102)
x103)
x104)
x105)
No Charge Information
Charge Information for 1 cent unit
Charge Information for 0.1 cent unit
Charge Information for 10 cent unit
Charge Information for $1 unit
Charge Information for $10 unit
Calling Metering (4 digits)
Charge Information Error
181
In case of
Billing Information
CHAPTER 2
14
01
04
Bill
Notification
D
ATTCON
Number
D -
:
0 :
1 :
01
16
33
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Unable to Output
Display
Unable to Notify
Out of Service (Out of Area)
Public Telephone Origination
182
CHAPTER 2
Original office data and its redundant data can be managed in two different data drives (usually Drive B and C), to deal with failure causing the data loss. In this way, for example, even
when office data is lost due to failure occurring while the office data is being updated, the previous office data can be easily loaded because it is already managed in another drive. In FCCS system, this service can be performed to all nodes.
Figure 2-24 CF card contents
CF Card
Drive A
New program
Drive B
Office data
Drive C
Office data
(Redundance)
Drive D
Old program
(1) Before office data update, save the existing office data to CF card from the memory using the MEM_HDD
command. Specify a Drive (usually Drive C) as the destination to save.
(2) After office data update has finished, save the updated office data to CF card from the memory using the
MEM_HDD command. Specify a different Drive (usually Drive B) from the Drive where the existing office data is saved as the destination to save.
(1) Confirm the Drive where the existing office data is saved referring to the date of office data file using the
DHDF command.
(2) Execute Office Data Load & System Initialize by the SINZ command. For this operation, specify the
Drive (usually Drive C) where the existing office data has been saved. The Drive can be specified by [Option] in the menu bar. In default setting, Drive B is specified.
(3) Save the office data before update to CF card from the memory using the MEM_HDD command. Specify
the Drive (usually Drive B) where originally updated office data has been saved as the destination to save.
12.2.1 Service condition
1.
In the routine diagnosis, office data verification and data backup are only applied to the Drive where office
183
CHAPTER 2
2.
3.
Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize is executed by the SINZ command.
storage device. Use Telephony Server Maintenance Menu/PCPro Tools for this backup. See Office Data
Backup - <How to Download the Office Data> for more details.
184
CHAPTER 2
Note 2: Communication Log Collection Function and Fault Log Function are available depending on termi-
nals. Please refer to [R-58] RTP Information Output in Data Programming Manual - Business for more
detailed information.
Note 3: This feature can be disabled on a system basis or on an individual terminal basis. For further informa-
tion, please refer to [R-58] RTP Information Output in Data Programming Manual - Business.
185
CHAPTER 2
Alarm Tone
1 second
3 seconds or more
10 seconds
Tone Duration
120 ms
Tone Pause
100 ms
186
CHAPTER 2
187
CHAPTER 2
CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K
The following is an example.
b6
0x60
0x20
b5
b4
b3
b2
b0
LEVEL
GROUP
Module Group
b1
0x01
FPC
0x00
NOP
UNIT
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
0x60
0x20
0x01
0x00
0x60
0x20
Group = 12
0
MG = 8
0x01
FPC = 1
0x00
NOP = 0
LV = 0
U = 0
Thus, Module Group = 8, Unit = 0, Group = 12, Level = 0 are obtained in this instance.
188
CHAPTER 2
DT700 Series
DtermIP (SIP)
DtermSP30 (SIP)
189
CHAPTER 2
Examples of Log
Example 1
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
190
CHAPTER 2
Example 2
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
191
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
CHAPTER 2
Example 3
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
STATISTICS
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
A,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
B,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
C,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
D,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
E,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
F,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
G,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
H,
192
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
I,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
J,
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
CHAPTER 2
Note: This is an example when the system outputs 36-N. Note that the format is variable.
Reset Factor
1: 6020 0100 810A 29CF 2:C901 3400 010E 0100 3:0901 0000 2004 0518
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4] [5]
[10]
[11]
4: 1323 5658 021E 0200 5:1000 0000 0900 0000 6:0000 0000 0000 0000
[11]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
7: 1300 0000 1100 0000 8:0000 0000 0000 0000 9:0000 0000 0000 0000
[17]
[18]
Make sure [1] (EN) and [2] (Sequence Number), the sequence numbers on the same EN are continuous data
related to the EN. Fault logs by the same terminal are divided into packets and output, therefore, it is required
to analyze the data by grouping the same header.
[2]
[3]
[19]
[9]
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5:0000 0000 0000 0000 6:0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8:0000 0000 0000 0000 9:0000 0000 0000 0000
193
CHAPTER 2
[2]
[3]
[19]
[20]
[21]
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5:0000 0000 0000 0000 6:0000 0000 0000 0000
[9]
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8:0000 0000 0000 0000 9:0000 0000 0000 0000
b6
0x60
0x20
b5
b4
b3
b2
b0
LEVEL
GROUP
Module Group
b1
0x01
FPC
0x00
NOP
UNIT
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
0x60
0x20
0x01
0x00
0x60
0x20
LV = 0
Group = 12
0
MG = 8
0x01
FPC = 1
0x00
NOP = 0
U = 0
Thus, Module Group = 8, Unit = 0, Group = 12, Level = 0 are obtained in this instance.
194
CHAPTER 2
195
CHAPTER 2
Major
Item
(Hex)
00
Factors
Not used
before registration/
before DRS01
(Initial Setting
Request)
02
after registration/
during initialization
04
Not used
05
Not used
06
03
Autonomous Reset
01
07
08
09
Configuration mode is
ended
(DtermIP only)
0A
Not used
Not used
0B -
196
CHAPTER 2
[12]: Protocol
0x01/0x02/0x03 = iLP-PM/PROTIMS/SIP
[13]: Total Number of Transmitted Control PKTs
0x10000000 = 10 times
[14]: Number of Retransmitted Control PKTs
0x09000000 = 9 times
[15]: Number of Failed Control PKTs
0x00000000 = None
[16]: Total Number of Received Control PKTs
0x00000000 = None
[17]: Number of Received Abnormal PKTs
0x13000000 = 19 times
[18]: Number of Failed Control PKTs
0x11000000 = 17 times
[19]: Number of Failed Control PKTs
0x00000000 = None
[20]: Number of Retransmission (three times) Note
[21]: Number of Retransmission (four times or more) Note
Note: Available for DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP) only.
The following shows how to count the numbers and the meaning of each protocol.
This example is applied for all the parameters.
6A 01 00 00
Lower
Upper
0x016A
362 times
Converted in decimal
197
CHAPTER 2
DtermIP (SIP)/
Soft Phone (SIP)
(0x04)
iLP-PM (0x01)
PROTIMS (0x02)
[13]
Number of Transmitted
Requests
[14]
Number of Retransmitted
Control PKTs
Number of Transmitted
ACK Packets
[15]
Number of Retransmitted
Packets
Number of Transmitted
Response (Normal)
[16]
Number of Transmitted
Response (Error)
[17]
[18]
Number of Abnormal
Sequences
ACK Packets
Number of Retransmission
(once)
[19]
Number of Duplicated
Sequences
Number of Retransmission
(twice)
[20]
Number of Retransmission
(three times)
[21]
Number of Retransmission
(four times or more)
198
CHAPTER 2
Eight fault logs and eight reset factors exist in the messages.
Header
1:B91F 0000 81AC 10FD 2:1D01 8400 0162 0800 3:090B 09DF 2001 0610 4:2140 5500 090B 09DF
Reset Factor (2)
5:2004 0610 2142 4300 6:0644 058B 2004 0610 7:2213 1900 0944 0AE4 8:0000 0000 0000 0000
No data is assigned here.
Header
1:B91F 0000 82AC 10FD 2:1D20 0406 1108 5905 3:0009 440A E420 0406 4:1109 0723 0007 440A
Reset Factor (6)
5:1220 0406 1109 0748 6:0006 4405 8B20 0406 7:1109 1143 0006 4405 8:0000 0000 0000 0000
Header
1:B91F 0000 83AC 10FD 2:1D8B 2004 0611 0945 3:2900 021E 0200 6A01 4:0000 6A01 0000 0B00
5:0000 0200 0000 6D01 6:0000 5E01 0000 0100 7:0000
199
Protocol: 01(iLP-PM)
02(PROTIMS)
Data Kind:02(Received/Sent Control Packets Info)
CHAPTER 2
200
CHAPTER 2
Examples of Log
Example 1
[NON]
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
LP00-0-ACT
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Take statistics of area (E) on the basis of reset factor (F) and reset execution time (G).
201
CHAPTER 2
Example 2
[NON]
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
LP00-0-ACT
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Take statistics of users (C) on the basis of reset factor of a terminal (F).
Also take statistics of status of RTCP sent/received (H, I, J).
202
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
CHAPTER 2
Example 3
[NON]
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
36-N
LP00-0-ACT
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
Report
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Take statistics of network status including packet retransmission rate and retransmission NG
rate (H, I, J), on the basis of terminal user and area (C, D, E).
203
CHAPTER 2
204
CHAPTER 2
205
CHAPTER 2
206
CHAPTER 2
IP Network
Lost RTP Packet
Codec
Pay Load Size
DtermIP
DtermIP
14.1 Operation
For operations on the terminal side, refer to Operating Procedure of [T-65] on Data Programming Manual Business.
14.2 Examples of Using Logs for Solution
<Example 1 - Packet Loss - >
(1) Brief
Call is disconnected.
(2) Cause
Due to unmatched duplex link between switches or network load, RTP packets are discarded in the network.
(3) Checking the Call Information Display helps to find the cause.
When the decreasing number displayed for 1.Lost Packet in Call Information Display is checked, it is noticed
that RTP packets are discarded while the DtermIP is trying to receive RTP packets.
<Example 2- Checking Configuration Contents- >
(1) Brief
Codec/Payload Size can be checked.
(2) Checking Codec/Payload Size by using Call Information Display.
Using Call Information Display, which displays Codec/Payload Size, makes it easy to check Codec/Payload
Size.
207
CHAPTER 2
Select Automatic from the User Menu Ether Port Setting PC Port Settings Port Available
(PC).
When Automatic is selected:
If the software reset is executed, the status of the PC port can be maintained.
If the hardware reset is executed after turning off the terminal, the status of PC port is also reset (PC
port will be connected to the network).
208
CHAPTER 2
When Automatic is not selected, the status of the PC port follows the configuration setting.
Note: After the registration:
If the terminal which does not support this feature is instructed to disconnect its PC port by the system,
a mismatch between the CPCP command setting and the status of the PC port may occurs.
Before the registration:
If the terminal which does not support this feature is instructed to disconnect its PC port by the system,
the CPCP command setting does not take effect.
(e) To disconnect the PC port by CPCP command, Automatic needs to be set on the configuration setting on the terminal. The table below shows the status of PC port depending on the configuration setting on the terminal and office data setting on CPCP command.
Configuration Setting
on Terminal
Automatic Note 3
OFF
Status of PC Port
Connection
PC port is connected.
Disconnection
PC port is disconnected.
No data setting
PC port is connected.
Connection
PC port is disconnected.
Disconnection
PC port is disconnected.
No data setting
PC port is disconnected.
port is connected.
Note: Not supported on the DtermIP INASET320C/G.
(6) The following shows the service conditions only for SIP Multiple Line terminal.
(a) The data setting (CPCP command) for the terminals in logout status is also available. The set data
takes effect after the terminals log into the System.
(b) To use this feature (CPCP command control), the following configuration setting on the terminal is
required.
Select Automatic from the User Menu Advanced Settings PC Port Settings Port Available (PC).
When Automatic is not selected, the status of the PC port follows the configuration setting.
209
CHAPTER 2
License registration:
The number of licenses user has purchased. Licenses registered in the system
is displayed for each terminal type. Each IP terminal turns available by applying this license.
IP Terminal registration: The number of IP terminals currently registered on the system data. The number of registered terminals is displayed on terminal group basis.
License consumption:
The number of terminals registered on the office data and in operation; login
stations and MC/MG devices completing startup procedure, is displayed.
210
CHAPTER 2
Start up a remote PC which FTP client software is installed in. Then log in to FTP server.
Enter Telephony Servers IP address (Note 1) after FTP command using FTP client software.
Note 1: Enter the IP address of LAN1 connector on ACT side CPU/STBY side CPU by the ATDL command.
For the single CPU, enter the ACT side CPU IP address.
for the dual CPU, enter each IP address (#0, #1) of ACT side CPU/STBY side CPU by the ATDL
command
Example) Log in to the Telephony Server (10.41.207.224) via FTP. Note 2
Note 2: The files are transferred to/from the directory in which a connection is made via FTP. For examples,
in the following case, the directory C:\temp is used to transfer files to/from FTP server (Telephony
Server).
C:\temp>ftp 10.41.207.224
STEP 2
Note: The following message appears when login to the Telephony Server is succeeded.
230 User XXXX logged in.
211
CHAPTER 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
Type the command put to upload a program file to FTP server (Telephony Server).
Example) Transfer itlisipe.tgz from the remote PC to the directory of Telephony Server.
ftp>put itlisipe.tgz
STEP 5
Make sure that the file has been written in the specified directory using ls or dir command.
ftp>dir
STEP 6
Activate the FTP server process according to FTP Server Startup Assignment.
STEP 2
Execute further operations referring to the Firmware Auto Update Tool for DT700 Series section in Peripheral Equipment Description.
The table below provides command information related to FTP control and the directory tree in FTP server
(Telephony Server).
Command List Related FTP
COMMAND
MEANING
bin
cd
ftp
delete
get
212
DESCRIPTION
This command must be entered before transferring
the files.
CHAPTER 2
COMMAND
put
MEANING
Write the files into FTP server
(Telephony Server).
pwd
ls/dir
quit/bye
rename
DESCRIPTION
Directories in the CF card differ in each maintenance user account assigned by ADTM command. If files
are written using the maintenance user account A for example, these files cannot be browsed using the
maintenance user account B.
When the Telephony Server is logged in using login name of the maintenance user account, the following
directories and files exist in default state. However, do not use these directories and files.
Directory:
bin
lib
File:
..bash_logout
..bash_logout.rpmorig
..bash_profile
..bash_profile.rpmorig
..bashrc
..bashrc.rpmor
When the system is in Dual Configuration, the maintenance user account can be used for both of #1 and #0
CPU CF cards. When writing the same files to both #1 and #0 CPU CF cards, IP address for each CPU CF
card needs to be entered because files are operated on CPU CF card bases via FTP server.
When the maintenance user account is deleted, all of the written files and created directories using the account are also deleted.
Change the transfer method from ASCII (default) to binary form by using bin command.
When migrating from existing IPX/SV7000 to SV8500, be sure to assign the following system data used
for FTP server activation feature of IPX/SV7000. FTP server which had been used in IPX/SV7000 cannot
be used in SV8500.
ASYDL SYS1 INDEX965 b1 = 0 (FTP server activation disabled)
213
CHAPTER 2
STEP 2
On Options tab, select Activation setting of Internal server in function list of LAN1 field, and
then click the Execute button.
STEP 3
On Activation setting of Internal server window, check the checkbox of FTP Server in Internal Server list of LAN1 field to ON. Then click the Set button.
STEP 2
On Options tab, select Maintenance User Account Settings in function list of LAN1 field, and
then click the Execute button.
STEP 3
STEP 4
Maintenance User Account Settings sub-window appears. Enter the following parameters,
and then click OK button.
- Login Name: 4~12 characters, -, _
- Password: 4~12 characters, -, _
- FTP: Check to allow.
Note: Refer to ADTM: Assignment of Data for TCP/IP Module in Command Manual for available characters
STEP 5
STEP 2
On Options tab, select Activation setting of Internal server in function list of LAN1 field, and
then click the Execute button.
STEP 3
On Activation setting of Internal server window, check the checkbox of FTP Server in Internal Server list of LAN1 field to OFF. Then click the Set button.
214
CHAPTER 2
STEP 2
On Options tab, select Maintenance User Account Settings in function list of LAN1 field.
Then operate the following procedure.
<To inactivate FTP server on the maintenance user account>
Select the maintenance user account to inactivate FTP server, and click the Edit button. Check
the checkbox of FTP to OFF, and then click the Set button.
<To delete the maintenance user account>
Select the maintenance user account to delete, and click the Delete button. Then click the Set
button.
215
CHAPTER 2
WAN
Maintenance
Tested Station
DT700 Series
Station
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
216
CHAPTER 2
(4) Using CSV file enables the maintenance personnel to specify two or more tested stations and output test
results. Refer to TLBK: Test of Loop Back Connection for IP Terminal in Chapter 7 for more information.
<Interactions with Other Features>
(1) Billing, CS Report [C-149] and Peg Count [P-7] do not apply to calls originated by this feature.
(2) Performing a test is available even if a tested station which sets the following features in service:
<Hardware/Software>
This feature is available in the following IP stations:
Tested Station Note 1
DT700 Series (FW 3.0.0.0 or later)Note 2
Maintenance Station
DtermIP (Proprietary Protocol)
DtermIP INASET
DT700 Series
This feature cannot be used in a system which sets VoIP Encryption [V-27] in service.
Payload type and size are fixed to C.711 40 ms. AIVCL/AIVCN data setting will become invalid.
When the third party originates a call to a maintenance station or a tested station during a test, the call
will be restricted.
All of key operations are inhibited except for origination from a maintenance station or a tested station.
217
CHAPTER 2
When a tested station performs origination operation, the test will not completed normally.
(2) This table shows behaviors of a maintenance station and a tested station and TLBK command indication
while performing a test.
Note: Refer to TLBK: Test of Loop Back Connection for IP Terminal in Chapter 7 for more information of com-
mand indication.
While Maintenance Station is Ringing
Maintenance Station/Tested Station
Operation
Behavior
Test Result
Test Failure
Factor
NG
(Test Failure)
NG
(Test Failure)
Test break
(Tested stations duty)
Behavior
Test Result
Test Failure
Factor
OK
OK
OK
<Other Conditions>
None
18.4 Data Assignment
TLBK - Test of Loop Back Connection for IP Terminal (Available Since FP85-105 S2)
Specify the maintenance station and the tested station.
218
CHAPTER 2
Test Range
Single
Plural
CSV File Read Note 3
Note 3: This button appears when Test Range = Plural is set.
219
CHAPTER 2
Enrolling of Product ID
and Notice Time (Time/Year)
PCPro
Exchange/Maintenance of
the Parts
is output by DFTD command becomes the time which is changed by Day Light Savings (Start).
Note: When notification time is enrolled as a same time of Day Light Savings (End), the notification is output
220
CHAPTER 2
(1) When Centralized System Management Report - CCIS [C-57] is used, the notification information which
is output in Local Node is also transferred to Center Node.
(2) Multiple Time Zone [M-114] is not applied in this feature.
<Hardware/Software>
(1) SR-MGC does not support this feature.
<Interactions with Networks>
None.
<Conditions Specific to This Feature>
(1) System Message [36-Y] is notified at 1 oclock on 1st in every month. When there is not an exchange part
which the notification time passes, System Message is not output.
(2) When there is the part whose notification time passes, the notification is done month by month. For stopping the notification, change the information of the periodical parts by APENL command after the replacement of the part.
(3) When the System is not turned on, System Message is output on 1st in the next month.
(4) The backup of Office Data which is assigned by APENL command is available by Data Memory of Data
Type Selection in MEM_HDD command. For more information, refer to MEM_HDD of CHAPTER 7
of this manual.
<Other Conditions>
None.
19.4 Data Assignment
STEP 1
APENL - Assignment of Periodical Exchange Device Notice for LDM and the year/month of
the exchange parts.
P-ID: Product ID [1-255]
P-Name: Product Name [Maximum 32 character]
Notice Time: Month/Year [01/2000-12/9999]
221
CHAPTER 2
Fault
Description
Fault of PHD
Re-registration Warning
The following figure shows a range to be analyzed (red part) by this feature when IP station failure occurs.
This Part can be Analyzed
Fault occurs (Health CheckNG,
the system outputs System Message [35-D])
Normal Login
Normal
Operation
(Recovery)
Not Registered
Normal Logout
Fault
Re-registration
The system notifies maintenance personnel of an IP station fault in the following ways.
IPDM command
222
CHAPTER 2
Terminal Authentication
System
Invalid
Login Mode
Note 5
Valid
Terminal
Information to be
Notified
Valid/Invalid
Valid/Invalid (other than SIP
terminal)
Re-registration warning
Login (Normal)
223
CHAPTER 2
IP Station Operating
Mode
Terminal Authentication
System
Invalid
Valid
Information to be
Notified
Terminal
Valid/Invalid
Valid/Invalid (other than SIP
terminal)
Invalid (SIP terminal)
Logout (Normal)
Note 4
Login (Normal)
Note 1: The following are example operations when the IP station is intentionally rebooted.
Note 2: For more information, refer to RTP Information Output in Chapter 2 in this manual and RTP Informa-
(Normal)/Error depending on the timing for reading data by IPDM command and re-registration.
Note 4: When IP station operating mode is MAC Authentication Mode, Logout (Normal) appears for a mo-
(4) Up to 10,000 fault events can be stored as the fault history in the system. When the number of fault events
exceeds 10,000, older events are deleted.
(5) All of 10,000 events in the fault history are deleted when the system initialization is executed.
(6) Survivable Remote MGC [S-141] and Remote Node over IP are not supported.
(7) For more information on IPDM command, refer to IPDM command in Chapter 7 Maintenance Command.
20.3 Programming
To activate System Message [35-K] output, assign the following data.
STEP 1
ASYDL
System Data 1
Index 999 Bit 2=1 (System Message [35-K] output is in service)
224
CHAPTER 2
21.1 Preparation
Check the License Sheet to see all the ordered items are listed.
* License Sheet may consist of two or more sheets.
Hardware keycode of SV8500 server is required when software authentication has already been done.
Contact the license registration site and get instructions to migrate to SV8500 system reusing the former systems unnecessary license.
STEP 1
Access NEC Registration Server to register the license key code listed on the License Sheet
(Note 1).
STEP 2
Follow the directions on the display and download required SVI file to any local directory.
*For FP85-108 S5 or earlier, be sure not to put other files in the folder the SVI file is saved.
For more information on license registration, refer to the manuals on the registration site.
Note 1: - Ordered license can be divided into multiple license files for using the license on two or more Tele-
phony Servers. One license software is divided into two by one process. License key code of the original license turns unavailable and divided License Sheet (PDF file) is sent to the installer by E-mail.
- Some type of license software cannot be divided into multiple license files. Refer to the remarks on
License Sheet to see the ordered license type.
Note 2: - Software keycode entry is necessary when the ordered software includes install CD (GENERIC
SOFTWARE).
- Whether to use middleware is supposed to be checked in downloading process. So be sure to check
the middleware use on the actual SV8500 server beforehand. If any difference is found, downloaded
SVI file cannot work. When software authentication has been completed on the system, middleware
check has already been done. Check to see no difference is found between the check result and the
actual middleware usage on the system.
- Be sure not to change the file name of the saved SVI file.
- One SVI file is saved.
- The SVI file is saved in zip form. Be sure not to unzip the SVI file because it is used as is.
225
CHAPTER 2
Launch PCPro Tools, select [Tool] - [Install Data Registration Setting] on the menu bar.
STEP 2
On Install Data Registration list, select the install data to which the SVI file is to be added. Click
[Detail] button.
* When no install data is displayed on the list, click [Add] button to create a new install data.
* On importing the SVI file in the procedure of Initial Startup, select the install data name registered when Install CD is imported.
STEP 3
Select [License] in the drop-down list of data type, and click [Import] button.
STEP 4
Click [Browse] button to select the folder where the SVI file is to be stored. Enter an install data
name and then click [Execute] button.
* When the same install data name is entered, existing file is to be overwritten.
STEP 5
Check the install data name entered in STEP 4 is displayed on the list.
STEP 2
Type "http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:9801/" into the address bar to access Telephony Server Maintenance Menu. Telephony Server Maintenance Menu Login screen appears. After the login,
Telephony Server Maintenance Menu screen appears.
Note: "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" represents the LAN1 IP address of the destination Telephony Server.
Note: The default for both user name and password is admin. You are recommended to change the user name
Click the Upload button for License on Telephony Server Maintenance Menu screen. The License Upload dialog box appears in the lower right postion of the screen.
226
CHAPTER 2
STEP 4
Click the Browse button in the dialog box and specify the SVI file obtained in Download License File.
STEP 5
Select Work and then click the Upload button in the dialog box. When the uploading is complete, Operation successfully completed will be displayed. Click OK button.
On PCPro Tools, select [System Control]. Select the assigned account name in [Connection Account Name] and click [Select] button. On process select window, select [Display active drive
(A/D Drv)] and then click [Execute] button. Check the operation drive on the processing window.
STEP 2
On the main menu of PCPro Tools, click Individual File Operation from [Menu] and select
License and click [Select] button. Change System Side if required.
STEP 3
Select [Upload (PC --> Telephony Server)] on the operation menu, and specify the install data
registration name and the license assigned in Import SVI File (only for FP85-108 S5 or earlier).
Change Drive if required.
STEP 4
Application Method
CFCS
SINZ
Remarks
Command command
Generic Term
Client License for DT7000 Series/DtermIP Series
DtermIP INASET
MH250
227
CHAPTER 2
License
Type
Application Method
CFCS
SINZ
Remarks
Command command
-
Generic Term
System License for FCCS (NCN)
System License for FCCS (LN)
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1: The SINZ command is used to apply for new assignment (For example, 0 to 1 or more).
The CFCS command is used to apply for additional assignment (For example, 1 to 2).
(a) Application for License with the CFCS command
STEP 1
Note:
On PCPro, run CFCS command and select [SVI Load and Checksum verify]. Click [Execute]
button to execute SVI file loading and checksum verification.
- When Redundant Data Memory Backup for Programs is in service, on the menu bar [Option]
[Drive Select], specify the drive (A/D) where the license software is added.
- In the case of loading or checksum verification failure, check the downloaded SVI file and go back to
Import SVI File (only for FP85-108 S5 or earlier).
228
CHAPTER 2
On PCPro, run SINZ command and execute [Program Load & Office Data Load & System Initialize]. Select the target drive from the menu bar [Option] [Drive Select] to specify the drive
where new program is written.
Note: When Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize, accompanied by the operating program
changeover (the target drive changeover between Drive A and Drive D), is executed, it will take approximately five minutes until the system starts up because OS is rebooted.
21.6 Operation Check
Referring to Chapter 6 INSTALLATION TEST in Installation Manual, check to see the applying connection is available.
21.7 Work after License Install
STEP 1
Read out the software key code and the hardware key code by AACT command, and then register them to the registration site to get activation code.
* For the detailed explanation on getting activation code, refer to the manuals on the registration site.
STEP 2
Note: When wrong activation code is entered by mistake, run AACT command again to enter correct activation
code.
229
CHAPTER 2
230
CHAPTER 2
Telephony Server
Telephony Server
SP 1
SP 1
SP 0
SP 0
(b) Distributes the terminals registered to one SP-PHD (SP0 or SP1) evenly between the SP-PHDs so as
to achieve load balance.
Telephony Server
Telephony Server
SP 1
SP 1
SP 0
SP 0
231
CHAPTER 2
Telephony Server
Telephony Server
Blocked
SP 1
SP 1
SP 0
SP 0
New Terminal
To move the terminals distributed between SP-PHDs (SP 1 and SP 0) so that all the terminals are
registered to one SP-PHD (SP 0).
To distribute all the terminals registered to one SP-PHD (SP 1) between SP-PHDs (SP 0 and SP 1)
To move the terminals distributed between SP-PHDs (SP 1 and SP 0) so that all the terminals are registered to one SP-PHD (SP 0).
(1) Blocked
SP 1
SP 1
SP 1
SP 0
SP 0
SP 0
(2) Reset
Terminals registered to SP 1 can be moved to SP 0 with the CTSP command, which resets all the member terminals of SP 1 and registers them to SP 0.
232
CHAPTER 2
While terminal reset is being performed, the number of member terminals of the SP 1 shown in the
[PHD] field of [MPH-ID Registration Terminal Information] is periodically updated, allowing the user
to check the progress of the connection switchover.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Click [Execute] button. The [Processing is being executed] dialog box appears.
STEP 4
Confirm that all the terminals are registered to SP 0 by checking the [PHD] field of [MPH-ID
Registration Terminal Information].
STEP 5
Click [Stop] button on the [Processing is being executed] dialog box. Note 2
Note 1: Choosing [Normal] resets only the member terminals in idle state; [Force] resets all member termi-
cause some of the terminals to re-register to SP 1. Be sure to click [Stop] button after confirming that
the connection switchover is complete.
To distribute all the terminals registered to one SP-PHD (SP 1) between SP-PHDs (SP 0 and SP 1)
SP 1
SP 1
SP 1
SP 0
SP 0
SP 0
(2) Reset
Terminals registered to SP 1 can be moved to SP 0 with the CTSP command, which resets half of the
member terminals of SP 1 using a random choice, and then registers them to SP 0.
While the terminal reset is being performed, the number of member terminals shown in the [PHD] field
is periodically updated, allowing the user to check the progress of the connection switchover.
233
CHAPTER 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
Click [Execute] button. The [Processing is being executed] dialog box appears.
STEP 4
By checking the [PHD] field of [MPH-ID Registration Terminal Information], confirm that half
of the terminals have been registered to SP 0 (they have been divided equally between SP 0 and
SP 1).
STEP 5
Click [Stop] button on the [Processing is being executed] dialog box. Note 2
Note: Be sure to keep the CTSP command active until the operation in step 5 is complete.
Note 1: Choosing [Normal] resets only the member terminals in idle state; [Force] resets all member termi-
cause some of the terminals to re-register to SP 1. Be sure to click [Stop] button after confirming that
the terminals are shared equally between SP 0 and SP 1.
SP 1
SP 1
SP 0
SP 0
Blocked
New Terminal
All terminals are registered to SP 0 or SP 1.
234
CHAPTER 2
STEP 2
STEP 3
Click [Execute] button. The [Processing is being executed] dialog box appears.
STEP 4
Click [Stop] button on the [Processing is being executed] dialog box. Note 2
Note: Be sure to keep the CTSP command active throughout the time period required to block new registration.
Note 1: When [Registration Restriction] is chosen, no terminal reset is performed. In this case, setting of
tered to SP 1.
23.3 Service Conditions
<Important Notices>
(1) This feature is available since FP85-108 S5.
(2) This feature only works on a Telephony Server with dual (redundant) configuration in which both SPs are
operating normally. If either SP is down due to a problem, this feature cannot be used.
<Interactions with Other Features>
(1) When this feature is used in an ACD system, the ACDP Automatic Logoff needs to be enabled with the
ASYDL/ASYDN command (SYS1, INDEX874 bit 3=1). Otherwise, ACD terminals are not logged off
even after being reset, to which incoming calls are still distributed. Thus calls routed to the terminals during
re-registration will remain unanswered.
<Hardware/Software>
(1) In this feature, up to a total of 4000 terminals can be controlled by SP-PHDs (SP 0/SP 1).
(2) This feature is only valid for terminals being controlled by SP-PHDs, such as IP terminals and SIP Multiple
Line terminals.
(3) This feature cannot control terminal registration/reset by terminal type.
<Interactions with Networks>
None.
<Conditions Specific to This Feature>
235
CHAPTER 2
None.
<Other Conditions>
None.
23.4 Data Assignment
ASYDL/ASYDN - Assignment of System Data (LDM)/(NDM)
Enable the ACDP Automatic Logoff feature by assigning the following values:
System Data 1
Index 874 Bit3=1 (ACDP Automatic Logoff is in service.)
Note: The data assignment above is required when this feature is used in an ACD system.
236
CHAPTER 3
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
System Messages
(1)
(2)
NEC TOKYO
(3)
LP00-0-ACT
(4)
JUL 24 09:35
Meaning:
(1)
SUP
237
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Alarms
CONN connector
IOC card
Telephony Server
SV 4PORT CA-A
Mmale
Ffemale
Printer
2400RS-232C CA-0/1
238
RS-232C cable
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b1 = Port 1
b3 = Port 3
b5 = Port 5
b7 = Port 7
IO Equipment No.
Port Number
Available/Not Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
SYS1, Index 39: System Message Automatic Output Designation for Dedicated Printer
Assign 1 to each bit corresponding to the Port Number of the IOC circuit card.
b0 = Port 0
b2 = Port 2
b4 = Port 4
b6 = Port 6
b1 = Port 1
b3 = Port 3
b5 = Port 5
b7 = Port 7
IO Equipment No.
Port Number
Available/Not Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
239
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
SYS1, Index 86
b4=1 (System Message Automatic Output to Dedicated Printer is in service)
b7: 0 (System Message Simplified Contents)/1(System Message Detailed Contents)
Always assign 1.
STEP 2
(3) Automatic Output to Dedicated Printer function is enabled (if a message is register, it will be outputted to
the printer).
Note: To temporarily suspend Automatic Output to Dedicated Printer function, set Make-busy information for
To enable System Message Scan service, assign 1 to SYMSCAN parameter on AIOC command for IOC Port Number = 0.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Click Scan New Alarms/Traffic and Collect New Alarms buttons to place these buttons into
pressed position (ON).
When the Fault Scanning is effective, PCPro can scan the System status by polling every 20 seconds. If the
System has faults, DFTD command is automatically activated and System Messages are output.
240
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Display all the System Messages which are currently occurring. These
messages are stored in the database in the PC.
Close the DFTD command. (The data in the database is not cleared.)
Abort the readout of the System Message(s).
Print out the System Message(s) displayed on the screen.
Save the System Message(s) displayed on the screen into the file.
Clear the System Message(s) displayed on the screen.
Display all the System Messages stored in the database.
Clear all the System Messages stored in the database.
Set the colors of the background, lamps and letters on the screen.
241
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
After reading out the System Messages by DFTD, click View Database button to display a
listup report similar to the following.
Figure 3-1 How to Export: Listup Report Screen Image
STEP 2
STEP 3
The following dialog appears. Select Text (TXT) in Format list box and Disk file in Destination list box respectively.
STEP 4
Press OK button.
Figure 3-2 How to Export: File Format and Destination for Export
STEP 5
Save the data by specifying an appropriate file name and directory in which the file to be saved.
242
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
3. System Messages
This section explains how to read and analyze system messages displayed during routine diagnosis, system
operation status controlling, and occurrence of a fault within the system. The following table provides a list of
system messages.
System Messages List
MESSAGE NO.
SYSTEM MESSAGE
0-C
Reset Interrupt
0-D
0-E
0-F
Memory Failure
0-G
0-H
0-I
0-J
Abnormal Interrupt
1-A
1-B
1-C
1-D
1-E
1-F
1-O
1-P
PLO Failure
1-S
1-T
1-U
1-V
1-W
PLO Restore
3-B
3-C
3-D
3-E
3-F
3-G
Ground Failure
3-H
243
CHAPTER 3
SYSTEM MESSAGE
3-I
3-J
3-K
Line Fault
3-L
4-C
4-D
4-Q
4-R
4-S
4-T
4-U
4-V
4-W
4-Y
5-Q
6-A
6-A
6-A
6-B
6-C
6-D
6-H
6-I
6-J
Emergency Call
6-L
6-M
6-N
6-O
6-P
7-A
244
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages List (Continued)
MESSAGE NO.
SYSTEM MESSAGE
7-B
System Initialize
7-C
7-D
7-E
7-F
7-G
7-H
7-K
PM MB Key Turn ON
7-L
7-M
7-N
7-O
7-P
7-Q
PFT Key ON
7-R
7-U
7-V
10-A
10-B
10-C
10-D
10-E
10-F
10-G
10-L
11-A
13-A
13-B
13-C
13-D
13-E
13-F
245
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages List (Continued)
MESSAGE NO.
SYSTEM MESSAGE
13-G
13-H
13-I
13-J
13-K
13-N
13-O
13-P
13-Q
13-R
13-Z
Power Failure
15-A
15-B
15-C
VPS Restore
16-A
16-B
16-C
16-E
16-F
16-K
16-L
16-M
16-N
16-T
16-U
16-X
17-A
17-B
17-C
17-D
17-H
17-O
246
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages List (Continued)
MESSAGE NO.
SYSTEM MESSAGE
17-P
17-Q
17-R
23-P
23-Q
23-S
23-T
23-U
23-W
23-X
23-Y
23-Z
25-A
25-B
25-C
25-D
25-E
25-F
25-G
25-H
25-I
25-J
25-K
ZT Set Up NG Note 5
25-L
ZT Fault Note 5
25-M
25-N
26-N
MAT Log
26-R
Call Trace
26-V
26-W
26-Y
26-Z
247
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
SYSTEM MESSAGE
33-A
33-B
33-C
33-D
33-E
33-F
33-G
33-H
33-L
33-M
33-N
DCS Alarm
33-O
33-P
33-Q
33-R
IP PKG Warning
33-S
IP PKG Failure
33-T
IP PKG Restore
35-C
SP Warning Notification
35-D
SP Failure
35-E
SP Failure Recovery
35-F
SP Process Information
35-G
SP Process Warning
35-I
SP Process Stop
35-K
36-A
36-E
36-F
36-G
Bandwidth Warning
36-H
36-I
Bandwidth Fault
36-J
36-K
248
CHAPTER 3
System Messages List (Continued)
MESSAGE NO.
SYSTEM MESSAGE
36-M
36-N
36-O
36-P
36-T
36-Y
249
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the processor is reset due to a failure in the system.
1:XXXX XX0 0 XXXX XX0 0
2:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b1
b0
b0
b0:
b1:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b0:
b1:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b7:
Reference: See section 3.6.2 on page 719, for the repair procedure.
Note 1: For FP85-108 S5 or later version, when a memory retained reset executed by ACDP Quick Initializa-
tion feature ends successfully, b3=1 and b4=1 will be issued. When this memory retained reset ends in
failure, b3=1 and b4=0 will be issued instead.
250
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0:
b0
b1:
b2:
b8
b3:
b4:
b23
b21 b20
b17 b16
b5:
b6:
b31
b24
b7:
b8:
b39
b37
b9:
b10:
b47
b40
b11:
b12:
b13:
b14:
b15:
b16:
b17:
b20:
b21:
b32:
b33:
b34:
b35:
b37:
b39:
b40:
System Messages
251
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Note 2: For FP85-108 S5 or later version, when a Non-Load Initialization is restarted with ACDP Quick Ini-
tialization feature, each Data Load Status given in [4] Data Load Result after restart processing will
be issued with Normal End. Check the results in b7: DM Load Status 0/1 = -/DM Non Load to
determine whether the data was loaded successfully or not.
Note 3: SIP Extension mentioned here refers to an SP Controlled SIP terminal.
252
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a fault has occurred to the clock oscillator in the CPU.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b5
b4
b3
b0
b5
b4
b3
b0
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
0/1=-/Monitor Restart
0/1=-/Initialization
0/1=Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1=-/MB control
0/1=ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
0/1=-/Monitor Restart
0/1=-/Initialization
0/1=-/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1=-/MB control
0/1=ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)
b7:
0/1=Released/Not released
b0
Reference: See section 3.6.2 on page 719, for the repair procedure.
253
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
C-Level infinite loop is a state where a clock-level program, running under clock interrupt disable state, is in an
infinite loop. This message displays when the counter value to check the normality of the processing has become
abnormal.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
[7]
[8]
[8]
8:XX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[8]
b5
b4
b3
b0
b5
b4
b3
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
Reference: See Section 3.6.2, Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently on ACT side, for the repair
procedure.
254
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
System Messages
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
255
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
[7]
[8]
[8]
8:XX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[8]
b5
b4
b3
b0
b5
b4
b3
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
Reference: See section 3.6.2 on page 719, for the repair procedure.
256
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
System Messages
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
257
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b5
b4
b3
b0
b5
b4
b3
b0
b1
b0
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
b0:
b1:
258
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when, in the CPU program processing, the counter value to check the normality of the
processing has become abnormal.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b5
b4
b3
b0
b5
b4
b3
b0
[3]
b7
b1
b0
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
b0:
b1:
259
CHAPTER 3
0-I:
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a fault, such as the Clock down or C-Level infinite loop error, has occurred.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
Reference: See Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently on ACT side, Control System Fault - STBY
Side is Faulty for the repair procedure.
260
CHAPTER 3
0-J:
System Messages
Abnormal Interrupt
Default Alarm
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when Central Processing Unit (CPU) has been abnormally interrupted in the process. If
the system receives this event, the system automatically executes the following actions depending the event
count.
EVENT COUNT
1-7
8
9-15
16
17-23
24
25-31
32
ACTIONS
Monitor Restart
Monitor Restart (Single System)
CPU System Changeover (Dual System)
Monitor Restart
Phase 1 Restart (for basic two-way
connections (STN-STN, STN-TRK, TRKTRK))
Monitor Restart
Non-Load Restart
Monitor Restart
Program Load Restart
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
261
CHAPTER 3
b5
b4
b3
b0
b5
b4
b3
b0
System Messages
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
262
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW in both
systems.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b1
b0
b6
b3
b2
b1
b0:
b1:
b0
b0:
b1:
263
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW card in one
of the dual systems.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b1
b0
b6
b3
b2
b1
b0:
b1:
b0
b0:
b1:
264
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW in both
systems.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b1
b0
b6
b3
b2
b1
b0:
b1:
b0
b0:
b1:
265
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW card in
one of the dual systems.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b1
b0
b6
b3
b2
b1
b0:
b1:
b0
b0:
b1:
266
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the system detects a clock failure, such as TSW internal clock down or Frame Head
down, in both systems.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b1
b6
b2
b2:
b6:
b7:
b0
b0:
b1:
b0
Reference: See Chapter 5 Speech Path System Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot be Heard for the repair
procedure.
267
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the system detects a clock failure, such as TSW internal clock down or Frame Head
down, in one of the dual systems.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b1
b6
b2
0/1 = -/TSW 0
0/1 = -/TSW System 1
b2:
b6:
b7:
b0
b0:
b1:
b0
Reference: See Chapter 5 Speech Path System Fault - STBY Side Has Become Fault, for the repair procedure.
268
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MJ
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the system detects a fault, such as input clock all down or output clock down in the
PLO cards, at both sides.
1:XXXX XXXX XX 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5]
b0:
b7
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Reference: See PLO Card Replacement Procedure, for the circuit card replacement procedure.
269
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b4
b1
b0
System Messages
b0:
b3
ROUTE OF INPUT
CLOCK
b5:
b6:
b7:
b0:
b1:
b4:
270
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the system detects all the failures concerned with input clock down or output clock
down in the PLO card at the ACT side. When this message is indicated, the PLO card changeover executes.
Note: The PLO Card 0 automatically changes over to 1. The changeover of 1 to 0 is not automatic.
1:XXXX XXXX XX 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5]
b0:
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Reference: See Chapter 5 PLO Card Replacement Procedure for the circuit card replacement procedure.
271
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b4
b1
b0
System Messages
b0:
b3
ROUTE OF INPUT
CLOCK
b5:
b6:
b7:
b0:
b1:
b4:
272
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MJ
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a fault of the speech path system has occurred in a specific Module Group. The
specific Module Group is placed into make-busy state.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b0:
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b1
b0:
b0
b1:
Reference: See Chapter 5 TSW Replacement: 1-IMG or TSW Card Replacement Procedure: 4-IMG for the
circuit card replacement procedure.
273
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the changeover of the TSW system is executed.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 XXXX XXXX
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XXXX XXXX
[7] [8]
[9] [10]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b0:
b0
274
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7-b4
b3-b0
CARD
TSW
b7
b6
I/O Alarm
10
11
13
15
MUX
[3]-[6]
CONTENTS
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
MG 00
MG 02
MG 04
MG 06
MG 01
MG 03
MG 05
MG 07
b7-b4
b3-b0
275
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
MG 00
MG 02
MG 04
MG 06
MG 01
MG 03
MG 05
MG 07
b7-b4
b3-b0
276
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when DLKC data transfer failure (temporary), shown in System Message [1-V], occurs
more than 16 times an hour. At this time, the faulty DLKC card is down and its switching network automatically
changes over.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
01H:
02H:
03H:
04H:
Firmware fault
Data transfer time out to DLKC
No answer time out (at DLKC)
Data parity error
b0:
b0
b0:
b1
b0
b1:
277
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a data sending error or no answer error occurs at the time of data transfer from CPU
to DLKC card.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
01H:
02H:
03H:
04H:
Firmware fault
Data transfer time out to DLKC
No answer time out (at DLKC)
Data parity error
b0:
b0
b0:
b1
b0
b1:
b7:
Note: This data displays when the STBY DLKC card is detected as faulty.
278
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a failure such as internal clock down occurred to PLO is restored.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b0:
b7
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b4
b1
b0
b0:
0/1 = Clock is in STBY side/ACT side
b3, b4: Current Route of Input clock (see the table below)
b4
b3
CONNECTED WITH
EXTERNAL CLOCK
M-OSC 0
Route 0
M-OSC 1
Route 1
Route 2
Route 3
b0:
b1:
b4:
279
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a C-Level program abnormal state is detected as permanent. When the Port
Microprocessor (PM) on an LC/TRK card detects the abnormal state, the PM places the card into make-busy
status. If the failure occurs more than 15 times an hour, the system judges the failure as permanent and issues
this system message.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b4: Group
b5-b6: Unit (0-3)
b7:
Module Group (0/1)
280
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when C-Level program is detected as abnormal by the Port Microprocessor (PM)
mounted on an LC/TRK card. If the failure occurs less than 15 times/hour, and a B-monitor/Initial restart
executes as the result, the failure is judged as temporary and this message is created.
1:XX0 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b4: Group
b5-b6: Unit (0-3)
b7:
Module Group (0/1)
b0:
Note
b0
Note: B-monitor Restart: Ports whose link has already been established remain connected. Ports processing a
281
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
At the periodic interval, the CPU sends diagnosis data to the Port Microprocessor (PM) on LC/TRK cards in
order to monitor the PM. If the CPU cannot receive the return data within a predetermined period of time, the
system displays this data. When the failure is detected more than 15 times per hour, the failure is judged as
permanent.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b4: Group
b5-b6: Unit (0-3)
b7:
Module Group
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG
Reference: See Chapter 5 Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently on ACT side for the repair
procedure.
282
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
At the periodic interval, the CPU sends diagnosis data to the Port Microprocessor (PM) on LC/TRK cards in
order to monitor the PM. If the CPU cannot receive the return data within a predetermined period of time, the
system displays this data. When the failure is detected less than 15 times per hour, the failure is judged as
temporary.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b4: Group
b5-b6: Unit (0-3)
b7:
Module Group
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG
b0:
b0
283
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when over current of the operating power (DC-48V) is supplied from the ATI/ELC
circuit card to the Attendant Console/Dterm. When this fault occurs, the related circuit card is placed into makebusy state and stops supplying power.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b4: Group
b5, b6: Unit
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG
284
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a wire of the line between the LC circuit card and the telephone set is short-circuited
with ground.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Note: This message displays when the specific LC card providing the above function is used.
285
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the DTI card detects an abnormal state of a digital line, but this failure has no
influence on the speech path. When the status worsens, the system issues [3-I] Digital Line Failure message.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0-b4: Group
b5, b6: Unit
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG
b0-b4: Time slot number in which the digital line failure occurred
(1-16, 17-31)
b0
286
CHAPTER 3
3-I:
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays after [3-H] Digital Line Warning lasts in the DTI card over the particular time. This
failure may cause a speech path fault to the DTI card.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 XXXX XXXX
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
4:XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[3] [4]
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
[3] [4]
[3] [4]
[3] [4]
[3] [4]
[3] [4]
[3] [4]
[3] [4]
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[3] [4]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b7
b4
b3
b0-b4: Group
b5, b6: Unit
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG
b0-b4:
01H = Frame alignment loss occurs 100 times a day
03H = Slip occurs 50 times a day
04H = Multi-frame alignment loss occurs 110 times a day
06H = Frame alignment loss lasts for two to three seconds
07H = Bit error rate is over 10-4
09H = Warning signal (AIS) from the opposite office has been received for
one second continuously.
0BH = Multi-frame alignment loss lasts for two to three seconds
0FH = Digital Line is not restored
11H = AIS signals are received continuously for one second.
b3-b7: Group number
b0
287
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
288
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
3-J:
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
289
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message indicates that A wire and B wire of the line between the LC circuit card and telephone set is shortcircuiting with each other.
Note: This message is available in Australia only.
1:XX0 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b2
b1
b0
290
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message indicates that A wire and B wire of the line between the LC circuit card and telephone set, which
once short-circuited (cf. 3-K Line Fault (Page 240)), have become normal.)
Note: This message is available in Australia only.
1:XX0 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b2
b1
b0
291
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a Ready Failure occurs in both systems as a result of the TSW card having a failure
or the card is not mounted properly.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b1
b0:
b1:
b0
b7:
292
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a Ready Failure occurs in one of the dual systems because the TSW card fails or
the card is not mounted properly.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b1
b0:
b1:
b0
b7:
Reference: See Chapter 5 Speech Path System Fault - STBY Side Has Become Fault or the repair procedure.
293
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when I/O Ready Failure occurs on a DLKC card.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b0
b0:
b7:
294
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MUX (PH-PC36) card has a Ready Failure in one of the dual systems. When
the card is not ready for service because of the failure or because the card is not mounted properly, the system
creates this message.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b2
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b0:
b1:
b2:
Reference: See Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX Card is Faulty and System Has Changed Over for the repair
procedure.
295
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MUX card has a Ready Failure in both of the dual systems. When the card is
not ready for service because of the failure or because the card is not mounted properly, the system creates this
system message.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b2
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b0:
b1:
b2:
Note 1: Though this message indicates the Ready Failure in both systems, the information displayed here only
relates to the ACT-side MUX status. (Two messages are not displayed separately.)
Note 2: Fixed as 0 (=ACT) Note 1.
Reference: See Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX Card is Faulty and System Has Changed Over for the repair
procedure.
296
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
[7]
[8]
[13]
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b3
b2
b1
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b7:
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b0
b3
b2
b1
b2
b1
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[9]
3:XX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0X XX0 0 0 0 0 X XX0 X
b3
b2
b1
297
CHAPTER 3
b0:
b7:
b0:
b2:
b3:
b7:
b0:
b0
b2:
b3:
b7:
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b0
b0
b3
b2
b0
b0
b3
b2
b3
b2
b1
298
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
b2
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b7:
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b0:
b7:
b3
b2
b1
b0
299
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the PCI card, which was detected as faulty, is recovered.
1: 0 X0 X 0 X0 X 0 X 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5]
b3
b2
b1
b0
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b0:
b0:
b0:
b1:
b0
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b1
b0
300
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
b2
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b7:
b0
b0:
b7:
301
CHAPTER 3
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0
302
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message is displayed when a communication failure is detected on the EMA MAIN card, the EXB card, or
the IOC card.
Note: This System Message is available since FP85-109 S6 Issue 2.0.
Note: For FP85-109 S6 Issue 3.0 or earlier, this System Message was called EMA Communication Failure No-
tification.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
303
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
NON
(FIXED)NON
(FIXED)3
This message displays when any of the following faults are detected:
Power failure
FAN failure
Fuse blowing
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
[5]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
Note 1: When abnormal PWR Supply is detected, the alarm lamps light as the following, according to the na-
304
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Note 2: When FAN failure is detected, the alarm lamps light as the following, according to the nature of its fail-
ure.
(1) When FAN failure is detected in any of the IMG, TSWR, or MISCR, MN lamp turns on.
(2) When either one of the three CPU FANs is faulty, MN lamp turns on.
(3) When two or all of the three CPU FANs are faulty, MJ lamp turns on.
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Reference: See Chapter 5 Power Supply Fault, for the repair procedure.
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
305
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
NON
(FIXED)NON
(FIXED)3
This message displays when an SR-MGC(E) detects any of the following faults:
PWR alarm
Note: The following shows a system message output from an SR-MGC(E), of which the system (MGC) is not
notified.
1:XX0 0 XXXX 0 0 0 0 XX0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Note: An SR-MGC(E) does not have any lamp indicating MJ and MN alarms; but PCPro provides the alarms.
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
306
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b4:
b5:
b0
b3:
b0
307
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
NON
(FIXED)NON
(FIXED)3
This message displays when an SR-MGC(S) detects any of the following faults:
PWR alarm
Note: The following shows a system message output from an SR-MGC(S), of which the system (MGC) is not
notified.
1:XX0 0 XXXX 0 0 0 0 XX0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Note 1: ALM lamp indicates MJ. For an SR-MGC(S) with dual power units mounted, failure even on a single
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
308
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3:
b4:
b4:
b5:
System Messages
Note: If dual power units are mounted on an SR-MGC(S), FAN0 represents a FAN on power unit of system-0
309
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a fault in either the ringer or howler tone occurs in the PWR card.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b2
b1
b0
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
310
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the CPU usage (occupancy) rate exceeds the value assigned to ASYD, SYS1,
INDEX 56, and the call origination from the pre-selected group of stations is restricted (i.e., Line Load Control
is set). This system message is always indicated as 0.
1: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
311
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the CPU usage (occupancy) rate becomes lower than the value assigned to ASYD,
SYS1, INDEX 57, and Line Load Control is cancelled. This system message is always indicated as 0.
1: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
312
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
[7] [8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[12]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b3: Station number digit with the fault. [This data is always indicated as
0 when type of connection is 2 (ACD Trunk).]
b4-b7: Type of connection
0 = Station connection
1 = Trunk connection
2 = ACD Trunk connection
b6
b4
b3
b2
b1
b3
b2
b1
b4-b7
b0-b3
[2]
DC0
DC1
[3]
DC2
DC3
[4]
DC4
DC5
b0
b0
313
CHAPTER 3
[6]-[8]
b7
b6
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
314
b4-b7
b0-b3
[6]
DC0
DC1
[7]
DC2
DC3
[8]
DC4
DC5
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
b6
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b0-b3
DC0
DC1
[3]
DC2
DC3
[4]
DC4
DC5
b1
b0
b4-b7
[2]
b0
b1
b0
315
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[3]-[6]
(b) Trunk
Route number + Trunk number
b4-b7
b4-b7
b0-b3
[3]
DC0
DC1
[3]
[4]
DC2
DC3
[4]
[5]
DC4
DC5
[5]
[6]
[6]
b0-b3
DC0
DC1
DC2
DC0
DC1
DC2
Example: RT 125,TK l0
01 25 00 l0
[3]-[6]
316
Route number
Trunk number
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[3]-[6]
[7], [8]
Not used
Error Counter
[3]-[6]
[7]
[8]
Pointer Address
Not used
Error Kind
Note
If other data is output, the ACD system may not be working correctly. In this case, be sure to install
the ACD application again by using the MSVICD command.
[3]-[6]
317
CHAPTER 3
6-I:
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays to indicate the result of a designated connection test (Individual Trunk Access) from a
station.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
[7] [8]
[9] [10]
[11]
[12]
[12]
[12]
[12]
[12]
[12]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
318
CHAPTER 3
[2]
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
System Messages
[3]-[5]
b3
b2
b1
b0
MEANING
---
Trunk busy
Sender busy
SMDR failure
Register busy
Tone fault
b4-b7
b0-b3
[3]
DC0
DC1
[4]
DC2
DC3
[5]
DC4
DC5
319
CHAPTER 3
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
System Messages
b3
b2
b1
b0
Note:When Logical Routes are assigned, Logical Route Numbers are displayed here.
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Note: When Logical Routes are assigned, Logical Route Numbers are displayed here.
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b1
b0
b0-b7: Trunk number for Outgoing trunk test, ORT/IRT Test, Sender Test
and Digital Conference test
Tone Slot number for Tone Test
0 = DT
1 = SPDT
2 = RBT
3 = CRBT, CWT
4 = BT
5 = RBT
6 = SST, WT
7 = SDT
8 = TRG
9 = SDTT
10 = CWRBT
14 = MSC
b0-b4: Dialed number digit sent by the test Trunk/Sender
or
Dialed Number digit received by the test Register
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
320
CHAPTER 3
b4-b7
b0-b3
b4-b7
b0-b3
b4-b7
b0-b3
DC0
DC1
DC12
DC13
DC0
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC14
DC15
DC2
DC3
DC4
DC5
DC16
DC17
DC4
DC5
DC6
DC7
DC18
DC19
DC6
DC7
DC8
DC9
DC20
DC21
DC8
DC9
DC10
DC11
DC10
DC11
321
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
6-J:
System Messages
Emergency Call
Default Alarm
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
[5] [6]
[7] [8]
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]-[6]
b7
[3] [4]
2:XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
DC0
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
DC5
(1st digit)
(2nd digit)
(3rd digit)
(4th digit)
(5th digit)
(6th digit)
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
DC0
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
DC5
(1st digit)
(2nd digit)
(3rd digit)
(4th digit)
(5th digit)
(6th digit)
322
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the LCR-Attendant Manual Override is set at the Attendant Desk Console.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
Note:
b2
b1
b0
Route Selection Time Pattern 0-7 corresponds to TDPTN 0-7 in the AOPR command.
323
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the LCR-Attendant Manual Override is cancelled at the Attendant Desk Console.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
Note:
b0
b0:
Fixed 0.
0 = Outgoing call restriction is released by Attendant Desk Console
Route Selection Patterns 0-7 corresponds to TDPTN 0-7 in the AOPR command.
324
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the system detects abnormal duration in the line connection between the calling
and called party. When the calling and called party establish a line connection and continue the hook-up for an
extremely short or long period of time [predetermined by the ASYD command (SYS1, INDEX 45, 46)], this
message is created.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XX0 0
[1] [2]
[2] [3]
[3] [3]
[3]
[4] [5]
[5] [5]
[5] [5]
[5] [5]
[5] [5]
[5]
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b3
b2
b1
b0
[5] [5]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b3
b2
b1
b0
325
b4-b7
b0-b3
DC0
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
DC5
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b4- b7
b0-b3
DC0
DC1
Note:
Route (a)
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Route (b)
b7
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b0-b7
(a)
(b)
(c)
Trunk (HEX)
(d)
Trunk (HEX)
b0-b3: OPRT
Route (Over 64)
b0-b3:
b1
b0
00 = Station-to-Station call
01 = Outgoing call to outside
02 = Incoming call from outside
326
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
b4-b7
00 = Station
01 = Attendant Console
b7
b6
b5
b4
b0-b3
(a)
b3
b2
Tenant
b1
Tenant
b0
DC0
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
DC5
b0-b3
b0-b7
Route (HEX)
Route (HEX)
Route (HEX)
Route (HEX)
Trunk (HEX)
Trunk (HEX)
Trunk (HEX)
Trunk (HEX)
DC0
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
DC5
DC6
DC7
DC8
DC9
DC10
DC11
DC12
DC13
DC14
DC15
DC16
DC17
DC18
DC19
327
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
When the SMDR output buffer usage rate exceeds a value specified with ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 249, or
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b3: FS
b4-b7: FE
This system message varies depending on the data.
FS
FE
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
328
MEANING
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
(a) FS = 0, FE = 0
[2] Availability of Buffer Usage Rate
information
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0-b3: Units
b4-b7: Tens
b0
b0
b0:
b0-b3: Units
b4-b7: Tens
b0
329
CHAPTER 3
(b) FS = 1, FE = 0
[2] Severity Level of Buffer Overflow
Alarm
b7
b1
b0
b0:
b0
b1
: NON CONT
: SUP
: MN
: MJ
b0
b6
b5
b4
b0
330
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
(c) FS = 2, FE = 0
[2] SMDR Group number
b7
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b0-b3: The SMDR Group number of the device where a failure has
occurred
b0-b7: The port number of SMDR Group where a failure has occurred (0-7)
b3
b2
b1
b0
(d) FS = 3, FE = 0
[2] SMDR Group number
b7
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b3: The SMDR Group number of the device where a failure has
occurred
331
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message appears to inform users that SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Alarm state (System Message [6-O])
no longer exists. The alarm state is cleared when:
SMDR output buffer usage rate drops from heights exceeding a value specified with ASYD, SYS1, INDEX
249 to less than a value specified with ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 250, or
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b3: FS
b4-b7: FE
This system message varies depending on the data.
FS
FE
(a)
(b)
332
MEANING
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
(a) FS = 0, FE = 0
[2] Availability of Buffer Usage Rate
information
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0-b3: Units
b4-b7: Tens
b0
b0
b0:
b0-b3: Units
b4-b7: Tens
b0
(b) FS = 2, FE = 0
[2] SMDR Group number
b7
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b3: The SMDR Group number of the device which has recovered from
a failure
b0-b7: The port number of SMDR Group which has recovered from a
failure (0-7)
333
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays after the office data is loaded and system initialization has executed.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
2:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
0/1 = IPL/PWR ON
0/1 = Load Key OFF/ON
0/1 = IPL KEY/PCPro INITIAL
0/1 = Program load/Non Program load
0/1 = -/Phase 1 Restart Note 1
Note 1: Phase1 Restart is executed when initializing the system without disrupting the following two-way con-
Fixed connections
334
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b0:
b3
b2
b1
b0
b1:
b2:
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b21 b20
b17
b16
b5:
b6:
b31
b24
b7:
b8:
b39
b32
b47
b40
b48
b62 b61
b56
b64
DM Load Status
0/1 = DM Load/Non Load
User Assign Soft Key Data Load Status
Sub Station Transfer Data Load Status
b10:
b11:
b13:
b15:
b16:
b71
b14:
b63
b9:
b12:
b55
b3:
b4:
b23
System Messages
b17:
b20:
b21:
b56:
b57:
b58:
b59:
b61:
b62:
b63:
b64:
MA-ID Data
335
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[1]
b7
b4
b3
b2
b0
b2:
b3:
b4:
Note:Phase 1 Restart is executed when initializing the system without disrupting the following two-way
Fixed connections
336
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MBR switch on the Telephony Server is turned ON at the time of system
changeover or speech path changeover.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b5
b4
b3
b0
[3]
b5
b4
b3
b0
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
337
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MBR switch on the Telephony Server is turned OFF at the time of system
changeover or speech path changeover.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b5
b4
b3
b0
b5
b4
b3
b0
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:
338
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MBR switch on the TSW card is turned ON at CPU changeover or speech path
changeover.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b7:
339
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MBR switch on the TSW card is turned OFF at CPU changeover or speech path
changeover.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b7:
340
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the PLO MBR switch on TSW is turned ON (UP).
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
0/1=System 0/System 1
b0
341
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the PLO MBR switch on TSW is turned OFF (DOWN).
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b0:
0/1=System 0/System 1
b0
342
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message is displayed when the MB switch on the line/trunk card is turned ON while extracting or inserting
a circuit card or at PM initialization. The message is also issued in the event of a failure of a circuit card.
Note: If the message is displayed, check the conditions of the circuit cards.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
343
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MB switch on the line/trunk card is turned OFF while extracting or inserting a
circuit card or at PM initialization.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
344
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MB switch on the PFT card is turned ON while extracting or inserting a circuit
card, or at PM initialization.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
345
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MB switch on the PFT card is turned OFF while extracting or inserting a circuit
card, or at PM initialization.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
346
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
In a specific time cycle, the system allows a routine diagnosis in its hardware and software to determine if they
are operating properly. This message indicates that the system has been checked by the routine diagnosis
program and the result of the diagnosis is normal.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
Note 1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Note 2: This is output when a PS line is accommodated on programmable line/feature key of the Dterm as a
sub line.
347
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
[7]
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b1:
b3:
0/1=-/Periodic Back-up
0/1=-/Unused Link Detection
b0:
b1:
b2:
b7
b7
b6
b6
b5
b5
b4
b4
b3
b3
b2
b2
b1
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
348
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
System Messages
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
349
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
b0:
b0:
b1:
b2:
b0:
b1:
b7
b0
b2
b1
b0
b1
b0
350
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b0:
b7
b0
351
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b0:
b7
b1
b0
b1:
CPU
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
352
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b0:
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
Unit 0, Even-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
Unit 1, Even-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
Unit 2, Even-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
Unit 3, Even-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
Unit 0, Odd-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
Unit 1, Odd-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
Unit 6, Odd-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
Unit 3, Odd-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
353
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
354
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
355
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[3]
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XX
[4]
3: 0 0 XX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[3]
[4]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b0:
b1:
b7
b1
b0
Note:
b0:
b1:
b7
b6 b5 b4
b3
b2
b1 b0
b2:
b3:
b4:
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b5:
b6:
b9:
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b10:
b11:
b13:
b14:
Note 4: SIP Extension mentioned here
b15:
refers to an SP Controlled SIP b16:
terminal.
b17:
0/1 = ACT Backup Data: Normal End/0/1 = STBY Backup Data: Normal End/In the Single System Configuration, the backup result of the STBY
side is always shown as Normal End.
356
CHAPTER 3
b0:
b1:
b7
b6 b5 b4
b3
b2
b1 b0
b2:
b3:
b4:
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b5:
b6:
b9:
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b10:
b11:
b13:
b14:
Note 5: SIP Extension mentioned here b15:
refers to an SP Controlled SIP b16:
terminal.
b17:
System Messages
357
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b0:
b3
b2
b1
b0
358
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
In a specific time cycle, the system allows a routine diagnosis in its hardware and software to determine if they
are operating properly. This message indicates that the system has been checked by the routine diagnosis
program and the result of the diagnosis is not normal.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
Note 1
359
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
System Messages
Note 1: The data in this area will be diverse, according to the diagnosis specified in [1]. For details on each
sub line.
360
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[3] [4]
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[5]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b0:
b0:
b1:
b2:
b0:
b1:
b7
b0
b2
b1
b0
b1
b0
361
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
LDM
[3]
[4] [5]
[6] [7]
NDM
[6] [7]
[4] [5]
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[6] [7]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note: On the e above diagram, the output location of [4]-[7] is different depending on which information to
b0:
b0:
b1:
b2:
00H:
01H:
02H:
03H:
04H:
05H:
b7
b0
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
362
CHAPTER 3
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
Note: When [4] (Error Type) is 00H, [5] Signal Code, [6] and [7] Error Drive are valid.
363
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
[3]
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b9:
b0:
0/1=-/CPU changeover
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b15
b1
b0
b9
b8
b3
b2
b1
b0
364
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
2:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[7] [8]
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[9] [10]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b0:
b7
b0
b6
b5
b4
b7
b3
b2
b6
b1
b5
b0
b4
As shown in the following table, each bit represents the Unit number
allocated for each MUX card in position. When 1 is set, the
corresponding MUX card (status: ACT) has a functional failure or is not
mounted in the proper location.
b3
b2
b1
b0
MG 0
MG 2
MG 4
MG 6
365
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b7
b3
b2
b1
b6
As shown in the following table, each bit represents the Unit number
allocated for each MUX card in position. When 1 is set, the
corresponding MUX card (status: STBY) has a functional failure or is not
mounted in the proper location.
b0
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Unit 1
Unit 0
Unit 3
Unit 2
Unit 1
Unit 0
MG 1
Unit 1
MG 0
Unit 0
Unit 3
MG 3
Unit 1
Unit 1
MG 7
Unit 2
Unit 1
Unit 0
MG 2
Unit 0
Unit 3
MG 5
System Messages
Unit 2
Unit 1
Unit 0
MG 4
Unit 0
Unit 3
Unit 2
Unit 1
MG 6
366
Unit 0
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
2:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[7] [8]
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[9] [10]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b0:
b7
b0
[3]-[6]
b7
b6
b5
b4
b7
b3
b2
b1
b6
b0
As shown in the following table, each bit represents the Unit number
allocated for each MUX card in position. When 1 is set, the
corresponding MUX card (status: ACT) has a functional failure or is not
mounted in the proper location.
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Unit 1
Unit 0
Unit 3
Unit 2
Unit 1
Unit 0
MG 1
Unit 1
MG 0
Unit 0
Unit 3
MG 3
Unit 1
Unit 1
MG 7
Unit 1
Unit 0
MG 2
Unit 0
Unit 3
MG 5
Unit 2
Unit 2
Unit 1
Unit 0
MG 4
Unit 0
Unit 3
Unit 2
Unit 1
MG 6
367
Unit 0
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b7
b3
b2
b1
b6
As shown in the following table, each bit represents the Unit number
allocated for each MUX card in position. When 1 is set, the
corresponding MUX card (status: STBY) has a functional failure or is not
mounted in the proper location.
b0
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Unit 1
Unit 0
Unit 3
Unit 2
Unit 1
Unit 0
MG 1
Unit 1
MG 0
Unit 0
Unit 3
MG 3
Unit 1
Unit 1
MG 7
Unit 2
Unit 1
Unit 0
MG 2
Unit 0
Unit 3
MG 5
System Messages
Unit 2
Unit 1
Unit 0
MG 4
Unit 0
Unit 3
Unit 2
Unit 1
MG 6
368
Unit 0
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
[3]
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b9:
b0:
0/1=-/CPU changeover
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b15
b1
b0
b9
b8
b3
b2
b1
b0
369
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b0:
b7
b1
b0
b1:
CPU
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
370
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b0:
b7
b1
b0
b1:
CPU
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
371
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b0:
b7
b1
b0
b1:
CPU
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
372
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[44H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (Changeover NG or CPU RAM Copy NG)
1: 4 4 XX 0 0 0 0 XXXX XXXX
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b0:
b7
b1
b0
b1:
CPU
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
373
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b0:
b7
b1
b0
b1:
CPU
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
374
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b0:
b7
b1
b0
b1:
CPU
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
375
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b0:
b7
b1
b0
b1:
CPU
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
376
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b0:
b7
b1
b0
b1:
CPU
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
377
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b0:
b7
b1
b0
b1:
CPU
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
378
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b0:
b7
b1
b0
b1:
CPU
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
379
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
[3]
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b9:
b0:
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b15
b1
b0
b9
b8
b3
b2
b1
b0
380
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[3]
[3]
[3]
5:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[3]
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[3]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b1
0
0
1
1
b2:
b7
b2
b1
b0
b0
0 = Unit 0
1 = Unit 1
0 = Unit 2
1 = Unit 3
0/1 = Even-number/Odd-number Module
[1]
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[7] [8]
5:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[29][30] [31]
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
381
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
<Level>
b7
b6
b5
b4
G0
G1
G2
G3
b3
b2
Level
b1
b0
0/1 = -/Ineffectively held
G30
G31
382
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[3]
[3]
[3]
5:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[3]
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[3]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b1
0
0
1
1
b2:
b7
b2
b1
b0
b0
0 = Unit 0
1 = Unit 1
0 = Unit 2
1 = Unit 3
0/1 = Even-number/Odd-number Module
[1]
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[7] [8]
5:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[29][30] [31]
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
383
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
<Level>
b7
b6
b5
b4
G0
G1
G2
G3
b3
b2
Level
b1
b0
0/1 = -/Ineffectively held
G30
G31
384
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
01H:
02H:
03H:
04H:
b7
b2
b1
b0
385
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[2]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[3]
[3]
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[3]
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
NUMBER OF TRUNK
INEFFECTIVE HOLD
-
2046
DATA (HEX)
2047
2048 (maximum)
386
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2nd
1: 5 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 XXXX XXXX
10th
11th
12th
[a] [b]
[a] [b]
4th
[a] [b]
[a] [b]
[a] [b]
13th
14th
15th
16th
[a] [b]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[a] [b]
[a] [b]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
6th
7th
8th
9th
[a] [b]
[a] [b]
[a] [b]
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[a] [b]
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b0-b2: LV (0-7)
b3-b7: G (0-24)
[a] [b]
5th
[a] [b]
3rd
b0-b2: U (0-3)
b3-b7: MG (0-31)
387
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[2]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[3]
[3]
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[3]
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
NUMBER OF TRUNK
INEFFECTIVE HOLD
-
DATA (HEX)
2046
2047
2048 (maximum)
388
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2nd
1: 5 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 XXXX XXXX
10th
11th
12th
[a] [b]
[a] [b]
4th
[a] [b]
[a] [b]
[a] [b]
13th
14th
15th
16th
[a] [b]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[a] [b]
[a] [b]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
6th
7th
8th
9th
[a] [b]
[a] [b]
[a] [b]
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[a] [b]
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b0-b2: LV (0-7)
b3-b7: G (0-24)
[a] [b]
5th
[a] [b]
3rd
b0-b2: U (0-3)
b3-b7: MG (0-31)
389
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
[3]
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b9:
b0:
0/1=-/CPU changeover
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b15
b1
b0
b9
b8
b3
b2
b1
b0
390
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
[1] Error detection by Routine Diagnosis [70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear NG
b1
b0
b1
0
1
b0
1 = CPU is abnormal
0 = Data Transfer error
391
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
[3]
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b9:
b0:
0/1=-/CPU changeover
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b15
b1
b0
b9
b8
b3
b2
b1
b0
392
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[3]
[4] [5]
[6]
[7] [8]
[9]
3: 0 0 XX 0 0 XX XXXX 0 0 0 0
[3]
[6]
[10]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b0:
b1:
b7
b1
b0
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b8
Note:
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b9:
b10:
b11:
b13:
b14:
b15:
b16:
b17:
393
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
Parameter
b0
Flash Card
Fault
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3 b2
b1 b0
System Messages
21H:
40H~47H:
53H:
57H:
59H~5BH:
80H~84H:
A0H:
A2H~A6H:
BDH:
C0H:
Failed installation
01H:
Flash Card being used by another
program
02H:
Flash Card not equipped
Error occurs;
b0:
0/1 = -/At the time data transfer started
b1:
0/1 = -/At the time data saved
b2:
0/1 = -/At the time data transfer ended
b3:
0/1 = -/At the time file transfer started
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b9:
b10:
b11:
b13:
b14:
b15:
b16:
b17:
394
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Parameter
Flash Card
Fault
b3
b2
b1
b0
System Messages
21H:
40H~47H:
53H:
57H:
59H~5BH:
80H~84H:
A0H:
A2H~A6H:
BDH:
C0H:
Failed installation
01H:
Flash Card being used by another
program
02H:
Flash Card not equipped
Error occurs;
b0:
0/1 = -/At the time data transfer started
b1:
0/1 = -/At the time data saved
b2:
0/1 = -/At the time data transfer ended
b3:
0/1 = -/At the time file transfer started
b6
b5
b4
b3 b2
b1 b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b9:
b10:
b11:
b13:
b14:
b15:
b16:
b17:
395
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
[3]
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b9:
b0:
0/1=-/CPU changeover
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b15
b1
b0
b9
b8
b3
b2
b1
b0
396
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b1
b0
b1
0
1
1
b0
1 = CPU is not normal
0 = Data transfer error
1 = No Answer error
397
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when PFT key (2 in SW00 on EMA card) is set to ON (upward).
Note: This message is available since S1E.
1: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
398
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when PFT key (2 in SW00 on EMA card) is set to OFF (downward).
Note: This message is available since S1E.
1: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
399
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MB switch on the PLO card is turned on while extracting or inserting a circuit
card.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b0:
b0
400
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MB switch on the PLO card is turned off while extracting or inserting a circuit
card.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b0:
b7
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0:
0/1 = Clock STBY/ACT
b1:
0/1 = PLO Synchronizing/PLO self-running or drifting
b2:
0/1 = -/Input clock down
b3, b4: Route of Input clock (see table)
b5:
0/1 = -/PLO input all down
b4 b3
b4
b1
b0
CONNECTED WITH
EXTERNAL CLOCK
M-OSC 0
Route 0
M-OSC 1
Route 1
Route 2
Route 3
b6:
b7:
b0:
b1:
b4:
401
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when Activation Code has not been registered for more than 29 days and less than 45
days.
1: X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
0000
2: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
3: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
[3]
4: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
5: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
6: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
7: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
8: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
9: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b1
b0
Value
Days
1E:
30 days passed
1F:
31 days passed
20:
32 days passed
21:
33 days passed
22:
34 days passed
23:
35 days passed
2C
44 days passed
402
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
403
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when Activation Code has not been registered for more than 44 days and less than 60
days.
1: X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
0000
2: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
3: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
[3]
4: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
5: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
6: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
7: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
8: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
9: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b1
b0
Value
Days
2D:
45 days passed
2E:
46 days passed
2F:
47 days passed
30:
48 days passed
31:
49 days passed
32:
50 days passed
3B
59 days passed
404
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
405
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MJ
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when Activation Code has not been registered for 60 days or more.
1: X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
0000
2: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
3: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
[3]
4: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
5: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
6: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
7: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
8: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
9: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b1
b0
Value
Days
3C:
60 days passed
3D:
61 days passed
3E:
62 days passed
3F:
63 days passed
40:
64 days passed
41:
65 days passed
7F
406
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
407
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message is displayed if the number of IP terminals exceeds the number of registered IP Licenses. One
message can display the information of 13 ports that encountered IP address acquisition NG.
#1
#2
[2]
#6
[3]
[2]
[3]
#12
[2]
[3]
[3]
[2]
#10
#5
[2]
#9
[3]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
#11
[2]
[3]
[2]
#13
[2]
#8
[3]
#4
[2]
#7
#3
[2]
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[3]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Total Number of IP License Acquisition NG ports (0-65535)
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b3: 0-9 (ones digit of Hour), b4-b7: 0-2 (tens digit of Hour)
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b0-b3: 0-9 (ones digit of Minute), b4-b7: 0-5 (tens digit of Minute)
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b2:
b3-b7:
Level
Group Number
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b8-b9:
Unit Number
b10-14:
MG Number
b15:
Not Used
408
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message is issued when Abnormal Reset Process is activated on the program.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b0
409
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when connection failure is detected between the Telephony Server and Survivable
Remote MGC (SR-MGC).
1: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
2: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
3: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
4: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
6: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7: X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0
[1]
[1] Function
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
high-speed method is available for an SR-MGC(E) in the system of FP85-105 S2 Issue 1.0 or later, and
for an SR-MGC(S) in the system of FP85-105 S2 Issue 6.0 or later.
Note 3: Available since FP85-108 S5.
Note 4: Available since FP85-109 S6.
410
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[2]
[3]
2: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
3: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
[4]
4: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
6: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7: X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
0000
[1] Function
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
411
0000
0000
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
412
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
3: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
4: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
6: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7: X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
[3]
0000
0000
0000
0000
[1] Function
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
413
0000
0000
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
System Messages
414
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
3: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
4: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
6: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7: X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
[1] Function
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
415
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
3: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
4: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
6: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7: X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
[3]
0000
0000
0000
0000
[1] Function
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
0000
416
0000
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
3: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
4: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
6: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7: X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
[3]
0000
0000
0000
0000
[1] Function
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[3] Factor
b7
b6
Error
Code
01H
b5
0000
0000
Error Detail
Troubleshooting
417
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
3: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
4: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
6: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7: X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
[3]
0000
0000
0000
0000
[1] Function
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
418
0000
0000
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
419
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
2: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
3: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
4: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
6: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7: X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
[1] Function
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
420
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the communication between Telephony Server and Survivable Remote MGC (SRMGC) recovers.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
[7] [8]
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[9]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2:XX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
421
CHAPTER 3
b6
[4]-[7]
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
422
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b6
[3]-[6]
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
IP Address of MGC
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-6:
01H = Health Check Packet Receiving OK
02H = Ping OK
03H = Health Check Send/Receive Complete Packet Receiving OK
b7:
0/1 = Health Check Recovery Detection after SR-MGC startup/
Health Check Recovery Detection after a failure is detected
b0-7: IP address of MGC which recovered from Health Check communication failure
423
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the state of SR-MGC is changed to Operating Mode or Stand-by Mode.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
Notification
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
424
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
425
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
When a trunk is disconnected from a station by Timed Forced Disconnect Trunk [T-63], this message displays
the LENS of disconnected trunk and the LENS of station or connected party.
Note: This System Message is available since FP85-109 S6 Issue 2.0.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 XXXX 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
426
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a clock down failure occurs in the CCH/DCH circuit card. When this message is
indicated, the related CCH/DCH card is placed into make-busy status.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
427
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when C-Level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit
card has occurred.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
428
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when C-Level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit
card has occurred.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
429
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a Port Microprocessor (PM) of the CCH/DCH card did not send an answer to the
CPU.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
430
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a Port Microprocessor (PM) of the CCH/DCH card did not send an answer to the
CPU.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
431
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when B-Level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit
card has occurred.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
432
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when B-Level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit
card has occurred.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
433
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a failure has continuously occurred to a common channel signaling link and the
link has been placed into make-busy state.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
434
CHAPTER 3
b3
b2
System Messages
b1
b0
FLT ID
CCITT
ERROR
00
01
DM (F = 1) response is received.
02
UA (F = 1) response is received.
03
UA (F = 0) response is received.
04
DM (F = 0) response is received.
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
40
435
FACTOR
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a failure has occurred to a common channel signaling link and the link has been
placed into make-busy state.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
436
CHAPTER 3
b3
b2
b1
System Messages
b0
FLT ID
CCITT
ERROR
00
01
DM (F = 1) response is received.
02
UA (F = 1) response is received.
03
UA (F = 0) response is received.
04
DM (F = 0) response is received.
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
40
437
FACTOR
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the faults pertaining to CCIS/ISDN Link are restored to normal.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
438
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a fault occurred to the Port Microprocessor (PM) within the CCH/DCH circuit card
and the restart processing is executed.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
439
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
440
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
441
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
442
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the battery is operated in the DRU system.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
443
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the main power of the DRU system is restored to normal.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
444
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b2
b1
b0
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b0:
b0
Reference: See Chapter 5 Replacement Procedure of PWR (Power) Circuit Card, for the circuit card
replacement procedure.
445
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group
446
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group
447
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group
448
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when Intra-Office Trunks (ATI, RST, etc.) have all become busy.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
449
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
ROUTE
NO.
DATA
(HEX)
TRUNK NAME
ROUTE
NO.
DATA
(HEX)
TRUNK NAME
901
01
Attendant Console
917
11
MFC Sender
902
02
918
12
Not used
903
03
919
13
MODEM
904
04
MF Receiver
920
14
MODEM
905
05
921
15
MODEM
906
06
922
16
MODEM
907
07
AMP
923
17
MODEM
908
08
Not used
924
18
MODEM
909
09
925
19
MODEM
910
0A
Not used
926
1A
MODEM
911
0B
Not used
927
1B
Not used
912
0C
928
1C
Not used
913
0D
929
1D
914
0E
Not used
930
1E
915
0F
Night ATTCON/DESKCON
931
1F
Not used
916
10
MFC Register
450
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when virtual tie line setup has completed.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
[1] Counter
b0:
b7
b0
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
00=01=Re-setup
b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group number
b0
451
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when virtual TIE line cancel has completed.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
[1] Counter
b0:
b7
b0
b2
b1
b0
0/1=-/Re-setup
b2
b1
b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group number
b0
452
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when virtual TIE line setup has failed due to a fault in the network of the terminating
office concerned.
1: 0 0 XX XX8 X XXXX 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2] [3]
[4] [5]
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group number
b0
453
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
System Messages
b0
CALL SOURCE
User
International network
Other
Spare
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
Class
X
Reason Kind
Value
X
8765
4321(bit)
-000
xxxx
-001
Normal Event Class
b0
CLASS
REASON
KIND
VALUE
DATA
REASON KIND
000
000
000
000
000
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
0001
0010
0011
0110
0111
0000
0001
0010
0011
0101
0110
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
1
2
3
6
7
16
17
18
19
21
22
26
27
28
29
30
31
Dead Number
No route to the designated transit network
No route to the opposite Party
Use of channel not allowed
Call terminated to a setup channel
Normal disconnection
Called user busy
No response from called user
Called party being rung/no answer
Communication denied
Opposite partys terminal number changed
Disconnection and release of the user not selected
Opposite partys terminal out of order
Invalid number format (incomplete number)
Facility denied
Answer to status inquiry
Other normal class
454
CHAPTER 3
010 xxxx
Classes not allowed use of resources
Class
X
Reason Kind
Value
X
8765
4321(bit)
011
xxxx
Classes not allowed use of services
100 xxxx
Classes not provided with services
101 xxxx
110 xxxx
Procedure error (ex: unrecognized
message) class
111 xxxx
Interworking class
System Messages
CLASS
REASON
KIND
VALUE
DATA
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
0010
0110
1001
1010
1011
1100
1111
34
38
41
42
43
44
47
011
011
011
011
011
0001
0010
1001
1010
1111
49
50
57
58
63
100
100
100
100
100
0001
0010
0101
0110
1111
65
66
69
70
79
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
1000
1011
1111
81
82
83
84
85
86
88
91
95
110
110
110
0000
0001
0010
96
97
98
110
110
110
110
110
0011
0100
0101
0110
1111
99
100
101
102
111
111
111
127
Others
REASON KIND
No usable channel/line
Network failure
Temporary failure
Switching system congested
Access information discarded
Use of requested line/channel not allowed
Class not allowed use of other resources
Use of QoS restricted
Requested facility not contracted
Bearer capability restricted
Bearer capability restricted at present
Class not allowed to use other services or options
455
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message indicates that an outgoing call (by connection acknowledge system) has not received an
acknowledgment signal from the opposite office. As a result, the attempted outgoing call is routed to Reorder
Tone (ROT) connection.
1:XXXX XXXX XX 0 X XX0 X
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
[7] [8]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[12]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
[2]-[4]
b7
b6
b2
b1
b0
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b2
b1
b0
b4-b7
b0-b3
[2]
DC0
DC1
[3]
DC2
DC3
[4]
DC4
DC5
b7:
OP data (0/1)
When OPTN data of [6] is valid, 1 displays.
456
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b3
b2
b1
b0
Note: This data displays when the Tenant number of the calling station is larger than 15, and b7 of [5] displays
as 1 (otherwise, 0 displays at any time). While the four-bit data of [5] is self-sufficient in verifying
Tenant 1-15, this OPTN data provides a supportive role to cover Tenant number ranging from 16 to 255.
Use the following method to analyze the data:
Tenant number of Calling Station (1-15)
b0 - b3 of [5]
OPTN data
Tenant No.
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b0 - b3 of [5]
b7:
b1
AC data
0/1=Internal trunk/External trunk
b6:
OP data (0/1)
When OPRT data of [8] is valid, 1 displays,
b0-b5: OG route number
b6=0
Route number <64 Refer to the OPTN
b6=1
63<Route number
data of [8]
b0
Tenant No.
b3
b2
b1
b0
Note:This data displays when the OG Route number is larger than 63, and b6 of [7] displays as 1 (otherwise,
0 displays at any time). While the six-bit data of [7] is self-sufficient in verifying the Route 1-63, this
OPRT data provides a supportive role to cover Route number larger than 63. Use the following method to
analyze the data:
OG Route (1-63)
OPTN data
OPTN data (variable)
457
OG Route No.
b0 - b5 of [7]
OG Route No.
b0 - b5 of [7]
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0-b7:
b0-b7:
b0-b4:
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b4-b7
b0-b3
DC0
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
DC5
DC6
DC7
DC8
DC9
DC10
DC11
DC12
DC13
DC14
DC15
DC16
DC17
DC18
DC19
DC20
DC21
458
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b6
b7
1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b6
0 = Tandem connection
b7:
b1
AC data
0/1=Internal trunk/External trunk
b6:
OP data (0/1)
When OPRT data of [3] is valid, 1 displays.
b0-b5: IC route number
b6=0
Route number<64 Refer to the OPTN
b6=1
<63 Route number data of [3]
b0
b7
b3
b2
b1
b0
Note:This data displays when the IC Route number is larger than 63, and b6 of [2] displays as 1 (otherwise,
1 displays at any time). While the six-bit data of [2] is self-sufficient in verifying the Route 1-63, this
OPRT data provides a supportive role to cover Route number larger than 63. Use the following method to
analyze the data:
IC Route (1-63)
OPRT data
OPRT data (variable)
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
IC Route No.
b0 - b5 of [2]
IC Route No.
b0 - b5 of [2]
b0
459
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
System Messages
b7:
b1
AC data
0/1=Internal trunk/External trunk
b6:
OP data (0/1)
When OPRT data of [8] is valid, 1 displays,
b0-b5: OG route number
b6=0
Route number<64
Refer to the OPTN
b6=1
<63 Route number
data of [8]
b0
b7
b3
b2
b1
b0
Note:This data displays when the OG Route number is larger than 63, and b6 of [7]displays as 1 (otherwise,
0 is displays at any time). While the six bit data of [7] is self-sufficient in verifying Route 1-63, this OPRT
data provides a supportive role to cover Route number larger than 63. Use the following method to analyze
the data:
OG Route (1-63)
OPRT data
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0 - b5 of [7]
OG Route No.
OG Route No.
b0 - b5 of [7]
b0-b7:
b0-b7:
460
CHAPTER 3
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0-b4:
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b4-b7
b0-b3
DC0
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
DC5
DC6
DC7
DC8
DC9
DC10
DC11
DC12
DC13
DC14
DC15
DC16
DC17
DC18
DC19
DC20
DC21
461
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the DR signal of the RS-232C, connected to the port designated by the system data,
remains off for 30 consecutive seconds while the system is in service (immediately after startup in the case of
system start-up).
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
462
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
IOC 1
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when [16-K] I/O Port Line Down Failure is restored to normal.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
463
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
IOC 1
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the timer circuit in the system becomes faulty and stops functioning and a 64 Hz
clock alarm is output.
1: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
464
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when [16-K] 64 Hz Clock Down Detected is restored to normal.
1: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
465
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b4
b3
b2
b1
0/1 = 0/1
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b0
b0:
b0
466
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the IOC card failure, observed in the message [16-T], is detected more than eight
times a day.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b4
b3
b2
b1
0/1 = 0/1
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b0
b0:
b0
467
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the user uses Follow Phone (SWAP) service.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XX0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
[7]
[8] [9]
[14]
3:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[14]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
FAILURE
00
Normal End
01
MG mismatch
02
03
04
TEC unmatch
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13-15
468
CHAPTER 3
FAILURE
16
17
18
19
Call Forwarding - All Calls has been set to Calling or Called station
20
Call Forwarding - Busy Line has been set to Calling or Called station
21
Call Forwarding - Dont Answer has been set to Calling or Called station
22-31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group (0-22)
b0
b0
469
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
[11]-[13]
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0-b3
[5]
DC0
DC1
[6]
DC2
DC3
[7]
DC4
DC5
b4-b7
b0-b3
[11]
DC0
DC1
[12]
DC2
DC3
[13]
DC4
DC5
b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group
b0
b4-b7
b0
b0
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
470
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MBR switch on the CCH/DCH card is turned ON.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b1
b0
471
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MBR switch on the CCH/DCH card is turned OFF.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b1
b0
472
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MB switch on the CCH/DCH card is turned ON while extracting or inserting a
circuit card or at PM initialization, etc.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
473
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MB switch on the CCH/DCH card is turned OFF while extracting or inserting
a circuit card or at PM initialization, etc.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
474
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the NIGHT switch on the ATTCON/DESKCON is operated or when the DAY/
NIGHT change is executed by the external switch operation.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
Note 1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b0-b7:
b2
b1
b0
475
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
System Messages
MEANING
b4 b5 b6 b7
0
Day Mode
Night Mode 1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b0-b7:
b1
b0
01=Not used
02=Day/Night Change
03=Not used
476
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message is displayed when IOC card is removed from the module while the MBR is set to OFF.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b0:
b0
477
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message is displayed when IOC card is inserted into the module while the MBR is set to OFF.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b0:
b0
478
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message is displayed when the MBR switch on the IOC card is turned ON.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b0:
b0
479
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displayed when the MBR switch on the IOC card is turned OFF.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b0:
b0
480
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the Primary Dch fails, and the Dch Back-Up function is operated automatically.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b0-b7:
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
1 = Back-up Start
2 = Back-up End
3 = Back-up Failed
481
CHAPTER 3
b3
b2
b0, b1:
b1
b0
b2, b3:
00 = Change signal is received
01 = Change signal is sent
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
System Messages
b1
b0
482
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the Primary Dch fails, and the Dch Back-Up function is operated manually.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b0-b7:
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
1 = Back-up Start
2 = Back-up End
3 = Back-up Failed
483
CHAPTER 3
b3
b2
b1
b0
System Messages
b0, b1:
00 = Change from Primary Dch to Dch for Back-up
01 = Change from the Dch for Back-up to Primary Dch
10 = Place Primary Dch to ACT status
11 = Place Dch for Back-up to ACT status
b2, b3: Way of changing
00 = Changed by the MAT
01 = Changed by the MB switch of the circuit card
02 = Changed by placing Dch to Make-Busy
03 = Unknown
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
484
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MUX card has a clock failure in one of the dual systems.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0
b3
b2
b1
Reference: See Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX Card is Faulty and System Has Changed Over for the repair
procedure.
485
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MUX card has a clock failure in both of the dual systems.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0
b3
b2
b1
Reference: See Chapter 5 MUX Replacement: 1-IMG or MUX Replacement: 4-IMG for the circuit card
replacement procedure.
486
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
[2] [2]
[2] [2]
[2] [2]
[3] [3]
[3] [3]
[3] [3]
[3] [3]
[3] [3]
[3] [3]
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b6
b5
b4
b2
b1
b0
[3] [3]
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[3] [3]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b3
b2
b1
b0
487
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message is issued when a call, originated via a station/trunk, is judged as malicious, and then, the details
on the call are traced with the called party pressing an access code or the Call Trace key.
When a call is originated from a station
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[7]
[8]
5:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[11]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[3]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[4]
b6
b5
b4
[9]
b3
b2
b1
b0
[5]
488
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
DC4
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
DC5
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
DC4
DC6
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
DC5
DC7
b4 - b7
DC8
DC10
DC12
DC14
b0 - b3
DC9
DC11
DC13
DC15
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b6
b5
b4
b3
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[7]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[8]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[9]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[10]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[11]
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
DC4
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
DC5
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
DC4
DC6
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
DC5
DC7
b4 - b7
DC8
DC10
DC12
DC14
b0 - b3
DC9
DC11
DC13
DC15
1~9
A
0
B
*
C
#
0
blank
For example:
1A0 is output for indicating the FPC 10, and 1A3 for the FPC 103.
1A is output for indicating the Tenant Number 10.
Note 2: This message is output only when the callers User Group Number is 1.
Note 3: When no Telephone Number is allocated to the connected partys number in Station-to-Station calls,
FPC, User Group Number, Tenant Number, and Telephone Number data here is output as 0.
489
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[2]
[3]
[5]
3:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[6]
5:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[7]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[3]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[4]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[5]
490
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
DC4
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
DC5
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
DC4
DC6
DC8
DC10
DC12
DC14
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
DC5
DC7
DC9
DC11
DC13
DC15
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b6
b5
b4
b3
b1
b0
[7] Calling number of Trunk Call (Caller ID) (HEX) Note 1, Note 2
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Actual Meaning
1~9
1~9
blank
[7]
b4 - b7
DC0
DC2
DC4
DC6
DC8
DC10
DC12
DC14
DC16
DC18
DC20
DC22
DC24
DC26
DC28
DC30
b0 - b3
DC1
DC3
DC5
DC7
DC9
DC11
DC13
DC15
DC17
DC19
DC21
DC23
DC25
DC27
DC29
DC31
For example:
1A0 is output for indicating the FPC 10, and 1A3 for the FPC 103.
1A is output for indicating the Tenant Number 10.
Note 2: If the number of the trunk call (Caller-ID) cannot be identified, the data here is output as 0.
491
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message is issued when the connection error related to external LAN Interface equipment occurs in the
system.
TCP/IP Part
Application Part
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
[7]
4:XXXX XXXX XX 0 0 0 0 0 0
[29]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]-[4]
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
IPv4 Address for external equipment in which error has been detected. (HEX)
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b23
b22
b21
b20
b19
b18
b17
b16
b31
b30
b29
b28
b27
b26
b25
b24
[5], [6] Socket number (Used Socket number) (HEX) -Socket Number used by application, in which error has
been detected.
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
492
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[7] Error Code (TCP/IP Error Code) (HEX) See Table 3-1.
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
DEFINITION
01 (01)
Not operational
16 (22)
25 (37)
31 (49)
32 (50)
Network is down
37 (55)
41 (65)
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0-b7:
(HEX)
01=SUPER SERVER
02=MAT
03=SMDR
04=MCI
05=OAI
06=PMS
07=MIS
08=NMS
09=CS Report
b0-b7:
(HEX)
Device Number of error-detected Client PC.
If the Machine Number is not determined, 00
is output.
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
493
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b0-b7:
b3
b2
b1
b0
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
System Messages
b3
b2
(HEX)
01 =SEND Execution error
02 =RECEIVE Execution error
06 =Time Over
07 =Parity error
08 =Connection error
09 =Connection Port Capacity Over
0A=Detection of B-Level Infinite Loop
0B=Disconnection by Remote Control
0F =TCP/IP Internal Process error
10 =TCP/IP Internal Process error
-When 01/02 is output at [10] (HEX)
b0-b7: 01
-When 06 is output at [10] (HEX)
b0-b7: 01
-When 08 is output at [10] (HEX)
b0-b7: 01
-When 09/0A is output at [10] (HEX)
b0-b7: 00
-When 0B is output at [10] (HEX)
b0-b7: 01
[29] The IPv6 Address of an external LAN interface where an error is detected (HEX)
Note: Available since FP85-109 S6. This is only displayed when Application Type is 02 (MAT).
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b23
b22
b21
b20
b19
b18
b17
b16
b31
b30
b29
b28
b27
b26
b25
b24
b39
b38
b37
b36
b35
b34
b33
b32
b47
b46
b45
b44
b43
b42
b41
b40
494
CHAPTER 3
b55
b54
b53
b52
b51
b50
b49
b48
b63
b62
b61
b60
b59
b58
b57
b56
b71
b70
b69
b68
b67
b66
b65
b64
b79
b78
b77
b76
b75
b74
b73
b72
b87
b86
b85
b84
b83
b82
b81
b80
b95
b94
b93
b92
b91
b90
b89
b88
b98
b97
b96
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b7:
(HEX)
Device Number of error-detected Client PC.
If the Machine Number is not determined, FF
is output.
495
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b0-b7:
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
System Messages
(HEX)
01=SEND Execution Error
02=RECEIVE Execution Error
03=SEND Execution Count Over
04=RECEIVE Execution Count Over
05=System Data is not assigned
06=Time Over
07=Parity Error
08=Connection Error
09=Connection Port Capacity Over
0A=Detection of B-level Infinite Loop
0B=Disconnection from remote
0C=Undefined message receive
0D=SEND Execution Error
0E=Duplicated device number is used
0F=TCP/IP Internal Process Error
10=TCP/IP Internal Process Error
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b7:
(HEX)
OAI logical number for external LANs whose fault
has occurred
496
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b0-b7:
b2
b1
b0
System Messages
(HEX)
01=SEND Execution Error
02=RECEIVE Execution Error
03=TCP/IP Connection Error
04=Connection Error (B-Level Infinite Loop, etc.)
05=TCP/IP Port Capacity Over
06=TCP/IP Connection Error (Service Invalid)
497
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0-b7:
b0
b0-b7:
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
(HEX)
Device number for external LANs whose fault has
occurred. Non-specified equipment indicates 00.
b0-b7:
b0
b0-b7:
498
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
System Messages
499
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the LAN Interface Connection Failure, detected in System Message [26-V],
recovers. The message displays when the LAN Interface Connection Failure is restored. The first data is
normally sent/received by the recovered application equipment.
TCP/IP
Application
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
2:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[7] [8]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[9]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]-[4]
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
IPv4 Address for external equipment in which error has been detected. (HEX)
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b23
b22
b21
b20
b19
b18
b17
b16
b31
b30
b29
b28
b27
b26
b25
b24
[5], [6] Socket number (Used Socket number) (HEX) - Socket Number used by application whose failure has
been received.
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
500
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
System Messages
b0-b7:
(HEX)
01=SUPER SERVER
02=MAT
03=SMDR
04=MCI
05=OAI
06=PMS
07=MIS
08=NMS
09=CS Report
b0-b7:
(HEX)
Device number of recovered Client PC
for external LAN Interface.
b0-b7:
(HEX)
01=Recovered
02~FF=Not defined
b0-b7:
(HEX)
Device number of recovered Client PC.
b0-b7:
(HEX)
Device Number of recovered Client PC for external
LAN interface.
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
501
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b0-b7:
b1
b0
System Messages
(HEX)
01=Recovered
02-0F=Not defined
10=Process Stop is recovered
11=Process Activation Error is recovered
12=DB related error when receiving call data recovery
13=DB related error when compiling recovery reports
14=DB related error when editing recovery reports
15=DB Capacity Alarm is recovered
16=Restore Error of HD is recovered
502
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the MUX card, whose clock function was detected as faulty, is recovered.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
503
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when an abnormal state is detected temporarily on the SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card.
1:X0 XX 0 0 XX XXXX XX0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b7:
b7
b0
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
fied in [3].
b4, b3
00
00
00
00
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
10
10
10
10
10
10
b7:
b2-b0
000
001
010
011
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
000
001
010
011
100
101
Hardware Failure
Optical Line Failure
Onboard Power Alarm
PCM Loss
Frame Alignment Loss
Receiving Section Failure
Mistake Rate Degradation
Sending Section Failure
Mistake Detection
Receiving Path Failure
Pointer Failure
Sending Path Failure
Receiving Path Error
Sending Path Error
504
SDT Card
Trouble
52M Interface
Alarm
VC-11 Path
Trouble
Note
CHAPTER 3
[3] Alarm-detected HW
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
System Messages
The data here specifies the HW, on which any of the VC-11 Path Trouble was
detected in data [2]. Note.
Refer to the table below:
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
Repair Procedure
Fault repair work is not required by the display of this message. If the message is created frequently, it is
recommended that the repair work be performed as shown in System Message [33-C] SDT Alarm Trouble.
505
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when a grave failure occurs on the SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card. If this is issued, remember
the ACT/STBY change of the SDT card may be followed, as a result of fault detection in the optical fiber line
(see System Message [33-E]).
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b7:
b7
b0
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
on each alarm.
b4, b3
00
00
00
00
00
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
10
10
10
10
10
10
b7:
b2-b0
000
001
010
011
100
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
000
001
010
011
100
101
Hardware Failure
Optical Line Failure
Onboard Power Alarm
Abnormal MB Key Operation
PCM Loss
Frame Alignment Loss
Receiving Section Failure
Mistake Rate Degradation
Sending Section Failure
Mistake Detection
Receiving Path Failure
Pointer Failure
Sending Path Failure
Receiving Path Error
Sending Path Error
506
SDT Card
Trouble
52M Interface
Alarm
VC-11 Path
Trouble
Note
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Repair Procedure
Depending on the fault status shown in data [2], perform necessary repair work:
(1) Hardware Failure/Onboard Power Alarm
SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card is faulty. Replace the card with a spare by referring to Chapter 5: Replacement
Procedure of SDT Card and Optical Fiber Cable.
(2) Optical Line Failure
Diagnosis: In addition to this alarm, is the PCM Loss alarm also indicated?
YES Optical line side is faulty.
Verify that the SDT card in the distant node is not placed into make-busy state. Also, perform the
light level check of the optical fiber cables.
NO SDT card is faulty.
Replace the SDT card with a spare by referring to Chapter 5: Replacement Procedure of SDT Card
and Optical Fiber Cable.
(3) Abnormal MB Key Operation
This alarm is indicated when the MB key on the PA-SDTA card is turned ON, even though the MBR key
has been on the OFF side. Place the MBR key UP (=ON) and then turn ON the MB key.
(4) PCM Loss
Abnormal state is detected on the optical line side. Verify that the SDT card in the distant node is not placed
into make-busy state. Also, perform the light level check of the optical fiber cables.
(5) 52M Interface Alarm
- Frame Alignment Loss
- Receiving Section Failure
- Mistake Rate Degradation
- Sending Section Failure
- Mistake Detection
Clock synchronization with the distant node might be lost, or a trouble might occur on the optical line side.
Check the PLO cards first in both self-node and distant node. When no fault is found, proceed with the light
level check of the optical fiber cables.
507
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 2
508
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card or optical fiber line, that was once detected as faulty,
recovers.
1:X0 XX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b7:
b7
b0
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b4, b3
00
00
00
00
00
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
10
10
10
10
10
10
b7:
b2-b0
000
001
010
011
100
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
000
001
010
011
100
101
Hardware Failure
Optical Line Failure
Onboard Power Alarm
Abnormal MB Key Operation
PCM Loss
Frame Alignment Loss
Receiving Section Failure
Mistake Rate Degradation
Sending Section Failure
Mistake Detection
Receiving Path Failure
Pointer Failure
Sending Path Failure
Receiving Path Error
Sending Path Error
509
SDT Card
Trouble
52M Interface
Alarm
VC-11 Path
Trouble
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the ACT/STBY of the SDT (PA-SDTA) card is changed over as a result of fault
detection in the optical fiber line. When the ACT/STBY change cannot be performed, this message also
indicates the cause for the changeover execution failure.
1:X0 XX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b7:
b7
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b0:
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
(Changeover Success)
Optical interface is not dual
Optical interface has a serious failure in each System 0/1
Repair Procedure
Once this message displays, be sure to check other messages, such as [33-C] SDT Alarm Trouble, and review
the cause for the changeover. If any fault is implicated, repair the whole fault(s) according to the situation.
510
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message is shown when failure in downloading from the system to the card, or from the card to the terminal,
is detected.
1:XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
[3]
b1
b0
b0:
01H = ELCN-PKG Menu download failure for DT300
b1:
02H = Menu download failure between ELCN-PKG and terminal
b2-b7: Not used
b6
b5
b4
b3
b8
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b8
b0-b2:
b3-b7:
b8-b9:
b10-b14:
b15:
Not used
Group No.
Unit No.
MG No.
Not used
Level No.
Group No.
Unit No.
MG No.
Not used
511
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b3
b2
b1
b0
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4-b7:
b0:
b1:
b2-b7:
512
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when PCM parity error occurs on MUX circuit card.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
513
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when PCM parity error on MUX circuit card has been recovered.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
514
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
MN
This message is issued when abnormality is detected to cables connecting OPTMUX and ROPTMUX.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b2:
b6:
b7:
515
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
NONE
2:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
516
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
NONE
2:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0:
b1:
b3:
b7:
517
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
NONE
2:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
518
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
NONE
This message is issued when the MBR switch on the OPTMUX card has been turned ON.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
519
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
NONE
This message is issued when the MBR switch on the OPTMUX card has been turned OFF.
1:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
520
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message is issued as a warning for the IP-related network configuration (IPTRK/PHC/PHL/IPPAD), such
as heavy load imposed on the IP network.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
[7] [8]
4:XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
[25][26] [27][28]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
01H:
02H:
03H:
04H:
05H:
06H:
07H:
08H:
09H:
521
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
System Messages
522
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
System Messages
523
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
The following provides the fault information by using the combination of data (FNC, INF, and FLT).
Definition of Fault Information
FNC
([3])
INF
([4])
FLT
([5])
01
01
01
Data of [6]-[28]
Description
33-R
33-S
33-T
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
FIFO overflow
None
524
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
INF
([4])
FLT
([5])
02
01
01
02
03
Data of [6]-[28]
Description
33-R
33-S
33-T
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
FIFO overflow
01
02
03
None
01
[6]-[9]
02
03
04
05
: Destination IP Address
525
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
INF
([4])
FLT
([5])
02
04
01
02
04
Data of [6]-[28]
Description
33-R
33-S
33-T
Level 4 error
03
01
01
526
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
INF
([4])
FLT
([5])
03
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
81
82
Data of [6]-[28]
Description
33-R
33-S
33-T
Over jitter-interval
527
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
INF
([4])
FLT
([5])
04
01
01
08
09
33-S
33-T
10
Timer
12
13
Memory Fault
40
43
4A
58
Ethernet Driver
80
90
C0
C1
D0
D1
E0
E1
F0
F1
01
Network failure
02
03
03
08
07
33-R
09
06
Description
02
05
Data of [6]-[28]
528
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
INF
([4])
FLT
([5])
05
01
01
Data of [6]-[28]
Description
33-R
33-S
33-T
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
02
03
529
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
INF
([4])
FLT
([5])
05
01
16
Description
33-R
33-S
33-T
18
19
PM reset output
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
17
02
Data of [6]-[28]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
: Sequence Number
: PM Type Note 1
: PM Extension Type Note 1
: Contents of Command
530
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
INF
([4])
FLT
([5])
05
02
0B
03
Data of [6]-[28]
Description
33-R
33-S
33-T
0C
0D
DL-ESTABLISH-REQUEST
command sending failed
0E
DL-ESTABLISH-CONFIRM
command reception time out
01
04
06
01
01
02
01
531
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
INF
([4])
FLT
([5])
07
05
01
03
04
Data of [6]-[28]
Description
33-R
33-S
33-T
Jitter-buffer overflow
This message is output only one time
per session.
02
04
05
06
08
09
0A
82
532
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
INF
([4])
FLT
([5])
Data of [6]-[28]
07
07
00
08
00
Description
Media Gateway permanent fault
33-R
33-S
33-T
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
00
[6]-[9]
01
01
02
00
[13]-[16] : IP Address
[12]
: Accommodated Location
: MG-Type
533
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
INF
([4])
FLT
([5])
09
01
01
02
03
02
03
Data of [6]-[28]
Description
33-R
33-S
33-T
Recovered by re-routing
01
02
03
04
01
02
Line fault
03
04
05
Alternate Routing
06
07
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
534
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Note 1: Combination of [7] and [8] shows the following Circuit Cards.
[7]
(PM Type)
[8]
(PM Extension Type)
0F
11
0F
12
4F
11
4F
12
4F
14
1F
11
IPPAD
AF
11
AF
12
AF
13
1F
13
Internal PHI
1F
14
Circuit Card
Note 2: Virtual MAC address will be displayed in the case of IPG Digital/IPG Analog/ UG50. Note
Software versions that each device can accommodate are listed as follows:
535
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
The following provides the troubleshooting for Definition of Fault Information. If the appropriate solution is not
in the list, contact NEC engineers.
Table 3-2 Troubleshooting For Fault Information
FNC ([3])
INF ([4])
FLT ([5])
SOLUTION
02
01
01
This message is output when the LAN cable link on the front panel of the circuit card
(PHA/PHD/IPPAD) indicates link-down.
The cause could be considered that LAN cable between HUB and the circuit card is
abnormal. Make sure the cables, if necessary, replace the appropriate one with the new
one.
02
03
This message is output when outgoing buffer from the Telephony Server to IP
terminals is overflowed. Make sure the IP terminals status, whether network
congestion or packet delay occurs.
04
01
This message is output when a communication port on the counter PHC is abnormal.
Make sure the network status and the network configuration. If the error keeps
occurring, reset the TCP/IP module.
04
This message is output when the PHC connection number exceeds the maximum
number (64). Make sure the number and adjust it if it does.
This message is output when the real-time protocol (RTP) packet loss occurs beyond
allowed time or period.
The cause could be considered as some of the network problems such as hardware fault
and LAN fault. However, it might be temporary problem due to the traffic congestion.
If the error keeps occurring occasionally, ask the network administrator.
03
01
02
04
ALL
ALL
05
01/02
ALL
This message is output when the fault occurs in the system initialization or the
registration process abnormality of IP station number.
The cause could be considered as some of the network problem such as hardware fault
and LAN fault. Check the card. If the card works properly, the fault might be
temporary. If the card does not work properly, replace it with a new one. If the error
keeps occurring after the replacement, contact NEC engineers.
03
01
This message is output when the connection cannot establish between PHA/PHE and
MC, the Telephony Server and IP terminals.
The cause could be considered that related equipment (such as LAN, MC, MG, or
PHA/PHE) is abnormal. Make sure that the MC/MG with the MAC address shown on
the message is available to use. If it is listed as available, keep watching it. Otherwise,
contact NEC engineers. Specify the cause location of the fault as follows:
If the health check error occurs in PHA/PHE accommodating all the MCs, the error
might occur in the system, PHA/PHE or PHA/PHE-side network.
If the health check error occurs in specified MC,
the error might occur on the speech path connecting the MC.
04
01
This message [33-R/S] is output when the Telephony Server communication port is
abnormal. If the message keeps occurring, reset the TCP/IP module.
536
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
INF ([4])
FLT ([5])
SOLUTION
05
04
02
This message is output when the connection cannot establish between the Telephony
Server and IP terminals.
The cause could be considered that related equipment are abnormal. Make sure that the
MG with the MAC address shown on the message is available to use. If it is listed as
available, keep watching it. Otherwise, contact NEC engineers.
07
06
02
If this message is frequently output, review the network and make sure the LAN
configuration, or ask maintenance personnel.
07
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
08/102
ALL
09
01
01
02
If this message is frequently output, review the network and make sure the LAN
configuration, or ask maintenance personnel.
[6]-[9]
03
537
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
INF ([4])
FLT ([5])
09
02
01
SOLUTION
[6]-[9]
03
538
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
INF ([4])
FLT ([5])
09
03
01
SOLUTION
[6] : Destination FPC number
[7] : Cause of start 1/2 = Send process/Receive process
[8], [9]
03 or 04
05
06
539
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
The following provides detailed fault information and the solution by using the combination of data (INF, FLT, and
Detailed Info). These information are provided when FNC ([3]) indicates 04.
Table 3-3 Detailed Fault Information and The Troubleshooting
INF ([4])
FLT ([5])
05
03
Detailed Info
[7]
[8]
20
0E
Description
Failed to communicate between DPMs
Restart to communicate between DPMs
06
Solution
Reset IPELC (IPLC). If the fault occurs
again, replace the IPELC (IPLC) with a
new one.
08
12
0C
Buffer Overflow
None
10
01
01
02
01
03
01
08
01
08
04
09
01
09
04
0A
01
0A
04
0B
01
0B
04
12
00
80
13
42
02
Memory Fault
Memory Fault Recovery
40
80
13
43
20
0E
4A
80
16
Failed to set LAN related data
540
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
INF ([4])
FLT ([5])
06
4A
Detailed Info
[7]
[8]
80
23
Description
58
07
08
Solution
(1) When the fault occurs in all the
terminals accommodated in
IPELC (IPLC), reset the IPELC
(IPLC). If the fault occurs again,
replace the IPELC (IPLC) with a
new one.
(2) When the fault occurs in some
terminals accommodated in
IPELC (IPLC), reset the IPELC
(IPLC). If the fault occurs again,
replace the terminals with new
ones.
43
10
None
43
11
None
80
02
04
90
03
04
C0
0C
04
C1
0C
01
None
D0
0D
04
0D
01
None
E0
0E
04
0E
01
None
F0
0F
04
None
F1
0F
01
541
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message is issued when the system detects a failure on the IPTRK/PHC/PHL/IPPAD circuit cards that
affects normal speech path state.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
[7] [8]
4:XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
[25][26] [27][28]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
01H:
02H:
03H:
04H:
05H:
07H:
08H:
09H:
542
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
System Messages
543
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
[7] [8]
4:XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
[25][26] [27][28]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b0-b2:Circuit No.
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
544
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
545
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
546
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
35-D: SP Failure
Default Alarm
Default Grade
MN
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when any failure has influence on carrying on calls occur on SP.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
547
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when any failure has influence on carrying on calls recovered.
1:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
548
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays the event information related to WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process. Note 1
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
2:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[5]
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[6]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note 1: WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process controls the following terminals in SP:
WLAN Handset (MH Series)/SP Controlled Standard SIP Voice terminal/SP Controlled Standard SIP Video
terminal
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
549
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
**
**
**
**
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
550
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Each operation related to WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process and system message that is output when an
event occurs is as follows.
Note: Several messages may be output for one event.
Terms for outputting System Message
SIP Wireless Terminal
Backup
Operation/Event
System Message
Operation is started.
Operation is stopped.
Note: It takes about five minutes to output the mes-
Not executed
Operation is started.
Executed
(Active/Standby)
Operation of both SP are
stopped.
551
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Operation/Event
System Message
Executed
(Active/Standby)
Changeover by a failure
Note: When office data for WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process is registered by ASSDN/ASSDL command al-
though WLAN Handset (MH Series)/SP Controlled Standard SIP Terminal is not accommodated, 35F: FNC=01H (Service Start.) is output when SP is activated and 35-I: FNC=01H (Service Stop.) is
output when SP is stopped.
Note: ASSDN/ASSDL data is usually registered although WLAN Handset (MH Series)/SP Controlled Standard
Stop.), 35-I: FNC=01H (Service Stop.) or 35-I: FNC=02H (SIP Wireless Terminal Backup Service
Stop.) after WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process stopped the operation.
552
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Note: If WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process is restarted before TP side detects KeepAliveTimeOut, only 35-
F: FNC=01H (Service Start.) is output without outputting 35-G: FNC=01H (Service Stop.), 35-I:
FNC=01H (Service Stop.) or 35-I: FNC=02H (SIP Wireless Terminal Backup Service Stop.)
553
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays the warning information related to WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process. Note 1
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
2:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[5]
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[6]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note: Refer to 35-F for Terms for outputting system message and Note.
Note 1: WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process controls the following terminals in SP:
WLAN Handset (MH Series)/SP Controlled Standard SIP Voice terminal/SP Controlled Standard SIP
Video terminal
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
554
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
**
**
**
**
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
555
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
System message that disturbs WLAN Handset (MH Series)/SP Controlled Standard SIP Terminal operation is
indicated as follows.
Factors for outputting system message
System Message
FNC=01H (Service Stop.)
Outputting factors/Countermeasure
(Normal outputting factor)
If failure occurs continuously despite the network is normal, contact with field support.
556
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Outputting factors/Countermeasure
FNC=03H (SIP Wireless Terminal Backup Service Config- (Abnormal outputting factor)
uration Failure.)
When redundant SIP server ID is different between the config data on SP side and the ASSDN/ASSDL data.
557
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
MJ
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays the major failure information related to WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process. Note 1
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XX0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
Note: Refer to 35-F for Terms for outputting system message and Note.
Note 1: WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process controls the following terminals in SP:
WLAN Handset (MH Series)/SP Controlled Standard SIP Voice terminal/SP Controlled Standard SIP
Video terminal
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b7: 01H = Service Stop. (When SIP Wireless Terminal Backup is not
executed.)
02H = SIP Wireless Terminal Backup Service Stop.
558
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
**
**
**
**
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
559
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
System message that disturbs WLAN Handset (MH Series)/SP Controlled Standard SIP Terminal operation is
indicated as follows.
System Message
Outputting factors/Countermeasure
If failure occurs continuously despite the network is normal, contact with field support.
560
If failure occurs continuously despite the network is normal, contact with field support.
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message is issued when the system detects a failure in IP stations. The IP station information is displayed
on the message. This message becomes active when ASYDL, System Data 1, Index 999 Bit2 = 1 is
assigned.(Available since FP85-105 S2E)
1: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
4: X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0
[9]
7: 0 0 0 0
[10]
0000
b6
b5
b4
b3
0000
0000
b2
b1
b0
[2] Equipment
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
[7]
5: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
b2
b1
b0
8: 0 0 0 0
3: X X X X X X 0 0
0000
0000
6: X X X X 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
9: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
[8]
[11]
[1] Functionality
b7
2: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
[12]
0000
0000
0000
0000
b0-b7:
01H: Terminal
09H: SIP
b0-b7: This data is determined by the combination of [1] and [2] data as
shown below.
561
CHAPTER 3
[1] Functionality
(Hex.)
[2] Equipment
(Hex.)
01
09
Description
01
DtermIP: IP terminal
02
03
05
07
08
UG50-DLC Note 3
01
02
03
04
06
07
08
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
Third Digit
b15
b14
b13
b12
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b7:
01H: Health Check Error
Second Digit
b11
b10
b9
System Messages
b8
First Digit
Note 1: FPC is displayed in right-aligned.
562
CHAPTER 3
Note 2: When FPC is not used all digits are displayed with 0.
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Third Digit
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
Second Digit
b10
b9
b8
First Digit
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b23
b22
b21
b20
b19
b18
b17
b16
[Example]
1-9: Number
A: 0
B: *
C: #
D, E, and F: Not used
563
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
Third Digit
b15
b14
b13
b12
b2
b1
b0
Second Digit
b11
b10
b9
b8
First Digit
Note 1: FPC is displayed in right-aligned.
Note 2: When FPC is not used all digits are displayed with 0.
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b23
b22
b21
b20
b19
b18
b17
b16
b31
b30
b29
b28
b27
b26
b25
b24
b39
b38
b37
b36
b35
b34
b33
b32
b47
b46
b45
b44
b43
b42
b41
b40
b55
b54
b53
b52
b51
b50
b49
b48
b63
b62
b61
b60
b59
b58
b57
b56
[Example]
When Telephone Number is 76#543210, 76 C5 43 21 A0 00 00 00 is displayed.
Note 1: Telephone Number is displayed in left-aligned.
564
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Note 2: When Telephone Number is not used all digits are displayed with 0.
Note 3: Station Number is expressed in the following way.
1-9: Number
A: 0
B: *
C: #
D, E, and F: Not used
b6
b5
b4
Second digit of MG
b15
b13
b14
b12
Unit
b23
b22
b21
b3
b2
b1
b0
First digit of MG
b11
b10
b9
b8
b19
b18
b17
b16
Level
[Example]
When LEN is 012167, 01 21 67 is displayed.
b6
b5
b4
Second digit of MG
b15
b13
b14
b12
Unit
b23
b22
b21
b3
b2
b1
b0
First digit of MG
b11
b10
b9
b8
b19
b18
b17
b16
Level
[Example]
When LEN is 021200, 02 12 00 is displayed.
565
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b23
b22
b21
b20
b19
b18
b17
b16
b31
b30
b29
b28
b27
b26
b25
b24
[Example]
When IP address is 192.168.1.12, C0 A8 01 0C is displayed.
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b23
b22
b21
b20
b19
b18
b17
b16
b31
b30
b29
b28
b27
b26
b25
b24
b39
b38
b37
b36
b35
b34
b33
b32
b47
b46
b45
b44
b43
b42
b41
b40
[Example]
When MAC address is 11-22-33-4C-5D-66, 11 22 33 4C 5D 66 is displayed.
566
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Note: Virtual MAC address will be displayed in the case of IPG Digital or UG50-DLC.Note 4
The software versions that each device can accommodate are listed as follows:
567
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the Office Data transfer is completed or started.
1: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
2: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
[1]
3: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
[2]
4: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
6: X X X X X X 0 0
0000
0000
9: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
[2]
7: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
8: 0 0 0 0
0000
0000
0000
0000
b0~b7:
10: Copy of the Office Data is started (DM-LDM)
20: Copy of the Office Data is finished (DM-LDM)
30: Copy of the Office Data is started (NDM)
40: Copy of the Office Data is finished (NDM)
50: Copy of the Office Data for Fusion Network is started
60: Copy of the Office Data for Fusion Network is finished
568
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[a]
[b]
[C]
[e]
[f]
[g]
[g]
6:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[h]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b15
b0
b8
b6
b15
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b8
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b8:
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b8:
569
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b15
b0
b8
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b15
b0
b8
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b8:
b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b8:
System Messages
When the Office Data Copy [1] = 10/20 (Data Memory Capacity)
[1] Data Memory Capacity
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
570
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
When the Office Data Copy [1] = 30/40 (Network Data Memory Capacity)
[1] Network Data Memory Capacity
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b7: Network Data Memory Capacity (displays attributes specified by ASYDL/ASYDN SYS1 INDEX514)
01H: 2M
03H: 4M
07H: 6M
0FH: 8M
1FH: 10M
3FH: 12M
7FH: 14M
FFH: 16M
[f] Capacity of Broadcast Destination Local Data Memory (LDM)/Network Data Memory (NDM)
Kind of Office Data Copy:
When the Office Data Copy [1] is 10/20 indicates Local Data Memory (LDM),
when the Office Data Copy [1] is 30/40 indicates Network Data Memory (NDM).
When the Office Data Copy [1] = 10/20 (Local Data Memory Capacity)
[1] Local Data Memory Capacity
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
When the Office Data Copy [1] = 30/40 (Network Data Memory Capacity)
[1] Network Data Memory Capacity
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0-b7: Network Data Memory Capacity (displays attributes specified by ASYDL/ASYDN SYS1 INDEX957)
01H: 2M
03H: 4M
07H: 6M
0FH: 8M
1FH: 10M
3FH: 12M
Note 2
7FH: 14M
FFH: 16M
571
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
[a]
[b]
5:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6:XXXX XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[b]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b8
572
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Node No. 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Node No. 32
When the Office Data Copy is finished or failed ([1] = 60), FPC numbers of destination office are displayed.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Node No. 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Node No. 32
573
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when IP terminal user failed to enter the correct password when logging in. Note 1
1:XX0 0 XXXX XXXX XXXX
[1]
[2] [3]
[4] [5]
[6] [7]
[8] [9]
3:XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[16][17] [18][19]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note 1: For SIP Multiple Line terminal, this system message is not output even though a wrong password is
b6
[2]-[7]
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Note: Virtual MAC address will be displayed in the case of IPG Digital or UG50-DLC.Note 2
The software versions that each device can accommodate are listed as follows:
574
CHAPTER 3
**
****
****
****
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
575
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
-
[36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) is output when the timeout of Fusion Health Check
is detected.
This message is of two types: Temporary and Permanent.
The temporary failure message is displayed when the timeout of Fusion Health Check is detected. Note 1
The permanent failure message is displayed when the timeout of Fusion Health Check has been detected ten
consecutive times.
Fusion Health Check is executed by assigning the system data [ASYDL/ASYDN: SYS1, Index 530].
Also, the system message [36-F/36-K/36-T] is output when the timeout of Fusion Health Check is detected, by
assigning the system data [ASYDL/ASYDN: SYS1, Index 534]. Refer to Command Manual for the detail.
Note 1: By default, the message is defined to be output at the first timeout; this output timing can be changed by
While [36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) has been output for the temporary timeout of Fusion Health Check, if Release Alarm is executed, the Error Counter will be cleared. Therefore, if
the timeout of Fusion Health Check is detected after Release Alarm is executed, the [36-F] Fusion Health
Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) will be output for the temporary timeout of Fusion Health Check.
Also, if Release Alarm is executed when the timeout of Fusion Health Check is detected, [36-K] Fusion
Health Check Report (Recovery) will not be output.
Note:
[36-T] Fusion Health Check Report (Permanent) can be output instead of [36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) for the permanent timeout of Fusion Health Check when the system data
[ASYDL/ASYDN: SYS1, Index 655, Bit 0-2 = 1] is assigned, which can be specified on an FCCS type basis
as shown on the table below.
FCCS Type
P2P
Target Device
External LAN
External LAN
Remark
Note:
When [36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) or [36-T] Fusion Health Check Report
(Permanent) is output, if there is no alternate route, a call cannot be made to the node where a failure is
occurring until [36-K] Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery) is output. However, a call can be made
within the same node or node where a failure is not occurring.
Note:
When [36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) or [36-T] Fusion Health Check Report
(Permanent) is output, [36-K] Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery) is output when released.
576
CHAPTER 3
[3] [4]
[5]
[6]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[7]
2:XX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
System Messages
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
577
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
[6] FPC
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
578
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when used bandwidth exceeds the warning value defined between location IDs. Once this
message is displayed, the message has not been output until its recovery. Output of this message can be
controlled by using the office data settings (ABNDL). For more details refer to Command Manual.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
[1]
[2]
[3]
2:XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[4]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] A Location ID
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
[2] B Location ID
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Note: Location IDs are set to A LOC-ID and B LOC-ID in ascending order. (A LOC-ID < B LOC-ID)
579
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b23
b22
b21
b20
b19
b18
b17
b16
b31
b30
b29
b28
b27
b26
b25
b24
System Messages
[4] Accommodated location of terminal b0-b31: Accommodated Equipment Number of terminal that exceeded the
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b23
b22
b21
b20
b19
b18
b17
b16
b31
b30
b29
b28
b27
b26
b25
b24
warning value
Note: If bandwidth for call via IPPAD exceeds the warning value, the accommodated location (LENS) of IP-
PAD is outputted.
Note: For FCCS over IP:
580
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when used bandwidth drops to below the warning value after the bandwidth warning.
Output of this message can be controlled by using the office data settings (ABNDL). For more details refer to
Command Manual.
1:XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
[1] A Location ID
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
[2] B Location ID
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
581
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the bandwidth restriction has been performed in the case of bandwidth resource
shortage. Output of this message can be controlled by using the office data settings (ABNDL). For more details
refer to Command Manual.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
[1]
[2]
[3]
2:XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[4]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] A Location ID
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
[2] B Location ID
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Note: Location IDs are set to A LOC-ID and B LOC-ID in ascending order. (A LOC-ID < B LOC-ID)
582
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b23
b22
b21
b20
b19
b18
b17
b16
b31
b30
b29
b28
b27
b26
b25
b24
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b23
b22
b21
b20
b19
b18
b17
b16
b31
b30
b29
b28
b27
b26
b25
b24
Note: If call origination via IPPAD is restricted, the accommodated location (LENS) of IPPAD is outputted.
Note: For FCCS over IP:
583
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when reserving enough of the bandwidth resource [for two calls calculated by G711
(sending period 10ms)] after the bandwidth fault has terminated the bandwidth restriction. Output of this
message can be controlled by using the office data settings (ABNDL). For more details refer to Command
Manual.
1:XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
[2]
[1] A Location ID
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
[2] B Location ID
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
584
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
-
[36-K] Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery) message is output when Fusion Health check succeeded after
[36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) or [36-T] Fusion Health Check Report (Permanent)
is output.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XX0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5]
[6]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[7]
2:XX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
585
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
[6] FPC
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
586
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message is displayed when FCCS link is down and BLF information clear of the node has started.
1:XX0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
587
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message is displayed with the following fault log on IP devices. For more information on how to read the
fault log, refer to Fault Log Information in Chapter 2.
1:XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b23
b22
b21
b20
b19
b18
b17
b16
b31
b30
b29
b28
b27
b26
b25
b24
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
588
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
System Messages
b0
divided message.
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b23
b22
b21
b20
b19
b18
b17
b16
b31
b30
b29
b28
b27
b26
b25
b24
[4] TAG1
b7
b6
01H=TAG1
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[5] DTC
Data Length
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
01H=Reset Factor
02H=Control Packet Send and Receive Information
03H=Registry NG Factor
F0H-FFH=Individual Data Kind
Note: Registry NG factor is not notified for DtermIP (SIP) and
589
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
4:XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[8]
[13]
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[13]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[7] DTC
b7
b6
Data Length
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
590
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b23
b22
b21
b20
b19
b18
b17
b16
b31
b30
b29
b28
b27
b26
b25
b24
b39
b38
b37
b36
b35
b34
b33
b32
b47
b46
b45
b44
b43
b42
b41
b40
b55
b54
b53
b52
b51
b50
b49
b48
b63
b62
b61
b60
b59
b58
b57
b56
591
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
When [6] = 02H (Control Packet Send and Receive Information) is indicated
Note: This is an example of the format for explanation. Actual start bit varies because it follows the undeter-
[12]
7:XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[8]
[14]
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[10]
[15]
[16]
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[17]
[7] DTC
b7
b6
Data Length
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
01H: iLP-PM
02H: PROTIMS
03H: SIP
04H: DtermIP (SIP) or Soft Phone (SIP)
Note: Message that includes unsupported proprietary header
or contents (such as SIP header Analysis NG, illegal dialog, CSeq error, SIP-URI error, syntax error) is not regarded as an illegal message.
[9] Number of Control Packets
Transmitted/Total Number of
Packets Transmitted/Number of
Request Transmitted
: iLP-PM/PROTIMS/DtermIP
(SIP), Soft Phone (SIP)
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
592
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0
b0
System Messages
b0
or contents (such as SIP header Analysis NG, illegal dialog, CSeq error, SIP-URI error, syntax error) is not regarded as an illegal message.
593
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0
b0
System Messages
b0
594
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
Data Length
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[9] [10]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[7] DTC
b7
[8]
3:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
595
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when the number of stored system message gets to 512, the maximum storage capacity.
The indication is fixed to all 0 in this system message.
1: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
596
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays the result when IP terminal automatic assignment and deletion is executed.
1:XXXX XX0 0 XXXX XXXX
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5] [6]
4:XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[11]
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[2] Result
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
[7] [8]
[10]
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[12]
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b7
2:XXXX XXXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b0-b7: 00H = OK
01H = NG
597
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b23
b22
b21
b20
b19
b18
b17
b16
b31
b30
b29
b28
b27
b26
b25
b24
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[6] Template ID
b7
b6
b5
b4
b6
b3
b2
b1
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b0
[8] SFC
b7
MG = 00-07
Unit = 0-3
Group = 00-23
Level = 0-7
[7] RSC
b7
b0-b7:
b8-b15:
b16-b23:
b24-b31:
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
598
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[10]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[11]
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
[12]
b4 - b7
DC1
DC3
DC5
b0 - b3
DC0
DC2
DC4
b4 - b7
DC1
DC3
b0 - b3
DC0
DC2
b4 - b7
DC1
DC3
DC5
DC7
b0 - b3
DC0
DC2
DC4
DC6
b4-b7
DC9
DC11
DC13
DC15
Actual Meaning
1~9
0
*
#
blank
599
System Messages
b0-b3
DC8
DC10
DC12
DC14
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
SUP
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
-
[36-T] Fusion Health Check Report message (Permanent) is output when the timeout of Fusion health check has
been detected ten consecutive times after an output of temporary timeout of Fusion Health Check of [36-F]
Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent). At this time, the temporary timeout is not counted.
Fusion Health Check is executed by assigning the system data [ASYDL/ASYDN: SYS1, Index 530]. Also, the
system message [36-F/36-K/36-T] is output when the timeout of Fusion Health Check is detected, by assigning
the system data [ASYDL/ASYDN: SYS1, Index 534]. Refer to Command Manual for the detail.
Note: [36-T] Fusion Health Check Report (Permanent) can be output instead of [36-F] Fusion Health Check
Report (Temporary/Permanent) for the permanent timeout of Fusion Health Check when the system data
[ASYDL/ASYDN: SYS1, Index 655, Bit 0-2 = 1] is assigned, which can be specified on an FCCS type
basis as shown on the table below.
FCCS Type
Target Device
External LAN
External LAN
P2P
Legacy
FCH/IPTRK
HUB
FCH/IPTRK
Internal LAN
Direct Connection
HUB HUB
Remark
Note: When [36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) or [36-T] Fusion Health Check Re-
port (Permanent) is output, if there is no alternate route, a call cannot be made to the node where a failure is occurring until [36-K] Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery) is output. However, a call can be
made within the same node or node where a failure is not occurring.
Note: When [36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) or [36-T] Fusion Health Check Report (Permanent) is output, Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery) [36-K] is output when released.
600
CHAPTER 3
[3] [4]
[5]
2:XX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[6]
4: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
3: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[7]
System Messages
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
601
CHAPTER 3
[6] FPC
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
602
System Messages
CHAPTER 3
System Messages
Default Grade
NON
Grade Modified
Lamp Modified
This message displays when there is a part whose Notice Year/Month passes. One system message includes 56 System Messages in maximum. When there are 57 or more information of Preventative Maintenance Notification, Product ID is displayed by ascending order across the multiple messages.
Note: This System Message is available since FP85-105 S2.
[7] [8]
8: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
[1]-[56]: Product ID
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
603
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4
This chapter provides information on how to repair the fault(s) within the system. If any of the components or
equipment listed in Table has a failure, move on to the repair procedure explained for each faulty condition.
List of Fault Repair Procedures
Fault status
Fault Section
Reference
page 606
Network failure
page 608
page 613
page 618
Clock failure
page 626
604
CHAPTER 4
Fault Message
Connection unavailable
33-R
FNC=03H, INF=01H, FLT=02H
(Excessive loss of RTP packets)
33-S
Communication unavailable
FNC=02H, INF=01H
(Ethernet (LAN) cable not plugged-in)
Communication unavailable
605
Reference
CHAPTER 4
START
NO
YES
1.1.1
ERRK
01
Indication from the Host to release all current connection corresponding TCP port was received. All of the resource related to
connection on TCP port of system side is released.
02 - 0B
0C
0D - FF
Not used
606
CHAPTER 4
1.1.2
ERRK
01
Text received from the Host for the corresponding TCP port
was in invalid format, system side couldnt define the text
received.
03
04
05
Connection was requested, but connection could not be established because the number of connection exceeds the maximum
(=16).
Connection was requested, but connection could not be established because the service was invalid.
02
06
07-FF
Not used
607
CHAPTER 4
Localize the failure of communication line equipment, WLAN/LAN hardware and network environment.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Repair the failure part (equipment/change the parts or interim patch up).
C:\TEMP>ping 192.168.2.10
Pinging 192.168.2.10 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply
Reply
Reply
Reply
from
from
from
from
192.168.2.10:
192.168.2.10:
192.168.2.10:
192.168.2.10:
bytes=32
bytes=32
bytes=32
bytes=32
time<10ms
time<10ms
time<10ms
time<10ms
TTL=128
TTL=128
TTL=128
TTL=128
608
CHAPTER 4
Some of the error screens when ping command is used are shown below.
from
from
from
from
192.168.2.10:
192.168.2.10:
192.168.2.10:
192.168.2.10:
Destination
Destination
Destination
Destination
net
net
net
net
unreachable.
unreachable.
unreachable.
unreachable.
from
from
from
from
192.168.2.10:
192.168.2.10:
192.168.2.10:
192.168.2.10:
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
expired
expired
expired
expired
in
in
in
in
transit
transit
transit
transit
609
CHAPTER 4
Figure below indicates miss to solve the host name with the IP address in the DNS searching when sending
the packet. Confirm if there is any fault in name of the host or the DNS setting.
C:\TEMP>ping pab160
Unknown host pab160.
610
CHAPTER 4
C:\TEMP>tracert 192.168.2.10
Tracing route to 192.168.2.10
over a maximum of 30 hops:
1
2
3
4
40ms
40ms
40ms
40ms
40ms
40ms
40ms
40ms
40ms
40ms
40ms
40ms
lan1.xx.jp
lan2.xx.jp
lan3.xx.jp
lan4.xx.jp
[192.xxx.xxx.xxx]
[192.xxx.xxx.xxx]
[192.xxx.xxx.xxx]
[192.xxx.xxx.xxx]
Trace complete.
611
CHAPTER 4
C:\TEMP>netstat -an
Proto(1)
Local Address(2)
TCP
TCP
UDP
UDP
.
.
router1:2972
router1:3809
router1:53
router1:53
.
.
Foreign Address(3)
router2:netbios-ssn ESTABLISHED
router3:netbios-ssn ESTABLISHED
*
*
.
.
.
.
C:\TEMP>netstat -s
IP Statistics(a)
Packet Received
Received Header Errors
Received Address Errors
.
.
=129314
=0
=0
ICMP Statistics(b)
Received
20(14)
0
0
0
0
Messages
Errors
Destination Unreachable
Time Exceeded
.
.
TCP Statistics
Active Opens
Passive Opens
Failed Connection Attempts
.
.
UDP Statistics(d)
Datagrams Received
No Ports
Receive Errors
Datagram Sent
State(4)
=18613
=132
=1547
.
.
=35313
=353
=15710
=15710
612
Sent
208(15)
0(17)
0
0
0
CHAPTER 4
System Messages
613
CHAPTER 4
1.3.1
About System Message 33-R Outputted Only from IPPAD Circuit Card
(1) FNC=03H, INF=01H, FLT=02H (Excessive RTP packet loss) is outputted
Fault reason
614
CHAPTER 4
Note: System Message about exceeding of maximum number is outputted from internal PHC. Confirm the max-
Unable to reply
<<This System Message will be output when control packet send timer time out has occurred eight times
continuously or when any communication fault was detected while sending the control packet.>>
Cause of the error may be the hardware fault or network interference.
(a) Confirm the operating status of MG (Media Gateway).
(b) Confirm each network equipment, connection and configuration when this fault occurs frequently.
615
CHAPTER 4
1.3.2
LAN cable link in the front panel of circuit card (IPPAD) has gone down.
<<LAN cable link down of the circuit card>>
Drop off of the LAN cable or faulty cable between circuit card and HUB may be the reason.
(a) Confirm LAN cable is firmly connected to the circuit card.
(b) If link is still down after the confirmation, check the cable again. Change the LAN cable depending
on circumstances.
616
CHAPTER 4
617
CHAPTER 4
Fault Status
1.4.1
Fault status
Change the circuit card when detailed message data about the circuit card was displayed.
618
CHAPTER 4
1.4.3
Fault Analysis
Causes: Countermeasures
START
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Restored?
No
Restored?
No
Yes
Restored?
No
Yes
Restored?
No
Restored?
(A)
Yes
No
619
CHAPTER 4
Fault Analysis
Causes: Countermeasures
(A)
Yes
No
Restored?
Yes
No
1)
Yes
No
Restored?
Yes
No
Yes
No
Restored?
Yes
No
(B)
620
CHAPTER 4
Fault Analysis
Causes: Countermeasures
(B)
Non-load Initial
Restored?
Yes
No
Restored?
Yes
No
Restored?
Yes
No
Power OFF/ON
Restored?
Yes
No
1)
Restored?
Yes
No
Restored?
Yes
No
621
CHAPTER 4
Note 1: Refer to Installation Manual CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM STARTUP Initial Startup (for FP85-
109 S6 or later) CF Card Initialization for the CF card initialization in FP85-109 S6 or later
software. Refer to Installation Procedure of CF Card in this manual for the CF card initialization in
FP85-108 S5 or earlier.
(3) Countermeasures Against Faults
(a) Available to operate normally after the system is placed in normal operation again.
(b) When the system is restored by this replacement, the replaced parts was faulty. Prepare the spare card/
module/parts as required for future needs.
(c) Parity error may be still left in the system, there might be a possibility to have parity error again after
normal operation, the system needs to be replaced for preventative measure.
(d) There is no more parity error in the program sector, but there might be a possibility to have parity error
again after normal operation, the system needs to be replaced for preventative measure.
(e) There is no more office data error caused by the parity error, but there might be a possibility to have
parity error again after normal operation, the system needs to be replaced for preventative measure.
(f) There is possibility that the contents of CF card has been modified improperly, or CF card operation
is unstable. The system needs to be replaced for preventative measure.
(g) There is possibility that some devices mounted on the CPU card have a temporary failure. The system
needs to be replaced for preventative measure.
(h) CF card or some devices on the CPU card are faulty.
(i)
The fault may not be caused by the system. Please contact the dealer or its service technicians.
622
CHAPTER 4
1.4.4
MODE
PWR
PWR
LINK
ACT
ALM
PBI No
LOAD
ON LINE
SW01
PWR
LOAD
SW00
ON LINE
MODE
623
CHAPTER 4
[1] TP block
SP block
[3] SP block (other than SIP Station)
SV8500 Server #0
SV8500 Server #1
(ACT)
(STBY)
ACT/STBY
TP #0
TP #1
SP #0
SP #1
(ACT)
(STBY)
(ACT)
(ACT)
SP #0
SP #1
: ACT
load sharingN+1
: STBY
(a) TP Changeover
(b) SP Changeover
624
CHAPTER 4
SP block (for SIP Station): Use CMOD command. TP and this block change over in combination.
SP block (for other than IP Station): load sharing (N + 1), both SPs are placed in ACT.
WARNING The following operations require system shutdown. Perform the following only when system
shutdown is permitted.
(4) Non-load Initial
(a) Use SINZ from the PCPro.
(5) Office Data load Initial
(a) Use SINZ from the PCPro.
Note: Proceed to the next step if this load initialization cannot be executed using this method.
625
CHAPTER 4
626
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5
Use this procedure to replace a faulty unit/circuit card with a spare or to check a spare card.
There are functional switches (having set the default switch) on some of the circuit cards to be replaced.
As for switch setting on the circuit cards, confirm the circuit card mounting face layout for the PIR.
When a circuit card is replaced with a spare card, always make the same switch setting on the new circuit card as that on the replaced card. Otherwise, electronic components on the circuit card may be destroyed, or the circuit card itself may fail to function normally.
When handling a circuit card, always use the field service kit for countermeasures against static electricity. Touching a circuit card without using the kit may destroy the card due to static electricity on the
human body.
627
CHAPTER 5
1.1
TSW #1
TSW #0
Line/Trunk Cards
Line/Trunk Cards
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32
Slot No.
Number of Ports
Card Color
LT Connector Accommodations
LT Connector Accommodations
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32
MUX #1
MUX #0
Line/Trunk Cards
Slot No.
Line/Trunk Cards
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32
Number of Ports
Card Color
LT Connector Accommodations
LT Connector Accommodations
Note 1: TSW will be mounted on the Slots 13 and 14 of PIR0 (1-IMG only).
Note 2: Faulty switch settings may cause system down, always handle it with care.
Corresponding alarm lamp is lit and system message is outputted when replacing the circuit card. Release
the alarm when circuit card replacement has completed. All system messages will be deleted when alarm
is released by the RALM command, read the system messages using the DFTD command when the system
messages are needed.
628
CHAPTER 5
1.2
STEP 1
Turn ON (upward) the MB (Make Busy) switch of the circuit card to be replaced.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Set the same key setting on the new circuit card as that is set on the removed card.
STEP 4
Confirm that MB (Make Busy) switch of the new circuit card is turned ON (upward).
STEP 5
STEP 6
After new circuit card is inserted, turn the MB (Make Busy) switch to OFF (downward).
[End]
629
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
CHAPTER 5
1.3
1.3.1
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
[Start]
STEP 1
When the card is provided in dual configuration, do this for both cards in the order of STBY - ACT.
STEP 2
Use SPTS command to see if there is any active call on the card.
When it is found, wait a while, and try again until the card has no active call.
STEP 3
When the card is provided in dual configuration, do this for both cards in the order of STBY - ACT.
STEP 4
STEP 5
Disconnect MT24 from the PA-SDTB circuit card. Remove the flat cables from the front connectors, I/O and PCM, on both PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards.
STEP 6
STEP 7
Referring to the removed cards, perform the switch settings on the new cards.
STEP 8
Make sure that MB key on the new card is set to UP position. Set Switch 4 of P-SW key must
be set to ON position for PA-SDTA.
STEP 9
Insert the new PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB to the slots of the PIR.
STEP 10 Connect the disconnected flat cables to the connectors on the new card and other PA-SDTA/PA-
630
CHAPTER 5
SDTB cards.
STEP 11 When the new card is PA-SDTB, also connect the MT 24 TSW cables to all the required front
connectors.
STEP 12 Turn OFF (downward) MB key on the new PA-SDTA.
STEP 13 Set P-SW key - 4 (MBR) to OFF position on the PA-SDTA. When the card is provided in dual
configuration, do this for both cards.
STEP 14 Turn OFF (downward) MB key on the new PA-SDTB.
[End]
1.3.2
[Start]
STEP 1
When the card is provided in dual configuration, do this for both cards in the order of STBY - ACT.
ACT lamp goes OFF. (When the card is provided in dual configuration, ACT-STBY changeover
will take place.)
When the card is provided in dual configuration: normal operation is available including new call
origination using other card.
When the card is provided in single configuration: active calls will be maintained, new call origination is not available. Note that when having connection link, it will be left connected.
STEP 2
When the card is provided in dual configuration, do this for both cards in the order of STBY - ACT.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
[End]
631
CHAPTER 5
1.4
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
Note: The status of each channel can be known by changing SW01 setting. For more details, see Circuit Card
Description.
STEP 2
STEP 1
SW01
OPE
OPE
MB
MB
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Wait a while....
OPE
MB
STEP 2
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Turn ON MB key.
No channel is in use.
SW01
SW01
Note: BL0 - BL7 indicate Idle/Busy status of channels. By changing SW01, the status of all channels can be
IP-LAN
RJ45 connector
LAN cable
IPPAD card
632
connected to
network device
such as switch, router
CHAPTER 5
STEP 4
STEP 5
Make sure the switch setting of the new IPPAD circuit card is the same as the one replaced.
STEP 6
STEP 7
STEP 8
STEP 9
[End]
633
CHAPTER 5
1.5
1.5.1
This section explains the replacement procedure of MUX circuit card (PH-PC36) for 1IMG system. MUX circuit card is mounted on PIR 1/2/3 (Slots 13 and 14). TSW card
is mounted on PIR0.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
This circuit card is an interface card to accommodate the Line/Trunk circuits. Replacement procedure of
this circuit card is shown below.
Note: Always handle it with care when key setting of the circuit card is to be changed.
Note: MUX card to be replaced must be in STBY mode when the system has speech path in dual configuration.
Use CMOD command to change over the ACT/STBY of the speech path.
[Start]
Note: Proceed to STEP 6 when TSW card is in single configuration. In this case, MN alarm is generated.
STEP 1
Check the MUX ACT lamp on the MUX card. When the lamp is off, the card is STBY mode.
YES: Proceed to STEP 3.
NO: Changeover the TSW ACT to STBY mode by using CMOD command, then proceed to STEP 2.
STEP 2
634
CHAPTER 5
STEP 3
Turn ON (upward) the TSW MBR key on the TSW card of STBY side.
YES: Turn ON (upward) the PLO MB key on the TSW card to be replaced.
PLO ACT is changed over. PLOACT lamp on the TSW card goes out.
NO: Proceed to STEP 5.
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
Disconnect the cable from the connector on the front panel of the MUX card to be replaced.
STEP 8
STEP 9
STEP 10 Set the keys on the new MUX card, referring to the card replaced.
STEP 11 Insert the new MUX card into the PIR.
STEP 12 Connect the disconnected cable to the connector on the front panel of the new MUX card.
STEP 13 Turn OFF (down) the MB key on the TSW card.
STEP 14 Make sure M1SY/M2SY/M3SY LED, which corresponds to the new card, lights green on the
TSW card (PIR 0).
635
CHAPTER 5
M1SY, M2SY and M3SY lamps (TSW card) = lit (green) (depending on the number of PIR)
STEP 16 If PLO MB key on the TSW card is set to ON, turn it OFF.
Note: PLOACT #0 has higher priority than PLOACT #1. Therefore, PLOACT #0 is automatically set as ACT
when the TSW MB key is turned ON/OFF while the PLO MB key of TSW #0 is OFF.
STEP 17 Turn OFF (down) the MBR key on the TSW card.
STEP 18 Execute the TSW ACT/STBY changeover by using CMOD command and confirm the new
MUX card is operating normally.
[End]
1.5.2
MUX circuit card is mounted on each PIR. This circuit card is an interface card to accommodate the Line/
Trunk circuits. Replacement procedure of this circuit card is shown below.
[Start]
Note: Proceed to STEP 3 when speech path is in single configuration. In this case, MN alarm is generated.
STEP 1
Check the MUX ACT lamp on the MUX card. When the lamp is off, the card is STBY mode.
YES: Proceed to STEP 3.
NO: Changeover the TSW ACT to STBY mode by using CMOD command, then proceed to STEP 2.
STEP 2
636
CHAPTER 5
STEP 3
Turn ON (upward) the TSW MBR key on the TSW card of STBY side.
STEP 5
STEP 6
Disconnect the cable from the connector on the front panel of the MUX card to be replaced.
STEP 7
STEP 8
STEP 9
Set the keys on the new MUX card, referring to the card replaced. Note that MB must be set ON
(upward).
STEP 14 Turn OFF (downward) the MBR key on the TSW card.
STEP 15 Execute the TSW ACT/STBY changeover by using CMOD command and confirm the new
MUX card is operating normally.
[End]
637
CHAPTER 5
1.6
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
Note: When the PWR is not provided in dual configuration, the corresponding PIR cannot
Turn ON (upward) MB key on the PWR and DPWR (DC-DC) circuit card to be replaced.
STEP 2
Turn OFF (downward) the -48V switch of the circuit card to be replaced.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
STEP 8
STEP 9
[End]
638
CHAPTER 5
1.7
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
Note: Always handle it with care when key setting of the circuit card is to be changed.
Note: TSW card to be replaced must be in STBY mode when the system has speech path in dual configuration.
Use CMOD command to change over the ACT/STBY of the speech path.
1.7.1
[Start]
Note: When the system is in single configuration, stop the system first.
STEP 1
Check the TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card. When the lamp is off, the card is in STBY mode.
YES: Proceed to STEP 3.
NO: Changeover the TSW by using CMOD, from ACT to STBY mode, then proceed to STEP 2.
STEP 2
Turn ON (upward) TSW MBR key on the TSW card of STBY side.
STEP 5
STEP 6
Disconnect MT24 TSW cables from MUX 1, MUX 2, and MUX 3 connectors.
639
CHAPTER 5
STEP 7
STEP 8
Set the keys on the new TSW card, referring to the card replaced.
STEP 9
Turn ON (upward) PLO MB, TSW MBR and MB keys on the new TSW card.
TSW ACT and MUX ACT lamps on the new card remains unlit.
640
CHAPTER 5
This procedure is applied when replacing a faulty circuit card with a spare. It is also able to be applied
when checking a spare card.
There are functional switches (having set the default switch) on some of the circuit cards to be replaced.
As for switch setting on the circuit cards, confirm the circuit card mounting face layout for the PIR.
When a circuit card is replaced with a spare card, always make the same switch setting on the new circuit card as that on the replaced card. Otherwise, electronic components on the circuit card may be destroyed, or the circuit card itself may fail to function normally.
When handling a circuit card, always use the field service kit for countermeasures against static electricity. Touching a circuit card without using the kit may destroy the card due to static electricity on the
human body.
Slot Number:
02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
PLO 1
PLO 0
TSW 12
TSW 13
TSW 10
TSW 11
TSW 03
TSW 02
TSW 01
GT 01
TSW 00
GT 00
DLKC 01
DLKC 00
PWR 0
WARNING
PWR 1
00 01
Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the key with extreme care.
During replacement of a circuit card, the system issues fault messages and activates the related
alarm. Reset the indicated alarm after completing the replacement procedure.
Corresponding alarm lamp is lit and system message is outputted when replacing the circuit card. Release
the alarm when circuit card replacement has completed. All system messages will be deleted when alarm
is released by the RALM command, read the system messages using the DFTD command when the system
messages are needed.
641
CHAPTER 5
2.3
[PIR]
IMG 1
Line/Trunk PM
IMG 0
Line/Trunk PM
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
TSW 02
PCM HW
MUX
MUX
TSW 13
TSW 12
TSW 11
TSW 01
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
IMG 3
Line/Trunk PM
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
MUX
PM BUS
PCM HW
TSW 10
TSW 00
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
MUX
IMG 2
Line/Trunk PM
TSW 03
PLO 1
DLKC 1
PLO 0
GT 1
GT 0
[TSWR]
[SV8500 Server]
EXB0
EXB1
CPU1
CPU0
EMA
WARNING
Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the key with extreme care.
[Start]
STEP 1
642
CHAPTER 5
Check OPE/MB lamp on the GT card. When the lamp is off, the card is in STBY mode.
YES: Proceed to STEP 3.
NO: Changeover the ACT/STBY of speech path by using CMOD. Proceed to STEP 2.
STEP 2
Conform that ACT mode of the TSW card matches that of the CPU card. And make sure that
both ACT mode are same.
When the mode does not match, change the mode of TSW card by using CMOD command.
STEP 5
Turn ON (upward) MB key on the GT that has been placed in STBY side.
STEP 7
STEP 8
STEP 9
STEP 10 Change over the ACT/STBY of speech path by using CMOD command.
Make sure that OPE/MB lamp lights green on the new GT card.
STEP 11 Make test calls to confirm that the new GT card is operating normally.
STEP 12 Display system messages from PCPro and analyze them when needed.
[End]
643
CHAPTER 5
2.3.1
IMG 1
IMG 2
IMG 3
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
[PIR]
MUX
TSW 13
TSW 03
PLO 1
PLO 0
GT 1
GT 0
[TSWR]
[SV8500 Server]
EXB0
EXB1
CPU1
CPU0
EMA
644
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
TSW 02
PCM HW
MUX
TSW 12
TSW 11
TSW 01
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
MUX
PM BUS
PCM HW
TSW 10
TSW 00
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
MUX
DLKC 1
CHAPTER 5
[Start]
STEP 1
Check TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card. When the lamp is off, the card is in STBY mode.
YES: Proceed to STEP 3.
NO: Changeover the ACT/STBY of speech path by using CMOD. Proceed to STEP 2.
STEP 2
When TSW ACT lamp lights green on the mate TSW card, changeover is successful.
STEP 3
TSW ACT lamp lights red on the all TSW cards that are placed in STBY mode.
STEP 4
SYNC lamp goes OFF on all MUX cards that are under the TSW card whose MB key is set ON.
STEP 5
STEP 6
Set the keys on the new TSW card, referring to the card replaced.
STEP 7
STEP 8
STEP 9
TSW ACT lamp goes off on all TSW cards that are placed in STBY mode.
STEP 11 Change over the ACT/STBY of speech path by using CMOD command.
STEP 12 Make sure the following:
[ACT side]
TSW ACT lights green (TSW card)
OPE/MB lights green (DLKC card)
645
CHAPTER 5
[STBY side]
[End]
646
CHAPTER 5
2.3.2
[PIR]
IMG 0
Line/Trunk PM
IMG 2
Line/Trunk PM
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
TSW 02
PCM HW
MUX
MUX
TSW 13
TSW 12
TSW 11
TSW 01
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
IMG 3
Line/Trunk PM
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
MUX
PM BUS
PCM HW
TSW 10
TSW 00
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
MUX
IMG 1
Line/Trunk PM
TSW 03
PLO 1
DLKC 1
PLO 0
GT 1
GT 0
[TSWR]
[SV8500 Server]
EXB0
EXB1
CPU1
CPU0
EMA
WARNING
Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the key with extreme care.
[Start]
647
CHAPTER 5
STEP 1
Check OPE/MB lamp on the DLKC card. When the lamp is off, the card is in STBY mode.
YES: Proceed to STEP 3.
NO: Changeover the ACT/STBY of speech path by using CMOD. Proceed to STEP 2.
STEP 2
Make sure that the DLKC card to be replaced is placed in STBY mode.
STEP 5
Turn ON (upward) MB key on the DLKC that has been placed in STBY side.
STEP 7
STEP 8
STEP 9
STEP 10 Change over the ACT/STBY of speech path by using CMOD command.
Make sure that OPE/MB lamp lights green on the new DLKC card.
STEP 11 Display system messages from PCPro and analyze them when needed.
[End].
648
CHAPTER 5
2.3.3
[PIR]
IMG 0
Line/Trunk PM
IMG 2
Line/Trunk PM
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
TSW 02
PCM HW
MUX
MUX
TSW 13
TSW 12
TSW 11
TSW 01
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
IMG 3
Line/Trunk PM
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
MUX
PM BUS
PCM HW
TSW 10
TSW 00
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
MUX
IMG 1
Line/Trunk PM
TSW 03
PLO 1
DLKC 1
PLO 0
GT 1
GT 0
[TSWR]
[SV8500 Server]
EXB0
EXB1
CPU1
CPU0
EMA
WARNING
Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the key with extreme care.
[Start]
649
CHAPTER 5
STEP 1
Check OPE lamp on the PLO card. When the lamp is off, the card is in STBY mode.
YES: Proceed to STEP 3.
NO: Changeover the ACT/STBY of PLO. Proceed to STEP 2.
Note: PLO ACT/STBY can be changed over by MB key operation. See Manual Changeover of PLO in Chap-
Make sure that the PLO card to be replaced is placed in STBY mode.
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
STEP 8
STEP 9
Make sure the ACT/STBY status of PLO that is shown by CMOD exactly reflects the actual
ACT/STBY status that is indicated by OPE lamps.
650
CHAPTER 5
2.3.4
WARNING
[Start]
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
[End]
651
CHAPTER 5
2.4
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
WARNING CF card cannot be removed while the SV8500 is in operation. Doing so stops the system
operation.
WARNING Be sure to use anti-static measures when handling a CF card. See How to Handle a CF card
for more details.
[Start]
STEP 1
Backup the office data stored in CF card and copy it into a reliable storage device.
STEP 2
Write in the program to the new CF card by referring to Installation Manual. Also, write in the
office data stored in the storage device such as a hard disk of a PC.
STEP 3
Shutdown the system, referring to Initialization by Turning OFF and ON the System.
STEP 4
Take out the fault CF card and insert the new CF card in which program and office data have
been written.
STEP 5
Turn ON the system again, referring to Initialization by Turning OFF and ON the System.
STEP 6
[End]
652
CHAPTER 5
2.5
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
FANU
(connector)
FANC
bracket (left)
FAN PWR SW
FANU
FAN1
FAN2
MADE IN JAPAN
FUSE
Fuse
(1.0 A)
CAUTION
FAN0
xxxx xxxx xx
ON
PZ-M699
CAUTION Complete the entire procedure within about 15 minutes; where the temperature is around 77
degrees F.
[START]
STEP 1: Remove the front cover of the rack (PIR/TSWR) located just below the FANU.
FANU
a rack located just below the FANU
(PIR/TSWR)
Front Cover
653
CHAPTER 5
STEP 2: Remove the front cover of FANU for the FANC to be replaced.
FANU Front Cover
FANC
PIR/TSWR
Cable Support
654
CHAPTER 5
STEP 6: Remove the cables from the FANU connector using a flat-blade screwdriver.
flat-blade screwdriver
FANU connector
STEP 7: Loosen the screws fixing the FANC brackets on both sides.
screw (right
screw (left)
a Phillips head screwdriver
[2]
[1]
[1]
655
CHAPTER 5
Turn OFF (upper) the FAN Power Switch on the new FANC.
STEP 10: Mount the new FANC to the FANU. (in reverse order shown above)
Place the FANC bracket on the FANU so that the loosed screw at the right side may come through the big
hole of the right bracket.
Tighten the screws with a flat-blade screwdriver, and fix the brackets.
STEP 11: Connect the FAN cables to the FAN connectors (FAN0 - FAN2).
STEP 12: Reconnect the cables to the FANU connector, and tighten the screws with a flat-blade screwdriver.
STEP 13: Turn ON (downward) the FAN Power Switch.
Note:
656
CHAPTER 5
2.6
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
FANs are mounted on FAN tray as shown below. To replace a FAN, the FAN tray must be removed from
the system.
FANs
FANU
FAN
PW
R SW
FUSE
xxx
xxx
ON MADE x xx
IN JA
PAN
PZ-M
699
FAN0
FAN1
FAN2
FANC
FAN Tray
FRONT
CAUTION Do not put your finger to operating FAN box. Before replacing a FAN, make sure that the
FAN blades are completely stopped.
CAUTION Complete the entire procedure within about 15 minutes; where the temperature is around 77
degrees F.
CAUTION
It is not necessary to turn off the power of PIR/TSWR during FAN replacement.
[START]
STEP 1: Identify a faulty FAN if this replacement is not regular FAN replacement.
657
CHAPTER 5
STEP 2: Remove the front cover of the rack (PIR/TSWR) located just below the FANU.
FANU
(PIR/TSWR)
a rack located just below the FANU
Front Cover
STEP 3: Remove the front cover of FANU for the FANC to be replaced.
FANU Front Cover
FANC
PIR/TSWR
658
CHAPTER 5
flat-blade screwdriver
FANU connector
STEP 6: Loosen the screws fixing the FAN tray on both sides.
screw (left)
screw (right)
659
CHAPTER 5
FAN tray
old FAN
(FAN0)
new FAN
FAN1
FAN2
FAN cable
FANU
FAN
PW
R SW
FUSE
ON
xxx
x xxx
MA
x xx
DE
IN JA
PAN
PZ-M
699
FAN0
FAN1
FAN2
FAN0 connector
FAN1 connector
FAN2 connector
Cable support
Note: Take into account the FAN cable connected location when attaching the FAN. Otherwise, the cable length
660
CHAPTER 5
Note: Insert the FAN connector firmly to the appropriate FAN connector until you hear an audible click.
STEP 11: Reconnect the cables to the FANU connector, and tighten the screws with a flat-blade screwdriver.
STEP 12: Turn ON (downward) the FAN Power Switch.
Note:
661
CHAPTER 5
2.7
Replacement Procedure of 1UC/DC Power Unit on 9UIR (DC Power Input Version)
This section explains how to change the 1UC/DC Power Unit from a Single Power Configuration to a
Dual Power Configuration as well as replacing the power units.
Note 1: AC/DC power unit is in Single Power Configuration for shipping. Therefore, a blank unit is mounted
on the #1 side of the AC/DC power unit when shipped. There are two types of blank units: unit with two
LOCK keys and unit with one LOCK key.
Note 2: Replacement should be processed one power unit at a time. Do not cut off power for both AC/DC power
Blank unit
LOCK key
Blank unit
LOCK key
662
CHAPTER 5
LOCK key
2.7.1
STEP 1
STEP 2
663
CHAPTER 5
Front View
STEP 3
Slide in the new AC/DC power unit. Check that the OPE lamp light is ON and the FAN is turning.
STEP 4
STEP 5
Turn the power switch ON for the newly installed #1 side of AC/DC power unit.
664
CHAPTER 5
2.7.2
STEP 1
Turn the power switch OFF for #0 side of AC/DC power unit.
Power Switch for #0
Turn the switch to left side (OFF)
OFF
STEP 2
ON
STEP 3
Use the handle to pull the #0 side of AC/DC power unit frontward.
Front View
Note: FANs constantly turn as long as power units are inserted. Be careful not to touch the FANs.
STEP 4
Slide in the new AC/DC power unit. Check that the OPE lamp light is ON and the FAN is turning.
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
Repeat the above steps for #1 side of AC/DC power unit if necessary.
665
CHAPTER 5
2.8
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
25A
1.5A
10A
12.5V
When excessive current is applied to a PWR circuit card, the related fuse is blown. The blown fuse after a fault
can be confirmed as shown in the following figure.
If a fuse is blown,
this area turns white.
A normal fuse
A blown fuse
The purpose of fuses is to let them blow before the components are damaged. If any fuse gets blown, replace it
immediately with a new one using the following procedure:
(1) Confirm the blown fuse via System Message [6-A] or MJ lamp.
(2) Replace the fuse with the new one.
(3) Determine the cause of the blown fault.
666
CHAPTER 5
The following figure shows the location of fuses for the system.
PZ-
M6
99
PAPW
54PAC
PW
55C
1.0
A
A
F
FUS
FUS
E 5
.0 A
E 0
.5 A
FUS
E 2
0A
FUS
5.0
A
FUS
0.5
A
00
01
02
03
04
20 A
05
06
07
08
09
IR
E
FUS
E
FUS
E
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
PZ-
M6
PH
99
-PW
14
1.0
A
FUS
A
F
FUS
E 1
5A
15 A
FUS
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
FUS
3.2
A
5.0
A
BAS
EU
FUS
667
CHAPTER 5
Perform the following procedure to confirm the cause of the RGU fuse blown fault.
Start
No
Yes
No
No
Perform station-to-station
connections within the PIR.
Is any fuse blown?
Yes
Fault of LC card that accompanied
the fuse blowing.
No
No
Yes
Perform station-to-station
connections within the PIR.
Is any fuse blown?
Yes
No
Yes
Fuse is still blown?
No
Yes
Fault of PWR card.
Fault of LC card
that was removed
No
No
668
CHAPTER 5
Perform the following procedure to confirm the cause of the DC-48V fuse blown fault (PIR).
Start
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Fault of PWR card.
669
CHAPTER 5
Perform the following procedure to confirm the cause of the DC-48V fuse blown fault (TSWR).
Start
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Insert the removed cards
one by one (into the TSWR).
Is any fuse blown?
No
Fault of circuit card that
accompanied the fuse blown.
Yes
No
Yes
Fault of PWR card.
670
CHAPTER 5
FAULTY SITUATION
Dial tone is not heard.
Answer/speech cannot be
made.
DP/PB Telephone
Line Fault
Dterm
REFERENCE SECTION
Unit Fault
The ACT MUX card side has become faulty and system
changeover has been executed.
671
CHAPTER 5
FAULTY SITUATION
REFERENCE SECTION
Fans are not activated even if the temperature has risen higher than a predetermined degree.
Section 5-25, Circuit Diagram of
Fans are not activated even if the FAN START switch Fan Unit and Thermal Unit
is set to AUTO position.
Tone Fault
Tone is distorted.
672
CHAPTER 5
3.1
Line Fault
This section explains the fault repair procedure in a case where only one specific station line is in any of the
faulty conditions listed in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 Line Fault Situation
FAULTY SITUATION
REFERENCE SECTION
Dterm Fault
3.1.1
Check Point
673
CHAPTER 5
3.1.2
Line Control
Each line in a specific Line Circuit (LC/ELC) card is controlled by the PM in that line circuit card. The line
circuit cards are controlled from the Telephony Server via the MUX. The following figure shows the control route of line circuit cards.
Controlling LC/ELC Circuit Cards and Speech Path
MDF
LC/ELC
Control Signal
MUX
PM
Speech Path
LT Cable
LC
LT Cable
LC
Ordinary Telephone/
Dterm
LC/ELC
Control Signal
MUX
Speech Path
PM
LT Cable
LC
LT Cable
LC
Ordinary Telephone/
Dterm
TDSW/INT
TSW
Control Signal
Symbols:
: Circuit Card
: Control Signal
SV8500 Server
674
: Speech Path
CHAPTER 5
3.1.3
Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used
Check LT cables.
675
CHAPTER 5
3.1.4
Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used
The station telephone set is faulty. Replace the station telephone set with a spare.
676
CHAPTER 5
3.1.5
Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used
The in-house wiring side is faulty. Confirm that the A-wire is not short-circulating with ground.
677
CHAPTER 5
3.1.6
Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used
678
CHAPTER 5
3.1.7
Remove the cause of the short-circuit and initialize the ELC circuit card.
(1) When OPE lamp on the ELC circuit card does not illuminate.
(a) Confirm that MB switch of the ELC circuit card is not in ON position (UP).
(b) Confirm that station data (ASDT command) in the ELC circuit card is assigned.
(c) Replace ELC circuit card with a spare.
(2) When BL lamp for each line is flashing or illuminating on the ELC circuit card.
(a) Confirm that MB switch of the ELC circuit card is not in ON position (UP).
(b) Use the MBST command to confirm that ELC circuit card has not been placed into make-busy state.
(c) Check the station data (ASDT command) assignment.
(d) Replace the ELC circuit card with a spare.
(3) Check the faulty line on the MDF.
(a) Isolate the faulty line to the in-house wiring side and to the system side.
(b) Connect the test Dterm to the system side.
(c) Confirm speech by station-to-station calling.
[When speech cannot be made]
Check LT cables.
Check to see if the modular plug is firmly connected with the Dterm.
679
CHAPTER 5
3.2
Trunk Fault
This paragraph explains the fault repair procedure when a fault, shown in Table 5-3, has occurred to a specific trunk.
Table 5-3 Trunk Fault Situation
TRUNK
FAULTY SITUATION
REFERENCE SECTION
ORT
SND
CFT
COT
TLT
DTI
MG
3.2.1
Check Point
680
CHAPTER 5
Ringdown System
Detection by ringing signal (20Hz) from
the opposite office.
Detection of Call
Termination
Acknowledge Signal
Sending
3
Detection of Release at the
time of Incoming
Connection
4
Loop System
Detection by loop from the opposite office.
TIMING SPECIFICATIONS
E&M System
Detection by incoming signal (ground or
48V) on E (RG2) lead.
Wink Signal
Delay Start
E&M System
288milliseconds (standard)
Loop System
Loop System
Closure of DC loop.
E&M System
Supply of outgoing call signal (ground or
48V) onto M (DL) lead.
Detection of Acknowledge
Signal
Wink Signal
Delay Start
If DP Signal is 10 seconds
(standard) after dial pulses are sent
out
Timing can be assigned using the
Even if answer signal has not reached from the
ARTD command.
opposite office, the call is regarded as
If PB Signal is 30 seconds
answered.
(standard) after seizure of the trunk
Timing can be assigned using
ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 156 (only
when 2nd Dial Tone System).
681
CHAPTER 5
TIMING SPECIFICATIONS
Loop System
Detection of polarity reversal across tip and
608 milliseconds (standard)
ring.
Timing can be assigned using the
E&M System
ARTD command.
Detection of Release Signal (ground or
48V) on E lead.
TIMING SPECIFICATIONS
For DP
10 pps: 860 milliseconds
(standard)
20 pps: 460 milliseconds
(standard)
Timing can be assigned using the
ASYD, SYS1, INDEX. 132
command.
For PB
60/120 milliseconds (selected by
ONSG of ARTD command.)
Timing can be changed using the
ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 133
command.
682
CHAPTER 5
3.2.2
Trunk Control
Trunk circuit cards are controlled from the CPU via the MUX. Each trunk line in a specific trunk circuit
card is controlled by the Port Microprocessor (PM) in a trunk circuit card. Figure 5-9 shows the control
route of the trunk circuit card.
Figure 5-9 Controlling Trunk Circuit Cards and Speech Path
ORT/SND
Control Signal
PM
Speech Path
MUX
TRK
TRK
MDF
COT/TLT
Control Signal
PM
Speech Path
TRK
TRK
CFT
LT Cable
LT Cable
Note
COT/TLT
Control Signal
PM
Speech Path
MUX
TRK
TRK
Network
LT Cable
LT Cable
ORT/SND
Control Signal
Speech Path
CFT
PM
TRK
TRK
Note
TDSW/INT
TSW
SV8500 Server
MG
MG
Symbols:
: Circuit Card
NETWORK
: Control Signal
Note: CFT for eight party is mounted within the TSW and MUX circuit card.
683
: Speech Path
CHAPTER 5
3.2.3
Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used
For CFT, place it into make-busy state using the MBTK command.
684
CHAPTER 5
3.2.4
Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, any other lines in that circuit card cannot be
(1) When OPE lamp on the trunk circuit card does not illuminate.
(a) Confirm that MB switch of the trunk circuit card is in ON position (UP side).
(b) Confirm that trunk data (ATRK command) in the trunk circuit card is assigned.
(c) Replace trunk circuit card with a spare.
(2) When BL lamp is flashing or illuminating on the trunk circuit card.
(a) Confirm that MB switch of trunk circuit card is in ON position (UP side).
(b) Use the MBTK command to confirm that trunk circuit card has not been placed into make-busy state.
(c) Check trunk data (ATRK command) assignment.
(d) Replace trunk circuit card with a spare.
(3) Check the faulty line on the MDF.
[If the C.O./Tie Line is in Loop Start system]
(a) Isolate the faulty line to C.O. side and to the system side.
(b) Connect the test telephone to the C.O. side.
(c) Confirm that Dial Tone (DT) is heard and the call is connected to the destination party at the opposite
office.
Note: Check can be made only on temporarily opened C.O./TIE lines.
685
CHAPTER 5
Note: When performing loop-back connection tests on the trunks at the users office, provide cross connection
as follows:
(1) For a COT
A
LC
LC
LC
COT
Set up a loop-back connection between the C.O. Trunk (COT) to be tested and station line.
LC
LC
Set up a loop-back connection between the C.O. Trunk (COT) to be tested and station line.
LC
TLT
LC
TLT
Set up a loop-back connection between the TIE Line Trunk (TLT) to be tested and another TLT.
If the TLT is a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Trunk, connect the related leads as shown below:
TLT
T
R
T
R
686
TLT
CHAPTER 5
If the TLT is a 4-wire E & M System, connect the related leads as shown below:
Receive
TLT
Send
T
R
T
R
E
M
T
R
T
R
E
M
Receive
Send
TLT
If the TLT is a 2W E & M System, connect the related leads as shown below:
T
R
E
M
T
R
E
M
TLT
TLT
LC
DTI
LC
DTI
Set up a loop-back connection between the DTI Trunk to be tested and another DTI Trunk as shown
below:
Receive
DTI
Send
T
T
T
T
Receive
DTI
Send
If the office is the PLO-source office, perform the tests by disconnecting the PLO and M-OSC. The
mode of the PLO becomes Self Operation Mode.
When the loop-back test is performed at the time of PCM LOSS, FRM LOSS, or MFRM LOSS alarm
lamp (red) illuminates. If the alarm lamp goes out, the DTI circuit card side is normal.
When only one DTI circuit card is to be checked, make the following connections and confirm that no
alarm lamps illuminates.
Receive
DTI
Send
Loop-back
Cross Connection
RA
RB
TA
TB
687
CHAPTER 5
3.3
ATTCON/DESKCON Fault
This section explains the fault repair procedure when a specific Attendant Console (ATTCON) is in any of the
following faulty conditions.
3.3.1
Check Point
ATTCON/DESKCON Control
Each ATTCON/DESKCON is controlled from an ATI (PA-CS33) circuit card. ATI circuit card is controlled
from the CPU card via the INT on the TSW card. Figure 5-10 shows the control route of the ATI circuit
card.
ATI (PA-CS33) circuit card is used as an interface card between the SV8500 Server and ATTCON/DESKCON. The card is mounted in slot 12.
688
CHAPTER 5
LT7
LT3
LT10
LT6
LT2
LT9
LT5
LT1
LT8
LT4
LT0
12
ATI
PAC33
LT11/PLO
PIR (Rear)
PIR (Front)
MDF
Note
DESK CONSOLE
DESK CONSOLE
Note: For more detailed information on the wiring, refer to Circuit Card Description.
689
CHAPTER 5
3.3.3
ATTCON/DESKCON Fault
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
START
On the ATTCON/DESKCON, LCHK
(Lamp Check) key has been pressed but
no lamps have illuminated.
END
690
CHAPTER 5
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
START
Replace the ATTCON/DESKCON with a
spare.
END
691
CHAPTER 5
3.4
Unit Fault
This section explains the fault repair procedure in a case where any of the faults shown in Table 5-6 has occurred
to all the line/trunk circuit cards mounted in a specific unit. Figure 5-6 shows the range of units.
Table 5-6 Unit Fault Situation
FAULT SITUATION
REFERENCE SECTION
MUX card has become faulty and, as a result the CPU has changed over. Section 3.4.5, Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX
System Message 4-S, 4-T and 23-Y is displayed.
Card is Faulty and System Has Changed Over
692
CHAPTER 5
3.4.1
Confirm the data shown below when service features cannot be assigned or service cannot be operated:
(1) Confirm that line capacity of physical PIR and virtual PIR is set correctly.
(2) Confirm that value of ASYD command to display LP mounting status is assigned as below.
(3) Compare the status of virtual PIR mounting information with physical/virtual PIR line capacity displayed. Data is assigned as below in this system.
(4) Confirm that all units are properly mounted by using the AUNT command.
693
CHAPTER 5
Unit structure of PIR is as shown below. Note that the following shows a DC type as an example.
Figure 5-11 Unit Data (1-IMG)
PIR3
U=2
U=3
PIR2
U=0
U=1
U=2
U=3
PIR1
FANU
PIR0
U=0
U=1
SV8500 Server
FANU
U=2
U=3
U=2
U=3
U=2
U=3
U=2
U=3
U=0
U=1
U=0
U=1
U=0
U=1
U=0
U=1
U=2
U=3
U=2
U=3
U=2
U=3
U=2
U=3
TSWR
FANU
U=0
U=1
FANU
U=0
U=1
694
FANU
U=0
U=1
FANU
U=0
U=1
CHAPTER 5
3.4.2
MUX 0
MUX 1
Clock
Clock
(B)
(B)
TSW
Speech
Path
Speech
Path
(A)
(A)
Control of
TP
PM
SYMBOLS
LC/TRK
Line/
Trunk
Circuit Card
: Circuit Card
(A)
(B)
695
LC/TRK
TSW
CHAPTER 5
TSW
Speech
Path
(A)
Control of
TP
PM
LC/TRK
Line/
Trunk
Circuit Card
LC/TRK
13 14
MUX 1
UNIT = 2
MUX 0
PIR 3
UNIT = 3
13 14
MUX 1
UNIT = 0
MUX 0
PIR 2
UNIT = 1
13 14
MUX 1
UNIT = 2
MUX 0
PIR 1
UNIT = 3
13 14
MUX1
UNIT = 0
MUX0
PIR 0
Front View
696
UNIT = 1
CHAPTER 5
3.4.3
Faulty Situation:
Note: Exchange the TSW circuit card when MUX is not mounted on PIR.
After replacement of the MUX circuit card, make a station-to-station call in the faulty unit and see if
speech is normal.
(a) Replace the MUX circuit card referring to Section 1.5, Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer)
Circuit Card.
(b) Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode referring to How to Control Switching Block in Chapter 2.
(2) Check by replacing the TSW circuit card.
After replacement of the TSW circuit card, make a station-to-station call in the faulty unit and see if
speech is normal.
(a) Place the TSW circuit card into ACT mode referring to How to Control Switching Block in Chapter 2.
(3) Check the line/trunk circuit cards mounted in the unit to see if they are faulty.
(a) Set the MB switch of the line/trunk circuit card UP and extract it from its mounting slot.
(b) Make a station-to-station call and see if a fault occurs.
(4) Perform this check on an individual basis.
(a) If the fault has stopped occurring, the circuit card extracted at that time is faulty. Replace the circuit
card with a spare.
(b) If the fault continues, check the next circuit card.
697
CHAPTER 5
698
CHAPTER 5
3.4.4
Faulty Situation:
Note: For dual system configuration, if a system message indicates that both systems are faulty, first repair the
fault in the indicated system and then proceed to repair the PIR in the other system.
<<For Dual Configuration>>
(1) Check to see if the MUX circuit card is making poor contact.
(a) Set the MUX circuit card into STBY mode. Flip the MBR switch of ACT side TSW circuit card from
ON OFF.
(b) Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP.
(c) Extract the MUX circuit card from its mounting slot and clean the contact portion. If cleaning cannot
be done, repeat insertion and extraction of the circuit card two or three times.
(d) Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.
(e) Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card DOWN.
(f) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up within the faulty unit.
(2) Check by replacing the MUX circuit card with a spare.
(a) Place the MUX circuit card into STBY mode. Flip the MBR switch on the ACT side TSW circuit card
from ON OFF.
(b) Replace the MUX circuit card. Refer to Section 1.5, Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer)
Circuit Card.
(c) Change the new MUX circuit card to ACT mode.
(d) Check to see if a DT (Dial Tone) connection can be set up within the faulty unit.
699
CHAPTER 5
(3) Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from their mounting slots in the unit. Insert the cards back into their
slots one after another and see if the dial tone is heard each time.
(a) Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from their slots.
Note: Set the MB switch of the line/trunk circuit card UP and extract.
(b) Confirm the MUX ACT lamp on the MUX circuit card illuminates.
(c) Set the MB switch of an extracted line/trunk circuit card UP and insert the circuit cards into their
mounting slots one by one.
(d) Confirm the OPE lamp of the inserted circuit card illuminates by setting the MB switch DOWN.
(e) Make a station-to-station call and see if DT can be heard.
[If Dial Tone (DT) is heard, check the next circuit card.]
[If DT is not heard, replace the circuit card with a spare.]
Note: Perform this check on the rest of the circuit cards by inserting them into their individual slots.
(b) Confirm the MUX ACT lamp on the MUX circuit card illuminates.
(c) Set the MB switch of an extracted Line/Trunk circuit card UP and insert the circuit cards into their
mounting slots one by one.
700
CHAPTER 5
(d) Confirm the OPE lamp of the inserted circuit card illuminates by setting the MB switch DOWN.
(e) Make a station-to-station call and see if dial tone can be heard.
[If DT is heard, check the next circuit card.]
[If DT is not heard, replace the circuit card with a spare.]
Note: Perform this check on the rest of the circuit cards by inserting them into their individual slots.
701
CHAPTER 5
3.4.5
Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX Card is Faulty and System Has Changed Over
Faulty Situation:
The ACT side has become faulty and the system changeover has executed in the dual configuration system.
(1) Check to see if the MUX circuit card of the STBY side is making poor contact.
(a) Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP.
(b) Extract the MUX circuit card from its mounting slot and clean the contact portion. If cleaning cannot
be done, repeat insertion and extraction of the circuit card two or three times.
(c) Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.
(d) Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card DOWN.
(e) Set the faulty system to ACT side referring to How to Control Switching Block in Chapter 2.
(f) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up within the faulty unit.
(g) If the connection cannot be established, change the faulty side to ST-BY and repeat the above procedure to the spare MUX circuit cards.
(2) Replace the MUX circuit card with a spare, and check it.
(a) Replace the MUX circuit card referring to Section 1.5, Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer)
Circuit Card.
(b) Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode referring to How to Control Switching Block in Chapter 2.
(c) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a circuit card responsible for
the fault.
(d) Perform the above check by extracting each MUX circuit card individually.
702
CHAPTER 5
3.5
REFERENCE SECTION
Even if dialing has been made, dial tone does not stop.
Dial tone cannot be heard.
703
CHAPTER 5
3.5.1
Check Point
When repairing a speech path fault, consider that when any of the faults shown in Table 5-16 have occurred
in the system, it is possible that the TSW circuit card is at fault. Always check the alarm lamps on the TSW
circuit card.
Figure 5-16 Speech Path Block Diagram (1-IMG)
PIR3
MUX
MUX
PIR 2
MUX
MUX
PIR 1
MUX
MUX
PIR0
TSW/INT0
TSW/INT1
MUX 3
MUX 2
MUX 1
MUX 3
MUX 2
MUX 1
MUX
TSW0
MUX
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
<Symbols>
: Speech Path
: Circuit Card (ACT)
: Cable
: Circuit Card (STBY)
704
TSW1
CHAPTER 5
IMG1
PIR 3
PIR3
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PIR 2
PIR 2
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PIR 1
PIR 1
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PIR 0
PIR 0
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
TSWR
TSW 00
MUX 003
MUX 002
MUX 001
MUX 000
MUX/INT
TSW 01
MUX 013
MUX 012
MUX 011
MUX 010
MUX/INT
TSW 10
MUX 100
MUX 101
MUX 102
MUX 103
MUX/INT
TSW 11
MUX 110
MUX 111
MUX 112
MUX 113
MUX/INT
<Symbols>
: Speech Path
: Circuit Card (ACT)
: Cable
: Circuit Card (STBY)
705
TSW: PH-SW12
MUX: PH-PC36
MUX/
INT
TSW
02
MUX/
INT
TSW
12
MUX/
INT
TSW
03
MUX/
INT
TSW
13
CHAPTER 5
IMG2
IMG3
PIR 3
PIR 3
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PIR 2
PIR2
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PIR 1
PIR1
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PIR 0
PIR 0
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
TSWR
TSW 03
MUX 033
MUX 032
MUX 031
MUX 030
MUX/INT
TSW 02
MUX 023
MUX 022
MUX 021
MUX 020
MUX/INT
TSW 12
MUX 120
MUX 121
MUX 122
MUX 123
MUX/INT
TSW 13
MUX 130
MUX 131
MUX 132
MUX 133
MUX/INT
<Symbols>
: Speech Path
: Circuit Card (ACT)
: Cable
: Circuit Card (STBY)
TSW: PH-SW12
MUX: PH-PC36
706
MUX/
INT
TSW
00
MUX/
INT
TSW
10
MUX/
INT
TSW
01
MUX/
INT
TSW
11
CHAPTER 5
3.5.2
Faulty Situation:
Fault related to speech such as noise, one-way speech, no-speed, etc. occurs.
1-IMG
Note: Be sure to use TSW MBR key on the TSW-ACT TSW card. If TSW MB key is operated before oper-
ating TSW MBR key on the TSW-ACT TSW card, the card will be reset. During this initialization, all
channels on the card will be placed in MB status, disconnecting all active calls.
<<For Dual Configuration>>
(1) Check to see if fault occurs by replacing TSW circuit cards one by one.
(a) Replace the TSW circuit card by referring to Replacement Procedure of TSW (Time Division Switch)
Circuit Card.
(b) Place the TSW circuit card in ACT mode. Refer to Changeover of CPU/TSW/PLO in Chapter 2.
(c) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsible for the fault.
(d) Perform the above check by extracting the TSW circuit cards individually.
(2) Check to see if fault occurs by replacing MUX circuit cards one by one.
(a) Replace the MUX circuit card by referring to Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer) Circuit
Card.
(b) Place the MUX circuit card to ACT mode. Refer to How to Control Switching Block.
(c) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a circuit card responsible for
the fault.
(d) Perform the above check by extracting the MUX circuit cards individually
(3) When OSC circuit card is mounted for digital interface, replace OSC circuit card with a spare and check.
(a) Set MB switch of the OSC circuit card to UP side.
(b) Confirm CLK OUT lamp on the OSC circuit card of the mate system illuminates.
(c) Extract the OSC circuit card from its mounting slot.
(d) Set MB switch UP and insert the new OSC circuit card into its mounting slot.
(e) Set MB switch DOWN.
707
CHAPTER 5
(4) Set the faulty speech path system to STBY side. Refer to Changeover of CPU/TSW/PLO in Chapter 2.
<<For Single Configuration>>
(1) Check to see if fault occurs by replacing TSW circuit cards.
(a) Replace the TSW circuit card by referring to Replacement Procedure of TSW (Time Division Switch)
Circuit Card.
(b) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsible for the fault.
(c) Perform the above check by extracting the TSW circuit cards individually.
(2) Check to see if fault occurs by replacing MUX circuit cards one by one.
(a) Replace the MUX circuit card by referring to Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer) Circuit
Card.
(b) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsible for the fault.
(c) Perform the above check by extracting the MUX circuit cards individually.
(3) When OSC circuit card is mounted for Digital Interface, replace OSC circuit card with a spare and check.
(a) Set MB switch of the OSC circuit card to UP side.
(b) Confirm CLK OUT lamp on the OSC circuit card goes out.
(c) Extract the OSC circuit card from its mounting slot.
(d) Set MB switch UP and insert the new OSC circuit card into its mounting slot.
(e) Set MB switch DOWN.
(f) Confirm the ACT lamp on the new OSC circuit card illuminates.
(g) Confirm that speech can be carried out normally by a station-to-station call.
4-IMG
Note: Be sure to use MBR key on the ACT GT card. If MB key is operated before operating MBR key
on the ACT GT card, the card will be reset. During this initialization, all channels that are related to this
card will be placed in MB status, disconnecting all active calls.
<<For Dual Configuration>>
(1) Check to see if fault occurs by extracting TSW circuit cards one by one.
708
CHAPTER 5
(a) Replace the TSW circuit card by referring to Replacement Procedure of TSW (Time Division Switch)
Circuit Card.
(b) Place the TSW circuit card into ACT mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT card. Refer to
Changeover of CPU/TSW/PLO in Chapter 2.
(c) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsible for the fault.
(d) Perform the above check by extracting the TSW circuit cards individually.
(2) Check to see if fault occurs by extracting MUX circuit cards one by one.
(a) Replace the MUX circuit card by referring to Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer) Circuit
Card.
(b) Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT card. Refer to
How to Control Switching Block.
(c) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a circuit card responsible for
the fault.
(d) Perform the above check by extracting the MUX circuit cards individually
(3) When the PLO circuit card is mounted for digital interface, replace PLO circuit card with a spare and check.
(a) Set MB switch of the PLO circuit card to UP side.
(b) Confirm OPE lamp on the PLO circuit card of the mate system illuminates.
(c) Extract PLO circuit card from its mounting slot.
(d) Set MB switch UP and insert the new PLO circuit card into its mounting slot.
(e) Set MB switch DOWN.
(f) Set MB switch of the ACT-side PLO circuit card UP.
(g) Confirm that the new PLO circuit card becomes the ACT side (OPE lamp on the new card lights
green).
(h) Set MB switch of the STBY side PLO DOWN.
(i)
(4) Set the faulty speech path system to STBY side by flipping the MBR key on the active GT card. Refer to
Section 14.1.6, Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System, in Chapter 6.
<<For Single Configuration>>
(1) Check to see if fault occurs by replacing TSW circuit cards one by one.
(a) Replace the TSW circuit card by referring to Replacement Procedure of TSW (Time Division Switch)
Circuit Card.
(b) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsible for the fault.
709
CHAPTER 5
(c) Perform the above check by extracting the TSW circuit cards individually.
(2) Check to see if fault occurs by replacing MUX circuit cards one by one.
(a) Replace the MUX circuit card by referring to Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer) Circuit
Card.
(b) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsible for the fault.
(c) Perform the above check by extracting the MUX circuit cards individually.
(3) When the PLO circuit card is mounted for digital interface, replace PLO circuit card with a spare and check.
(a) Set MB switch of the PLO circuit card to UP side.
(b) Confirm ACT lamp on the PLO circuit card goes out.
(c) Extract PLO circuit card from its mounting slot.
(d) Set MB switch UP and insert the new PLO circuit card into its mounting slot.
(e) Set MB switch DOWN.
(f) Confirm the ACT lamp on the new PLO circuit card illuminates.
(g) Confirm that speech can be carried out normally by a station-to-station call.
710
CHAPTER 5
3.5.3
Speech Path System Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot be Heard
Faulty Situation:
Note: For dual system configuration, if a system message indicates that both systems are faulty, first repair the
fault in the indicated system and then proceed to repair the PIR in the other system.
1-IMG
Note: Be sure to use TSW MBR key on the TSW-ACT TSW card. If TSW MB key is operated before oper-
ating TSW MBR key on the TSW-ACT TSW card, the card will be reset. During this initialization, all
channels on the card will be placed in MB status, disconnecting all active calls.
(1) Check to see if the TSW circuit card is making poor contact.
(a) Place the TSW circuit card in STBY mode referring to How to Control Switching Block.
(b) Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP.
(c) Extract the TSW circuit card from its mounting slot and clean the contact portion. If cleaning cannot
be done, repeat insertion and extraction of the circuit card two or three times.
(d) Set TSW MBR switch, PLO MBR switch (1-IMG only), and MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP
and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.
(e) Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card DOWN.
(f) Set TSW MBR switch DOWN.
(g) Check if a station-to-station connection can be normally set up.
(2) Check PCM cables.
(a) Check the Front cables.
(b) Initialize the system by pressing the INIT button on the EMA card and see if a station-to-station connection can be set up.
4-IMG
Note: Be sure to use MBR key on the ACT GT card. If MB key is operated before operating MBR key
on the ACT GT card, the card will be reset. During this initialization, all channels that are related to this
card will be placed in MB status, disconnecting all active calls.
711
CHAPTER 5
(1) Check to see if the TSW circuit card is making poor contact.
(a) Set the TSW circuit card into STBY mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT card. Refer to
Changeover of CPU/TSW/PLO in Chapter 2.
(b) Set TSW MBR switch on the TSW card UP.
(c) Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP.
(d) Extract the TSW circuit card from its mounting slot and clean the contact portion. If cleaning cannot
be done, repeat insertion and extraction of the circuit card two or three times.
(e) Set TSW MBR and MB switches, on the TSW circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its
mounting slot.
(f) Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card DOWN.
(g) Set TSW MBR switch DOWN.
(h) Check if a station-to-station connection can be normally set up.
(2) Check front cables.
(a) Check the Front cables.
(b) Initialize the system by pressing the INIT button on the EMA card and see if a station-to-station connection can be set up.
712
CHAPTER 5
3.5.4
Faulty Situation:
A fault has occurred in the STBY side of the Dual Configuration system.
1-IMG
Note: Be sure to use TSW MBR key on the TSW-ACT TSW card. If TSW MB key is operated before oper-
ating TSW MBR key on the TSW-ACT TSW card, the card will be reset. During this initialization, all
channels on the card will be placed in MB status, disconnecting all active calls.
(1) Check to see if the TSW circuit card is making poor contact.
(a) Set TSW MBR switch of the TSW circuit card UP.
(b) Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP and extract the circuit card from its mounting slot.
(c) Extract the TSW circuit card from its mounting slot and clean the contact portion. If cleaning cannot
be done, repeat insertion and extraction of the circuit card two or three times.
(d) Set TSW MBR switch and MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its
mounting slot.
(e) Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card DOWN.
(f) Set TSW MBR switch and PLO MBR switch (1-IMG only) DOWN.
(g) Check if a station-to-station connection can be normally set up.
(2) Check PCM cables.
(a) Check the PCM cables. See Figure 5-19.
(b) Initialize the system by depressing the INIT button on the EMA card and see if a station-to-station
connection can be set up.
(3) Check to see if fault occurs by extracting TSW circuit cards one by one.
(a) Replace the TSW circuit card by referring to TSW Card Replacement Procedure in this chapter.
(b) Place the TSW circuit card to ACT mode. Refer to How to Control Switching Block in Chapter 2.
(c) Check to see if a Station-to-Station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsible for the fault.
(d) Perform the above check by extracting the TSW circuit cards individually.
713
CHAPTER 5
(4) Check to see if fault occurs by extracting MUX circuit cards one by one.
(a) Replace the MUX circuit card by referring to MUX Replacement: 1-IMG/MUX Replacement: 4-IMG
in this chapter.
(b) Place MUX circuit card to ACT mode. Refer to How to Control Switching Block in Chapter 2.
(c) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsible for the fault.
(d) Perform the above check by extracting the TSW circuit cards individually.
4-IMG
Note: Be sure to use MBR key on the ACT GT card. If MB key is operated before operating MBR key
on the ACT GT card, the card will be reset. During this initialization, all channels that are related to this
card will be placed in MB status, disconnecting all active calls.
(1) Check to see if the TSW circuit card is making poor contact.
(a) Set the TSW MBR switch of the TSW circuit card UP.
(b) Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP and extract the circuit card from its mounting slot.
(c) Extract the TSW circuit card from its mounting slot and clean the contact portion. If cleaning cannot
be done, repeat insertion and extraction of the circuit card two or three times.
(d) Set the TSW MBR switch and MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into
its mounting slot.
(e) Set the MB switch of the TSW circuit card DOWN.
(f) Set TSW MBR switch DOWN.
(g) Check if a station-to-station connection can be normally set up.
(2) Check PCM cables.
(a) Check the PCM cables.
(b) Initialize the system by depressing the INIT button on the EMA card and see if a station-to-station
connection can be set up.
(3) Check to see if fault occurs by extracting TSW circuit cards one by one.
(a) Replace the TSW circuit card referring to TSW Card Replacement Procedure in this chapter.
(b) Set the TSW circuit card into ACT mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT card. Refer to
How to Control Switching Block in Chapter 2.
(c) Check to see if a Station-to-Station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsible for the fault.
(d) Perform the above check by extracting the TSW circuit cards individually.
(4) Check to see if fault occurs by extracting MUX circuit cards one by one.
714
CHAPTER 5
(a) Replace the MUX circuit card by referring to MUX Replacement: 1-IMG/MUX Replacement: 4-IMG
in this chapter.
(b) Set the MUX circuit card into ACT mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT card. Refer to
How to Control Switching Block in Chapter 2.
(c) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsible for the fault.
(d) Perform the above check by extracting the TSW circuit cards individually.
715
CHAPTER 5
3.6
This section explains the fault repair procedure for the control system listed in Table 5-8.
REFERENCE SECTION
3.6.1
Check Point
When repairing the control system, check the status of the following lamps:
716
CHAPTER 5
The following figures show a block diagram of the CPU controlling block, where CPU 0 is active.
Figure 5-19 CPU Controlling Block Diagram (1-IMG)
PM Bus
MUX
MUX
LC/TRK
PIR3
LC/TRK
PM Bus
MUX
MUX
LC/TRK
PIR2
LC/TRK
PM Bus
MUX
MUX
LC/TRK
PIR1
LC/TRK
PM Bus
TSW
MUX
MUX INT
TSW
MUX
EXB INT
LC/TRK
MUX INT
EXB INT
LC/TRK
BUS0
BUS1
PIR0
SV8500 Server
EXB0
EXB1
CPU0
CPU1
EMA
IOC
(option)
PCI-Ex Bus
(PCI Express)
IOC
(option
: Circuit Card
: CPU Controlling Route
717
PCI-Ex Bus
(PCI Express)
: Signal
: Cable
CHAPTER 5
IMG1
PIR 3
PM BUS
MUX
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX
PM BUS
PIR 2
LC/TRK
PIR 2
PIR 1
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX
LC/TRK
PIR 1
PIR 0
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX
LC/TRK
PIR 0
MUX
PM BUS
MUX
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX
PM BUS
LC/TRK
PM BUS
PM BUS
MUX
MUX
PM BUS
MUX
PM BUS
LC/TRK
PM BUS
PM BUS
MUX
MUX
PM BUS
MUX
PM BUS
LC/TRK
PM BUS
PM BUS
MUX
PM BUS
MUX
LC/TRK
MUX
PM BUS
To IMG 2 To IMG 3
TSWR
PCI-Ex Bus
(PCI Express)
M M M M
U U U U
X X X X
MUX/INT
MUX/INT
TSW 00
MUX
/INT
MUX
/INT
TSW
02
TSW
03
M M M M
U U U U
X X X X
M M M M
U U U U
X X X X
MUX/INT
MUX/INT
TSW 01
TSW 10
TSW
12
MUX
/INT
TSW
13
TSW 11
DLKC BUS
EXB0
DLKC 1
DLKC 0
EMA
IOC
(Option)
DLKC BUS
GT 0
MUX
/INT
DLKC BUS
IOC
(Option)
DLKC BUS
Local I/O BUS
PLO 0
PLO 1
GT 1
CPU Board 1
PCI-Ex Bus
(PCI Express)
EXB1
SV8500 Server
CPU Board 0
M M M M
U U U U
X X X X
To IMG 2 To IMG 3
GT : PH-GT09
TSW : PH-SW12
DLKC: PH-PC20/PH-PC20-B
PLO : PH-CK16-D, etc.
MUX : PH-PC36
718
Symbols:
: CPU Controlling Routes
: Cable
CHAPTER 5
3.6.2
Faulty Situation:
(2) Change over the CPU or speech path referring to SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDURES.
(3) Make test calls (Station-to-Station call) to see if the fault occurs again.
(4) After completing all steps, place the related cards into ACT mode.
(5) Check to see that any fault information is displayed
[For Single-Configuration System]
(1) Replace the related circuit cards one by one referring to each page:
719
CHAPTER 5
(2) Initialize the system by pressing INIT button on the EMA card.
(3) Check to see that any fault information is displayed.
720
CHAPTER 5
3.6.3
Faulty Situation:
The ACT side has become faulty, and system changeover has been executed.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
1-IMG
START
Replace STBY-side related circuit card
(CPU, GT, TSW, MUX, EMA) with a
spare, and check.
END
When a fault is not indicated, set
the faulty systems to STBY side.
Refer to SYSTEM CONTROL
PROCEDURES in Chapter 2.
CPU Controlling Block Diagram: See Figure 5-19, Figure 5-20 in this chapter.
721
CHAPTER 5
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
4-IMG
START
Replace STBY-side related circuit cards
(CPU, GT, TSW, MUX, EMA) with a spare,
and check.
722
CHAPTER 5
3.6.4
STEP 1
STEP 2
Check the wiring on the MDF when Audible Visual Alarm Indicating Panel is used.
STEP 3
Make sure that the cable (Note 1) is securely inserted to EXALM connector on the EMA
SUB-A card.
Note 1: Depending on the type of EMA SUB-A card, the connecting cable changes.
The following shows an example of fully expanded 4-IMG system. The dotted lines are used for 4-IMG only.
MDF
Rear View
Rear View
(PIR 15)
(PIR 3)
PIR
ALMB
PIR
ALM
PIR
ALMA
PIR
ALMA
(PIR 14)
Audible Visual
Alarm Indicating
Panel
(PIR 2)
PIR
ALMB
PIR
ALMB
PIR
ALMA
PIR
ALMA
(PIR 13)
Rear View
Cable for EMA SUB-A card
Note 1
(PIR 1)
(PIR 12)
PIR
ALMB
PIR
ALMB
PIR
ALMA
PIR
ALMA
(PIR 0)
TSWR
TSWR
ALMA
PIR
ALMB
PIR
ALMB
PIR
ALMA
PIR
ALMA
723
IMG2
IMG3
TSWR
Note 2
EMA SUB-A
MISCR
EMA SUB-B
SV8500 Server)
CHAPTER 5
3.7
This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-9 occur.
REFERENCE SECTION
3.7.1
Check Point
724
CHAPTER 5
(3) The figures below show the block diagrams for the power supply to each module.
Figure 5-22 Block Diagram of Power Supply System
[PIR]
Power Receiving Terminal
PWR 0
PIR3
Note
PWR 1
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX 0
MUX 1
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX 0
MUX 1
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX 0
MUX 1
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX 0/
TSW 0
MUX 1/
TSW 1
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
PWR 0
PIR2
Note
PWR 1
PWR 0
PIR1
Note
PWR 1
PWR 0
PIR0
Note
PWR 1
Note
Power Module 0
PIR0
SV8500 Server
Power Module 1
Power Module 1
Power Module 0
BASEU
[TSWR]
Power Receiving Terminal
TSWR
PWR 0
Note
PWR 1
DLKC0
GT0
TSW00
BASEU
725
TSW01
TSW02
TSW03
PLO0
CHAPTER 5
(4) The figures below show the power supply system for PIR and TSWR.
Figure 5-23 Power Supply to PIR
PWR 0
PWR 1
DC-DC
CONV
DC-DC
CONV
RGU
RGU
RGU
RGU
CR (for LC)
HOW
HOW
HOW (for LC)
SUB
PWR
SUB
PWR
NFB
NFB
-48V
-48V
AC-DC Converter
AC-DC Converter
AC
AC
PWR 0
DC-DC
CONV
-48V
REL
DC-DC
CONV
+5V, +12V, -5V
-48V
REL
-48V
-48V
+80V
+80V
726
-48V
CHAPTER 5
3.7.2
727
CHAPTER 5
3.7.4
FAULT SUPERVISION
728
CHAPTER 5
3.8
3.8.1
Check Point
STEP 1
If a specific fan does not work, and other fans are operating, replace the specific fan with a new
one, referring to Replacement Procedure of FANs (PIR/TSWR).
STEP 2
Make sure that FAN PWR SW on the FANC (PZ-M699) is set to ON (downward).
Make sure the voltage at the connector is -48 V. If it is less than -48 V, check the cable connection
between FANU and the PIR/TSWR.
FAN1
FAN2
FAN3
FAN tray
PIR
FUSE ALM
-48V
-48VR
FAN ALM
PZ-M699
729
CHAPTER 5
3.9
TONE FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the various tones cannot be heard in the whole
system.
3.9.1
Check Point
When repairing a tone fault, consider that the tone generator circuit is equipped in the TSW circuit card
and supplies tone.
The figure below shows an example of the related trunking for dial tone connection.
Figure 5-26 Dial Tone Connection
TSW
DT
Dial
Tone
LC
ORT
3.9.2
Tone Fault
External Music-On-Hold
STEP 2
730
CHAPTER 5
STEP 3
MDF
PIR2
Installation Cable
PIR1
PIR0
TSW
MUSIC
IMG0
Note 1
MUSIC
EXALM
DSP
Note 2
EMA SUB-A
Music-On-Hold
SV8500 Server
Rear View
Note 1: Depending on the type of EMA SUB-A card, the connecting cable changes.
731
CHAPTER 5
MDF
D37 EXCLK CA-A
Installation Cable
Installation Cable
EXCLK1
TSWR
(PLO)
(PLO)
EXCLK0
Music-On-Hold
EMA SUB-A
IMG0
MUSIC
EMA SUB-B
IMG1
IMG2
Note 3
EXALM DSP
IMG3
TSWR
MISCR
SV8500 Server
Rear View
732
CHAPTER 5
REFERENCE SECTION
733
CHAPTER 5
To CCIS Line
LT Cable
CCT
734
CHAPTER 5
(c) On DTI cards, set MB switch DOWN. On CCH card, set MBR switch DOWN.
(d) Check whether the fault is still indicated.
(2) Check by replacing the DTI card with spare.
(a) On DTI card, set MB switch UP and extract the card from the mounting slot.
(b) On a new DTI card, make the switch setting.
(c) On new DTI card, set MB switch UP and insert the card into the mounting slot.
(d) On new DTI card, set MB switch DOWN.
(e) Check whether the fault is still indicated.
735
CHAPTER 5
REFERENCE SECTION
To ISDN Line
LT Cable
PRT
736
CHAPTER 5
737
CHAPTER 5
4. SYSTEM OPERATION
This section explains the system operation of the system with PIR.
738
CHAPTER 5
4.1
When a station is in lockout status (permanent signaling state, shorting across speech wires, etc.), it can quickly
be discovered, preventing the situation from developing into serious trouble.
(1) Indicating Method
By entering the following commands from PCPro, information pertaining to the lockout station concerned
will display.
COMMAND
DLSL
DLSS
739
CHAPTER 5
4.2
Recovery Procedure
Figure 5-31 Recovery Procedure From Lockout Station (1 of 2)
Go on-hook and then go off-hook again.
If dial tone is heard, the station is in permanent
signaling status.
System
MDF
LOCKOUT STATION
SEPARATING
TEST TEL.
Here DT?
YES
NO
A
740
CHAPTER 5
RLST command
(Confirm: DT)
Hear DT?
YES
NO
COMMAND
RLST
741
CHAPTER 5
4.3
In the Telephony Server system, Line Load Control can be activated automatically or manually as a
countermeasure against abnormal traffic congestion towards the stations accommodated in the PIR.
In the case of automatic control, the system automatically monitors an overloaded situation and restricts
outgoing calls from stations and incoming calls from trunks.
In the case of manual control, the operator at an Attendant/Desk Console or PCPro restricts outgoing calls from
stations and incoming calls from trunks.
This section covers the following methods to activate Line Load Control:
4.3.1
Operating Procedure
Setting
Figure 5-32 Line Load Control Operations on ATTCONSetting
Press LOOP key.
742
CHAPTER 5
Cancelling
Figure 5-33 Line Load Control Operations on ATTCONCancelling
Press LOOP key.
(SST)
Press CANCEL key.
NEC
LAMP
743
CHAPTER 5
Setting
Figure 5-35 Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKCONSetting
Press Lx (L1-L6) key.
(SST)
Press CANCEL key.
Cancelling
Figure 5-36 Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKCONCancelling
Press Lx (L1-L6) key.
(SST)
Press CANCEL key.
744
CHAPTER 5
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
Desk Console
745
CHAPTER 5
4.4
When the connection with a port has been disconnected, it is reported by a message.
CONTENT
Port Normal
Port Abnormal
This message is output when Port Abnormal status has lasted for 30 seconds.
This message is immediately output if port abnormal occurs after the IOC card is
initialized.
This message is output when DR signal is ON for the port about which Output of Port
Disconnected message is output.
746
CHAPTER 5
4.5
Line Management
Note: Make-Busy means a status rejecting any registration so as to change its equipment, etc.
4.5.1
Stations and data terminals can be put into make-busy state by the following operations:
(1) On each station basis using the MBST command.
Assign the station number in the STN parameter and choose 1 for the MB box of the MBST command.
For the make-busy cancellation, choose 0 for the MB box.
(2) On each circuit basis using the MBLE command.
Assign LENS number in the LENS parameter and choose 1 for the MB box of the MBLE command.
For the make-busy cancellation, choose 0 for the MB box.
(3) On each circuit card basis using the MBPM command or operating the MB (toggle) key on the card.
Assign the required LENS number in the MG, UNIT and Group parameters and choose 1 for the MB
box of the MBPM command.
747
CHAPTER 5
4.5.2
Figure 5-38 shows the procedure for class change and number change of station and data terminal.
Figure 5-38 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal Procedure
START
Line Make-Busy
END
4.5.3
Figure 5-39 shows the procedure to make-busy/make-busy cancel of C.O. line/tie line.
Figure 5-39 Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line Procedure
START
Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of
C.O./Tie Line
END
748
CHAPTER 5
4.5.4
be make-busy state.
749
CHAPTER 5
4.6
This section explains the order to turn ON/OFF the power of the whole system when PIR
is mounted.
Be sure to follow the procedures below to power on/off the system.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
4.6.1
1-IMG configuration
PWR/DPWR card on PIR Power module on SV8500 server
4-IMG configuration
PWR card on TSWR PWR/DPWR card on PIR Power module on SV8500 server
Note:
To turn on the PIR modules, power on the younger number of PIR module first and then turn on the older
numbers in order (PIR0 PIR1 PIR2.....).
1-IMG configuration
Power module on SV8500 server PWR/DPWR card on PIR
4-IMG configuration
Power module on SV8500 server PWR card on TSWR PWR/DPWR card on PIR
Note:
To turn off the PIR modules, power off the younger number of PIR module first and then turn off the older
numbers in order (PIR0 PIR1 PIR2.....).
750
CHAPTER 5
4.6.2
Note: PCPro Tools can be used for FP85-108 S5 or earlier. Use Telephony Server Main-
tenance Menu for FP85-109 S6 or later (Do not use PCPro Tools for FP85-109 S6
or later).
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
STEP 1: Connect an AC power code to AC inlet on Power module (on the rear panel of SV8500 server module).
STEP 2: Turn on the PWR switch (to left) (Note 1). PWR lamp (on the left of Power switch) lights green.
Turn OFF:
STEP 1:
<Telephony Server Maintenance Menu (For FP85-109 S6 or later)>
1) Click the Shutdown button in the SYSTEM CONTROL area of Telephony Server Maintenance
Menu screen. The Shutdown dialog box appears in the lower right portion of the screen.
2) Click the Shutdown button in the Shutdown dialog box.
3) Make sure that PWR lamp is off on the CPU card. Note 2
<By PCPro Tools (For FP85-108 S5 or earlier)>
On PCPro Tools menu [System Control], select [2. System Shutdown] and click the Execute button.
SV8500 server stops operating here. Note 2
STEP 2: Turn off the Power switch (to right) on the Power module.
STEP 3: Disconnect the AC power code.
[DC-Powered Model of SV8500 Server]
Turn ON:
STEP 1: Supply the power to BASEU. When the power cable between BASEU and SV8500 server is connected, BASEU starts supplying the power to SV8500 server here.
STEP 2: Turn on the Power switch (to left) on the Power module (on the rear panel of SV8500 server module)
(Note 1). PWR lamp (on the left of Power switch) lights green.
Turn OFF:
STEP 1:
<Telephony Server Maintenance Menu (For FP85-109 S6 or later)>
751
CHAPTER 5
1) Click the Shutdown button in the SYSTEM CONTROL area of Telephony Server Maintenance
Menu screen. The Shutdown dialog box appears in the lower right portion of the screen.
2) Click the Shutdown button in the Shutdown dialog box.
3) Make sure that PWR lamp is off on the CPU card. Note 2
<By PCPro Tools (For FP85-108 S5 or earlier)>
On PCPro Tools menu [System Control], select [2. System Shutdown] and click the Execute button.
SV8500 server stops operating here. Note 2
STEP 2: Turn off the Power switch (to right) on the Power module.
STEP 3: Stop supplying the power to BASEU.
Note 1: When you want to turn on SV8500 server right after turning off the powered system, wait for a while (about
ATTENTION
STEP 1: Connect an AC power code to AC inlet on AC-DC Power Unit. AC-DC Power
Unit is powered on here (OPE lamp lights and fans start turning).
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
STEP 2: Turn on the PWR switch (to right) on the front right of AC-DC Power Unit. AC-DC Power Unit starts
supplying the power to PIR here.
STEP 3: Flip the -48V SW switch up on the PWR/DPWR card in each PIR.
Turn OFF:
STEP 1: Flip the -48V SW switch down on the PWR/DPWR card in each PIR.
STEP 2: Turn off the PWR switch (to left) on the front right of AC-DC Power Unit.
STEP 3: Disconnect the AC power code.
[Turn ON/OFF Procedure: DC-Powered Model of PIR]
Turn ON:
STEP 1: Supply the power to BASEU. When the power cable connection between BASEU and PIR is completed, BASEU starts supplying the power to PIR here.
752
CHAPTER 5
753
CHAPTER 5
4.6.4
Turn ON:
STEP 1: Supply the power to BASEU. When the power cable between BASEU and
TSWR is connected, BASEU starts supplying the power to TSWR here.
STEP 2: Flip -48V SW switch up on the DC-DC power (PWR/DPWR) card.
Turn OFF:
STEP 1: Flip the -48V SW switch down on the DC-DC power (PWR/DPWR) card.
STEP 2: Stop supplying the power to BASEU.
754
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6
1. GENERAL
This chapter explains the routine maintenance procedure of SV8500 system.
Even if the system is operating normally, it is necessary to perform a routine check to prevent a fault occurrence
before it is too late to discover any latent cause of a fault.
This chapter categorizes the routine maintenance procedures of the Telephony Server into the following three
types, and explains the minimum required work steps and precautions pertaining to each of the following three
procedures.
2. FLOW OF PROCEDURES
The scheduling of routine maintenance (daily, monthly, quarterly) will vary depending on each installation
and organization. Figure 6-1 shows the flow of the routine maintenance procedures.
Figure 6-1 Flow of Procedures
System Control
SYSTEM OPERATION
Maintenance Command
755
CHAPTER 6
TEST EQUIPMENT/
TOOLS
Telephone Set
Blown Fuse
Phillips Screwdriver
PURPOSE
REMARKS
756
CHAPTER 6
2.2.1
Check whether the room temperature is within the range of 5C (41F) to 30C (86F).
Check whether the relative humidity in the room is within the 15% to 65% range.
(3) If the temperature or the humidity goes beyond the suitable, adjust the air conditioner.
2.2.2
757
CHAPTER 6
2.2.4
2.2.5
758
CHAPTER 6
Attendant/Desk Console
759
CHAPTER 6
User Name
Signature of Supervisor
Work Time
(From )
Date:
Maintenance
Classification
Control No.
Maintenance
Company
Name of Equipment
Room Temperature - C
F & humidity%
Item
Check of Ambient Conditions in
the Switch Room
Detail
Ambient
Temperature
Check
Routine/Nonroutine
Name of Worker
Item
Trunk RGU Check
Detail
SND Trunk
Relative humidity
DCF Function
Alarm Check
TOPU
Tone
PCPro/Printer Check
PCPro
PCPro
Printer
ATTCON Check
Related to Fault
System Check
Result of Routine
Diagnosis
CPU
Locked out
Stations
TSW
PM
Alarm Tests
TOPU
Rectifier
Battery
Ringing Signal
C.O. Trunk
TIE Trunk
ORT
IRT
760
Check
CHAPTER 6
761
CHAPTER 6
ACCESS
NUMBER
ROUTE
NUMBER
762
TRUNK
NUMBER
CHECK
REMARKS
CHAPTER 6
SENDER Function
TEST ITEM
Perform the test by specifying DP/PB
an ORT with the Connection
Test Station.
Confirm that System Message
[6-I] displays as a result of the
test.
Perform the test by specifying
an ORT with the Connection
Test Station.
Confirm that System Message
[6-I] displays as a result of the
test.
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
LC
ORT
LC
~
MOH
SND
ORT
763
CHAPTER 6
RST ( / )
FUNCTION
TRUNK NO.
RST No.
RST No.
RST No.
RST No.
ORT0
SND0
ORT
PB RECEIVING DP RECEIVING
764
SENDER
REMARKS
CHAPTER 6
TEST ITEM
Perform the test by specifying
an 8CFT with the Connection
Test Station.
Confirm that System Message
[6-I] displays as a result of the
test.
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
LC
INT / TSW
8CFT
~
TSTT
FUNCTION
TRUNK NO.
CFT0
SPEECH
RELEASE
REMARKS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Speech Path for Each PIR, and Ringing Generator Unit
NO.
TEST TYPE
TEST ITEM
1 The ATTCON/
Normal speech path is confirmed
DESKCON is called by calling the attendant from a
from one station in station located in each PIR.
each PIR.
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
LC
ATI
ATTCON/
DESKCON
765
CHAPTER 6
Speech Path for Each PIR, and Ringing Generator Unit (Continued)
NO.
TEST TYPE
2 The operator calls
the station back.
TEST ITEM
After normal speech path has
been confirmed, the attendant
calls the station back. Confirm
that the station rings.
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
ATI
ATTCON/
DESKCON
PWR0, 1
RG
LC
(RINGING)
MOUNTING LOCATION
MODULE NAME UNIT NAME
0
PIR0
CHECK
1
2
3
0
PIR1
1
2
3
0
PIR2
1
2
3
0
PIR3
1
2
3
766
REMARKS
CHAPTER 6
TEST ITEM
Station dials the operator
access code and confirms that
the call termination is
indicated at all the ATTCON/
DESKCON.
Station dials the operator
access code. An attendant
answers and speaks with the
caller. This process is repeated
at all the ATTCON/
DESKCON.
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
LC
ATI
ATTCON/
DESKCON
ATI
ATTCON/
DESKCON
LC
(RINGING)
767
~ RG
CHAPTER 6
FUNCTION
ATTCON/
DESKCON NO.
0
CALL TERMINATION
CALL ORIGINATION
INCOMING CALL
SPEECH RELEASE SPEECH RELEASE
INDICATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
768
REMARKS
CHAPTER 7
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Maintenance Commands
1. GENERAL
This chapter explains various commands and list up commands that are used in the system administrative
management procedure. The table below shows the list of commands.
Table 7-1 Command List
COMMAND
AACT
ALLC
ALMG
AONE
APENL
ASECL
ASSW
ATDL
ATRF
ATRFN
AVERN
BOSD
CADSD
CARR
CARRN
CATK
CBCN
CBCV
CBKS
CBND
CCSE
CDBU
CFCS
CLPB
CMNT
CMOD
CMWL
769
REMARKS
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
COSSL
COSSN
CPBKN
CPCP
Control of PC Port
CPRS
CSCL
CSPAL
CSPAN
CSTN
CTSP
DCBD
DCEN
DCON
DDMO
DEBUG
DFLN
DFTD
DHDF
DHDS
DHDSN
DICBD
DIMG
DIPI
DISD
DISI
DISS
DISSN
DLEN
DLSL
DLSS
DLSS_T
770
REMARKS
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
DLTEL
DMOS
DNTEL
DPHL
Display of PH Status
DPKG
DPSW
DPTR
DSOS
DSTN
DTELN
DTF101
DTF102
DTF103
DTF104
DTF105
DTF201
DTF301
DTF302
DTF303
DTF501
DTF601
DTF602
DTF701
DTF702
DTF801
DTF101N
DTF102N
DTF103N
DTF104N
DTF105N
DTF201N
DTF301N
771
REMARKS
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
DTF302N
DTF303N
DTF501N
DTF601N
DTF602N
EVLOG
FLINST
File Install
HDFP
IPAN
IPDM
MBCT
MBCTC
MBLE
Make-Busy of LENS
MBPH
MBPM
MBRT
Make-Busy of Route
MBRT_LR
MBSM
MBST
Make-Busy of Station
MBST_T
MBTC
MBTC_LR
MBTK
MBTK_LR
MEM_HDD
MEM_HDD_N
MFCH
PMBU
RALM
Release Alarm
RALMN
RDPD
772
REMARKS
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
RLMG
RLST
Release Station/Trunk
RLST_T
RPID
SCVT
SINZ
System Initialize
SINZN
SPTS
SRTS
SRTS_LR
TOGC
TLBK
773
REMARKS
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Operation
Select whether to confirm the license data and create a file or to register the activation code.
Confirm License Data and Create File
Register Activation Code
<Operation: Confirm License Data and Create File>
[Hardware Key Code List]
This list displays the Hardware Key Code.
System Note 1
System 0
System 1
Note: Each Hardware Key Code of System0 and System1 will be shown when the System is in dual configura-
tion.
Note 1: The System column is not displayed in the window when the single configuration system is used.
774
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Button
<Operation: Confirm License Data and Create File>
Get:
Readout the Hardware Key Codes of all of active CPUs and the Software
Key Code of all the Software installed to the system.
File Save:
Output the displayed Hardware Key Code and the Software Key Code to the
text file.
Set:
775
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note: Each Hardware Keycode of System0 and System1 will be shown when the System is in dual configura-
tion.
Software Keycode:
CNT
Software Keycode
Software Name
Button
Get:
Readout the Software Keycode of all the Software installed to the system.
Input Data
Activation Code:
Button
Get:
Set:
Button
File Save:
Output the displayed Hardware Keycode and the Software Keycode to the text
file.
Exit:
776
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
LP:
Note: This parameter appears when O (only one LP) is set in ALL/ONE input data.
777
CHAPTER 7
ALMG:
Maintenance Commands
1. Functional Outline
This command provides flexibility in changing the system message output grade and alarm lamp grade. The
SV8500 user can give a proper output grade and alarm lamp grade to each system message according to their
requirements.
Output grade - - - - - - - Specifies whether the fault information is output on system alarm lamp and system
message.
When no data is assigned, the default alarm grades are automatically applied.
Note 1: This command cannot change the alarm grade for System Message [6-A].
Note 2: Use LLMG (Listup of Alarm Grade Data) command TYPE=3 to output the default value of alarm lamp
to default value.
2. Parameters
Input data
FK:
FI:
LMP:
GRD:
Note: When lower grade of GRD is assigned than SYSM GRD, system message is not output.
778
CHAPTER 7
779
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
2. Parameters
Input Data
<Software Keycode>
Assign the Software Keycode labeled on BASIC SOFTWARE (1/2) CD-ROM, then click the Set
button.
780
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
2. Precautions
(a) The list of Notice Information is one per one System. The maximum number of Notice Time (Month/
Year) data that can be assigned in one System is 255.
(b) Product Name of Notice Information can be overlapped.
(c) Product ID of Notice Information cannot be overlapped.
(d) Notice Time (Month/Year) must not be same time of Day Light Savings (Start/End).
Note 3: When Notice Time is enrolled as a same time of Day Light Savings (Start), the time that the message is out-
put by DFTD command becomes the time which is changed by Day Light Savings (Start).
Note 4: When Notice Time is enrolled as a same time of Day Light Savings (End), the notification is output twice
in this month.
3. Parameters
Input Data
When assigning the new information of Periodical Exchange Device Notice, write the following parameters and
click [Set].
P-ID: Product ID [1-255]
Enter the desired number.
P-NAME: Product Name [Maximum 32 characters]
Enter the product name.
Notice Time: Month/Year [01/2000-12/9999]
Enter the month/year which notifies the information of the periodical parts that should be exchanged.
Display Data
When [Get] is clicked, the list of Periodical Exchange Device Notice information which is enrolled is displayed.
In this data, when there is a part whose Notice Year/Month passes, the information is displayed by red character.
P-ID: Product ID [1-255]
781
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
all Periodical Parts Exchange Notice information, click [List All Clear] and then, click [Set].
782
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Available period is made indefinite:Selecting this box makes one-time password with no-time-limit.
Available Period:
Specify the available period (Day: Hour: Minute). The time can be specified from one second to seven days.
Select this item and click the Get button to retrieve the total number of terminals that have completed the Terminal Authentication.
Select this item and click the Get button to display list of the terminals that
have completed the SIP authentication.
MAC Address:
Buttons
Get:
Set:
Del.:
Execute:
Exit:
Output Data
<Maintenance Function>
Select an item displayed in a list box, and click the Execute button to perform it. The Maintenance Function
tab displays only when Encryption License is valid.
Cipher key update
783
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
when loading the office data in order to assign the software switch.
2. Parameters
System Select:
System 0
System 1
SYSTEM SELECT 1:
SW: 1-4
1: LAN Connector 3
2: LAN Connector 2
3: LAN Connector 1
4: LAN Connector 4
ON: Not detect fault
OFF: Detect fault
SW: 5-8
SYSTEM SELECT 2:
SW: 1-8
SYSTEM SELECT 3:
784
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Be sure to upload the required new download files to the FTP server using ADTM command before executing the download procedure by this command.
2. Precautions
(1) The following functions are available for PCPro version S7 or later:
(a) The following files can be imported or exported by this command: Note 1
File of List of Download File Name
Specify the file name of the download file for each type of terminals. When downloading a configuration file, name the download file the same as the configuration file.
File of Terminal List
Input information on all terminals that execute downloading.
785
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
DtermIP DtermIP(Dterm75/E)
DT710
10000
10001
itlisipe.tgz
DT710
Download File
(Firmware/Configuration File)
ramhp2pw.tgz
IP Terminals
Telephony Server
ramhptop.hex
10002
LAN
Firmware File
//Terminal Type
DtermIP(75/E)
DtermIP
DT710
HWTP
00
00
91
HWVER
02
14
30
File Name
ramhptop.hex
ramhp2pw.tgz
itlisipe.tgz
Configuration File
DtermIP(Dterm75/E)
DT710
Use UTF-16 encoding for the text file used by this command.
Add // at the top of the line to make it a comment line.
For editing the file with Excel, see the section of Editing Import/Export File with Excel.
(2) The followings are the restrictions and conditions for the files used by this command:
(a) File of List of Download File Name
Do not change the value of Hardware Type (HWTP) and Hardware Version (HWVER). To return
to the default values, click Reset to the Default Setting.
Up to 255 items of download file information can be input to this file.
The number of fields separated by tab must be four per line.
Terminal Type and File Name cannot be left blank.
(b) File of Terminal List
Up to 4000 items of download file information can be input to this file.
Input either of the following information. The other information is not used if they are input in the
file: Note 2
- LENS
- TN/STN
Note 2: When both LENS and TN/STN are input to the file, LENS has first priority to be used.
786
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
(3) When a file of List of Download File Name is imported to [List of Download File Name] on the screen of
this command, note the followings:
(a) The imported information returns to the default value if the running command is finished. If you want
to change the value from the default setting, import a file of List of Download File Name whenever
this command is started up.
(b) The imported information is also reflected to the drop-down list of Terminal Type and HWTPHWVER in Terminal Specifying Type.
(c) If a file is imported while Execute Downloading is selected for Process Type, the terminal types
and the file names listed in [Terminal List] are updated according to the imported file.
(d) If a file is imported while File Creation for Specifying Terminals is selected for Process Type, the
information listed in [Terminal List] is not updated.
(4) The information on terminals that execute downloading can be added to the [Terminal List] by either of the
following manner.
(a) Adding from Office Data to [Terminal List]
The information on each IP terminal, such as a station number, LENS and Terminal Type is read out
and is added to the [Terminal List].
(b) Adding from File to [Terminal List] Note 3
The information on terminals is added to the [Terminal List] by importing the file that is created beforehand to specify terminals executing downloading.
The file for specifying terminals is output by either of the following way:
Exporting [Terminal List] to a file
Outputting a template file for specifying terminals
Note 3: When adding the information by using a file, note the followings:
Only one file can be imported to [Terminal List]. If the information on multiple terminals are to be
input, all information must be listed in one file.
The exported file (*.text) can be edited directly with a text editor or Excel. When editing with Excel,
see the section of Editing Import/Export File with Excel.
(5) The conditions and restrictions regarding [Terminal List] are as follows:
(a) Up to 4000 items of information can be input to [Terminal List].
(b) Each column can be replaced by a drag-and-drop operation. The order of the column returns to the
default whenever this command is started up.
(c) The listed information can be sorted by clicking the top of each column. For example, when clicking
LENS, the information will be sorted in the order of Line Equipment Number. Note 4
Note 4: The displayed information cannot be sorted when data read or downloading is in process.
(d) When the information in [Terminal List] is updated, the Auto Scroll of the updated rows is executed.
787
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
(e) The Auto Scroll of the updated rows can be disabled by clearing the check box for Auto Scroll on [Terminal List]. Clear the check box if you want to view the information in [Terminal List] during data
read or downloading.
(f) The steps of the data assignment for Adding from Office Data to [Terminal List] and Adding from
File to [Terminal List] are independent to each other. When a change is made to Terminal Specifying
Method, the information listed in [Terminal List] returns to the state as this command is started up.
(6) When downloading is executed after specifying terminals by a file, Input Value Error may occur if the file
has problems. In this case, Error Record or Duplicate Record is displayed on the column of Error Detail.
Modify the corresponding row in the file and then import the file again.
(7) If ABORT button is pressed while there are some terminals executing downloading, the command processing cannot be aborted until the download by these terminals is completed.
(8) When pressing Export button after the completion of the download, a file for specifying terminals that includes information of Status/Result and Error Detail is created.
(9) Only the IP terminals that have established registration to the MGC can download the new download file.
(10) When information is added to [Terminal List] by selecting Execute Downloading for Process Type, the
terminals that cannot execute downloading appear in gray in [Terminal List]. The check box displayed on
the head of the rows cannot be checked in this situation.
(11) As for File Name in [List of Download File name], only one download file can be specified per Terminal
Type, regardless of the type of IP terminals. If multiple download files are to be downloaded, a list file (for
example: *list.txt, *.list) that specifying the necessary download files must be created. In this case, specify
the file name of the list file after storing this list file in the FTP server.
(12) UG50 is not supported.
3. Parameters
The followings are the parameters in this command.
Display the List of Download File Name:
Click this check box when displaying [List of Download File Name].
Terminal Type: Type of IP terminal (maximum of 64 characters)
The types of IP terminals corresponding to each download file are displayed.
HWTP: Hardware Type (00-FF)
The hardware types corresponding to each type of IP terminals are displayed.
HWVER: Hardware Version (00-FF)
The versions of hardware corresponding to each type of IP terminals are displayed.
File Name: File Name (maximum of 16 characters)
The file names of download files to be downloaded for each terminal are displayed.
788
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note: A file of List of Download File Name can be imported by pressing Import button. By pressing Export
button, the file of List of Download File Name can be output to any folder. When pressing Reset to the
Default Setting button after importing the file of List of Download File Name, the information listed in
the [List of Download File Name] returns to be the default values. Also, the imported information returns
to the default value if the command processing is aborted. If you want to change the default values, import the file whenever this command is started up.
As for the default values, see the table in Download File Name.
Process Type:
Select one of the followings:
Execute Downloading
Downloading is executed to the specified terminals.
Office Data
The information on terminals that execute downloading is read out from the office data.
File
The file that is created beforehand for specifying terminals is imported.
Office Data
The information on terminals that execute downloading is read out from the office data and exported to a file.
Edit directly
A template file for specifying terminals is output.
Station Number
Select this when specifying a station number of the IP terminal.
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
789
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Terminal Type
Select this when specifying a type of the IP terminal.
Terminal Type:
Select a type of the IP terminal.
HWTP - HWVER: Hardware Type - Hardware Version
Select the hardware type and the hardware version corresponding to selected Terminal Type.
All
Station Number
Select this from the drop-down listbox to search for terminals by specific Tenant Number (TN) and
Station Number (STN) range.
Firmware Version: Note 1
The selected Terminal Type can be narrowed down by choosing Firmware Version.
Version:
Enter the Firmware Version (00.00 - 99.99).
Conditions:
Select the conditions for filtering (!=, <, <=, ==, >=, >).
TN: Tenant Number
Start:
End:
790
CHAPTER 7
Start:
End:
Maintenance Commands
IP Address
Select this from the drop-down listbox to search for terminals by specific IP address range.
Firmware Version: Note 1
The selected Terminal Types can be narrowed down by choosing Firmware Version.
Version:
Enter the Firmware Version (00.00 - 99.99).
Conditions:
Select the conditions for filtering (!=, <, <=, ==, >=, >).
IP Address:
Start:
End:
(0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254)
(0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254)
Note 1: This parameter is not displayed when HWTP (Hardware Type) is 91 or HWVER (Hardware Version)
is blank.
File Path:
The file path of the file for specifying terminals is displayed. The file path is displayed only when File is
selected for Terminal Specifying Method.
Terminal List: Note 2
[Terminal List] is displayed only when Execute Downloading is selected for Process Type. Downloading is executed for the checked items of information. The file for specifying terminal types can be output
to any folder by pressing Export button.
Note 2: As for this parameter, note the following conditions.
When File is selected for Terminal Specifying Method, and both LENS and TN/STN are
included in the specified file, LENS has first priority to be used.
When information is added to [Terminal List] by selecting Execute downloading for Process
Type, the terminals that cannot execute downloading appear in gray in [Terminal List]. The check
box displayed on the head of the rows cannot be checked in this situation.
Up to 4000 items of information can be added to [Terminal List].
Terminal Type
HWTP: Hardware Type
HWVER: Hardware Version
Version
LENS: Line Equipment Number
SW/SP: SW/SP Number
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
RT: Route Number
TK: Trunk Number
PCN: PHS Community Number
791
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
ACT CPU (to specify the ACT side of the Telephony Server as FTP server)
STBY CPU (to specify the STBY side of the Telephony Server as FTP server, or in dual configuration)
External Server (to specify the FTP server connected to LAN)
IP Address:
This parameter is displayed only when External Server is selected for FTP Server Type. Assign the
IP Address of FTP server connected to LAN (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254).
Login Name/Password [Maximum 15 digits]:
Enter the Login Name and Password required to login to the FTP server.
Specify File Storage Directory:
Click this check box to specify the directory where the download files are stored. When no directory is
specified, the default directory for logging in to the FTP server is automatically set.
Directory Name:
Input the directory name within 63 characters. When using an external server as the FTP server, it
is recommended to specify the default directory for logging in to the FTP server.
When specifying the Telephony Server as the FTP server, input the directory/DATA-C/GPCM/00.
Do not specify the directory other than this.
Download Method:
Select either of the followings to specify the download method. Automatically set to Sequential when
ACT CPU or STBY CPU is selected in FTP Server Type.
Sequential
When download to one terminal has been completed, download to the next sequentially numbered
terminal starts immediately.
Parallel
Used when External Server is selected in FTP Server Type. The maximum number of terminals
to which download is concurrently executed depends on the number singed to Concurrent Number.
Concurrent Number (2-8) Note 3
792
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
793
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Product Name
Terminal
Type on
PCPro
EMEA
Product Name
AvailHWT
abilP
ity
HWV
ER
File Name
(Default)
SN8029 MC2A-A
SN8029 MC2A-B
Analog MC
Note 1
21
2amcmwlist.txt
SCA-8LCA
SCA-8LCA-EMEA
8MC SIP
Note 1
B1
8amcmwlist.txt
SN8032 MG15MXX(MGEB-A)
PRI1.5 MG
64
SN8023 MG2MXX(MGEA-A)
PRI2.0 MG
65
MG(PRI) (1.5M)
Box [MG-24PRIA]
MG-24PRIA
MG-PRI1.5
SIP
A8
MG-30PRIA
MG-PRI2.0
SIP
A9
MG(PRI) (1.5M)
Card [SCA24PRIA]
SCA-24PRIA
SCA-PRI-SHA24
MG-PRI1.5
SIP
A8
MG(PRI) (2M)
Card [SCA30PRIA]
SCA-30PRIA
MG-PRI2.0
SIP
A9
MG-SIP16 Card
[SCA-16SIPMGA]
SCA-16SIPMGA
Note 6
66
MG-SIP16 Box
[MG-16SIPMGA]
MG-16SIPMGA
Note 6
66
MG-SIP16 Card
[SCA16SIPMG(US)]
SCA16SIPMG(US)
Note 7
66
MG-SIP96
MG-SIP96
Note 8
66
MG-SIP128 [MG128SIPMGG]
MG-128SIPMGG
Note 9
66
MG-SIP128 [MG128SIPMGJ]
MG-128SIPMGJ
Note 10
MG-T1(SIP) Card
[SCA-24DTIA]
MG-T1(SIP) Box
[MG-24DTIA]
Analog 2MC
8LC Card
MG-PRI/MG-PRA
MG(SIP)
mgsipmwlist.txt
mgsipmwlist.txt
MG(SIP)
MG-T1[SIP]
794
mgprimwlist.txt
66
AF
mgdtimwlist.txt
CHAPTER 7
Terminal
Type on
PCPro
EMEA
Terms in Manual
Product Name
MG-BRI
MG-2BRI-XX
MG(BRI) Box
[MG-2BRIA]
MG-2BRIA
MG(BRI) Card
[SCA-2BRIA]
SCA-2BRIA
MC4AMG2A PFTXX
MCMG Box
[MG-4LC2COTA]
Product Name
Maintenance Commands
AvailHWT
abilP
ity
HWV
ER
File Name
(Default)
BRI MG
Note 1
63
mgbrimwlist.txt
MG-BRI SIP
Note 1
A3
mgbrisiplist.txt
MG-4LC2COTA
MCMG Card
[SCA-4LC2COTA]
SCA-4LC2COTA
MCMG Box
[MG-7COTA]
MG-7COTA
MCMG Card
[SCA-7COTA]
SCA-7COTA
MG-COT Card
[SCA-6COTA]
SCA-6COTA
MG-COT Card
[SCA-6COTC]
SCA-6COTC
SCA-6COTB
VS-32(VSEA-A)
VS32 Conference
Server
67
mcmgmwlist.txt
6A
6B
VS-32(V)(VSEBA)
VS-32 Conference
Server [MGVS32VA]
MG-VS32VA
VS-32 Conference
Server [SCAVS32VA]
SCA-VS32VA
IP Enabled Dterm
(Dterm Series E/
Dterm 75)
(IP Adapter)
North America/Other Countries except
Australia: IPW-2U
(P-P) (BK)
Australia: IPW2UA-P UNIT
(Telephone)
DTP-8D/16D/32D
mgcotmwlist.txt
-
Voice Server
71
C1
vs32atdl.txt
Note 2
vs32atdl.txt
-
C1
Dterm75/Series E w/ IP
Adaptor(P-P)
or DtermIP(Series E Mode)
11
02
795
ramhptop.hex
CHAPTER 7
Terminal
Type on
PCPro
Maintenance Commands
AvailHWT
abilP
ity
HWV
ER
File Name
(Default)
11
12
ramhp2pr.hex
11
14
ramhp2pw.out
DtermSIP(ITN)
91
20
appsipe.tgz
DT710
91
30
itlisipe.tgz
DT730
DT730
91
33
itlisipv.tgz
DT730G
(12/24DG)
DT730DG
91
51
itlisipvg.tgz
DT730G
(12/24CG)
DT730CG
91
52
itlisipvc.tgz
DT750
DT750
91
34
itlisips.tgz
DT770G
DT770G
91
54
itlisipcr.tgz
DtermIP INASET
(Classic) Note 4
ITR-LC
DtermIP Inaset
13
11
dpPtoP1E.ini
DtermIP
INASET240G
Note 4
Inaset240G
13
21
dp24GP1E.ini
DtermIP
INASET320C
Note 4
Inaset320C
13
31
dp32CP1E.ini
DtermIP
INASET320G
Note 4
ITR-320G-1 (North
America only)
Inaset320G
13
41
dp32GP1E.ini
DtermIP
INASET320C
(XML version)
ITR-320C-1M
13
51
dp32CP1ME.ini
DtermSP20
DtermSP20 ENG
DtermSP20(So
ftPhone)
12
00
EMEA
Terms in Manual
Product Name
IP Enabled Dterm
(Dterm Series i)
(IP Adapter)
North America/Other Countries except
Australia: IP-R
UNIT
Australia:
IP-RA UNIT
(Telephone)
DTR-8D/16LD/
16D/32D
Dterm Series i
w/ IP Adaptor
ITR-4D/8D/16D/
16LD/32D
DtermIP
DtermIP (SIP)
Note 4
ITN-4D/8D/16D/
32D Note 5
DT710
DT700 Series
Product Name
796
CHAPTER 7
Terminal
Type on
PCPro
EMEA
AvailHWT
abilP
ity
Terms in Manual
Product Name
DtermSP30 (SIP)
Product Name
Maintenance Commands
HWV
ER
File Name
(Default)
15
00
93
93
This command does not support the following Terminal Types even if they are displayed in List of Download File Name. Do not use the following Terminal Types and their additional information in the list.
Terminal Type
HWTP
HWVER
Dterm75/Series E w/ IP
Adaptor(P-P) or DtermIP(Series E Mode)
00
02
ramhptop.hex
Dterm Series i w/ IP
Adaptor
00
12
ramhp2pr.hex
DtermIP
00
14
ramhp2pw.out
IP-CS(3ch)
31
BPRG_IPBSA.DAT
IP-CS(6ch)
32
BPRG_IPBSA.DAT
IP-ZT
34
00
IPVPS
51
00
Analog MG
61
T1 MG
62
797
File Name
BPRG_IPZT.DAT
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
The file may not be created properly if the procedures are not performed as provided in this section.
Note:
The appearance of each image for Excel may differ according to your Excel setting and environment.
STEP 1:
STEP 2:
Activate Excel.
Select [File] - [Open] from the menu bar.
Select
798
CHAPTER 7
STEP 3:
Select [Text File] from [Files of type] drop-down list, choose the applicable file from the list and click
[Open] button.
2Select file
STEP 4:
Maintenance Commands
(3) Click
In [Text Import Wizard - Step 1 of 3] dialog, select [65001: Unicode (UTF-8)] from [File origin] dropdown list and click [Next] button.
(1) Select
(2) Click
799
CHAPTER 7
STEP 5:
Maintenance Commands
In [Text Import Wizard - Step 2 of 3] dialog, select [{none}] from [Text qualifier] drop-down list and
click [Next] button.
(1) Select
(2) Click
STEP 6:
In [Text Import Wizard - Step 3 of 3] dialog, select all rows in [Data preview] field (the background
will turn black), [Text] from [Column data format] and click [Finish] button. To select all rows, press
[Shift] key and click on each rows and select multiple rows.
(2) Select
(3) Click
800
CHAPTER 7
STEP 7:
Maintenance Commands
Right click the top left column to select all cells and select [Format Cells...] from the right click menu.
(2) Select
STEP 8:
In [Number] tab, select [Text] from [Category] list box and click [OK] button.
(1) Select
(2) Click
STEP 9:
801
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
DATA
MEANING
DATA
MEANING
Terminal Traffic
Route Traffic
10
15
17
CS Peg Count
18
19
20
21
IP Service Traffic
22
802
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Also, if the measurement should be executed throughout a day, assign the same data in both Start TIME
and End TIME parameters.
Note 2: ATT Answer Peg Count is available for the following Attendant Incoming Calls. Note that the Route
Class Data (CDN 6: TCL) of the Incoming Route must be 1 (=DDD Line)/2 (=FX Line).
Note 3: This traffic measurement is also available for connections via IPPAD; however, incoming and outgoing
command.
Ringdown
803
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
DATA
MEANING
DATA
MEANING
Terminal Traffic
Route Traffic
10
15
18
19
804
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
End C_RT:End Connection Route Number (available when TYPE 18/19 is selected)
Note: The selected traffic measurement data, except for TYPE 1 (Terminal Traffic), is collected with the whole
command.
Note 1: When time difference exists between the nodes, confirm that the related time difference data, based on
Universal Coordinated Time (UCT) standard, has been assigned at each node via ATDF command.
Note 2: Assign the traffic measurement time period between Start TIME and End TIME longer than an hour.
Also, if the measurement should be executed throughout a day, assign the same data in both Start TIME
and End TIME parameters.
Note 3: ATT Answer Peg Count is available for the following Attendant Incoming Calls. Note that the Route
Class Data (CDN 6: TCL) of the Incoming Route must be 1 (=DDD Line)/2 (=FX Line).
Ringdown
Note 4: To activate Station Peg Count, ATTCON Peg Count and Service Peg Count, assign the largest value of
Number of Tenants (ASYDN, SYS1, INDEX 8) in all nodes. Assign FF Hex for MDATA.
Note 5: To activate ATTCON Peg Count and ATT Answer Peg Count, assign the largest value of Number of
Attendant Consoles (ASYDN, SYS1, INDEX 9) in all nodes. Assign FF Hex for MDATA.
805
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
In order to avoid misoperation, do not open this command from multiple PCPros simultaneously.
2. Parameters
Input data
SOFTVER (NDM):
The program version data assigned/to be assigned to NDM is automatically displayed in hexadecimal.
When assigning the program version data:
By clicking Get button, this parameter automatically displays the program
version data before being upgraded (the earliest version in SOFTVER (ROM)).
In this case, this data can be changed manually (In normal times, it is not necessary to change the data manually).
When deleting the program version data:
By clicking Get button, this parameter displays the program version written in
NDM. In this case, this data cannot be changed manually. Note 1, Note 2
Note 1: At this point, if all the systems (nodes) listed in SOFTVER (ROM) indicate the same program version
(i.e. the upgrades of all systems in the FCCS network have been completed), Del. button becomes
valid.
Note 2: If a failure occurs after deleting the program version data from NDM (SOFTVER (NDM) displays the
new program version data), the system can return to the state that restricts the use of the new program
features (not completely same as the previous version) by reassigning the AVERN data.
Note 3: When entering the data to SOFTVER (NDM) parameter manually, the value to be entered (for example,
the version data before being upgraded) can be checked in the log file.
If an error occurs, one of the following messages appears on this command. If multiple errors occur at once, only
one message is displayed in order of precedence. (The following error messages are listed in order of
precedence.)
(a) Registered SOFTVER(NDM) is abnormal.(DATA: XXXXXXXXXX, MDATA: XXXXXXXXXX)
As a result of the data readout, SOFTVER (NDM) and its flag data or masked data are invalid. When
this message is displayed, Del. button becomes valid and Set button becomes invalid. SOFTVER(NDM) parameter is filled with blanks.
806
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
As a result of the data readout, the different SOFTVER (ROM)s coexist in the same network. FPC of
the corresponding node is not indicated because it is impossible to determine which SOFTVER(ROM) is correct. While this message is displayed, Del. button is invalid.
(c) NODE to which SOFTVER cant be read exists.(FPC: XXX)
Program version information of a node cannot be read out due to FCCS link disconnection, etc. FPC
of the corresponding node is indicated. If multiple nodes apply, the smallest FPC in the corresponding
nodes is displayed.
(d) CPU Faction to which SOFTVER can't be read exists. (FPC: XXX)
Program version information of a node cannot be read out due to power failure of one of the CPUs
(CPU#0/CPU#1), etc. FPC of the corresponding node is indicated. If multiple nodes apply, the smallest FPC of the corresponding nodes is indicated.
Buttons
Get:
Read out the information. This button is always operative. Note 4, Note 5
Set:
Note 6: To change the program version data written in NDM, delete it first, and then assign the new version
data.
Del.:
Exit:
Output Data
FPC:
CPU:
SOFTVER (SYSTEM): The currently enabled program version of each node (in hexadecimal). Note 8
807
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note 8: When no program version data has been assigned to NDM and each node operates without the restric-
Information:
808
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
2. Parameters
Input data
Direction Select:
be divided per Unit or MG depending on the extension number before saving the data.
809
CHAPTER 7
CADSD:
Maintenance Commands
1. Functional Outline
This command can assign/delete many station data with consecutive numbers at once.
2. Parameters
Input Data
Type:
Assign/Delete
Note 1
Note 1
Note 2
810
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note 2: In the parameter here, specify the size of increment between the consecutive station numbers to be as-
INPUT DATA
STN(START)=100
STN(END)=200
STEP=10
TEC:
RSC:
SFC:
Buttons
Execute:
Cancel:
Exit:
Exit this command.
Output Data (after Execute button is pressed)
TN:
Tenant Number
STN:
LENS:
STATUS:
Note: If OK is not displayed (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.
811
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note 1: In this parameter, specify the size of increment between the consecutive station numbers deleted. See
INPUT
STN(START)=100
STN(END)=200
STEP=10
Buttons
Execute:
Cancel:
Exit:
Output Data
TN:
STN:
STATUS:
When asterisk (*) and number (#) are not used as part of STN
100 110 120 130 ... 190 200
When * and # are used as part of STN
10* 118 126 134 ... 1** 1#8
Note 2: When the deletion is successful, OK is displayed. Otherwise (i.e. the deletion is rejected), related error
message is displayed.
812
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Assign/Delete
ARI D-RES:
Output Data
ICRT:
Incoming Route
OGRT:
Outgoing Route
STATUS:
813
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Assign/Delete
ARI D-RES:
Output Data
IC LGRT:
OG LGRT:
STATUS:
814
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Assign/Delete
Route Number
TK (START):
TK (END):
STEP:
TN:
Tenant Number
RSC:
SFC:
TYPE:
GROUP
3 = GROUP UNIT
LEVEL
815
CHAPTER 7
5 = UNIT
LEVEL GROUP
6 = UNIT
GROUP LEVEL
Maintenance Commands
Note 1: In this parameter, specify the size of increment between the consecutive trunk numbers assigned. See
INPUT DATA
TK(START)=1
A Trunk Number is assigned by increments of 2
or
A Trunk Number is deleted by increments of 2
TK(END)=21
STEP=2
STEP=2
Note 2: Data entry for this parameter is necessary when RT is 901 or 915.
Note 3: TYPE parameter determines how to arrange the trunk data. See Details on Trunk Arrangement TYPE
for details.
Buttons
Execute:
Cancel:
Exit:
Output Data
TK:
LENS:
STATUS:
Note 4: If OK is not displayed (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.
816
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Route Number
TK(START):
TK(END):
STEP:
Buttons
Execute:
Cancel:
Exit:
Output Data
TK:
Trunk Number
STATUS:
Result of Deletion
OK=Deletion Successful Note 2
Note 1: In this parameter, specify the size of increment between the consecutive trunk numbers deleted. See the
example below:
Example:
RESULT
INPUT DATA
TK(START)=1
TK(END)=21
STEP=2
Note 2: When the deletion is successful, OK is displayed here. Otherwise (i.e. the deletion is rejected), related
817
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
U=2
00
05
10
15
20
16
16 16
16
16
16
PIR
PIR
U=3
U=0
U=1
1MG
05
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
Level No.
Group No.
U=3
06
15
16
56 64
72 80 88 96
49 57
8 16 24 32
7
6
5
4
3
2
1 9 17 25
65 73 81 89
40 48
02 03 04 05
00 01 02 03
33 41
U=0
U=1
818
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
05
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
1MG
Level No.
Group No.
U=3
06
15
16
24 56
32 64 80 96
17 49
8 40 72 88
7
6
5
4
3
2
1 33 65 81
25 57 73 89
16 48
02 03 04 05
00 01 02 03
41
U=0
U=1
U=2
Slot No.
1MG
05
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
Level No.
06
29
5
1
U=3
15
16
63 64
93
96
51 52
49 50
32
69
65
47 48
72
68
8
4
35 36
33 34
02 03 04 05
00 01 02 03
Group No.
U=0
U=1
819
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
05
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
1MG
Level No.
Group No.
U=3
06
15
16
91 92
93
96
21
9
89 90
24
12
85
19 20
7 8
88
13
1 2
16
4
17 18
5 6
02 03 04 05
00 01 02 03
U=0
U=1
1MG
05
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
Level No.
Group No.
U=3
06
15
16
31 63
32 64 80 96
7 39
3 35
29 61 79 95
8 40 68 84
4 36 66 82
30 62
5 37 67 83
1 33 65 81
6 38
2 34
02 03 04 05
00 01 02 03
U=0
U=1
820
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
1MG
05
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
Level No.
Group No.
U=3
06
15
16
87 91
89 92 94 96
15 19
3 7
85 89 93 95
16 20 22 24
4 8 10 12
86 90
13 17 21 23
1 5 9 11
14 18
2 6
02 03 04 05
00 01 02 03
U=0
U=1
821
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
mand (*1), SKP (soft key pattern) and SN (status number) must be reassigned by the ADSLN command.
(To reassign them, press [Get], [Del] and then [Set] buttons in that order.)
(*1)It corresponds to the following situations:
a new node is added to the existing standalone system and that system is upgraded to FCCS system.
a new node is added to the existing FCCS system.
2. Parameters
Input data
TYPE:
FPC:
Interval:
Broadcasting Interval
822
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
FPC (1-253):
This parameter is set when Control Type = Re-construction to each FPC is selected.
To specify a node, enter FPC of a node re-constructing VNDM data in the FCCS
network.
INTERVAL:
Output Data
FPC:
Normal End
Red:
Abnormal End
Cyan:
Broadcast Request
White:
No Broadcast Request
-VNDM is the memory associated with monitored number and available OAI Facilities (Subscribe) information.
-VNDM is controlled by one node (VNDM Primary Node) in an FCCS network and broadcasted to the
other nodes.
Note 2: Center-VNDM (C-VNDM)
This is the primary VNDM. It is only present in the VNDM center node in an FCCS network.
Note 3: Local-VNDM (L-VNDM)
This is the copy of VNDM located in all other local nodes in an FCCS network.
823
CHAPTER 7
Note 4: This parameter is used in the following network configurations:
Multiple IP
Multiple OAI Terminal Anywhere
Multiple ACDP
Multiple Agent Anywhere
824
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
TOTAL:
List:
Note: TN and STN are not displayed for terminal information that are not registered to the node which CBKS
TOTAL:
List:
Note: TRK, TN and LENS are not displayed for terminal information that are not registered to the node which
825
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
<IP-BS>
ALL ITEMS ARE SELECTED:
Selects all IP-BSs that are registered to the node which CBKS command is used toward. When Selected terminal is reset is clicked, all
IP-BSs that are read out can be reset.
TOTAL:
List:
<PS>
ALL ITEMS ARE SELECTED:
Selects all PSs whose operations are controlled by the node which
CBKS command is used toward. When Selected terminal is reset is
clicked, all PSs that are read out can return to Primary Node.
TOTAL:
List:
Note: TN and LENS are not displayed for terminal information that are not registered to the node which CBKS
826
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Cycle:
Start time:
DisplayRange:
Output Data
Start time:
Stop:
827
CHAPTER 7
Exit:
Clear:
Recalc:
828
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
LINK:
MB:
Note: This command cannot be used for ISDN-related circuit card (such as PRT, DCH card).
829
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
CNT:
Note
Buttons
Get:
Change:
Stop:
Exit:
Output Data
RT:
STS0:
STS1:
P-LENS:
B-LENS:
CHG-STS:
Note:
830
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
831
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note 1: Phone book data copy is not available if Phone book data exists in the destination.
Note 2: Phone book data move is not available if Phone book data exists in the destination.
Note 3: If Local Phone book data move is executed, all of originally moved data will be cleared.
Parameter Type
STN:
TELN(LDM):
TELN(NDM):
LENS:
832
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Readout or input data are different depends on Parameter Type. The data in each Parameter Type are shown
below.
<Deleting data, Original data (for copy), Destination Copy, Original data (for move), Destination Move>
Tenant Number
Physical Station Number (0-9, #, * [Maximum 6 digits])
Number of Local Phone book Data (0-100) is displayed.
Buttons
Get:
833
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Do not perform any PCPro operations other than CMNT command toward the Telephony Server or
SR-MGC during office data copy. The PCPro operation such as login to/logoff can also cause a copy
failure.
When using the manual copy function of CMNT command, it must be completed before the office
data copy of routine diagnosis starts. The manual copy function is canceled when the routine
diagnosis starts. Once the office data copy is canceled, it will not be performed on that day
regardless of ASYDL, SYS1, Indexes 844 and 845 settings.
* To work around the above problem, assign data FF HEX to both ASYD SYS1 INDEX 87 and INDEX
88 to stop the routine diagnosis program before starting the manual office data copy.
Note 4: Earlier than FP85-109 S6, the conditions must be considered when performing office data copy.
(d) Precautions of SR-MGC Version Upgrade are different depending on the software versions.
Since FP85-109 S6:
SR-MGC Version Upgrade is available with the File Control tab. The following conditions must be
considered when performing the SR-MGC Version Upgrade.
The SR-MGC Version Upgrade is enabled with the PROCESS TYPE: Program Copy/Program
Switch parameter in the File Control tab.
Do not perform any PCPro operations other than CMNT command during the program copy. The
PCPro operation such as login/logoff can cause a copy failure.
While executing a Program Copy/Program Switch, the office data copy process after routine
diagnosis will not be performed. Therefore, the office data copy will not be performed within the
same day.
During office data copy process after routine diagnosis, Program Copy/Program Switch is not
available.
834
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
* When using the manual program copy function of CMNT command, it must be completed before the
office data copy of routine diagnosis starts. To work around the above problem, assign data FF HEX
to both ASYD SYS1 INDEX 87 and INDEX 88 to stop the routine diagnosis program before starting
the manual program copy.
When Program Copy is executed, a temporary file is created, and then the temporary file is
overwritten by the program file.
When the Stop button is pressed during the manual program copy process, the process is canceled
before it is completed, and the temporary file is discarded.
When the manual program copy process is still running at the time assigned with Appoint Stop Time,
the process is canceled.
Earlier than FP85-109 S6:
SR-MGC Version Upgrade provides program upgrade as is in the same version. The following are
conditions for version upgrade.
This function is available only for SR-MGC(E) and SR-MGC(S) since FP85-105 S2E.
All of the following requirements must be satisfied between MGC (copy source) and a SR-MGC
(copy destination).
Using the same program version (Note 5) of main program (Note 6).
Using the same program version (Note 5) and the issue number (including digits after the decimal point) (Note 7) of BASE system (Note 8).
Note 5: A version, such as "S02E" or "S02", output in [Version] of the DISS command refers to the program
version.
Note 6: MAIN output in [Type] of the DISS command refers to the main program.
Note 7: A number, such as "01.00" or "02.00", output in [Issue] of the DISS command refers to the issue num-
ber.
Note 8: BASE_SYS output in [Type] of the DISS command refers to the BASE system.
During the version upgrade process, MGC does not perform office data copy after routine
diagnosis, which means no office data copy on the day.
During office data copy process after routine diagnosis, version upgrade is not available.
(e) The Telephony Server with FP85-109 S6 or later version software is required for SR-MGC Remote
Version Upgrade using the CMNT command. For more information of SR-MGC Remote Version Upgrade, refer to Peripheral Equipment Description Vol. 2.
835
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
3. Parameters
Since FP85-109 S6:
Input Data
Select any of the tabs, Setting, FTP Server Setting, Initialize, Change Operating, or File Control to activate
the required operation.
<Setting Tab>
SR-MGC No. [0-255]:
Assign a unique SR-MGC Number to each SR-MGC equipment in remote office.
Office Name [Maximum 20 characters]:
Enter the Office Name of the remote office to which the corresponding SR-MGC belongs.
IP Address:
Enter the IP address of SR-MGC, not the default IP address but the actual IP address to be allocated to
the target SR-MGC. In the case of two-unit SR-MGC, assign IP address of the SR T.
Mode:
The type of changeover and recovery is to be executed.
1 = Automatically switched to SR-MGC operation when communication failure has been detected between MGC and SR-MGC.
Automatically switched back to MGC operation when communication recovery has been detected
between MGC and SR-MGC.
In FCCS Cluster network, if SR-MGC detects normality of communication between SR-MGC and
Primary node or SR-MGC and Backup nodes, SR-MGC will switch the rescued terminals back to
the recovered node.
2 = Automatically switched to SR-MGC operation when communication failure has been detected between MGC and SR-MGC.
Automatically switched back to MGC operation when communication recovery between MGC
and SR-MGC, and normality of communication between MGC and a selected terminal have been
detected.
In FCCS Cluster network, if SR-MGC detects normality of communication between SR-MGC and
Primary node, Primary node and a selected terminal, SR-MGC will switch the rescued terminals
back to the Primary node.
3 = Not used.
C_MGC: Note 1
Select an Operating Mode for SR-MGC.
836
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
0 = Normal Operation
1 = Office data cannot be copied from the MGC when FCCS Cluster feature is used. This value must
be assigned to the Backup nodes used in FCCS Cluster network.
Note 1: This data is required for SR-MGC with FCCS Cluster. For node where this data = 1, office data copy,
program copy, program switch and initialization from the Telephony Server are not available.
If KIND: Individual is selected in the Change Operating tab, the operation changeover for SR-MGC
is also not allowed.
Assigning MA-ID:
Select this check box to assign MA-ID.
MA-ID [0000 - 9999]:
Message Area ID
FTP Server No. [1 - 256]:
Enter the number to be allocated to the FTP number.
<FTP Server Setting Tab>
FTP Server No. [1 - 256]:
Enter the number to be allocated to the FTP number.
IP Address:
Enter the IP address of FTP server.
Port No.:
Enter the port number to connect FTP server (default data: 21).
Location Name [Maximum 20 characters]:
Enter any name as a location name where the FTP server is provided.
File Directory Path [1 to 128 characters]:
Enter the directory path to where the program file and the checksum file are stored within the FTP server. [0-9, A-Z, a-z, -, /, _, (space )]
Program File Name [1 to 40 characters]:
Enter the program file name saved in the FTP server (the program file name to be downloaded to the
SR-MGC). [0-9, A-Z, a-z, -, ., _, (space )]
Note: The Program file name is the image file name and the File Directory Path folder must also contain the
837
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
User ID [4 to 16 characters]:
Enter the user name to log in to the FTP server. [0-9, A-Z, a-z, -, _]
User Password [4 to 16 characters]:
Enter the user password to log in to the FTP server. [0-9, A-Z, a-z, -, _]
For personal security, asterisks (*) are displayed on the screen instead of the password.
<Initialize Tab>
Initialization of SR-MGC can be activated on this tab.
Click either of the radio buttons and press the Execute button to execute initialization on the target SRMGC.
KIND:
All:
Select this button to execute the initialization on all the SR-MGCs in the network (default setting).
Individual:
Specify the SR-MGC Number when this button is selected.
All
Changeover to all the SR-MGCs in the network is executed.
Individual
Changeover to a specified SR-MGC is executed. Enter the SR-MGC Number (0-255) of the target
SR-MGC.
CONDITION:
Select the direction of the operation changeover for SR-MGC. This command is executed in the MGC
side.
MGC SR-MGC
Turns the SR-MGC to operation mode, which allows terminals to register to the SR-MGC. Note 2
SR-MGC MGC
Turns the SR-MGC to stand-by mode, which does not allow terminals to register to the SR-MGC.
Use this parameter to switch into stand-by mode after MGC SR-MGC or manual changeover
(ASYDL SYS1 INDEX852 Bit=0) is executed. Note 3 Note 4
838
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note 2: This parameter forcibly switches SR-MGC into operation mode from stand-by mode, which means SR-
MGC allows terminals to register to SR-MGC. This parameter does not help all the terminals registered in MGC to switch to SR-MGC.
Note 3: After the mode of SR-MGC has been switched by this command, the SR-MGC will stay in operation
mode. To switch the SR-MGC into stand-by mode, use SR-MGC MGC of CONDITION in the
CMNT command. Note that the ASYDL setting (ASYDL SYS1 INDEX852 Bit 5) is not valid to these
operations. When SR-MGC enters stand-by mode, the MGC starts to operate.
Note 4: Do not specify the SR-MGC which has the data setting of C_MGC = 1 (SR-MGC is a Backup node in
Program Copy
Note 5: Do not turn off SR-MGC during the program switch process. SR-MGC will not start up after it is turned
off.
Select SR-MGC No.
Select target SR-MGC to execute the process such as selected with the PROCESS TYPE parameter such
as Office Data Copy & Load, Program Copy or Program Switch.
Specifying SR-MGC:
Specify the target SR-MGC number (0-255), the box of specified SR-MGC number is displayed
in yellow. And then click the Execute button.
To undo specifying SR-MGC, click the box again.
All SR-MGC (en bloc specifying):
Click the Select All button to execute office data or program copy to all the SR-MGCs in the network.
The meaning of the indication is
Display
Description
Gray
White
No Processing Request
Yellow
Blue
Under processing
Green
Succeeded in processing
Red
Failed in processing
839
CHAPTER 7
Display
Magenta (Pink)
Maintenance Commands
Description
Cannot execute, because SR-MGC is assigned as the Backup node
Note: When the Clear All button is clicked, all the SR-MGC Numbers return to the state of No Processing Re-
quest.
Note: When the Stop button is clicked during office data copy, the operation is cut off after the currently copy-
ing file is completely copied. However, when DM/LDM/NDM copy is executed, the operation is cut off
after all the DM/LDM/NDM files are copied. File copy operation takes about two minutes per file. (The
time varies depending on the connection status of the network.)
Note: The following kinds of office data is copied from SV8500 MGC to SR-MGC:
840
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note 8: Concurrent Number is limited depending on the maximum number of sessions in the FTP server. Also
bandwidth, network configuration with the FTP sever and communication status need to be considered.
Please consult your network administrator before setting this data.
Output Data
Operating Information (Not used)
SR-MGC List
SR-MGC No.: SR-MGC Number [0-255]
STS: State of SR-MGC:
State of SR-MGC is indicated as follows:
OK:
Connection between SV8500 MGC and SR-MGC has been established normally
(SR-MGC is in stand-by mode)
??:
NG:
SR-MGC power OFF, or communication error between SV8500 MGC and SR-MGC
Automatically changed to SR-MGC when communication failure has been detected between MGC and SR-MGC. Automatically recovered to SR-MGC when communication
recovery has been detected between MGC and SR-MGC.
2:
Automatically changed to SR-MGC when communication failure has been detected between MGC and SR-MGC. Automatically recovered to SR-MGC when communication
recovery has been detected between MGC and SR-MGC and communication normal between the representative terminal and MGC was detected.
841
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Connection NG
??:
Status reading
842
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
843
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
C_MGC: Note 1
Select an Operating Mode for SR-MGC.
0 = Normal Operation
1 = Office data cannot be copied from the MGC when FCCS Cluster feature is used. This value must be
assigned to the Backup nodes used in FCCS Cluster network.
Note 1: This data is required for SR-MGC with FCCS Cluster. For node where this data = 1, office data copy
All
Changeover to all the SR-MGCs in the network is executed.
844
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
CONDITION:
Select the direction of the operation changeover for SR-MGC. This command is executed in the MGC side.
MGC SR-MGC
Turns the SR-MGC to operation mode, which allows terminals to register to the SR-MGC. Note 2
SR-MGC MGC
Turns the SR-MGC to stand-by mode, which does not allow terminals to register to the SR-MGC. Use
this parameter to switch into stand-by mode after MGC SR-MGC or manual changeover (ASYDL
SYS1 INDEX852 Bit=0) is executed. Note 3, Note 4
Note 2: This parameter forcibly switches SR-MGC into operation mode from stand-by mode, which means SR-
MGC allows terminals to register to SR-MGC. This parameter does not help all the terminals registered in MGC to switch to SR-MGC.
Note 3: After the mode of SR-MGC has been switched by this command, the SR-MGC will stay in operation
mode. To switch the SR-MGC into stand-by mode, use SR-MGC MGC of CONDITION in the
CMNT command. Note that the ASYDL setting (ASYDL SYS1 INDEX852 Bit 5) is not valid to these
operations. When SR-MGC enters stand-by mode, the MGC starts to operate.
Note 4: Do not specify the SR-MGC which has the data setting of C_MGC = 1 (SR-MGC is a Backup node in
Specifying SR-MGC
Click the Execute button after specifying the target SR-MGC number (0-255).
Status of SR-MGC
Gray
White
No Copy Request
Yellow
Blue
Green
Red
Magenta (Pink)
Note: When the Clear button is clicked, all the SR-MGC Numbers return to the state of No Copy Request.
845
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note: The following kinds of office data is copied from SV8500 MGC to SR-MGC:
ing file is completely copied. However, when DM/LDM/NDM copy is executed, the operation is cut off
after all the DM/LDM/NDM files are copied.
File copy operation takes about two minutes per file. (The time varies depending on the connection status
of the network.)
<Program Update Tab>
Note: Available since FP85-105 S2E.
You can use this tab to copy a program in MGC to a SR-MGC after the program in MGC had been updated as
is in the same version.
SR-MGC No.: Specify the target SR-MGC number (0-255) to execute a program update.
MAIN
MPH
PHD
PHI
B2BUA_MAIN
SP_BOOT
SIPSV_PHE
LIBCMN
LIBFSMTL
LIBOSIP
SV_GATE
SV_TSKCTL
SV_EMA
SV_IOC
PBXWATCHD
SVSYSSUB
846
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Output Data
SR-MGC No.: SR-MGC Number [0-255]
STS: State of SR-MGC:
State of SR-MGC is indicated as follows:
OK:
Connection between SV8500 MGC and SR-MGC has been established normally
(SR-MGC is in stand-by mode)
??:
NG:
SR-MGC power OFF, or communication error between SV8500 MGC and SR-MGC
847
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
DEVICE:
SW:
SYSTEM:
Note 1: When the status of TSW is ACT, Make Busy of TDSW for TYPE is invalid. Select Change Operating
Mode to change the status of TSW from ACT to STBY before executing Make Busy of TDSW.
Note 2: This parameter appears only when 1 is selected in TYPE.
Note 3: This parameter appears only when 2 is selected in TYPE.
Output data
<Upper field>
Parameter:
CPU
TSW
PLO
848
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note 4: ACT or ST-BY is output in PIR field in the following conditions. However, this parameter does
not output connection status of BUS cables between PIRs and between PIR and TSWR.
At least one actual PIR is mounted by assignment of PIR mounting status (ASYDL, System 1, Index 556557) and Unit status (ASYDL, System 1, Index 1026-1027).
BUS cable is connected between EXB card and PIR0 or TSWR
Note 5: The followings are details of PIR output data.
ACT or ST-BY output for PIR will be the same as that of CPU.
When BUS cable is not connected between EXB card and PIR or TSWR, Disconnect will be output.
When only virtual PIR is mounted, Not Mount will be output.
System 0: Status of each parameter in System 0 side
0=Not Mount
1=ACT
2=ST-BY
3=MB
4=Disconnect Note 6
0=Not Mount
1=ACT
2=ST-BY
3=MB
4=Disconnect Note 6
Note 6: This data is output in the case of PIR only (Available since FP85-104 S1E).
Note 7: When EXB card of STBY CPU and BUS cable in PIR are not connected (Disconnect will be output)
and trying to execute CPU mode changing, the following message will be output in a pop-up menu:
STBY PIR is improper. Execute mode changing?. When Yes is selected, the mode changing is executed. When No is selected, it is not executed (Available since FP85-104 S1E).
Note 8: When EXB card of ACT CPU and BUS cable in PIR are connected correctly (ACT will be output)
and EXB card of STBY CPU and BUS cable in PIR are not connected (Disconnect will be output),
if CPU mode changing is executed, the mode will be returned to the mode before the execution. It is
held by new ACT side faulty recovery to check the irregular between EXB card=PIR 0 and the disconnection of BUS card in PIR. This action is done while the output message of the mode change executing
is displayed (Changing will be output). Therefore, at the time of CPU mode is output again, displayed mode is not changed yet (Available since FP85-104 S1E).
<Lower field>
Parameter:
F-BUS
849
CHAPTER 7
0=Not Mount
1=ACT
3=MB
0=Not Mount
1=ACT
3=MB
850
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
TN:
STN:
A maximum of five digits for a Business system, and six digits for a Hotel system.
Note 1
LENS:
MCI:
ATT:
STA:
VMM:
851
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
UGN:
TELN:
LENS:
MWLAMP:
MCI:
ATT:
STA:
VMM:
Note 1
Note 2
Output Data
FPC:
Note 3
TN:
Tenant Number
Note 3
STN:
Buttons
Get:
852
CHAPTER 7
Set:
Exit:
853
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Output Data
<SIP Server Status>
SIP Server ID: ID of SP [1-127]
LINK: Status of link on the SP
ACHANNEL: Already assigned number of Speech Channels [3-1200]
OCHANNEL: Operating number of Speech Channels [3-1200]
NAME: SP Name
IP Address: IP address of SP
<Channel Status>
CNT: Count
LENS: Equipment Number
854
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Exit:
Execute:
<Redundancy>
SIP Server ID: ID of SP [1-127]
ACT Server ID: Server condition is operated in Active-mode
STBY Server ID: Server condition is operated in Stand-by mode
WAIT Server ID: Server condition is operated in changing
OFF Server ID: Server condition is operated in suspending
Buttons
Get:
Exit:
Reset:
Note 1: Only when the SP is in Active mode or Standby mode, reset will be executed, if in other conditions, reset
is not completed within 3 minutes, the task will be stopped with displaying Time-out.
SP mode change:
855
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note 1: Only when system ID is specified in SIP Server ID and the system is redundant, this button is displayed.
Note 2: Only when the SP is in Active mode and another SP is in Standby mode, system changeover can be ex-
ecuted.
Note 3: When system changeover is executing, the remaining time until Time-out is displayed, if system change-
over is not completed within 3 minutes, the task will be stopped with displaying Time-out.
Stop:
856
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Output Data
<SIP Server Status>
SIP Server ID: ID of SP [1-127]
LINK: Status of link on the SP
ACHANNEL: Already assigned number of Speech Channels [3-1200]
OCHANNEL: Operating number of Speech Channels [3-1200]
NAME: SP Name
IP Address: IP address of SP
857
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
<Channel Status>
CNT: Count
LENS: Equipment Number
Control: Status of Control Channel
ST-B1: Status of Speech Channel (ST-B1)
ST-B2: Status of Speech Channel (ST-B2)
ST-B3: Status of Speech Channel (ST-B3)
PH LENS: Accommodation of PH
Buttons
Get:
Exit:
Execute:
<Redundancy>
SIP Server ID: ID of SP [1-127]
FPC: Fusion Point Code [1-253]
ACT Server ID: Server condition is operated in Active-mode
STBY Server ID: Server condition is operated in Stand-by mode
WAIT Server ID: Server condition is operated in changing
OFF Server ID: Server condition is operated in suspending
Buttons
Get:
Exit:
Reset:
Note 1: Only when the SP is in Active mode or Standby mode, reset will be executed, if in other conditions, reset
858
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
is not completed within 3 minutes, the task will be stopped with displaying Time-out.
SP mode change:
Note 1: Only when system ID is specified in SIP Server ID and the system is redundant, this button is displayed.
Note 2: Only when the SP is in Active mode and another SP is in Standby mode, system changeover can be ex-
ecuted.
Note 3: When system changeover is executing, the remaining time until Time-out is displayed, if system change-
over is not completed within 3 minutes, the task will be stopped with displaying Time-out.
859
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
RESULT:
TN:
UGN:
NAME:
CNT:
Count of DC [0-20]
Input the number of DC to register to System Phone book. Do not leave a blank
in this field.
DC_01 - DC_20: Digit Code 01 - Digit Code 20 [Maximum 32 digits (0-9, #, *)]
Input the DC (dial number) to register to System Phone book.
Buttons
Read File:
Execute:
Exit:
860
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Output Data
RESULT field:
F_OK:
F_ERR:
Database file error occurs. (Execute button is not active. Data assignment is not
available.)
The error occurs when database file is read out because of the following causes.
Input Data
Cause of Error
INDEX
TN
UGN
NAME
CNT
DC
R_OK:
R_ERR:
R_NOT:
861
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Assignment
NAME
CNT
Abiko
Suzuki
20
DC_01
1000
20001
DC_02
DC_03
2000
3000 [CR+LF]
20002
20003
...
DC_20[CR+LF]
...
20020 [CR+LF]
Note 1: Two-tab character input is required between INDEX and TN data input field because RESULT
field is not used while drawing up the database.
Note 2: Above data input is an example.
Conditions:
The database file is drawn up with text file only. The file extension should be *.txt.
Data needs to be input to the file with the tab delimited text format.
CPBKN_DATAFILE [CR+LF] needs to be input in the first row of the file by all means.
Data for CNT takes priority over the number of input DC. For example, only five DCs can be assigned if 5 is input in CNT field even though seven DCs have been already input in database.
When 0 is input in CNT field, whole data in relevant row will be deleted.
When ; is input in left most part of each row, the row is regarded as comment row.
One-tab character needs to be input between data to separate each data. However, Two-tab character
input is required between INDEX and TN data input field because RESULT field is not used while
drawing up database.
Input data will be active only when data are input in the following order.
862
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
INDEX
RESULT
TN
UGN
NAME
CNT
DC_01 - DC_20
To input NAME, do not use characters and marks that cannot be used by PCPro. If input, error will
occur. The following shows available characters and marks for PCPro.
A-Z, a-z, 0-9, !, ?, -, +, %, &, /, (,), =, ., ,, :, ", ', ;, *, #, @, [, ], SP (blank space)
, , , , , , , , , , , , ,
, , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,
, , , , , , , , ,, ,
Open Regional and Language Options in Control Panel, click the [Details...] button in Text
services and input languages field on Language tab.
STEP 2
Text Services and Input Languages window appears. Click the [Add...] button in Installed
services field on Settings tab.
STEP 3
Add input locale window appears. For Input language and Keyboard layout/IME, select the
location of input language from the pull down menu. Then press [OK] button.
To confirm Hot keys for input languages, click [Key Settings...] button in Preferences field
on Settings tab of Text Services and Input Languages window.
Note: For Operating Systems other than WIndows XP and Windows Server 2003, refer to the manuals provided
by each OS.
Note: When desired language does not exist in the pull down menu:
Open Regional and Language Options in Control Panel, click the check box of area that includes the
location for desired input language in Code page conversion tables field on Advanced tab.
<To Open and Save Database File through Microsoft Office Excel>
The database file can be edited also using the Microsoft Office Excel. Refer to the followings to open and save
the database through the Microsoft Office Excel.
863
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Select Text Files (*.prn; *.txt; *.csv) in pull down menu of Files of type. Select the relevant
database file and click [Open] button.
STEP 4
Do not change data in Text Import Wizard - Step 1 of 3 and Text Import Wizard - Step 2 of
3. Click [Next >] button.
STEP 5
Text Import Wizard - Step 3 of 3 window appears. After selecting all columns in Data preview field, click the radio button of Text in Column data format filed. Then click [Finish] button.
STEP 6
File is opened. Right-click on the top-left box of the sheet to select all cells in the sheet, and select Format Cells... from the menu.
STEP 7
Select Text in Category filed on Number tab of Format Cells window, and click [OK] button.
STEP 8
STEP 2
Select Text (Tab delimited) (*.txt) in pull down menu of Save as type. Select the relevant database file and click [Save] button after input the file name.
STEP 3
Note: CPBKN_DATA.txt is used here for file name of the database as an example.
STEP 4
STEP 5
Open the database file with the text editor and go through the content.
Note: When quotation marks () and colons (,) are used in NAME field, they may be enclosed in quotation
marks on the database. In that case, delete the enclosing quotation marks.
864
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
STN Specification:
IP Address START/END: Specify the range of IP addresses (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254). This parameter
is valid when Kind of Specification = IP Address Specification.
TN START/END:
STN START/END:
Specify the range of Station Numbers (Up to six digits (0-9, *, #)).
This parameter is valid when Kind of Specification = STN Specification.
UGN START/END:
Specify the range of User Group Numbers (1-255). This parameter is valid
when Kind of Specification = TELN (NDM) Specification or TELN (LDM)
Specification.
TELN START/END:
865
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
<Others>
All Select:
Auto Scroll:
By marking the checkbox, the data in the list is automatically scrolled to the
end.
Note:
By marking the checkboxes next to the numbers in the list, the individual readout data can be selected.
Output Data
No.:
Result:
TN:
STN:
LENS:
UGN (NDM):
TELN (NDM):
UGN (LDM):
TELN (LDM):
IP Address:
Connection Status:
Buttons
Get:
Execute:
Skip:
Exit:
866
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
867
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Tenant Number
STN(START):
STN(END):
TEC(OLD):
TEC(NEW):
Note 2
RSC(OLD):
Note 3
RSC(NEW):
SFC(OLD):
SFC(NEW):
Note 1: In the bottom part of the display, a check box is provided to determine whether to use * and # as
1=DP (10pps)
2=PB
3=DP/PB
4=DP (20pps)
5-11=Not used
12=Dterm
14=Hot Line
15=CAS line
17=Not used
19-22=Not used
23=ISDN Terminal
24-26=Not used
868
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
28-31=Not used
Note 3: If changing all classes of all specified stations, enter ** for this parameter.
Buttons
Execute:
Cancel:
Exit:
Output Data
STN:
Station Number
STATUS:
Note: If not OK (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.
869
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
- Read out the registered data from the saved CSV file.
or
- Refresh the list of registered data on Data field specifying the range by GET TYPE.
When deleting the data collectively with CSV file, be sure to check the difference between the actual
assigned data and the data in CSV file beforehand.
Note 3: In the case of failing in collective deletion, the command shows error message in STATUS field. Data
Index800 bit1), delete all the data assigned by ASPAL/ASPAN command on NCN and delete all the data
assigned by ASPAL command on each LN as well.
Note 6: Refer to the table below for the required time to execute data deletion by CSPAL command. The running
RUNNING TIME
100
150 seconds
1,000
1,450 seconds
10,000
14,500 seconds
870
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
2. Parameters
CSV File
File Name:
ALL TYPE:
RANGE TYPE: Registered data is to be listed specifying the range by TN and ACC.
TN (Tenant Number): Set the range by entering START TN and END TN [1-63].
ACC (Access Code): Set the range by entering START ACC and END ACC [Up to six digits].
Data
ALL SELECT
Place a checkmark to delete all the listed data.
Indicate from CNT to SRV
Place a checkmark to set the parameters CNT through SRV are to be listed.
Note: Regardless of the checkmark ON/OFF selected, STATUS field is always displayed.
TN:
Tenant Number
ACC:
Access Code
CI:
SRV:
Kind of Service
SID:
Service Index
SIDA:
Service Index A
NND:
Necessary Digit
871
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
NND1:
FPC:
STATE:
NO1:
NO2:
KIND:
Kind of Function
PNO:
A/G:
Admin/Guest
LGRT:
2nd DT:
AH:
Authorization Code
SUB:
SKIP:
Skip Digits
TN:
Tenant Number
EQP:
LGRT1~15:
STATUS:
Deletion result, error message, and error message for abnormal parameter value are displayed.
Note 1: Deletion target data can be selected individually by the CNT check box.
872
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
- Read out the registered data from the saved CSV file.
or
- Refresh the list of registered data on Data field specifying the range by GET TYPE.
When deleting the data collectively with CSV file, be sure to check the difference between the actual
assigned data and the data in CSV file beforehand.
Note 3: In the case of failing in collective deletion, the command shows error message in STATUS field. Data
letion by CSPAN command, the error message Cannot write data because broadcast or Office Data
copy is executing. is displayed in STATUS field. Data deletion is proceeded to the end even when error
message appears.
Note 5: To specify the range in GET TYPE, Connection Status Index (CI) cannot be selected. N (Normal), H
Index800 bit1), delete all the data assigned by ASPAL/ASPAN command on NCN and delete all the data
assigned by ASPAL command on each LN as well.
Note 7: Refer to the table below for the required time to execute data deletion by CSPAN command. The run-
RUNNING TIME
100
160 seconds
1,000
1,630 seconds
10,000
16,500 seconds
873
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
FCCS
NUMBER OF DATA ENTRY
RUNNING TIME
100
160 seconds
1,000
1,630 seconds
10,000
16,300 seconds
RUNNING TIME
100
160 seconds
1,000
1,630 seconds
10,000
16,300 seconds
RUNNING TIME
100
160 seconds
1,000
1,640 seconds
10,000
16,300 seconds
2. Parameters
CSV File
File Name:
ALL TYPE:
874
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
RANGE TYPE: Registered data is to be listed specifying the range by TN and ACC.
TN (Tenant Number): Set the range by entering START TN and END TN [1-63].
ACC (Access Code): Set the range by entering START ACC and END ACC [Up to six digits].
Data
ALL SELECT
Place a checkmark to delete all the listed data.
Indicate from CNT to SRV
Place a checkmark to set the parameters CNT through SRV are to be listed.
Note: Regardless of the checkmark ON/OFF selected, STATUS field is always displayed.
TN:
Tenant Number
ACC:
Access Code
CI:
SRV:
Kind of Service
SID:
Service Index
SIDA:
Service Index A
NND:
Necessary Digit
NND1:
FPC:
STATE:
NO1:
NO2:
KIND:
Kind of Function
PNO:
A/G:
Admin/Guest
LGRT:
2nd DT:
AH:
Authorization Code
SUB:
SKIP:
Skip Digits
TN:
Tenant Number
875
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
EQP:
LGRT1~15:
STATUS:
Deletion result, error message, and error message for abnormal parameter value are displayed.
Note 1: Deletion target data can be selected individually by the CNT check box.
876
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note
Note: In the bottom part of the display, a check box is provided to determine whether to use * and # as a
NEW STN:
STATUS:
Note: If not OK (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.
877
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note: Suspending or terminating the execution of this command will stop sending terminal reset requests and
allow the registration procedure. Be sure to keep the command active until the move of the member terminals is complete.
878
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note 1: When [All Release] is chosen for [Change Type] of this command, terminal registration to the specified
SP-PHD is denied during the execution of the command, regardless of the setting of the terminal reset.
Note 2: When [Separate Release] is chosen for [Change Type] of this command, terminal registration to the
specified SP-PHD is allowed or denied during the execution of the command, according to the load
balance (the number of registered terminals) between SP-PHDs. (Terminals are moved from SP-PHD
with more terminals to the one with less terminals so that they are distributed evenly between the SPPHDs.)
2. Parameters
Input Data
<SP Control>
ChangeType (Separate Release/All Release)
Separate Release: Distributes the member terminals of the SP-PHD specified with MPH-ID to share the
load balance with the other SP-PHD.
All Release: Moves all the member terminals of the SP-PHD specified with MPH-ID to the other SP-PHD.
PH Select (Normal/Force/Registration Restriction)
Normal: Resets only the member terminals in idle state. Terminals using the My Line or a Sub Line are not
affected.
Force: Resets member terminals, regardless of whether its My Line or any of Sub Lines are being used.
Registration Restriction: Denies new terminal registration to the specified SP-PHD, regardless of the setting of [Change Type] (Separate Release/All Release). Does not reset member terminals of the specified
SP-PHD.
Output Data
MPH-ID Registration Terminal Information
CNT: Registration count
MPH-ID: Identification number of SP controlling the member terminals Note 3
PHD: The number of member terminals registered to the SP-PHD
Note 3: Assign MPH-ID=1 for SP-PHD in the CPU #0 and MPH-ID=2 for SP-PHD in the CPU #1.
879
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Number of station/trunk whose call is to be blocked (in the remainder of this page, denoted as Restriction
Number)
Data can be obtained by entering any of the stations telephone number (TYPE 1), physical station number
(TYPE 2) or LENS (TYPE 3) in the parameters below:
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE:Selection of Input Data Type
TYPE 1 (Input Data = UGN, TELN)Note
TYPE 2 (Input Data = FPC, TN, STN)Note
TYPE 3 (Input Data = FPC, LENS)Note
READ (button to view the Display Data)
EXIT (button to exit)
Note: When using this command, first choose the input data type (TYPE 1 - 3) in TYPE selection list box. Then
880
CHAPTER 7
Output Data
CNT:Registered Restriction Numbers in total (1-5)
DC:Each Restriction Number
When Physical Station Number is registered (maximum six digits)
When Telephone Number is registered (maximum 16 digits)
When Trunk Call Number is registered (maximum 32 digits)
881
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Output Data
C_RT:
C_TK:
RT:
TK:
TN:
Tenant Number
882
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
TN:
STN:
Maximum number of digits is five for Business system, and six for Hotel system.
Note 2
RT:
TK:
LEN:
C_RT:
C_TK:
883
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
The following shows the relationship between SEC value and encryption on a connection pattern basis.
Figure 7-6 The Relationship between SEC value and Encryption
[1] non-IP terminal and non-IP terminal
SEC = blank
Encryption = OK
Terminal
specified by DCON
Encryption = NG
Terminal
specified by DCON
Terminal
specified by DCON
SEC = blank
Terminal
specified by DCON
SEC = X
Encryption = OK
SEC = O
IPPAD
Terminal
specified by DCON
Encryption = NG
SEC = blank
IPPAD
Terminal
specified by DCON
Encryption = OK
SEC = blank
IPPAD
Legend:
: IP terminal (with encryption)
884
: non-IP terminal
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
When there are unassigned memory blocks, their sizes are not to be displayed.
2. Parameters
Output Data
Execute the DDMO command, and click Get button; the following area sizes of the data memory are to be
displayed.
DM: Data Memory
Used-size: the size of the used area of the data memory
Free-size: the size of the free area of the data memory
Max-size: the maximum area size of the data memory
Usage: the usage rate (proportion of the used area size to the maximum area size)
LDM: Local Data Memory
Used-size: the size of the used area of the data memory
Free-size: the size of the free area of the data memory
Max-size: the maximum area size of the data memory
Usage: the usage rate (proportion of the used area size to the maximum area size)
NDM: Network Data Memory
Used-size: the size of the used area of the data memory
Free-size: the size of the free area of the data memory
Max-size: the maximum area size of the data memory
Usage: the usage rate (proportion of the used area size to the maximum area size)
Click the Detail button, and the detailed information of the data memory size is displayed.
885
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
TRIGGER NUMBER
Fault Message
SMTP Information
SIP Authentication
10
11
12
886
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
CONTENTS
TRIGGER NUMBER
13
14
15
16
17
19
22
<Remote Host>
Store debug info inside MGC (output later)
: If not checked, debug information is stored into main memory only. If checked, the information is stored
into main memory and designated remote host.
Output debug info immediately:
Receive on this MAT Note 6
: Debug information is displayed on this PCPro.
Note 6: MAT indicated here refers to PCPro.
887
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
<TCP/IP>
Output Device
None
Fault printer: Debug information is output to fault printer.
IO Port: IO port of fault printer [1-7]
Remote Host: Debug information is output to a remote host.
TCP/IP Debug information output
None: Suspend TCP/IP trace data.
Warnings: Only warning messages are output.
TX/RX data and warnings:
Protocol Filter
:This group box is displayed only when TX/RX data and warnings is checked. The following can be specified for output of trace information.
UDP: Information such as registration and signaling speech between system and IP terminals.
ICMP: Information regarding PCPro, SMDR, and OAI server
TCP: Information such as PING
ARP: Information regarding Address Resolution Protocol
IP Address and Port Number Filter
:This group box is displayed only when TX/RX data and warnings is checked. The following can be specified for output of trace information.
Number of bits to check (0=No Filter)
Filtering Address:
UDP or TCP port number (0=No Filter)
Protocol
Port No.
Usage
3456
UDP
Registration
60000
TCP
PCPro
888
CHAPTER 7
Protocol
Port No.
Maintenance Commands
Usage
60001
UDP
A/S
60010
TCP
SMDR
60020
TCP
MCI
60030
TCP
OAI
60040
TCP
MIS
60050
TCP
PMS
60060
TCP
NMS
60080
TCP
CS Report
60090
UDP
Internal PHD
60110
UDP
60120
UDP
60130
UDP
Internal PHE
60140
TCP
60150
TCP
60180
UDP
Internal PHF
64000
TCP/UDP
57000
TCP
65030
TCP
53
UDP
DNS
123
UDP
SNTP
<DRS>
Registration Failed: Information of registration failed is output.
Registration Succeeded: Information of registration succeeded is output.
Sending Terminal Reset: Information of Sending Terminal Reset is output.
Fault notification from terminals: Information of Fault notification from terminals is output.
Buttons
Add
889
CHAPTER 7
Delete:
Apply:
Cancel:
Maintenance Commands
To capture Call Statistics on the local host in the PCPro session enter DEBUG command (or select it from
the Tool folder).
2.
3.
890
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
4.
From the Unchosen Trigger area, select item 3 (Notification of IP station RTP statistics information).
Press Set button.
5.
891
CHAPTER 7
6.
7.
892
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
8.
To capture Call Statistics on the local host, check Receive on the PCPro box. Local PC IP Address will
appear automatically in the IP Address field as well as Port Number (UDP) 40000. Press Apply button
and Open window button.
9.
After pressing Open window button the following console appears. Make IP type of call. The first CALL
STATISTICS message will appear. On the Option menu, check Show IP Addr. The LAN2 (ACT) address
appears in the front of CALL STATISTICS message.
893
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Function Type
ID-No
STN
L-STN:
TN:
P-STN:
Output data
RSC:
SFC:
DC:
894
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Yes/No
895
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
0: System 0
1: System 1
Data Select:
896
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Designate the LP number. (Required when 12, 13, 18, 19, 23, 26, 27, 28 or 37 is selected
in the Data parameter.)
Drive Select:
Output data
After assigning the parameters above and then pressing the Get button, the related file names are listed in
the display field at the bottom part of the command screen.
[File List] Note 1
File Name
Date Modified
File Size (byte(s))
Note 1: Checked files will be deleted when Del button is pressed.
Buttons
Get:
Del:
Delete the Office Data file specified in the File Name parameter.
897
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Output data
System 0/System 1
Gray:
Not Mounted
Green:
ACT
Yellow:
STBY
Red:
Make Busy
Drive A or Drive D
Program Name
Version:
Program Version
Issue:
Issue
Date:
Date Modified
Information:
Error Information
898
CHAPTER 7
Office Name:
Office Name
Date:
Date Modified
Information:
Error Information
899
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
System
System 0
System 1
900
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Drive
When Type = MAIN or ACDP is displayed:
A: Drive A
D: Drive D
When Type = DM, LDM, or NDM is displayed:
B: Drive B
C: Drive C
Issue Note 1
System
System 0
System 1
901
CHAPTER 7
Buttons
Get:
Abort:
902
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
TELN:
TN:
STN
LENS:
Output Data
CB ACT:
AN BLK ACT:
BIN NO:
DC:
Buttons
Get:
Exit:
903
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
UG50.
3. Parameters
Input Data
View Type:
PH LENS:
Output Data
CNT:
Counter
LENS:
FPC:
MG Type:
Status:
Registration Status
904
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
IP:
MAC:
SEC:
Encryption status for voice data [O (encrypted) / X (not encrypted) / Readout Failed /
Blank (system or terminal does not support encryption)]
TN:
Tenant Number
RT:
TK:
Trunk Number
MPH ID:
MPH LENS:
ISDN Status:
Action Mode:
Reference
Reference Information
Buttons
Get:
Exit:
905
CHAPTER 7
DIPI:
Maintenance Commands
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the information of IP terminals. Information can be displayed by pressing the Execute
button. Information displayed can be output to the CSV file by pressing the CSV File Output button.
Note: For PCPro with a software version FP85-110 S7 or later, this command is started up as IPAN command.
906
CHAPTER 7
907
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
MAC Address
SEC: Encryption status for voice data
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
UGN(NDM): User Group Number (NDM)
TELN(NDM): Telephone Number (NDM)
UGN(LDM): User Group Number (LDM)
TELN(LDM): Telephone Number (LDM)
RT: Route Number
TK: Trunk Number
ISDN STATUS: Line Status at this time
MODE: Operation mode used at this time
PCN: PHS Community Number
ERN: Calling Area Number (1-32)
GRN: Group Number (1-8)
CSN/ZTN: IP-BS Number (1-32)
GKID: Gate Keeper Identifier (1-255)
SIPID: SIP Server ID
MPH LENS: Accommodated Location (LENS) of MPH
MPH ID: MPH Identifier (1-4095)
PH LENS: Line Equipment Number of PHL Card [MG, U, G]
PH TYPE: Type of PHL Card
[Detailed Information]
No.: Number
Firmware Information
SP/SW No.: Software Number (4 digits)
ISS: Firmware Version
908
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
STN MAC.
Note:
To reset WLAN Handset (MH Series), select Station on the View Type parameter and TelephoneNumber (NDM)/Telephone Number (LDM) on the Kind of Station parameter.
2. Precautions
(a) A Virtual MAC address beginning with 02 is displayed as a MAC address of IPG (Digital), IPG
(Analog) or UG50. Note 1
(b) A dummy MAC address beginning with 19 is displayed as a MAC address of SIP Handler Controlled SIP terminal. The actual MAC address of the terminal is not displayed. Note 1
(c) A dummy MAC address beginning with 1D is displayed as a MAC address of IP-DTG. Note 1
Note 1: UG50, SIP Handler Controlled SIP terminal and IP-DTG are available for FP85-110 S7 or later.
3. Parameters
Input Data
ViewType: Select the item to be displayed.
Station
PH Control
IPCS/IPZT
Gate Keeper
Voice Server
SIP Server
MPH
IP-DTG Note 2
909
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
PH Control Data Clear and Soft Reset (with idle busy check)
PH Control Data Clear and Soft Reset (without idle busy check)
Note 3: To clear the registration information with specifying SIP Handler Controlled SIP terminal, select the
PH Control Data Clear and Soft Reset (with idle busy check) parameter or the PH Control Data Clear
and Soft Reset (without idle busy check) parameter. After clearing the registration information, the SIP
Handler Controlled SIP terminal cannot be used until it completes re-registration due to the terminals
periodical REGISTER update or the terminal reset operated manually.
Note 4: To display this parameter, select an item in the Detail data list, and then click the Execute button. Avail-
able terminals in this parameter varies depending on the IP KIND. (IP KIND is displayed in the Detail
data list.)
<IP KIND>
DtermIP
IP terminal
Soft Dterm
Smart Phone
Analog MC
Digital MC
IP-BS
NA
IP-VPS
MG (Analog)
MG (Digital)
MG (ISDN BRI)
NA
Analog 2MC
IP-BS
MG (BRI)
910
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
NA
NA
SIP-MG
NA
MG (SIP)
MCMG_COT
NA
MCMG_aMC
Voice Server
SIP Station
DtermIP (SIP)
MPH
NA
SPterm
DT700 Series
Soft SPterm
SIP-VPS
MCMG (7COT)_COT
NA
MCMG (7COT)_aMC
8MC (SIP)
8LC Card
VS32 (SIP)
VS-32 (SIP)
IP-DTG
PHA
PHD
PHE
IPPAD
Internal PHI
MPH
PHI
Note 5: The information of IP-DTG controlled by Internal PHE is also read out.
Note 6: Internal PHD is displayed until FP85-109 S6 Issue 3.
911
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
PH Control Data Clear and Soft Reset (without idle busy check)
Note 7: To display this parameter, select an item in the Detail data list, and then click the Execute button. Op-
912
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
PH Control Data Clear and Soft Reset (without idle busy check)
Note 8: To display this parameter, select an item in the Detail data list, and then click the Execute button. Op-
913
CHAPTER 7
914
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
915
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
916
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
IPTEN:
PHGEN:
DST_IP:
LENS:
Enter the Line Equipment Number of the IPELC card [six digits] (available for
TYPE=6-7)
KIND:
DATA CLEAR:
Designated kind statistics data of circuit card clear flag (available for TYPE=7-8)
Clear Data/Not Clear Data
Note: If any wrong data is input, error message SP H/I Error (Error Code 0x0D05) is displayed.
Output Data
(a) When 1: Internal Ether Traffic Data of IP Trunk Read is selected;
Frequency of:
917
CHAPTER 7
918
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
919
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
920
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Connection Status
(f) When 6: Terminal Data of IPELC Read is selected;
IP Address
Jitter Buffer Minimum (x 10 milliseconds)
Jitter Buffer Maximum (x 10 milliseconds)
Jitter Buffer Size (x 10 milliseconds)
Jitter Buffer Consumption (x 10 milliseconds)
(g) When TYPE = 7: Traffic Data of IPELC Read and KIND = 1 are selected;
[Receive]
Packets
CRC Error (RMD)
Collision
Ethernet Controller Framing Error
No Receive Buffer
No PCI Bridge SDRAM Space
Bus Parity Error
[Send]
Packets
No PCI Bridge SDRAM Space TMD
Ethernet Controller FIFO Underflow
Ethernet Controller Delay
Ethernet Controller Carrier Loss
Ethernet Controller Retry NG
Bus Parity Error
[Receive Packet Details]
Receive Packet (less than 64 bytes)
Receive Packet (64-127 bytes)
Receive Packet (128-255 bytes)
Receive Packet (256-511 bytes)
Receive Packet (512-1023 bytes)
Receive Packet (1024-1528 bytes)
Receive Packet (more than 1528 bytes)
(h) When TYPE = 7: Traffic Data of IPELC Read and KIND = 2 are selected;
The number of packets to be sent out or received is displayed via channel 0 to 31 on PROTIMS
and RTP.
921
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
2. Parameters
Input data
Type of Issue
Main Memory
Port Microprocessor
Port Microprocessor Equipment Number
Module Group: Module Group Number Note 1
Unit:
Output data
Issue Information List
<When Main Memory is selected for Type of Issue>
Type:
Program Name
Issue
Date:
Issue:
Issue
922
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Program Name
MAIN
ACDP
Output data
Issue Information List
Type:
Program Name
MAIN
ACDP
FPC
System:
System 0
System 1
Version:
Program Version
Issue:
Issue
Date:
Information:
Error Information
923
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Output data
<For Station>
TN
Tenant Number
STN:
TEC:
MEANING
DATA
MEANING
DP (10pps)
PB
DP/PB
DP (20 pps)
Not used
12
Dterm
13
14
Hot line
15
CAS line
16
18
5-11
17
Not used
19-22
Not used
23
ISDN Terminal
24-26
Not used
27
28-31
Not used
RSC:
SFC:
Annex (0-3)
924
CHAPTER 7
G:
Maintenance Commands
0=Ground
1=Underground
FLR:
Floor (1-127)
<For Trunk>
RT:
MEANING
DATA
MEANING
901
Attendant Console
902
903
904
MF Receiver
905
906
907
AMP
908
Not used
909
910, 911
Not used
913
914
Not Used
915
916
MFC Register
917
MFC Sender
918
Not used
919
927, 928
920-926
Not used
929
930
933
CRT
937
938
939
940
941-947
Not used
TK:
<For FCCS>
C_RT:
C_TK:
ERN:
GRN:
925
CHAPTER 7
CSN:
CS Number (1-32)
CS-INT Bch:
Maintenance Commands
Note 1: When the Line Equipment Number (LENS) of a SIP server configured with the ASSDL/ASSDN command
is entered, the following information is provided for the PCN and ERN parameters:
PCN = 1024
ERN: SIP server ID Note 2
Note 2: If the number of SIP server IDs exceeds 31, ERN may not be displayed correctly.
926
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
MG:
UNIT:
Output data
Index
Index Number
LENS
927
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
TN:
Start STN:
End STN:
Output data
CNT:
Count
TN
Tenant Number
STN
LENS
928
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
UGN:
Note 1, Note 2
Start TELN:
Note 2
End TELN:
Note 2
Note 1: This parameter is valid when Type =Printout of lockout stations by tenant is selected.
Note 2: This parameter is valid when Type =Printout of lockout stations within a specified range of station
numbers is selected.
Output Data
FPC:
TN:
Tenant Number
Start STN:
End STN:
CNT:
Count
UGN:
TELN:
LENS:
Buttons
Get:
Exit:
929
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Output Data
UGN:
TELN:
TN:
Tenant Number
STN:
TEC:
RSC:
SFC:
930
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Reading Type
Select All
Select Partial
ITEMS:
931
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
PH Module Status:
TP Control: Displays the status of PH modules controlled by TP in the Telephony Server.
Internal PHI (BRI)
Internal PHI (PRI)
Internal PHE
Internal PHC
Internal PHF
PBUS over IP
Internal SIP Handler
932
CHAPTER 7
LINK
933
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
LENS:
Output Data
UGN (NDM):
TELN (NDM):
NID:
Network ID Note
TN:
Tenant Number
STN:
TEC:
RSC:
SFC:
UGN (LDM):
TELN (LDM):
Note: Network ID (NID) is allocated automatically when the Module Group/Unit data is assigned by the
AFMU command. For detailed information, refer to the SV8500 FCCS Network System Manual.
934
CHAPTER 7
PHA
PHD
PHE
Internal PHI Note 1
Internal PHD
Internal PHE
Internal SIP Handler Note 2
MPH
PHI
PH LENS:
REGMAX:
Registration Maximum
REGCNT:
LOGIN CNT:
Number of Login-Terminals
SPECIFIC HUNT:
MPH LENS:
MPH ID:
Buttons
Get:
Abort:
935
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
stalled to the PCPro. (See the FLINST command for more information.)
Note: DPKG command should be run during low traffic only.
2. Parameters
Input Data
MG:
UNIT:
Buttons
Get:
Close:
Note: When the Input Data above is entered and the Get button is pressed, the related circuit card name is dis-
played on a Group basis. However, if the name is not found for some reason, the following mark may
appear in the relevant display field.
##
Circuit card name not found (for the card is in make-busy state, etc.).
936
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note 1: When using this command, make sure that each circuit cards related database file have already been
installed to the PCPro. (See the FLINST command for more information.)
2. Parameters
Input Data
KIND:
TYPE:
Control Package
PMN:
PKG NAME:
LP:
SYSTEM:
System
Note 2
0=System 0
l=System 1
MG:
Note 2
UNIT:
Note 2
937
CHAPTER 7
ACT/STBY:
ACT/STBY information
Maintenance Commands
Note 2
0=ACT
l=STBY
2=Not used
No:
Note 2
Note 2: This parameter may appear when Control Package is selected in the TYPE parameter.
Buttons
Get:
Next Page:
Previous Page:
Exit:
Output Data
PKG Name:
938
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
quired to be obtained.
Note: This command is available for SR-MGC(E) and SR-MGC(S) as well. Only capacity is shown for them.
CAPACITY
Details of Client Licenses
Service Licenses
939
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
IPG Note 1
UG Phone Note 2
Note 1: IPG Analog: Available since FP85-108 S5
CAPACITY
Capacity Type:
System Capacity: Indicates the amount of circuit capacity in the whole system.
IP Line Capacity: Indicates the amount of circuit capacity corresponding to each model of SR-MGC.
Capacity [0-2000]
Whole capacity and capacity for IP of the SR-MGC will be indicated.
940
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
PIR:
STATUS:
DETAIL:
Displays the cause when Not mounted is indicated in Status of Mounting Information.
For more information, refer to Table 7-1 System Operation Status Message on page
942.
Displays MG number
UNIT:
STATUS:
941
CHAPTER 7
DETAIL:
Maintenance Commands
Displays the cause when Make Busy or Not mounted is indicated in Status of Unit
Mounting Information. For more information, refer to Table 7-1 System Operation Status Message.
Table 7-1 System Operation Status Message
No.
MESSAGE
942
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Tenant Number
STN:
Buttons
For display data selection
SHP:
Note
KYD:
Note
CPG:
Note
CPE:
Note
PHN:
Note
SHC:
Station Hunting-Circular
Note
SHU:
Station Hunting-UCD
Note
HLS:
Note
Note: When the designated station has any of the above listed data, the corresponding button(s) can be
Close:
943
CHAPTER 7
LENS:
TEC:
Maintenance Commands
l=DP (10pps)
2=PB
3=DP/PB
4=DP (20pps)
5-11=Not used
12=Dterm
14=Hot Line
15=CAS Line
17=Not used
19-22=Not used
23=ISDN Terminal
24-26=Not used
28-31=Not used
RSC:
SFC:
944
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
ACPGN:
ACPEN:
ASHUN:
ASHCN:
AHLSN:
ASHPN:
AKYD:
2. Parameters
Input Data
UGN:
TELN:
Telephone Number
Output Data
FPC:
TN:
Tenant Number
STN:
Station Number
LENS:
UNIT:
Unit Number
G:
Group Number
LV:
Level Number
TEC:
RSC:
SFC:
945
CHAPTER 7
Selection Button
CPGN:
CPEN:
SHUN:
SHCN:
HLSN:
SHPN:
KYD:
946
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
947
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
948
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
949
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
950
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
951
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
952
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
953
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
954
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
955
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
956
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
957
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
958
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
959
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
960
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
961
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
962
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
963
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
964
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
965
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
966
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
967
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
DTF301N: Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=8 (UCD Route Peg Count) assigned
by the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
For details of the parameters, refer to TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT in Chapter 2.
968
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
DTF302N: Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=9 (UCD Group Peg Count) assigned
by the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
For details of the parameters, refer to TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT in Chapter 2.
969
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
DTF303N: Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=10 (UCD Station Peg Count) assigned
by the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
For details of the parameters, refer to TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT in Chapter 2.
970
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
DTF501N: Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=15 (ATT Answering Peg Count)
assigned by the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
For details of the parameters, refer to TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT in Chapter 2.
971
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
DTF601N: Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=18 (Connection Route Peg Count)
assigned by the ATRFN command.
Note: This traffic measurement is also available for connections via IPPAD; however, incoming and outgoing
972
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
973
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Buffer overflow
When EVLOG storage buffer is full and no more logs can be written, the system sends a message to
the terminals. When the problem has been solved and 10% of the buffer memory is available, the eventlog !!warning, evlog buffer full is displayed.
Note: For PCPro with a software version FP85-107 S4 or earlier, this command is started up as DEBUG com-
974
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
<Trigger>
CONTENTS
TRIGGER NUMBER
Fault Message
SMTP Information
SIP Authentication
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
22
37
38
IP Trace Log
39
40
44
IPG Log
47
Extension Language
48
975
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
<Remote Host>
Store evlog info inside MGC (output later):
If not checked, evlog information is stored into main memory only. If checked, the information is stored
into main memory and designated remote host.
Output evlog info immediately:
Receive on this MAT Note 2:
Evlog information is displayed on this PCPro.
Note 2: MAT indicated here refers to PCPro.
sonal computer.
<TCP/IP>
Output Device
None
Fault printer: Evlog information is output to fault printer.
IO Port: IO port of fault printer [1-7]
Remote Host: Evlog information is output to a remote host.
TCP/IP Evlog information output
None: Suspend TCP/IP trace data.
Warnings: Only warning messages are output.
TX/RX data and warnings:
976
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Protocol Filter:
This group box is displayed only when TX/RX data and warnings is chosen. The following can be specified
for output of trace information.
UDP: Information such as registration and signaling speech between system and IP terminals.
ICMP: Information regarding PCPro, SMDR, and OAI server
TCP: Information such as PING
ARP: Information regarding Address Resolution Protocol
IP Address and Port Number Filter
Number of bits to check (0=No Filter) (1-32)
Note: When you do not assign the number of bits, assign 0.
Filtering Address
Assign the IP address of tracing devices. Range of IP address can be specified by assigning the number of bits. The following table shows examples of assignment.
Note: When you do not assign the number of bits, assign 0.
Number of bits (Mask value)
IP address
Target address
32 (255.255.255.255)
192.168.10.50
192.168.10.50
28 (255.255.255.240)
192.168.10.32
192.168.10.32 - 192.168.10.47
(For 16 devices)
Port No.
Usage
3456
UDP
Registration
60000
TCP
PCPro
60001
UDP
A/S
60010
TCP
SMDR
60020
TCP
MCI
60030
TCP
OAI
60040
TCP
MIS
977
CHAPTER 7
Protocol
Port No.
Maintenance Commands
Usage
60050
TCP
PMS
60060
TCP
NMS
60080
TCP
CS Report
60090
UDP
Internal PHD
60110
UDP
60120
UDP
60130
UDP
Internal PHE
60140
TCP
60150
TCP
60180
UDP
Internal PHF
64000
TCP/UDP
57000
TCP
65030
TCP
53
UDP
DNS
123
UDP
SNTP
<DRS>
Registration Failed: Information of registration failed is output.
Registration Succeeded: Information of registration succeeded is output.
Sending Terminal Reset: Information of Sending Terminal Reset is output.
Fault notification from terminals: Information of Fault notification from terminals is output.
Buttons
Add
Delete:
Apply:
Cancel:
978
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
To capture Call Statistics on the local host in the PCPro session enter EVLOG command (or select it from
the Tool folder).
2.
3.
979
CHAPTER 7
4.
Maintenance Commands
From the Unchosen Trigger area, select item 3 (IP Telephone RTP Statistics). Press Set button.
980
CHAPTER 7
5.
6.
981
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
7.
Select the Remote Host tab. Check Send to Remote Host box.
8.
To capture Call Statistics on the local host, check Receive on the PCPro box. Local PC IP Address will
appear automatically in the IP Address field as well as Port Number (UDP) 40000. Press Apply button
and Open window button.
982
CHAPTER 7
9.
Maintenance Commands
After pressing Open window button the following console appears. Make IP type of call. The first CALL
STATISTICS message will appear. On the Option menu, check Show IP Addr. The LAN2 (ACT) address
appears in the front of CALL STATISTICS message.
983
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
984
CHAPTER 7
HDD of System 0
System 1:
HDD of System 1
Buttons
Execute:
Close:
985
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Meaning
Non
Data coincide
Add
Change
Delete
(c) When you execute ping in this command, it is only System-LAN2 that you can set as an origin of
ping packet transmission.
(d) In the SEC column, encryption status for control data is displayed. When reading out data is failed
Readout Failed is displayed.
O: Encrypted
X: Not encrypted
Blank: System or terminal does not support encryption.
(e) A Virtual MAC address beginning with 02 is displayed as a MAC address of IPG (Digital), IPG
(Analog) or UG50. Note 1
(f) A dummy MAC address beginning with 19 is displayed as a MAC address of SIP Handler Controlled SIP terminal. Note 1
(g) A dummy MAC address beginning with 1D is displayed as a MAC address of IP-DTG. Note 1
Note 1: UG50, SIP Handler Controlled SIP terminal and IP-DTG are available for FP85-110 S7 or later.
986
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
3. Parameters
<<For the Telephony Server Login>>
[Input Data]
MGC (origin of ping packet transmission)
System-0/System-1/Both system
Processing type
Individual/All equipment Note 2
The number of times of ping
One Time/Four Times
Note 2: When the processing type All equipment is selected, all the connected device data on the tabs of
MGC, IP Terminal, Package, PHC Point Code, and SR-MGC are intended to affect. When Individual is selected, operation is executed on the basis of each tab.
[Output Data]
System-0 operating status Note 3
System-1 operating status Note 3
IP Address (ACT) Note 4
IP Address (System-0) Note 4, Note 5
IP Address (System-1) Note 4, Note 5
Subnet Mask Note 4
Note: Information of LAN2 will be displayed.
Note 3: The color for the operating status means as shown below.
COLOR
STATUS
ping
Green
Available
Yellow
Available
Red
Stop
Not available
Gray
Not mounted
Not available
Note 4: When the IP address of MGC is not assigned by the ADTM command or assigned to 0.0.0.0, the default
data is indicated.
987
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Buttons
Get:
Ping Execute: Executes ping test to verify that a particular IP address exists and can accept request, and
to see how long it takes to get response. Ping test is executed to the IP address marked in
the check box on the list.
File output:
Exit:
988
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
[Input Data]
SR-MGC (origin of ping packet transmission)
SR-MGC
Processing type
Individual/All equipment Note
The number of times of ping
One Time/Four Times
Note: When the processing type All equipment is selected, all the connected device data on the tabs of MGC,
IP Terminal, and PHC Point Code are intended to affect. When Individual is selected, operation is
executed on the basis of each tab.
[Output Data]
SR-MGC operating status: ACT (Fixed)
IP Address (ACT)
Subnet Mask
Buttons
Get:
Ping Execute: Executes ping test to verify that a particular IP address exists and can accept request, and
to see how long it takes to get response. Ping test is executed to the IP address marked in
the check box on the list.
File output:
Exit:
989
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note: The following tabs are common for the Telephony Server login and SR-MGC login.
<MGC tab>
MGC Kind:3U MGC/SR-MGC
[Output Data]
ACT/System-0/System-1
IP Address Note 6, Note 7
Ping result (system-0)
Ping result (system-1)
Note 6: For the Telephony Server login, only LAN2 indicates the default data when the IP address of MGC is
Equipment Kind
LENS Input Type: All / Collective
Specify the range of LENS in the START and END box when Collective is selected.
Click the type of target IP device. The check box All Equipment is provided to select all the types.
Terminal
DtermIP:
Soft Phone (SP20):
Inaset:
Soft Phone (SP21):
Soft Phone (SP30):
IPG Digital:
UG50 (DLC):
IP terminal
Soft Phone (Proprietary Protocol) for ACD Note 8
DtermIP INASET
Not used.
DtermSP30 (Proprietary Protocol)
IPG (Digital) Note 9
UG50 (DLC) Note 9
Media Converter
Analog MC:
IPG Analog:
UG50 (LC):
Analog 2MC
IPG (Analog) Note 9
UG50 (LC) Note 9
IPCS/IPZT:
IP-BS
CS
990
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Gateway
Gate Keeper:
SIP Server:
Not used.
SP
VPS
IPVPS:
Not used.
Media Gateway
ISDN Trunk (BRI):
ISDN Trunk (PRI 1.5M):
ISDN Trunk (PRI 2M):
SIP-MG:
MG (COT):
MC-MG (7COT):
MG (6COT):
B2BUA-SIP GW-4ch:
B2BUA-SIP GW-32ch:
UG50 (BRI):
UG50 (PRI 1.5M):
UG50 (PRI 2M):
UG50 (COT-TYPE1):
UG50 (COT-TYPE2):
Multi-Function Server
Voice Server:
Multi-Protocol Handler:
VS32
MPH
SIP
SIP Multi-Function Telephone:
SIP Soft-Phone:
SIP-VPS:
8LC Card
UG50 (LC) Note 9
991
CHAPTER 7
SIP Phone:
Maintenance Commands
IP-DTG Note 9
IP-DTG:
IP-DTG
Other
H.323:
SIP Station:
Not used.
WLAN Handset (MH Series),
SP Controlled Standard SIP terminal
Note 8: To display DtermSP30 used as ACD agent position, select Soft Phone (SP20).
Note 9: Status display of this Equipment is available for FP85-110 S7 or later.
Station
Station Number
Specify the range of Tenant Number in the START TN and END TN
Specify the range of Station Number in the START STN and END TN
Trunk
Specify the range of Route Number in the START RT and END RT
Specify the range of Trunk Number in the START TK and END TK
IPCS/IPZT
PCN: PCS / PHS Community Number [1-1024]
Specify the range of Calling Area Number in the START ERN and END ERN [1-32]
Specify the range of Group Number in the START GRN and END GRN [1-8]
Specify the range of IPCS Number in the START CSN / ZTN and END CSN / ZTN [1-32]
GateKeeper
GKID: Gate Keeper ID [1-255]
992
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
PH Control
Specify the PH LENS.
Note: Click the Version detailed display button to display the detail firmware information of the selected PH
SIP Server
Specify the SIP Server ID [1-255].
MPH
Specify the Multi-Protocol Handler ID [1-4095]
Note: When MPH is selected for View type, the ping command cannot be executed because the data read out
Station
Trunk
IPCS/IPZT
Gatekeeper
PH Control
SIP Server
MPH
Equipment
Name
Equipment
Name
Equipment
Name
Equipment
Name
Equipment
Name
Equipment
Name
Equipment
Name
IP CH KIND
IP CH KIND
IP CH KIND
IP CH KIND
IP Address
IP Address
IP Address
IP Address
IP Address
IP Address
IP Address
LOC-ID
LOC-ID
LOC-ID
LOC-ID
LOC-ID
LOC-ID
LOC-ID
MAC Address
MAC Address
MAC Address
MAC Address
MAC Address
SEC
SEC
SEC
SEC
SEC
PH TYPE
LENS
LENS
LENS
LENS
LENS
LENS
LENS
LENS
TN
TN Note 11
TN
TN
TN
STN
STN Note 11
STN
STN
STN
UGN(NDM)
UGN(NDM)
UGN(NDM)
TELN(NDM)
TELN(NDM)
TELN(NDM)
UGN(LDM)
UGN(LDM)
UGN(LDM)
Note 13
TELN(LDM)
TELN(LDM)
TELN(LDM)
RT
RT
RT
TK
TK
TK
ISDN STATUS
ISDN STATUS
ISDN STATUS
MODE
MODE
MODE
UGN(NDM)
TELN(NDM)
UGN(LDM)
TELN(LDM)
UGN(NDM)
Note 12
TELN(NDM)
Note 12
UGN(LDM)
Note 13
TELN(LDM)
993
PH TYPE
Note 10
CHAPTER 7
Equipment
Kind
Station
Trunk
IPCS/IPZT
Gatekeeper
Maintenance Commands
PH Control
SIP Server
MPH
PCN
PCN
PCN
ERN
ERN
ERN
GRN
GRN
GRN
CSN/ZTN
CSN/ZTN
CSN/ZTN
GKID
GKID
GKID
GKID
SIP Server ID
SIP Server ID
SIP Server ID
SIP Server ID
MPH LENS
MPH LENS
MPH LENS
MPH ID
MPH ID
MPH ID
PHIN
PHIN
PHIN
PHIN
PH LENS
PH LENS
PH LENS
PH LENS
PH LENS
PH LENS
PH LENS
PH TYPE
PH TYPE
PH TYPE
PH TYPE
PH TYPE
PH TYPE
PH TYPE
Note 14
User Agent
Information
User Agent
Information
Note 14
Note 14
Firmware
Information
Firmware
Information
Firmware
Information
Firmware
Information
Firmware
Information
SP/SW No.
SP/SW No.
SP/SW No.
SP/SW No.
SP/SW No.
ISS
ISS
ISS
ISS
ISS
Hardware
Information
Hardware
Information
Hardware
Information
Hardware
Information
Hardware
Information
ISS
ISS
ISS
ISS
ISS
Ping Result
(system-0)
Ping Result
(system-0)
Ping Result
(system-0)
Ping Result
(system-0)
Ping Result
(system-0)
Ping Result
(system-0)
Ping Result
(system-0)
Ping Result
(system-1)
Ping Result
(system-1)
Ping Result
(system-1)
Ping Result
(system-1)
Ping Result
(system-1)
Ping Result
(system-1)
Ping Result
(system-1)
REGMAX
MGC PORT
TERM PORT
MPH LENS
DTG-ID
DTG-ID
Note 14
User Agent
Information
Note 14
Note 10:This item appears on the left side of the LENS column only when MPH was chosen for the View type
box.
Note 11:This item appears only when Station Number was chosen for the Station kind field.
Note 12:This item appears only when Telephone Number (NDM) was chosen for the Station kind field.
Note 13:This item appears only when Telephone Number (LDM) was chosen for the Station kind field.
Note 14:This information is available since FP85-110 S7.
994
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
GKID
Gatekeeper ID
IP CH KIND
SIP Server ID
SIP Server ID
IP Address
IP Address
MPH LENS
LOC-ID
Location ID
MPH ID
MPH ID
MAC Address
MAC Address
PHIN
SEC
PH LENS
LENS
PH TYPE
Type of PH
TN
Tenant Number
DTG-ID
STN
Station Number
User Agent
Information
UGN(NDM)
Firmware
Information
Firmware Information
TELN(NDM)
Telephone Number
SP/SW No.
UGN(LDM)
ISS
TELN(LDM)
Telephone Number
Hardware
Information
Hardware Information
RT
Route Number
ISS
TK
Trunk Number
Ping Result
(system-0)
ISDN
STATUS
Line Status
Ping Result
(system-1)
MODE
Operation Mode
REGMAX
PCN
TERM PORT
ERN
MGC PORT
GRN
Group Number
MPH LENS
CSN/ZTN
IP-BS Number
995
Note 6
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
<Package tab>
[Input Data]
Specify the range of LENS in the START PH LENS and END PH LENS [five digits].
[Output Data]
PH LENS
IP Address
PH TYPE: PHA, PHE, PHD, PHC, IPPAD, PHI, Internal PHE, Internal SIP Handler, Internal PHC, Internal
PHI
MPH LENS: Line Equipment Number of MPH
MPH ID: Identifier of MPH
REGMAX: The maximum number of registration
REG CNT: The number of terminals under the registration of the corresponding PH card
LOGIN CNT: The number of terminals logging in to the MGC
Firmware Information Note 15
SP / SW No.
ISS
Ping result (system-0)
Ping result (system-1)
Note 15:Click the Detail button to display the detail firmware information of the selected PH card on the list.
996
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
997
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
998
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
View Type
Station Kind
Station Number
Telephone
Number (NDM)
Telephone
Number (LDM)
Equipment Kind
X
Note 17
X
Note 17
X
Note 17
Station Number
X
Note 17
Telephone
Number (NDM)
X
Note 17
Telephone
Number (LDM)
X
Note 17
X
Note 17
X
Note 17
X
Note 17
Station
PH Control
DtermIP
SoftPhone (SP21)
UG50 (DLC)
UG50 (LC)
SoftPhone (SP20)
SoftPhone (SP30)
Analog MC
IPVPS
SIP Soft-Phone
UG50 (LC) [SIP]
SIP Phone
H.323
SmartPhone
IPG (Digital)
IPG (Analog)
Voice Server
(IP CH KIND: 8-CONF, 16CONF or 32-CONF only)
SIP-VPS
Voice Server [SIP]
(IP CH KIND: 8-CONF, 16CONF or 32-CONF only)
SIP Station
[Input Data]
Verify Type: File Memory / File File
Verify Key Data: Station Number / Telephone Number (NDM) / Telephone Number (LDM)
File 1: Select the CSV file clicking the Reference button.
File 2: Select the CSV file clicking the Reference button (for the Verify Type File File only).
999
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
[Output Data]
File 1 / File preservation time: The directory and the saved time of the selected CSV file is displayed.
Data Conditions: This box shows the conditions when the CSV file is obtained. Note 18
Note 18:When Equipment Kind is selected for the View Type box on the IP Terminal tab, if there is information
other than the target of Station Number Verify (Note 17 on the previous page), it is regarded as not
meeting the search condition and not displayed in the Verify Result field.
File 2 / File preservation time: The directory and the saved time of the selected CSV file is displayed.
Status
TN (for the Verify Key Data Station Number)
STN (for the Verify Key Data Station Number)
UGN (for the Verify Key Data Telephone Number (NDM) or Telephone Number (LDM)
TELN (for the Verify Key Data Telephone Number (NDM) or Telephone Number (LDM)
LENS
IP Address
Ping result (system-0)
Ping result (system-1)
1000
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Terminal
DtermIP
Soft Phone (SP20)
Inaset
Soft Phone (SP21)
Soft Phone (SP30)
[Output Data]
Equipment Name
IP CH KIND: Kind of channel for VS-32
IP Address
LOC-ID: Location ID
MAC Address
SEC: Encryption status for voice data
LENS: Accommodation Location Information (LENS)
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
UGN (NDM): User Group Number
TELN (NDM): Telephone Number
UGN (LDM): User Group Number
TELN (LDM): Telephone Number
RT: Route Number
1001
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note 19:To display Equipment Kind [Registration/License Count], choose the equipment from the list of Equip-
ment, and get the registration information with pressing Get button. When the information is obtained with this command, if registration figure is 0, Equipment Kind [Registration/License Count]
will be displayed.
Note 20:To delete Equipment Kind [Registration/License Count], change the location of terminal accommoda-
1002
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Function
Error/Warning Scale
Grasping
Error/Warning Occurrence
Time Grasping
Description
The window displays the number of IP stations in which a fault occurs.
Maintenance personnel can grasp the fault scale immediately after this command has
started up.
Error/Warning Number List window shows number movements of fault events over
time so that maintenance personnel can grasp a period of time for errors/warnings occurrences.
The window displays the number of IP station fault events over time until 24 hours before since the data has been read.
Maintenance personnel can output the read out results on TSV (tab delimited) file.
Fault scanning is available to all IP stations.
Maintenance personnel can edit the TSV file generated by All Stations Scanning and
import it.
Scanning the specified stations by using TSV file is repeated automatically until it is
canceled.
Contents to be scanned are same as Specific Stations Scanning.
Fault scanning is available to specific IP stations.
For the IP stations displayed during Specific Stations Scanning, All Stations
Scanning or Multiple Stations Scanning, the Fault History Display window displays
fault history of IP stations whose Error Count/Warning Count is 1 or more.
This function can retrieve current 24 fault events occurred in the specified IP station
from fault history (10,000 events) stored in the system.
Maintenance personnel can specify multiple IP stations simultaneously.
1003
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Also this command has the following ability to analyze the fault status more easily.
Function
Description
Sort
Maintenance personnel can sort scan data on a content basis by clicking an item on the
scan data displayed on the screen.
Filter
Pause
When fault scanning is in progress, maintenance personnel can pause in the fault
scanning.
Maintenance personnel can output a list of scan data which are displayed by fault
scanning to a file.
Maintenance personnel can delete events (up to 10,000 events) in the fault history
collectively. Maintenance personnel can execute this function if needed (such as after
output to the file).
2. Precaution
(a) The target for collecting information by this command is only the information in the system to which
PCPro logs in. If maintenance personnel specify Telephone Numbers in the different system, a message notifies maintenance personnel that information cannot be read.
(b) Up to 10,000 fault events can be stored as the fault history in the system. When the number of fault
events exceeds 10,000, older events are deleted.
(c) Fault History Display with Display Fault History of List Selection Data button is valid in IP stations
whose Error Count/Warning Count is 1 or more. In the following reasons, the number of fault events
may not match between Error Count/Warning Count and Fault History Display.
The window displays existing (up to 10,000) events in the fault history. Fault events are corrected
periodically; therefore, some events in the relevant station may be deleted depending on the timing.
As a result, the number of events on the window may become lower than the number in Error Count/
Warning Count.
The windows displays current 24 events. The rest of events are not displayed when 25 or more
events exist.
(d) Error/Warning Number List can be displayed by selecting from the option menu on the main window.
Error/Warning Number List can show Error Count/Warning Count for 24 hours (in 10 minute increments) based on the system clock.
(e) The window can display Floor Name identified from IP address of IP station by defining Floor Name
on a network address basis.
Floor Name can be also identified from Extension Number Pattern (specifying several digits from the
first Station Number/Telephone Number) of IP station by defining Floor Name on a Extension Number Pattern basis. For details of Floor Name Setting, refer to [Floor Name Setting] window.
1004
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
(f) The displayed information is different depending on the IP station status. The following table shows
information displayed on the scanning window in each IP station status.
Y: Displayed on the window, N: Not displayed on the window
Login
(Normal)
Login
(Restored)
Logout
(Normal)
Warning
Error
Extension Number
Floor Name
Read Time
STATUS
CAUSE
Error/Warning Time
Restoration Time
Error Count
Warning Count
Equipment
IP Address
MAC Address
PH LENS
FPC
LENS
TN
STN
UGNL Note 1
TELNL Note 1
UGNN Note 1
TELNN Note 1
Error Information
Note 2
Note 1: This item appears on the window when Telephone Number is allocated to each station by using ALGSL/
ALGSLN command.
Note 2: This item appears on the window when an error occurs in each IP station.
1005
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
(g) The following table describes IP station types which appear on the Main window and Fault History
Display window.
Display
Description
DtermIP
IP terminal
SoftPhone (SP20)
SmartPhone
DtermIP INASET
SoftPhone (SP30)
IPG Digital
UG50 (DLC)
SIP Soft-Phone
3. Parameters
The following are parameters in this command.
Scan Mode
Plural:
Single:
[Plural]
Scan Data
All IP Terminals:
File:
1006
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Target Item
Target Data
Login (Normal)
Login (Restored)
STATUS
Logout (Normal)
Warning
Error
Health Check Error
CAUSE
Fault of PHD
Re-registration warning
[Single]
Kind of Station
STN
TELN(LDM)
TELN(NDM)
Interval (second): Current status is updated in each period which has been specified. (1-300 seconds)
[For STN]
TN: Tenant Number (1-63)
STN: Station Number (0-9, *, #, up to 6 digits)
[For TELN (LDM) /TELN (NDM)]
UGN: User Group Number (1-255)
TELN: Telephone Number (0-9, *, #, up to 16 digits)
1007
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
4. Buttons
The followings are buttons used in this command.
Window
All IP Terminals is
selected.
File is selected.
Fault Scanning
Main Window
Others
Button
Description
Get
Re-Specify
Changes IP stations to be
scanned.
Cancel
Cancels scanning.
Get
Re-Specify
Changes IP stations to be
scanned.
Cancel
Scan
Pause
Resume
Release pausing.
Stop
Setting
Selects items to be
displayed.
Change
Release
Refresh
Close
Get
Cancel
File Output
Close
1008
CHAPTER 7
Window
Button
Description
Refresh
Reverse Display
File Output
Outputs Error/Warning
Number.
Exit
Refresh
File Import
File Export
File Delete
Close
Maintenance Commands
Note 3: Display Filter Setting allows maintenance personnel to analyze the scan data more easily by filtering the data
with STATUS and CAUSE" when All Stations Scanning and "Multiple Stations Scanning are activated.
Note 4:
5. Displayed Data
The followings are items displayed in each window.
(a) Main window
This window appears when maintenance personnel start up this command.
Item
Description
Error
Warning
Note 5:
1009
CHAPTER 7
Item
Maintenance Commands
Description
No.
Extension Number
Floor Name
Read Time
Date and Time that the scan data has been read
IP Station Status
Login (Normal)
Login (Restored)
STATUS
Logout (Normal)
* When the IP station is out of management by the system
Warning
Error
Cause of error/warning
CAUSE
Error/Warning Time
Restoration Time
Date and Time that the IP station is restored from the error/warning
Error Count
Warning Count
Equipment
IP Address
IP address of IP station
MAC Address
PH LENS
FPC
LENS
TN
STN
Station Number
UGNL
TELNL
UGNN
TELNN
Error Information
Note 6: The following shows the relationship between CAUSE and STATUS.
1010
CHAPTER 7
Cause
Maintenance Commands
Status
Error
Fault of PHD
Error
Re-registration warning
Warning
Description
No.
Extension Number
Floor Name
CAUSE
Error/Warning Time
Restoration Time
Date and Time that the IP station is restored from the error/warning
Equipment
IP Address
IP address of IP station
MAC Address
PH LENS
Except for above, Line Equipment Number of current IP station registration SPPHD
FPC
LENS
Description
Current Time
Current time (system clock of the system to which the IP station logs in).
Display Order
Date
Start Time
End Time
1011
CHAPTER 7
Item
Maintenance Commands
Description
Error Number
Number of error events which have been occurred between Start Time and End Time
Warning Number
Number of warning events which have been occurred between Start Time and End
Time
Description
Floor Name
Text Editor:
Microsoft Excel:
.
Order
1
Parameter
Floor Name
Input Data
Floor Name to be displayed on the scan data
[Example]
Floor A North side
Floor A North side reception room
1012
Range
ASCII
CHAPTER 7
Order
2
Parameter
Network Address/Mask Bit
Maintenance Commands
Input Data
Range
Network Address:
0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.255
Mask Bit: 1-32
0-9, *, #
[Maximum 16 digits]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
1013
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
(b) When the same network address/mask bit values or the same extension number pattern values are
specified to multiple different floor names (See (5) and (6)), the floor name in the latest line (6) will
be displayed.
6. Operation Procedure
The following table describes operation procedures on a function basis.
Functions
Relevant Window
Operation/Display Procedures
Error/Warning Scale
Grasping
Error/Warning
Occurrence Time
Grasping
1014
CHAPTER 7
Functions
Relevant Window
Maintenance Commands
Operation/Display Procedures
(1) Select Plural for Scan Mode.
(2) Select All IP Terminals for Scan Data and click
Get button.
(3) After getting the scan data, set the Display Filter
Setting data as needed. For the contents of Display Filter Setting, see Display Filter Setting in
3. Parameter.
Note:
Multiple Stations
Scanning
Note:
Note:
Use Shift key or Ctrl key to select multiple events in the
fault history.
Select the IP station whose Error Count or Warning
Count is 1 or more in the scanned result.
1015
CHAPTER 7
C_TK:
MB:
1016
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Route Number
C_TK:
MB:
Note: Multiple trunks can be assigned simultaneously per a route designated in TK parameter.
1017
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
MB:
1018
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
become disabled.
Note 2: This command is not available for IPPAD.
2. Parameters
Input data
MG:
UNIT:
Unit Number
GROUP:
Group Information
MB:
Make-Busy Information
Make-Busy Request
Normal:
The registrations of idle terminals on the applicable PHL card are moved to another PHL circuit
card while the busy terminals remain on the existing PHL card until they become idle. After the
busy terminals are released, their registrations are moved to another PHL circuit card as the idle
terminals were.
Compulsion release:
The registrations of all terminals on the applicable PHL card are compulsorily moved to another
PHL, regardless of the status.
1019
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Output data
After clicking Get button, the latest status is displayed at ten second intervals.
PKG TYPE: Circuit Card Name
STN:
TELN:
Telephone Number
STATUS:
PCN:
PS Community Number
ERN:
GRN:
Group Number
CSN:
CS Number
GKID:
Gate Keeper ID
SSID:
SIP Server ID
1020
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Unit:
Unit Number
Group:
Group Information
MB:
Make-Busy Information
Output data
MB:
1021
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Route Number of the external route/internal route. Table 7-1 provides the meaning of
the internal route number.
MB:
DATA
MEANING
DATA
MEANING
901
Attendant/Desk Console
902
903
904
MF Receiver
905
906
907
AMP
908
Not used
909
910-912
Not used
913
914
Not used
915
916
MFC Register
917
MFC Sender
918
Not used
927, 928
Not used
919-926
929
931-947
Modem
Data Signaling Trunk-Option
930
Not used
1022
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Logical route number allocated to the external/internal route. Refer to the MBRT command as to the Internal route number and its meaning. Note 1
MB:
Make-Busy Information
Make Idle
Make Busy
Output Data
FPC: Fusion Point Code [1-253] Note 2
RT: External Route Number
Note 1: Prior to this command, logical route number must be allocated by using the ALRTN command.
Note 2: After entering attributes in LGRT and MB then clicking Write button, this parameter becomes avail-
able.
1023
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
MB:
1024
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
1025
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
TELN:
MB:
Make-Busy Information
Output Data
FPC:
TN:
STN:
Buttons
Get:
Set:
Exit:
1026
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Route Number
TK:
MB:
Note: Multiple trunks can be assigned simultaneously per a route designated in RT parameter.
1027
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
TK:
Trunk Number
Note 2
START
END
MB:
Note 1: Prior to this command, logical route number must be allocated by using the ALRTN command.
Note 2: The status of plural trunks can be changed simultaneously, according to the range of trunk number as-
RT:
Route Number
1028
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
TK:
MB:
Note 1: For Business system, the data is valid for the ACIS/CCIS line (TCL=4, 5, 7). For a Hotel system, the
data is invalid.
STATUS:
Note 2: This parameter is displayed only. This parameter appears only when MB = 2 (Make Busy (Bothway))
is selected.
1029
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
TK:
MB:
Note 1
0=Make Idle
1=Make Busy (Outgoing)
2=Make Busy (Bothway)
Note 2
Note 1: Prior to this command, a logical route number must be allocated to the route number by the ALRTN
command.
Note 2: For a Business system, the data is valid for the ACIS/CCIS line (TCL=4, 5, 7). For a Hotel system, the
data is invalid.
Output Data
FPC:
RT:
Route Number
STATUS:
1030
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
System Initialization
3. Parameters
Input Data
Direction Select:
Note 1
Data Memory
Name Display
Wireless Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Speed Calling
User Assign Key
Number Sharing
Note 2
ACD Data Memory
Call Block
ICB and DR
Expanded Speed Calling
Call Forwarding-Logout
One Touch Speed Calling for DtermIP
SPD Name Data
H.323 Terminal Call Transfer (Not used)
Message Area ID Data
SR-MGC Data
SIP Terminal Call Transfer Note 3
Mobile Service Data
Day/Night Data
Local Phone book Data
Soft Switch Data
1031
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
LP Select:
All Select:
Select this check box when selecting all the data types listed in the Data Type
Select field. When individually selecting only a specific number of the data
types, leave the box unchecked (and specify the TYPEs in the Data Type Select field).
Select this check box to verify the data automatically after backup or restore.
Auto Scroll:
Click Option in the menu bar, and select Drive Select. A window, with the following parameter, appears.
In the window, designate the affected Drive:Note 4
Office Data:
Note 1: When Data Memory is selected, Network Data Memory (NDM) and Local Data Memory (LDM) are
installed/saved/verified simultaneously.
Note 3: This data is for WLAN Handset (MH Series) and SIP standard terminals.
Note 4: When specifying the data here, consider the following:
When Drive B/C is specified in the Office Data parameter while Hard Disk to Memory or Verify HDD
against MEM is designated in the Direction Select parameter, the data is automatically adjusted as
Drive B.
Output data
Action/Information:
Result of the execution
Direction:
HDD to MEM
MEM to HDD
Verify HDD against MEM
Type:
Selected Type
1032
CHAPTER 7
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp loaded/backed up/verified
Buttons
Execute:
Exit:
1033
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
MEM_HDD_N: Data Control Between Memory and HDD for Fusion Network
1. Functional Outline
This command, available at the NCN only, backs up/verifies a series of Office Data from the Memory of all
Local Nodes to the Flash Card of each same node.
Note: You can back up/verify the data onto the Flash Card of all the node on the FCCS (Fusion) network (Max-
imum 64 nodes).
2. Precautions
(a) You cannot save the data of software switches by this command. Use the MEM_HDD command to save
the data of software switches.
(b) Do not load the Call Forwarding data to a memory during system operation. If you do so, the Desktop Terminal LCD may not indicate the correct Call Forwarding status.
To correct this, you can do either of the following:
System Initialization
3. Parameters
Input data
Direction Select:
Data Memory
Note 1
Name Display
Wireless Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Speed Calling
User Assign Key
Number Sharing
Note 2
ACD Data Memory
Call Block
ICB and DR
Expanded Speed Calling
Call Forwarding-Logout
One Touch Speed Calling for DtermIP
SPD Name Data
H.323 Terminal Call Transfer (Not used)
Message Area ID Data
SIP Terminal Call Transfer Note 3
1034
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Designate the LP number. (Required when Call Forwarding, Speed Calling, User Assign Key, Number Sharing, Call Block, ICB and DR, Expanded Speed Calling, Call
Forwarding-Logout, or Mobile Service Data is selected in the Data Type Select parameter.)
All Select:
Select this check box when selecting all the data types listed in the Data Type Select
field. When individually selecting a specific number of data types, leave the box unchecked (and specify the type(s) in the Data Type Select field).
Auto Verify Afterward: Automatically verify the data after being copied.
Auto Scroll: Refresh the Processing Status Log
Click Option in the menu bar, and select Drive Select. Then, a window, with the following parameter,
appears. On the window, designate the affected Drive: Note 4
Office Data:
Note 1: When Data Memory is selected, Network Data Memory (NDM) and Local Data Memory (LDM) are
saved/verified automatically.
Note 3: This data is for WLAN Handset (MH Series) and SIP standard terminals.
Note 4: When specifying the data here, consider the following:
When Drive B/C is specified in the Office Data parameter when Verify HDD against MEM
has been selected for in the Direction Select parameter, the data is written to Drive-D only.
Output data
Action/Information:
FPC of Node in which saving/verifying is executed
Result of the execution
Direction:
MEM to HDD
Verify HDD against MEM
1035
CHAPTER 7
Type:
Selected Type
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp backed up/verified
Buttons
Execute:
Exit:
1036
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
MB:
1037
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
1038
CHAPTER 7
1039
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
1040
CHAPTER 7
RDPD:
Maintenance Commands
1. Functional Outline
This command deletes the password of IP Station. The IP Station assigns the password for logging in to the
SV8500 for security use. This is a command to delete the IP Stations password from PCPro side.
2. Precautions
(a) In FP85-109 S6 Issue 3 or earlier, the name of this command is Remove of IP Station Password.
(b) This command does not display or list up assigned passwords.
3. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE: Input Station Type
STN: Station Number
TELN: Telephone Number
When STN is selected in Type
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number (Physical Number)
When TELN is selected in Type
UGN: User Group Number
TELN: Telephone Number
Output Data
DPD: IP Station Password
Note: When the IP Station has already assigned a password, for personal security, asterisks (*) are displayed
Buttons
Get: Display a password assigned on the station/tenant.
Delete: Delete a password assigned on the station/tenant.
Exit: Exit this command.
1041
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
1042
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
3. Parameters
Input data
LENS: Line Equipment Number
Enter the LENS (six digits) assigned by AMGIL command to read out the information of MG(PRI).
Channel Number to reset: Channel Number (0-31)
Enter the channel number to switch over forcefully.
Note: Each channel data is displayed as follows.
Display
Meaning
Gray
Not registered
Yellow
Red
1043
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Output data
STATUS: Status of Station/Trunk (1-4)
0=Not Assigned
1=Idle
1044
CHAPTER 7
2=Busy
3=Lockout
4=Make Busy
5=Call Now (PHS system only)
Information: Information of the connected party Note
Note: This parameter appears only when STATUS=2.
CNT: Count
FPC: Fusion Point Code (1-253)
LENS: Line Equipment Number
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
RT: External/Internal Route Number
TK: Trunk Number (1-255)
C_RT: Connection Route Number (1-1023)
C_TK: Connection Trunk Number (1-4095)
PCN: PHS Community Number (1-1024)
ERN: Area Number (1-32)
GRN: Group Number (1-32)
CSN: CS Number (1-32)
INTERVAL: Interval time of scan (seconds) (30-180)
RESULT: After release result (1, 2)
1=Release complete
2=Release executing
Details of a color:
Not Assigned= GRAY (Status: 0)
Idle, Make Busy= WHITE (Status: 1)
Busy = WHITE (Status: 2)
Lockout = WHITE (Status: 3)
Make Busy = GRAY (Status: 4)
Call Now = GRAY (Status: 5)
Release complete = GREEN (Result: 1)
Release executing = YELLOW (Result: 2)
Note: The Numbers shown in brackets are used for printout data.
1045
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note 1
Note 1
Note 2
Note 2
Note 3
Note 4
Note 4
Note 1: This parameter is valid when Telephone Number is designated in the TYPE selection list box.
Note 2: This parameter is valid when Trunk is designated in the TYPE selection list box.
Note 3: This parameter is valid when LENS is designated in the TYPE selection list box.
Note 4: This parameter is valid when Connection Trunk is designated in the TYPE selection list box.
Output Data
FPC: Fusion Point Code (1-253)
TN: Tenant Number Note 1
STN: Physical Station Number (a maximum of five digits for a Business system, and six digits for a Hotel
system) Note 1
1046
CHAPTER 7
Note 5
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
Note 6
Buttons
Get: Get information on the station/trunk.
Release: Execute the station/trunk release.
Exit: Exit this command.
1047
Maintenance Commands
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Tenant Number
Enter the Tenant Number in which the target station belongs.
Station Number [Max. 6 digits]
Designate the station number whose PAD LOCK ID Code setting is to be released.
Output Data
PID:
RSC:
SFC:
Note:
It is not available to display and list up the ID codes on the PCPro screen.
Buttons
Get: Get information for the PAD LOCK ID Code assigned to the station/tenant.
Del.: Delete information for the PAD LOCK ID Code assigned to the station/tenant.
Exit: Exit this command.
1048
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
[Execute]
When the trunk is idle and Bothway Make Busy/Not Mounted, memory initial starts.
1049
CHAPTER 7
SINZ:
Maintenance Commands
System Initialize
1. Functional Outline
This command initializes the system from PCPro.
WARNING:
Do not use this command when the system is in normal operation since this command executes the system initialization.
2. Precautions
(a) When the system is initialized, PCPro is disconnected. After initialization is complete, log back into
PCPro.
(b) When Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize, accompanied by the operating program
changeover, is executed, it will take approximately 5 minutes until the system starts up because OS is
rebooted.
3. Parameters
Parameters displayed in the windows are different depending on the software versions of the Telephony Server.
Confirm the software versions of your Telephony Server and see the relevant input data descriptions.
Input Data (For FP-109 S6 Issue 3 or later)
[For the Telephony Server]
ACT & STBY: The process is executed in both of the ACT and STBY systems.
STBY:
System Initialize:
The system initialize is executed with the current office data of MEM without loading from the CF
card.
1050
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Restart:
The system initialize is executed by restarting the system.
This process is available when Use Optional Function is checked.
Switch the Program: Note 2
When this check box is selected and then the process is executed, switching programs between
WORK side and TEMP side is performed. The programs to be switched include OS, program and
license files.
Shutdown:
The system initialize is executed by shutting the system down.
This process is available when Use Optional Function is checked.
Switch the Program: Note 2
When this check box is selected and then the process is executed, switching programs between
WORK side and TEMP side is performed. The programs to be switched include OS, program and
license files.
Note 1: This parameter is displayed when System Select is hidden or ACT & STBY is selected for System Se-
lect.
Note 2: This parameter is displayed when either of the following is selected for Process Kind Select since
FP85-109 S6 Issue 3.
Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize
Restart
Shutdown
1051
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
[For SR-MGC(E)]
System Initialize:
The system initialize is executed with the current office data of MEM without loading from the CF
card.
Restart:
The system initialize is executed by restarting the system.
This process is available when Use Optional Function is checked.
Switch the Program: Note 2
When this check box is selected and then the process is executed, switching programs between
WORK side and TEMP side is performed. The programs to be switched include OS, program and
license files.
Shutdown:
The system initialize is executed by shutting the system down.
This process is available when Use Optional Function is checked.
1052
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note 1: This parameter is displayed when System Select is hidden or ACT & STBY is selected for System Se-
lect.
Note 2: This parameter is displayed when either of the following is selected for Process Kind Select since
FP85-109 S6 Issue 3.
Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize
Restart
Shutdown
[For SR-MGC(S)]
System Initialize:
The system initialize is executed with the current office data of MEM without loading from the CF
card.
1053
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Restart:
The system initialize is executed by restarting the system.
This process is available when Use Optional Function is checked.
Drive Select: Program Note 1, Note 2
Drive A
Drive D
Shutdown:
The system initialize is executed by shutting the system down.
This process is available when Use Optional Function is checked.
Drive Select: Program Note 1, Note 2
Drive A
Drive D
1054
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
ACT & STBY: The process is executed in both of the ACT and STBY systems.
STBY:
System Initialize:
The system initialize is executed with the current office data of MEM without loading from the CF
card.
Restart:
The system initialize is executed by restarting the system.
This process is available when Use Optional Function is checked.
Drive Select: Program Note 1, Note 2
Drive A
Drive D
1055
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Shutdown:
The system initialize is executed by shutting the system down.
This process is available when Use Optional Function is checked.
Drive Select: Program Note 1, Note 2
Drive A
Drive D
Note 1: In the system with FP85-109 S6 Issue 1 or 2 version software, Do not specify Drive D.
In the system with FP85-109 S5 or earlier version software, immediately after starting SINZ command,
Drive A is chosen by default. When you load the program from Drive D, make sure to choose Drive D.
Note 2: An operating drive is chosen by default. This parameter shows the operating drive as shown below. For
lect.
[SR-MGC(E)/SR-MGC(S)]
System Initialize:
The system initialize is executed with the current office data of MEM without loading from the CF
card.
1056
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Restart:
The system initialize is executed by restarting the system.
This process is available when Use Optional Function is checked.
Drive Select: Program Note 1, Note 2
Drive A
Drive D
Shutdown:
The system initialize is executed by shutting the system down.
This process is available when Use Optional Function is checked.
Drive Select: Program Note 1, Note 2
Drive A
Drive D
Note 1: In the system with FP85-109 S6 Issue 1 or 2 version software, Do not specify Drive D.
In the system with FP85-109 S5 or earlier version software, immediately after starting SINZ command,
Drive A is chosen by default. When you load the program from Drive D, make sure to choose Drive D.
Note 2: An operating drive is chosen by default. This parameter shows the operating drive as shown below. For
lect.
Buttons
Execute: Execute the specified system initialization.
1057
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
System Initialize
1058
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
1059
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
2: by MG, Unit
MG
0
Interval
10
SCAN
STOP
EXIT
Group
Unit 0
Unit 1
Unit 2
Unit 3
PM:
ID:
BY:
MB:
4:
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- RS RS DT DT -- DT -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM ID ID ID ID ID ID PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM MB MB PM PM PM PM PM PM
-- -- -- -- -- -- DL -- -- -- -- TK -- DT -- DT -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -PM PM PM PM PM PM ID ID PM PM MB MB ID ID MB MB PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM MB MB PM PM PM PM PM PM
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM MB MB PM PM PM PM PM PM
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM
Table 7-1 provides a list of the circuit cards and the working status of the PM in each group.
FUNCTION NAME
LC
Line Circuit
TK
Analog Trunk
RS
Register Sender
AI
Attendant Interface
DL
CF
3-Party Conference
MO
DT
DS
DST
DT
Digital Trunk
1060
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
2: by MG, Unit
Unit
1
MG
0
SCAN
Interval
10
STOP
EXIT
1: Line Idle
3: Make Busy
5: Status5
Group
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Type
Status
Level
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-- -- -- -- -- -- DL -- -- --
-- TK -- DT -- DT -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -BY BY BY BY BY BY ID BY BY BY BY ID BY ID BY ID BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1061
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
2: by MG, Unit
MG
0
Unit
1
Group
06
Interval
10
DL
ID
3124
5
STATUS
----Idle
Idle
Idle
--
TN
1
1
1
STN
2002
2001
2000
TEC
RT
TK
TCL
Dterm
Dterm
Dterm
1062
SCAN
STOP
EXIT
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
2: by MG, Unit
MG
0
Unit
0
Group
13
Interval
10
SCAN
STOP
EXIT
TK
ID
3010
5
STATUS
TN
STN
TEC
----Idle
Idle
Idle
Idle
RT
TK
TCL
10
10
10
10
4
3
2
1
TIE Line
TIE Line
TIE Line
TIE Line
MEANING
DATA
MEANING
901
Attendant Console
902
903
904
MF Receiver
905
906
907
AMP
908
Not used
909
910, 911
Not used
913
914
Not used
915
Night Attendant
916
MFC Register
917
MFC Sender
918
Not used
927, 928
Not used
919-926
Modem
929
MFC Sender
931
Not used
930
932-947
1063
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Route Number
Interval Time
Output data
Number of Idle TK
Number of Busy
1064
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
changed. If logging in to a LN, only the DM of self-node can be changed by this command.
2. Parameters
Input Data
LGRT: Logical route Number [1-899] Note
Interval: Interval Time of two scan [2-999]
Note: Prior to this command, a logical route number must be allocated by the ALRTN command.
Output Data
FPC: Fusion Point Code [1-253]
RT: Route of Route Number
Number of IDLE/BUSY TK
1065
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Capable of observing both originating and incoming trunks, you can perform the tests even involving the
Tandem connection.
Different from Individual Trunk Access that uses a specific access code, this test can involve the register/
sender, etc., thereby enabling the test condition the same as that in the normal connection.
for MG-SIPs.
(c) The test observation by this command is effective for approximately three minutes since the test was
initiated.
(d) When the test result is abnormal, due to a factor such as PCPro power failure, etc., the existing data
for test connection may remain on the SV8500 side. To clear the data, activate the TOGC command
again.
(e) Test results can be observed only on the trunks accommodated in the same SV8500 node even if
CALLING STN TYPE = TELN(NDM)/TELN(LDM) or CALLING RT TYPE = LGRT.
(f) This connection test is restricted for FCCS trunk.
(g) When testing Dterm with this command, be sure to choose My Line. Once the Dterm belongs to My
Line, it is possible to perform a test from the terminal with Sub Line.
(h) Test trunks (Internal/External Trunk, IPPAD) assigned by the command flash MB lamp in 60INT.
Note 2
(i)
Both of the Calling/Called Party can execute Trunk Access to Station/Trunk only when these are in
the same system.
(j)
Do not cancel Make Busy of the assigned IPPAD channel by using this command. Note 2
1066
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
2. Parameters
[When STN is selected in the TYPE selection list box]
Input Data
CALLING STN TYPE: Station Type of Calling Party
STN=Station Number
TELN(NDM)=Telephone Number (NDM)
TELN(LDM)=Telephone Number (LDM)
CALLED RT TYPE: Route Type of Called Party
RT=Physical Route of Called Party
LGRT=Logical Route of Called Party
C_RT=Connection Route of Called Party Note 1
Note 1: This parameter appears since FP85-105 S2.
1067
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
1068
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
2. Precaution
When performing loopback tests for two or more tested stations, tested station data can be registered using a
CSV file. Also test results can be output to a CSV file by clicking CSV File Output button. The followings
are information of data input and output using a CSV file.
Example Input of Tested Station Data to CSV File
// TN STN
1, 1500,
1, 1501,
1, 1502,
First Second
If there is // or $ in a blank line or in the top of a line, the line is not recognized as a data line.
In CSV file input, the first and the second data which are comma-delimited are read out.
Input data is read out in this way.
When Kind of Station is set as STN: First data = TN, Second data = STN
When Kind of Station is set as TELN: First data = UGN, Second data = TELN
A CSV file, output by this command, can be imported even if the CSV file data does not match a current
data assignment for Kind of Station.
1069
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Note: $ appears on the top of a line for the data assigned by this command. // appears on the header of
test results.
3. Parameters
Input Data
When performing a new loopback test, input the following data. Then click Execute button.
Kind of Station (Kind of Station)
STN:
Station Number
TELN (LDM): Telephone Number (LDM)
TELN (NDM): Telephone Number (NDM)
Test Range
Single
Plural
Maintenance Station/Tested Station
<Designation when Kind of Station = STN is set>
TN:
Tenant Number [1-63]
STN: Station Number [Maximum 5 digits]
<Designation when Kind of Station = TELN (LDM) or TELN (NDM) is set>
UGN: User Group Number [1-255]
TELN: Telephone Number [Maximum 16 digits]
<Designation when CSV file is used>
CSV File Read Note 1
Note 1: This button appears when Test Range = Plural is set.
1070
CHAPTER 7
Maintenance Commands
Displayed Data
CNT: Count of Test Result List
Displays the number of tested stations.
Test Result
Displays the following test results;
OK
NG (Test Failure)
NG (Command Error)
Test Failure Factor
Displays the following error codes when NG (Test Failure) appears in Test Result field.
Test Error Code
Description
Connection timeout
Connection error
Internal error
1071
APPENDIX A
CAUTION
Follow this procedure only when instructed to do so by the service technician.
1. GENERAL
This feature is used to apply patches to the Telephony Servers program.
Telephony Server
[1]
[2]
Maintenance Console
1. Use Telephony Server Maintenance Menu/PCPro Tools to upload patch files to the Telephony Server.
2. Use XPAT command to apply uploaded patch files to the Telephony Server.
2. PRECAUTIONS
(1) For dualCPU system, apply patches to STBY side as well as ACT side. Otherwise, after system changeover to STBY side occurs, the system will operate on a program without the patch applied.
(2) Maximum of 255 patches can be retained in the Telephony Server.
(3) When applying multiple patches, application will fail unless all files are in correct format.
3. APPLYING THE PATCH FILES
(1) Upload patch files to the Telephony Server. Note 1
Note 1: Make sure to upload the patch files to each Telephony Server side (ACT side and/or STBY side) target-
FP85-109 S6 or later (Do not use PCPro Tools for FP85-109 S6 or later).
<By Telephony Server Maintenance Menu (For FP85-109 S6 or later)>
STEP 1
Copy the obtained patch files to the desired directory of the maintenance console.
1072
APPENDIX A
STEP 2
STEP 3
Type "http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:9801/" into the address bar to access Telephony Server Maintenance Menu.
Note: "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" represents the LAN1 IP address of the destination Telephony Server.
STEP 4
Telephony Server Maintenance Menu Login screen appears. Type a user name and password. Click OK to log into Telephony Server Maintenance Menu.
Note: The default for both user name and password is admin. You are recommended to change user name
Click the Upload button for Patch on Telephony Server Maintenance Menu screen. The
Patch Upload dialog box appears in the lower right portion of the screen.
STEP 6
Click the Browse button in the dialog box and specify the patch file copied in STEP 1.
STEP 7
Select Work and then click the Upload button in the dialog box. When the uploading is complete, Operation successfully completed will be displayed. Click OK.
Copy the obtained patch files to the desired directory of the maintenance console. Note 2
Note 2: Designate a folder to save the patch files to. NEVER place files other than patch files in the designated
folder.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Note 3:
Follow the procedures below when wishing to add a new directory in Install Data List.
1. In Install Data Registration Setting window:
a. Press Add button in Install Data List field.
b. This opens Setting Install Data Name window.
2. In Setting Install Data Name window:
a. Enter desired name in Install Data Name box.
b. Press Setting button.
c. This takes you back to Install Data Registration Setting window.
1073
APPENDIX A
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
Make sure the data name entered in STEP 52 appears in Install Data List of Install Data Detail window.
STEP 7
System Side:
System 0/System 1
Drive:
A/D
Patch Selection:
STEP 2
Select target Telephony Server side to apply patches using radio buttons in System Select:
ACT/STBY.
1074
APPENDIX A
STEP 3
Press Get button to display Patch Information List (list of uploaded patch files).
When application for all uploaded patch files have been completed:
Message The applicable file does not exist. appears.
Close XPAT command.
STEP 4
STEP 5
Note 4: Since FP85-109 S6, pressing the Yes button automatically executes readout to update the Patch In-
formation List. When patch application failed, the first patch file in Application Status column displayed as Not Applied Yet failed to have the patch applied. Contact the patch provider when this
problem occurs.
Earlier than FP85-109 S6, pressing the Yes button automatically executes readout to update the
Patch Information List. When patch application failed, the first patch file in Applied Status column
displayed as Unapplication failed to have the patch applied. Contact the patch provider when this
problem occurs.
STEP 6
FP85-109 S6 or later (Do not use PCPro Tools for FP85-109 S6 or later).
<By Telephony Server Maintenance Menu (For FP85-109 S6 or later)>
1075
APPENDIX A
STEP 1
Click the Delete button for Patch on Telephony Server Maintenance Menu screen. The Patch
Delete dialog box appears in the lower right portion of the screen.
STEP 2
Select a drive (WORK or TEMP) which contains the target patch files and then click the Check
button. A list of files targeted for deletion is displayed.
STEP 3
Note: Use the Ctrl key or the Shift key for multiple selections.
STEP 4
Click the Delete button in the dialog box. When the file deletion is complete, Operation successfully completed will be displayed. Click OK.
STEP 2
Excluding files that are not applicable, use PCPro Tools to upload patch files to the Telephony
Server.
FP85-109 S6 or later (Do not use PCPro Tools for FP85-109 S6 or later).
<By Telephony Server Maintenance Menu (For FP85-109 S6 or later)>
STEP 1
Click the Delete button for Patch on Telephony Server Maintenance Menu screen. The Patch
Delete dialog box appears in the lower right portion of the screen.
STEP 2
Select a drive (WORK or TEMP) which contains the target patch files and then click the Check
button. A list of the patch files is displayed.
STEP 3
Note: Use the Ctrl key or the Shift key for multiple selections.
STEP 4
Click the Delete button in the dialog box. When the file deletion is complete, Operation successfully completed will be displayed. Click OK.
STEP 5
Use SINZ command of PCPro to execute Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize.
Note: The following need to be considered to switch programs before starting up the Telephony Server.
1076
APPENDIX A
When you choose the check box for Switch the Program and then execute Program & Office Data
Load & System Initialize, switching the program between WORK and TEMPside is performed.
STEP 2
Excluding files to be canceled, use PCPro Tools to upload patch files to the Telephony Server.
STEP 3
Use SINZ command of PCPro to execute Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize.
Note: Choose a drive to load the program in the Drive Select field of the command screen. Immediately after
starting SINZ command, Drive A is chosen by default. When you load the program from Drive D,
make sure to choose Drive D.
1077
APPENDIX A
FP85-109 S6 or later (Do not use PCPro Tools for FP85-109 S6 or later).
2. Parameters
Input Data
System Select:
Select target CPU to perform patch application by radio button.
ACT
STBY
Target Process:
Application Status:
Check Result:
1078
APPENDIX A
Note 5: When pressing Get button, if readout cannot be correctly processed for an existing patch file, col-
Buttons
Get:
Check:
Apply:
1079
REVISION SHEET
UNIVERGE SV8500
Operations and Maintenance Manual
NWA-041693-001
Revision Sheet
S7: DATE JULY,2013
CHAPTER 2
4,5,6
47,48,50,51,53,59,60,66,70,.73,
80,83,84,85,89,109,112,121,152,
224
CHAPTER 2
66,69,130,131,150,151,152,164,
211,213,226,227
CHAPTER 3
410,524,525,526,527,528,529,
530,531,532,533,534,535,536,
537,562,566,567,573,574,588
CHAPTER 3
326,327,328,329,330,331,7332,
354,391,559
CHAPTER 5
47,48,50,51,53,59,61,62,63,64,
65,68,69,78,79,82,83,85,88,135,
181,182,209,210,222,223,224
CHAPTER 3
259,260,261,262,266,268,288,
289,330,332,333,336,395,396,
397,398,399,400,403,404,405,
406,407,408,409,410,411,412,
413,414,483,484,485,486,491,
492,493,536,557,558,559,560,
561,562
638,640,643,645,747
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 7
609,610,611,612
674,750
798,802,809,824,855,865,866,
881,909,915,919,920,925,929,
1014,1017,1031,1033,1034,
1035,1036,1037,I1038,1039,
1040,1049
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 7
788,792,825,834,835,898,904,
907,931,932,933,939,940,957,
958,972,973,987,990,991,999,
1006,1043,1050,1055
CHAPTER 2
138,139,152,184,185
54,55,56,57,58,130,152,215,225,
226,227
CHAPTER 3
CHAPTER 3
250,251,262,263,264,265,286,
298,302,334,338,339,348,355,
356,413,433,435,521,523,531,
535,541,545,546,547,550,552,
554,556,558
243,300,301,414,415,422,556,
557,570,594
CHAPTER 4
613,614
APPENDIX A
1075,1076
CHAPTER 1
1
742,743
CHAPTER 7
761,765,766,767,768,769,771,
780,781,782,784,786,791,795,
796,804,805,807,809,811,812,
813,816,817,818,819,820,821,
822,823,824,825,826,827,828,
829,830,834,842,860,862,864,
868,869,870,875,876,878,879,
880,881,882,883,884,885,886,
887,890,897,902,903,904,905,
906,907,908,909,910,914,915,
916,917,919,920,923,925,927,
928,929,930,931,932,933,934,
935,936,937,938,939,940,941,
942,943,944,945,946,947,948,
949,950,951,952,953,954,956,
963,964,965,966,994,995,996,
997,999
1000,1001,1002,1003,1004,
1005,1006,1007,1008,l1009,
1010,1011,1012,1013,1014,
1015,1016,1017,1018,1019,
1020,1021,1022,1024,1026,
1027,1028,1029,1030,1031,
1036,1037,1038,1041
APPENDIX A
CHAPTER 2
REV-1
REVISION SHEET
1044,1045,1046,1047,1048,
1049,1050,1051
Introduction
10
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
41,50,54,55,56,61,62,73,74,78,
83,208,217,220,221,222,223,
224,225
Chapter 3
237,239,240,241,334,335,342,
343,379,380,381,412,414,489,
490,491,492,493,494,543,544,
559
Chapter 6
Product Liability
Chapter 2
1, 2
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
371, 373
Chapter 5
691, 699, 700
755, 792
736
Chapter 7
Product Liability
743,745,760,763,799,802,833,
834,841,878,920,921,922,923,
925,926,927,928,929, 995
1010,1011
Chapter 2
41, 66
Chapter 3
394, 545
Chapter 7
873, 874, 952
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
210, 215, 216, 218, 219, 220,
221, 276, 279, 324, 325, 361,
362, 363, 429, 430, 431, 433,
434, 488, 518 - 523
Chapter 2
49, 51, 54, 63, 66, 68, 69, 72,
74, 76, 113, 168
Chapter 3
200, 201, 244, 245, 345, 346,
355, 356, 357
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
593, 663
603
Chapter 7
Chapter 7
Appendix A
Introduction
2, 4, 8, 9, 10
Regulatory Notice
Chapter 7
Chapter 5
Chapter 7
Appendix A
984
REV-2
Printed in Japan
1307-120